O&M Barber's Hill ISd

Plumbing Submittal
Barber's Hill ISD Plumbing O&M

Submitted by
SC Plumbing
10/31/2018
HAJOCA
100 NORTHPARK CENTRAL 500
HOUSTON, TX 77073
Phone: 713 921-8400
Fax: 713 921-8485
www.hajocahouston.com
Spec# Table of Contents
1 ............ *****
WC-1
*****
2 771979 ZURN Z5615-BWL WHT 1PC 1.28GPF WALL MOUNT 1-1/2
TOP SPUD FLUSH VLV TOILET(O&M only)
3 934053 KOHLER K-13517-CP EXPOSED POL CHROME 1.28GPF
TOILET FLUSH VLV(O&M only)
4 514392 KOHLER K-4731-C-0 WHT STRONGHOLD PLAS OF
ELONG TOILET SEAT W/ CHECK HINGE L/ COVER(O&M
only)
5 ............ *****
WC-2
*****
6 771979 ZURN Z5615-BWL WHT 1PC 1.28GPF WALL MOUNT 1-1/2
TOP SPUD FLUSH VLV TOILET(O&M only)
7 934053 KOHLER K-13517-CP EXPOSED POL CHROME 1.28GPF
TOILET FLUSH VLV(O&M only)
8 514392 KOHLER K-4731-C-0 WHT STRONGHOLD PLAS OF
ELONG TOILET SEAT W/ CHECK HINGE L/ COVER(O&M
only)
9 ............ *****
U-1
*****
10 1172840 KOHLER K-4991-ET-0 WHT BARDON ACCUFLUSH 3/4
TOP SPUD 0.125 GALS PER FLUSH WM URINAL(O&M
only)
11 941526 KOHLER K-13520-CP EXPOSED POL CHROME .125GPF
URINAL FLUSH VLV(O&M only)
12 ............ *****
U-2
*****
13 1172840 KOHLER K-4991-ET-0 WHT BARDON ACCUFLUSH 3/4
TOP SPUD 0.125 GALS PER FLUSH WM URINAL(O&M
only)
14 941526 KOHLER K-13520-CP EXPOSED POL CHROME .125GPF
URINAL FLUSH VLV(O&M only)
15 ............ *****
L-1
*****
16 2432 KOHLER K-2005-0 WHT VC KINGSTN 211/4X181/8X121/4
3H WM 4CC LAV BASIN(O&M only)
17 1039859 CHICAGO 802-VE2805-665ABCP POL CHROME 2H DM
4CC 2 VP PUSHBUTTON HDL METERING LAV FCT W/ 4
RIGID SPOUT LEAD FREE(O&M only)
18 58226 ZURN Z8746-PC 11/4 CP 17 GA BRASS COMM LAV GRID
DRAIN W/ OFFSET TAILPIECE & OVERFLOW HOLES
ADA COMPLIANT NOT FOR POTABLE WATER USE(O&M
only)
19 813032 ZURN Z8802-XL-LRLK-PC 1/2X3/8 FXOD COMP CP
BRASS XL ANGLE STOP & SUPPLY KIT W/ HDL EXT & LK
HDL LEAD FREE(O&M only)
20 177033 ZURN Z8700-PC 1-1/4 17GA CAST CO P-TRAP(O&M only)
21 1303876 LEONARD 170A-LF LEAD FREE POINT OF USE
THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE(O&M only)
22 9351 TRUEBRO 82193 102-EZ WHT LAV-GUARD TRAP &
SUPPLY COVER F/ TUBULAR P-TRAP 2-ANGLE STOP &
2-SUPPLY(O&M only)
23 ............ *****
WF-1
*****
24 1343251 ACORN 3424-ES-ADA-1-H-ST WALL HUNG 38" ASA SS
WASHFOUNTAIN W/ METERED PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL, SINGLE TEMP AIR-TROL VALVE (O&M only)
25 ............ *****
SH-1
*****
26 ............ **SHOWER BELOW IS ON THE

SCHEDULE**
27 ............ **SHOWER BELOW IS IN THE SPECS**

28 1176864 LEONARD 4511 4500 SHOWER VALVE AND TRIM WITH
H-06 INSTITUTIONAL SHOWER HEAD(O&M only)
29 ............ *****
SH-2
*****
30 ............ **SHOWER BELOW IS IN THE SPECS**

31 972099 LEONARD VALVE #4505 AQUATROL SHR
HEAD,DIVERTER,HAND HELD SHR(O&M only)
32 ............ *****
S-1
*****
33 138213 JUST SLADA1921AGR3 21X19 S/S 3-HOLE 18GA(O&M
only)
34 1075120 CHICAGO 350-GN8AE3-317XKAB POL CHROME 1H DM 1
WRISTBLADE HDL BAR/ PREP FCT W/ 8 RIGID / SWING
GOOSENECK SPOUT LEAD FREE(O&M only)
36 813032 ZURN Z8802-XL-LRLK-PC 1/2X3/8 FXOD COMP CP
BRASS XL ANGLE STOP & SUPPLY KIT W/ HDL EXT & LK
HDL LEAD FREE(O&M only)
37 1303876 LEONARD 170A-LF LEAD FREE POINT OF USE
THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE(O&M only)
38 9351 TRUEBRO 82193 102-EZ WHT LAV-GUARD TRAP &
SUPPLY COVER F/ TUBULAR P-TRAP 2-ANGLE STOP &
2-SUPPLY(O&M only)
39 1103238 ZURN Z1180-1-1/2IP 11/2 THRD ACID RESISTANT
COMPOSITE 15GPM SOLIDS INTERCEPTOR(O&M only)
40 ............ *****
SS-1
*****
41 498 FIAT MSB2424 24X24X10 MOLDED STONE WHITE MOP
SINK(O&M only)
42 494 FIAT 832AA MOP SINK HOSE & BRKT CONSISTS OF 1
BRKT & 1 HOSE(O&M only)
43 152090 ZURN Z843M1-RC RGH CHROME AQUASPEC 2H WM 8
WIDESPREAD 2 LEVER HDL SVC SINK FCT(O&M only)
44 115578 FIAT MSG2424 S/S WALL GUARD(O&M only)
45 ............ *****
SS-2
*****
46 ............ *****
EWC-1
*****
47 1211249 ELKAY LMABFTL8WSSK SS 115V 60HZ 8GPH BI-LEVEL
WM ADA FRONT/ SIDE PUSH BAR FILTERED EZH2O
BOTTLE FILLING STATION/ DRINKING FTN W/ GREEN
TICKER(O&M only)
49 ............ *****
EWC-2
*****
50 1285725 ELKAY LMABF8WSSK SS 115V 60HZ 8GPH WM ADA
FRONT/ SIDE PUSH BAR FILTERED EZH2O BOTTLE
FILLING STATION/ DRINKING FTN W/ GREEN TICKER
(O&M only)
52 ............ *****
HB-1
*****
53 375447 ZURN Z1333-C MODERATE CLIMATE WALL HYDRANT
(O&M only)
54 ............ *****
WH-1
*****
55 1177769 ZURN Z1320-3/4X6 3/4X6 THRD ECOLOTROL NICKEL
BRONZE FRZLS ENCASED WALL HYDRANT W/
CERAMIC DISC & ANTI-SIPHON AUTO DRAINING(O&M
only)
56 ............ *****
EW-1
*****
57 948351 BRADLEY S19314EW HALO COMBO DRENCH SHOWER
EYEWASH W/ PLAS SHOWERHEAD/BOWL(O&M only)
58 134208 BRADLEY S19-2100 36GPM EMER THERM VLV W/ 65-95
TEMP RANGE(O&M only)
59 ............ *****
TMV-1
*****
60 904022 LEONARD 270LF 1/2MIP MIXING VALVE LEAD FREE
(O&M only)
61 ............ *****
TMV-2
*****
62 1259573 LAWLER 86408 SERIES 803 W/THERMOMETER &
SHUTOFF(O&M only)
63 ............ *****
RVB-1
*****
64 929880 IPS 88158 BIM875AB 1/2 SWT LOW LEAD GALV METAL
ICE MAKER OUTLET BOX W/ DOM VLV(O&M only)
65 ............ *****
RVB-2
*****
66 122002 GUYGRAY 82032 B200 1/2 MIP GALV CENTER DRAIN
WASHING MACH OUTLET BOX W/ QTR TURN VLVS & 2
THRD DRAIN FTG ALSO FITS 5/8 SWT(O&M only)
67 ............ *****
EWH-1
*****
68 269721 AOS DEL20S 3KW 208V 1PH HEATER(O&M only)
69 121708 AMTROL ST-5-C 150 PSI 2GAL THERM-X-TROL STEEL
DIAPHRAGM TYPE THERMAL EXPANSION TANK ASME
(O&M only)
70 ............ *****
EWH-2
*****
71 269721 AOS DEL20S 3KW 208V 1PH HEATER(O&M only)
(O&M only)
73 ............ *****
EWH-3
*****
(O&M only)
75 ............ *****
GWH-1-2
*****
76 1285179 AOS BTH120A00N000000 60GAL CYCLONE MXI
120MBTU NAT GAS MODULATING COMM WTR HTR
53-1/2H 27-3/4DIA 3 YEAR WARRANTY 100120312(O&M
only)
77 135048 AMTR ST-20V-C 8.0 GAL ASME EXPANSION TANK(O&M
only)
78 ............ *** OPTIONAL ACCESSORY ***
79 ............ *****
GWH-3-4
*****
80 1210121 AOS BTH400A00N000000 119GAL CYCLONE MXI
399.9MBTU NAT GAS MODULATING COMM WTR HTR
75-3/4H 33-1/8DIA 3 YEAR WARRANTY 100120404(O&M
only)
81 807950 AMTROL ST-30V-C 150 PSI 14GAL THERM-X-TROL
STEEL DIAPHRAGM TYPE THERMAL EXPANSION TANK
ASME(O&M only)
82 ............ *** OPTIONAL ACCESSORY ***
83 ............ *****
CP-1, 2, 3, 6
*****
84 867369 B&G NBF-8S/LW PUMP ALL BRONZE SWEAT
CONNECTION 1/40HP AB1953 LEAD FREE, 1.5 GPM, 6
TDH(O&M only)
85 ............ *****
CP-4, 5
*****
86 747464 B&G NBF-45 1/6HP BRONZE CIRC, PUMP 103405 LESS
FLANGES(O&M only)
87 ............ *****
WS-1
*****
88 ............ *****
WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
*****
89 ............ *****
GARBAGE DISPOSAL
*****
90 398218 ISE PRO COMPACT DISPOSER 3/4HP 5Y(O&M only)
Spec Seq#: 1
*****
WC-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 2
Commercial Fixtures Terms and Conditions

Price and Terms of Payment
Terms are net, payable 30 days from date of invoice. All pricing in U.S. currency. The Buyer shall pay all sales, consumers, or other applicable
taxes. A 1-1/2% per month service charge will be added to all past due invoices. Annual rate 18% of the outstanding balance due.
Minimum invoice $50.00. Zurn reserves the right to apply a minimum order charge to equal $50.00. All orders are subject to credit approval
771979
by the Zurn Credit Department prior to the acceptance of an order. Orders may be refused, delivery may be withheld, or shipment stopped in
transit without any liability on Zurn's part if in its sole opinion, the Buyer’s ability to pay for the merchandise or the terms and conditions herein
are in doubt. The Credit Department of Zurn must be notified of potential pricing errors within 30 days of invoice date.
Freight
All sales are F.O.B. Zurn’s plant. Zurn will allow full freight allowance only on Zurn Commercial Fixtures orders of $7,500 or more. This full
freight allowance is when the shipment is within the continental United States and has a destiny of a Buyer’s standard address of job
location. Routing of shipment shall be determined at the sole discretion of Zurn. Multi product line orders totaling $7,500 can be combined to
meet FFA guidelines. Shipping dates are estimates and time of delivery is not the essence of this sale of the contract therefore. Under no
circumstances will Zurn have any responsibility on account of any delays in manufacture, transportation, or otherwise. Shipments sent via UPS
can not be guaranteed and will not subject to a warranty.
Limited Warranty
All goods sold hereunder are warranted to be free from defects in material and factory workmanship for a period of three years from the date
of purchase. Zurn will replace goods at no cost that prove defective provided Zurn is notified in writing of such defect and the goods are returned
to Zurn prepaid at Abilene, Texas, with evidence that they have been properly maintained and used in accordance with instructions. ZURN
SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LABOR CHARGES OR ANY LOSS, INJURY, OR DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. The sole and exclusive remedy shall be limited to the replacement of the defective goods.
Before installation and use, the purchaser shall determine the suitability of the product for his intended use and the purchaser assumes all
risk and liability whatever in the connection therewith. Where permitted by law, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY IS LIMITED
TO A PERIOD OF THREE YEARS AND SHALL BE LIMITED SOLELY TO THE REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFECTIVE GOODS. All weights stated in Zurn
catalogs and lists are approximate and are not guaranteed.
Illustrations of Typical Installations

The typical installations for various products found in each product section are intended to illustrate the products and potential options for
the use of these products. Under no circumstances are they to be construed as recommended installation procedures. Consult local codes
and project specifications for proper installation instructions.
Returned Goods
Standard cataloged material may be returned only with written permission of Zurn. Returned goods are subject to a 25% restocking charge of
total saleable material returned, plus cost of reconditioning, if necessary, to make material sellable. Transportation charges are the
responsibility of the Buyer. Credit allowance will be in the form of merchandise credit only – not cash credit. The value of a return must total
at least $100.00 to qualify for credit allowance. No credit will be allowed for parts unless originally ordered and invoiced as parts. No credit
will be allowed for discontinued or made-to-order items. Items that have been specially made are not subject to return or cancellation
except by special negotiation. Material must be returned within two years of invoice date for credit to be issued.
Shortage/Damage Claims
Notification of material shortages or incorrect filling of orders must be made to Zurn within 10 days of receipt. No claims over three months
old will be honored. Buyer agrees to make all complaints for damage in transit or “short count” directly to the carrier; before the contents are
unloaded have the carrier agent’s acknowledgement of such damage noted on the bill of lading and to present to the carrier its agent’s
acknowledgement of such damaged material with formal claim covering said damage.
General
Zurn reserves the right to make changes in design or equipment of any item or product without incurring any obligation on previously sold
items, and to discontinue items at any time, without notice. Possession of this Catalog or other sales literature is not to be construed as an
offer to sell. All orders are subject to acceptance by the general office of Zurn in Abilene, Texas.
Catalog printed in U.S.A.
ZURN INDUSTRIES, LLC · COMMERCIAL FIXTURES OPERATION

2640 SOUTH WORK STREET · FALCONER, NY, U.S.A. 14733 · PHONE: 716-665-1132 · FAX: 716-665-1135 · www.zurn.com
Spec Seq#: 2
Light Commercial Products Terms and Conditions

Terms are net, payable 30 days from date of invoice. All pricing in U.S. currency. The Buyer shall pay all sales, consumers, or other applicable
taxes. A 1-1/2% per month service charge will be added to all past due invoices. Annual rate 18% of the outstanding balance due.
771979
transit without any liability on Zurn's part if in its sole opinion, the Buyer’s ability to pay for the merchandise or the terms and conditions
herein are in doubt. The Credit Department of Zurn must be notified of potential pricing errors within 30 days of invoice date.
Freight
All sales are F.O.B. Zurn’s plant. Zurn will allow full freight allowance only on Zurn Light Commercial orders of $1,000 or more. This full
freight allowance is when the shipment is within the continental United States and has a destiny of a Buyer’s standard address of job
location. Routing of shipment shall be determined at the sole discretion of Zurn. Multi product line orders totaling $7,500 can be combined to
meet FFA guidelines. Shipping dates are estimates and time of delivery is not the essence of this sale of the contract therefore. Under no
circumstances will Zurn have any responsibility on account of any delays in manufacture, transportation, or otherwise.
Limited Warranty
All goods sold hereunder are warranted to be free from defects in material and factory workmanship for a period of one year from the date of
purchase. Zurn will replace goods at no cost that prove defective provided Zurn is notified in writing of such defect and the goods are
returned to Zurn prepaid at Falconer, New York, with evidence that they have been properly maintained and used in accordance with
instructions. ZURN SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LABOR CHARGES OR ANY LOSS, INJURY, OR DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. The sole and exclusive remedy shall be limited to the replacement of the
defective goods. Before installation and use, the purchaser shall determine the suitability of the product for his intended use and the
purchaser assumes all risk and liability whatever in the connection therewith. Where permitted by law, THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY IS LIMITED TO A PERIOD OF ONE YEAR AND SHALL BE LIMITED SOLELY TO THE REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFECTIVE
GOODS. All weights stated in Zurn catalogs and lists are approximate and are not guaranteed.
the use of thede products. Under no circumstances are they to be construed as recommended installation procedures. Consult local codes
Returned Goods
Standard cataloged material may be returned only with written permission of Zurn. Returned goods are subject to a 25% restocking charge
of total saleable material returned, plus cost of reconditioning, if necessary, to make material sellable. Transportation charges are the
responsibility of the Buyer. Credit allowance will be in the form of merchandise credit only – not cash credit. The value of a return must total at
least $100.00 to qualify for credit allowance. Galvanized material will be credited at value of Dura-Coated cast iron, and chrome plated at
value of bronze. No credit will be allowed for parts unless originally ordered and invoiced as parts. No credit will be allowed for discontinued
or made-to-order items. Items that have been specially made are not subject to return or cancellation except by special negotiation. Material
must be returned within one year of invoice date for credit to be issued.
General
offer to sell. All orders are subject to acceptance by the general office of Zurn in Falconer, New York.
ZURN INDUSTRIES, LLC · LIGHT COMMERCIAL OPERATION

1801 PITTSBURGH AVENUE · ERIE, PA, U.S.A. 16502 · PHONE: 814-455-0921 · FAX: 814-454-7929 · www.zurn.com
Spec Seq#: 2
Tubular Brass Terms and Conditions

Terms are net, payable 30 days from date of invoice. All pricing is in U.S. currency. The Buyer shall pay all sales, consumers, or other
applicable taxes. A 1-1/2% per month service charge will be added to all past due invoices. Annual rate 18% of the outstanding balance due.
771979
transit without any liability on Zurn's part if in its sole opinion, the Buyer’s ability to pay for the merchandise or the terms and conditions
herein are in doubt. The Credit department of Zurn must be notified of potential pricing errors within 30 days of invoice date.
Freight
All sales are F.O.B. Zurn’s plant. Zurn will allow full freight allowance only on Zurn Tubular Brass orders of $1,500 or more. This full freight
allowance is when the shipment is within the continental United States and has a destiny of a Buyer’s standard address of job location. Routing
of shipment shall be determined at the sole discretion of Zurn. Multi product line orders totaling $7,500 can be combined to meet FFA
guidelines. Shipping dates are estimates and time of delivery is not the essence of this sale of the contract therefore. Under no
circumstances will Zurn have any responsibility on account of any delays in manufacture, transportation, or otherwise.
Limited Warranty
All goods sold hereunder are warranted to be free from defects in material and factory workmanship for a period of three years from the date
of purchase. (One year for decorative finishes.) Zurn will replace goods at no cost that prove defective provided Zurn is notified in writing of
such defect and the goods are returned to Zurn prepaid at Falconer, New York, with evidence that they have been properly maintained and
used in accordance with instructions. ZURN SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR ANY LABOR CHARGES OR ANY LOSS, INJURY, OR DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. The sole and exclusive remedy shall be
limited to the replacement of the defective goods. Before installation and use, the purchaser shall determine the suitability of the product for
his intended use and the purchaser assumes all risk and liability whatever in the connection therewith. Where permitted by law, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY IS LIMITED TO A PERIOD OF THREE YEARS AND SHALL BE LIMITED SOLELY TO THE REPLACEMENT OF THE
DEFECTIVE GOODS. All weights stated in Zurn catalogs and lists are approximate and are not guaranteed.
the use of these products. Under no circumstances are they to be construed as recommended installation procedures. Consult local codes
Returned Goods
Standard cataloged material may be returned only with written permission of Zurn. Returned goods are subject to a 25% restocking charge
of total saleable material returned, plus cost of reconditioning, if necessary, to make material sellable. Transportation charges are the
responsibility of the Buyer. Credit allowance will be in the form of merchandise credit only – not cash credit. The value of a return must total at
least $100.00 to qualify for credit allowance. No credit will be allowed for parts unless originally ordered and invoiced as parts. No credit will be
allowed for discontinued or made-to-order items. Items that have been specially made are not subject to return or cancellation except by
special negotiation. Material must be returned within two years of invoice date for credit to be issued.
General
offer to sell. All orders are subject to acceptance by the general office of Zurn in Falconer, New York.
ZURN INDUSTRIES, LLC · COMMERCIAL TRAPS and SUPPLIES OPERATION

5900 ELWIN BUCHANAN DRIVE · SANFORD, NC, U.S.A. 27330 · PHONE: 919-775-2255 · FAX: 919-775-3541 · www.zurn.com
Spec Seq#: 3
Installation Guide
Guide d’installation
Guía de instalación
2.5 mm
Sealant Tape Safety Glasses Bucket Solder Strap Wrench 2,5 mm
Ruban d'étanchéité Lunettes de protection Seau Souder Clé à sangle
Cinta selladora Lentes de seguridad Cubeta Suelda Llave de correa
Record your model number below Important Information Important Information Important Information For specific roughing-in information,
for future reference: For service parts information, visit For retrofit (RF) models, remove the The vacuum breaker should not be go to www.kohler.com.
Consigner le numéro de modèle www.kohler.com/serviceparts. old valve body and start at step 8. subjected to continuous pressure for
Pour obtenir de l'information de
ci-dessous pour toute référence For care and cleaning and other Do not install the valve where, during more than 12 hours. A shut off valve
raccordement spécifique, aller sur le
ultérieure: information, visit www.us.kohler.com. normal functioning, water from the is required upstream from the flush
site www.kohler.com.
valve will cause damage. valve.
Apunte abajo su número de mode- Informations importantes
Para información específica sobre el
934053
lo para referencia futura: Pour tout renseignement sur les Informations importantes Informations importantes
diagrama de instalación, vaya a
pièces de rechange, visiter Pour les modèles installés Le robinet casse-vide ne doit pas
www.kohler.com.
www.kohler.com/serviceparts. rétroactivement (RF), retirer l'ancien être soumis à une pression continue
Pour tout renseignement sur l'en- corps de vanne et commencer à pendant plus de douze heures. Un
tretien, le nettoyage et autre, visiter l'étape 8. Ne pas installer la vanne robinet d'arrêt du système est
www.us.kohler.com. si, lors d'un fonctionnement normal, nécessaire à l'amont du robinet de
l'eau en provenance de la vanne peut chasse.
Información importante
causer des dommages.
Para información sobre piezas de Información importante
repuesto, visite Información importante La válvula rompevacío no se debe
www.kohler.com/serviceparts. Para modelos de conversión (RF), someter a una presión continua
Para el cuidado y la limpieza y otra retire el cuerpo de la válvula vieja y durante más de 12 horas. Se
información, visite comience en el paso 8. No instale la requiere una llave de paso corriente
www.us.kohler.com. válvula donde, durante el arriba de la válvula de descarga.
funcionamiento normal, el agua de
la válvula causará daño.
IMPORTANT: Maintain a 6" (152 1 Flush the supply line and turn off 2 Cut the water supply tube to the 3 Install the escutcheon and 4 Apply thread sealant tape.
mm) minimum critical level above the the water supply. required length. Sweat solder the sleeve. Cut to size if needed. Appliquer du ruban d'étanchéité
fixture. Purger le conduit d'alimentation et adapter onto the tube. Installer l'applique et le manchon. pour filets.
IMPORTANT: Maintenir un niveau couper l'alimentation en eau. Couper le tube d'alimentation en Couper à la taille requise si Aplique cinta selladora de roscas.
critique minimum de 6" (152 mm) Haga circular agua por la línea de eau à la longueur requise. nécessaire.
au-dessus du dispositif. suministro y cierre el suministro Installer l'adaptateur sur le tube Instale el chapetón y la manga.
IMPORTANTE: Mantenga un nivel de agua. en effectuant un brasage tendre. Corte al tamaño si es necesario.
crítico de 6" (152 mm) mínimo arriba Corte el tubo de suministro de
de la unidad. agua a la longitud requerida.
Suelde el adaptador al tubo.
6" (152 mm)

Min/Min./Mín
5 Install the control stop. Align the 6 Assemble the tailpiece. 7 Install the tailpiece. Slide the 8 Install the valve body to the 9 Align and tighten the valve to the
outlet to the valve inlet. Assembler la pièce de escutcheon over the spud. tailpiece. control stop.
Installer la soupape de contrôle. raccordement. Tighten the coupling nut. Installer le corps de la vanne sur Aligner et serrer la vanne sur la
Aligner l'orifice de sortie sur Ensamble el tubo final. Installer la pièce de la pièce de raccordement. soupape de contrôle.
l'orifice d'entrée de la vanne. raccordement. Faire glisser Instale el cuerpo de la válvula al Alinee y apriete la válvula a la
Instale la llave de paso de control. l'applique sur la ligature. Serrer tubo final. llave de paso de control.
Alinee la salida con la entrada de l'écrou d'assemblage.
la válvula. Instale el tubo final. Deslice el
chapetón sobre el spud. Apriete
la tuerca de acoplamiento.
Washer
Rondelle
Arandela
Valve Inlet Gasket

Entrée de valve Joint
Entrada de la válvula Empaque
10 Turn on the water supply. 11 Remove the cap. Turn the screw 12 Check for leaks. 13 Fully close the control stop. 14 Open in 1/4 turn increments until
Ouvrir l'alimentation en eau. counterclockwise to fully open Vérifier l'étanchéité. Entièrement fermer la soupape the desired flush is achieved.
the control stop. de contrôle. Reinstall the cap.
Abra el suministro de agua. Verifique que no haya fugas.
Retirer le capuchon. Tourner la Cierre completamente la llave de L'ouvrir d'un quart de tour à la
vis dans le sens contraire des paso de control. fois jusqu'à obtention de la
aiguilles d'une montre pour puissance de chasse voulue.
entièrement ouvrir la soupape de Réinstaller le capuchon.
contrôle. Abra en incrementos de 1/4 de
Retire la tapa. Gire el tornillo vuelta hasta lograr la descarga
hacia la izquierda para abrir deseada. Vuelva a instalar la
completamente la llave de paso tapa.
de control.
Setscrew
Vis de retenue
Tornillo de fijación
1146817-2-C
Spec Seq#: 3
Troubleshooting Dépannage Guía para resolver problemas
Flushometer does not function. Le robinet de chasse ne fonctionne pas. El fluxómetro no funciona.
1. Confirm the control stop is open. 1. S'assurer que la soupape de contrôle est ouverte. 1. Confirme que la llave de paso de control esté abierta.
2. Check the handle assembly for damage. Replace if 2. Examiner l'ensemble de la poignée pour y rechercher des 2. Verifique que el montaje de manija no esté dañado.
necessary. dommages. Remplacer si nécessaire. Reemplace si es necesario.
3. Check the piston assembly for damage. Replace if 3. Examiner l'ensemble du piston pour y rechercher des 3. Verifique que el montaje de pistón no esté dañado.
Low flow – no siphon on fixture. Débit bas – pas de siphon sur le dispositif. Flujo bajo - la unidad no presenta sifón.
1. Confirm 35 psi (241 kPa) static pressure and 25 gal/min (95 1. Vérifier que la pression statique est égale à 35 psi (241 kPa) 1. Confirme que la presión estática sea 35 psi (241 kPa) y 25
L/min). et à 25 gal/min (95 l/min). gal/min (95 L/min).
2. Confirm the control stop is fully open. Open if needed. 2. S'assurer que la soupape de contrôle est entièrement 2. Confirme que la llave de paso de control esté completamente
Flushing is not long enough. ouverte. Ouvrir si nécessaire. abierta. Ábrala si es necesario.
1. Check the handle assembly for damage. Replace if La chasse ne dure pas assez longtemps. La descarga no es lo suficientemente larga.
necessary. 1. Examiner l'ensemble de la poignée pour y rechercher des 1. Verifique que el montaje de manija no esté dañado.
2. Check the piston assembly for damage. Replace if dommages. Remplacer si nécessaire. Reemplace si es necesario.
necessary. 2. Examiner l'ensemble du piston pour y rechercher des 2. Verifique que el montaje de pistón no esté dañado.
Flushing is too long or continuous. dommages. Remplacer si nécessaire. Reemplace si es necesario.
1. Clean the bleed hole. La chasse est trop longue ou continuelle. La descarga es demasiado larga o continua.
2. Check the handle assembly for damage. Replace if 1. Nettoyer l'orifice de purge. 1. Limpie el orificio de purga.
934053
Handle leaks. dommages. Remplacer si nécessaire. Reemplace si es necesario.
1. Check the handle assembly for damage. Replace if Fuites de la poignée. La manija tiene fugas.
Leak from vacuum breaker or tailpiece area. dommages. Remplacer si nécessaire. Reemplace si es necesario.
1. Check the vacuum breaker for damage. Replace if Fuite en provenance du robinet casse-vide ou de la zone Fuga del área de la válvula rompevacío o tubo final.
necessary. de la pièce de raccordement. 1. Verifique que la válvula rompevacío no esté dañada.
2. Tighten the connections. 1. Inspecter le robinet casse-vide pour y rechercher des Reemplace si es necesario.
3. Turn the control stop down (clockwise) 1/4 turn until the leak dommages. Remplacer si nécessaire. 2. Apriete las conexiones.
stops. Check flushing performance. 2. Serrer les raccords. 3. Gire la llave de paso de control hacia abajo (derecha) 1/4
4. If a damaged fixture is causing high back pressure, replace 3. Tourner la soupape de contrôle vers le bas (dans le sens de vuelta hasta que la fuga pare. Verifique el funcionamiento
the fixture. des aiguilles d'une montre) de 1/4 de tour jusqu'à ce que la de la descarga.
For additional information, visit your product page at: fuite s'arrête. Vérifier la performance de la chasse. 4. Si una unidad dañada causa una contrapresión alta,
http://kohlerpro.kohlerco.com/irj/portal/pro/ or call 4. Si un dispositif endommagé crée une surpression élevée, reemplace la unidad.
1-920-803-3927. remplacer le dispositif. Para información adicional, visite la página de su producto en:
Pour obtenir de l'information supplémentaire, visiter la page de http://kohlerpro.kohlerco.com/irj/portal/pro/ o llame al
SERVICE PARTS
produits sur le site: http://kohlerpro.kohlerco.com/irj/portal/pro/ 1-920-803-3927.
For service parts information, visit your product page at ou appeler le 1-920-803-3927.
www.kohler.com/serviceparts. PIEZAS DE REPUESTO
PIÈCES DE RECHANGE Para información sobre piezas de repuesto, visite la página
For care and cleaning and other information go to:
Pour tout renseignement sur les pièces de rechange, visiter de su producto en www.kohler.com/serviceparts.
www.us.kohler.com.
la page du produit à www.kohler.com/serviceparts.
ONE-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY Para el cuidado y la limpieza y otra información visite:
Pour tout renseignement sur l'entretien, le nettoyage et autre, www.us.kohler.com.
KOHLER plumbing products are warranted to be free of defects visiter: www.us.kohler.com.
in material and workmanship for one year from date of GARANTÍA LIMITADA DE UN AÑO
installation. GARANTIE LIMITÉE D'UN AN Se garantiza que los productos de plomería KOHLER están
Kohler Co. will, at its election, repair, replace or make Les produits de plomberie KOHLER sont garantis contre tout libres de defectos de material y mano de obra por un año a
appropriate adjustment where Kohler Co. inspection discloses vice de matériau et de fabrication pendant un an à partir de la partir de la fecha de instalación.
any such defects occurring in normal usage within one (1) year date de l'installation. Kohler Co., a su criterio, reparará, reemplazará o realizará los
after installation. Kohler Co. is not responsible for removal or Si un vice est découvert au cours d'une utilisation normale, ajustes pertinentes en los casos en que la inspección realizada
installation costs. Use of in-tank toilet cleaners will void the Kohler Co. choisira, à sa discrétion, la réparation, le por Kohler Co. determine que dichos defectos ocurrieron durante
warranty. remplacement ou la rectification appropriée après inspection el uso normal en el transcurso de un (1) año a partir de la fecha
To obtain warranty service contact Kohler Co. either through desdits vices par Kohler Co. pendant un (1) an à partir de la de la instalación. Kohler Co. no se hace responsable de costos
your Dealer, Plumbing Contractor, Home Center or E-tailer, or date d'installation. Kohler Co. n'est pas responsable des frais de desinstalación o instalación. El uso de limpiadores de
by writing Kohler Co., Attn.: Customer Care Center, 444 Highland d'enlèvement ou d'installation. L'utilisation de nettoyants à inodoro que se colocan dentro del tanque anulará la
Drive, Kohler, WI 53044, USA, or by calling 1-800-4-KOHLER l'intérieur du réservoir annule la garantie. garantía.
(1-800-456-4537) from within the USA and Canada, and Pour obtenir le service de garantie, contacter Kohler Co., par Para obtener el servicio de garantía, comuníquese con Kohler
001-800-456-4537 from within Mexico, or visit www.kohler.com l'intermédiaire du vendeur, plombier, centre de rénovation ou Co. a través de su distribuidor, contratista de plomería, centro
within the USA, www.ca.kohler.com from within Canada, or revendeur par internet, ou bien par écrit à l'adresse suivante de remodelación o distribuidor por Internet, o escriba a Kohler
www.mx.kohler.com in Mexico. Kohler Co., Attn.: Customer Care Center, 444 Highland Drive, Co., Attn.: Customer Care Center, 444 Highland Drive, Kohler,
IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THAT OF Kohler, WI 53044, USA, ou appeler le 1-800-4-KOHLER WI 53044, USA, o llame al 1-800-4-KOHLER (1-800-456-4537)
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR (1-800-456-4537) à partir des É.-U. et du Canada, et le desde los EE.UU. y Canadá, y al 001-800-456-4537 desde
PURPOSE ARE EXPRESSLY LIMITED IN DURATION TO 001-800-456-4537 à partir du Mexique, ou consulter le site México, o visite www.kohler.com desde los EE.UU.,
THE DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY. KOHLER CO. www.kohler.com aux É.-U., www.ca.kohler.com à partir du www.ca.kohler.com desde Canadá, o www.mx.kohler.com en
AND/OR SELLER DISCLAIM ANY LIABILITY FOR SPECIAL, Canada, ou www.mx.kohler.com au Mexique. México.
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some LES GARANTIES TACITES, Y COMPRIS CELLES DE TODA GARANTÍA IMPLÍCITA INCLUYENDO DE
states/provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied COMMERCIALITÉ ET D'ADAPTATION À UN USAGE COMERCIALIZACIÓN E IDONEIDAD DEL PRODUCTO PARA
warranty lasts, or the exclusion or limitation of special, incidental PARTICULIER, SONT EXPRESSÉMENT LIMITÉE À LA UN USO DETERMINADO, SE LIMITA EXPRESAMENTE A
or consequential damages, so these limitations and exclusions DURÉE DE LA PRÉSENTE GARANTIE. KOHLER CO. ET/OU LA DURACIÓN DE ESTA GARANTÍA. KOHLER CO. Y/O EL
may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal LE REVENDEUR DÉCLINENT TOUTE RESPONSABILITÉ VENDEDOR DESCARGAN TODA RESPONSABILIDAD POR
rights. You may also have other rights which vary from CONTRE LES DOMMAGES PARTICULIERS, ACCESSOIRES CONCEPTO DE DAÑOS PARTICULARES, INCIDENTALES
state/province to state/province. OU INDIRECTS. Certains états et provinces ne permettent pas O INDIRECTOS. Algunos estados/provincias no permiten
This is Kohler Co.'s exclusive written warranty. de limite sur la durée de la garantie tacite, ni l'exclusion ou la limitaciones en cuanto a la duración de una garantía implícita
limite des dommages particuliers, accessoires ou indirects, et, o a la exclusión o limitación de daños particulares, incidentales
par conséquent, lesdites limites et exclusions peuvent ne pas o indirectos, por lo que estas limitaciones y exclusiones pueden
s'appliquer à votre cas. Cette garantie vous donne des droits no aplicar a su caso. Esta garantía le otorga ciertos derechos
juridiques particuliers. Vous pouvez également avoir d'autres legales específicos. Además, usted puede tener otros derechos
droits qui varient d'un état ou d'une province à l'autre. que varían de estado a estado y provincia a provincia.
Ceci constitue la garantie écrite exclusive de Kohler Co. Ésta es la garantía exclusiva por escrito de Kohler Co.
USA/Canada: 1-800-4KOHLER
Mexico: 001-800-456-4537
www.kohler.com
1146817-2-C © 2013 Kohler Co.
Spec Seq#: 3
Installation Guide
2.5 mm
934053
www.kohler.com.
6" (152 mm)

Min/Min./Mín
Washer
Rondelle
Arandela
Valve Inlet Gasket

de control.
Setscrew
Vis de retenue
1146817-2-C
Spec Seq#: 3
934053
SERVICE PARTS
www.us.kohler.com.
Mexico: 001-800-456-4537
www.kohler.com
1146817-2-C © 2013 Kohler Co.
Spec Seq#: 4
For Quick-Release Seats/Pour sièges Quick-Release /Para asientos Quick-Release
1 2 3 4 5 Adjust/Ajuster/Ajuste
Reverse "+"
to shorten.
Inverser de "+"
raccour cir.
Invierta el "+"
para acortar.
For Non-Quick-Release Seats/Pour sièges Non-Quick-Release/Para asientos que no son Quick-Release
514392
1 2 3 4 5
ONE-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY GARANTIE LIMITÉE D'UN AN GARANTÍA LIMITADA DE UN AÑO

KOHLER plumbing products are warranted to be free Les produits de plomberie KOHLER sont garantis Se garantiza que los productos de plomería
of defects in material and workmanship for one year contre tout défaut matériel et de fabrication pour un an, KOHLER están libres de defectos de material y
from date of installation. à partir de la date de l’installation. mano de obra por un año a partir de la fecha de
Kohler Co. will, at its election, repair, replace or Kohler Co. jugera à sa discrétion, de la réparation, du instalación.
make appropriate adjustment where Kohler Co. remplacement ou du réglage approprié et ceci après Kohler Co., a su criterio, reparará, reemplazará o
inspection discloses any such defects occurring in toute inspection faite par Kohler Co. de tous défauts realizará los ajustes pertinentes en los casos en que
normal usage within one (1) year after installation. dus à une utilisation normale et ceci pendant un (1) an la inspección realizada por Kohler Co. determine que
Kohler Co. is not responsible for removal or installation à partir de la date d’installation. Kohler Co. n’est pas dichos defectos ocurrieron durante el uso normal en
costs. Use of in-tank toilet cleaners will void the responsable des coûts de démontage ou d’installation. el transcurso de un (1) año a partir de la fecha de la
warranty. L’utilisation de nettoyants à l’intérieur du réservoir instalación. Kohler Co. no se hace responsable de
To obtain warranty service contact Kohler Co. either annulera la garantie. los gastos de desinstalación o instalación. El uso de
through your Dealer, Plumbing Contractor, Home Pour obtenir un service-garantie, contacter Kohler limpiadores de inodoro que se colocan dentro del
Center or E-tailer, or by writing Kohler Co., Attn.: Co. par l’intermédiaire de votre vendeur, plombier, tanque anulará la garantía.
Customer Care Center, 444 Highland Drive, Kohler, centre de rénovation, revendeur par internet ou par Para obtener el servicio de garantía, comuníquese
WI 53044, USA, or by calling 1-800-4-KOHLER écrit à Kohler Co. à l’attention de: Customer Care con Kohler Co. a través de su distribuidor, contratista
(1-800-456-4537) from within the USA and Canada, Center, Kohler, 444 Highland Drive Wisconsin 53044 de plomería o distribuidor a través de Internet, o
and 001-800-456-4537 from within Mexico, or visit USA, ou en appelant le 1-800-4-KOHLER escriba directamente a: Kohler Co., Attn.: Customer
www.kohler.com within the USA, www.ca.kohler.com (1-800-456-4537) à partir des États-Unis et du Care Center, 444 Highland Drive, Kohler, WI 53044,
from within Canada, or www.mx.kohler.com in Mexico. Canada, et le 001-800-456-4537 à partir du Mexique, U.S.A. o llame al 1-800-4-KOHLER (1-800-456-4537)
IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THAT OF ou rendez-vous à l’adresse www.kohler.com aux desde los Estados Unidos y Canadá, o al
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A États-Unis, à l’adresse www.ca.kohler.com au 001-800-456-4537 desde México, o visite
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE EXPRESSLY Canada, ou à l’adresse www.mx.kohler.com au www.kohler.com desde los Estados Unidos,
LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE DURATION OF Mexique. www.ca.kohler.com desde Canadá, o
THIS WARRANTY. KOHLER CO. AND/OR SELLER LA DURÉE DES GARANTIES TACITES, Y COMPRIS www.mx.kohler.com en México.
DISCLAIMS ANY LIABILITY FOR SPECIAL, CELLES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET TODA GARANTÍA IMPLÍCITA INCLUYENDO
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. D’APTITUDE À UN EMPLOI PARTICULIER, SE LAS DE COMERCIALIZACIÓN E IDONEIDAD DEL
Some states/provinces do not allow limitations on how LIMITE EXPRESSÉMENT À LA DURÉE DE LA PRODUCTO PARA UN USO DETERMINADO, SE
long an implied warranty lasts, or the exclusion or PRÉSENTE GARANTIE. KOHLER CO. ET/OU LE LIMITA EXPRESAMENTE A LA DURACIÓN DE LA
limitation of special, incidental or consequential REVENDEUR DÉCLINENT TOUTE PRESENTE GARANTÍA. KOHLER CO. Y/O EL
damages, so these limitations and exclusions may not RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRE LES DOMMAGES VENDEDOR NO SE HACEN RESPONSABLES
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal PARTICULIERS, IMPRÉVUS OU DE POR CONCEPTO DE DAÑOS PARTICULARES,
rights. You may also have other rights which vary from CIRCONSTANCE. Certains états/provinces ne INCIDENTALES O INDIRECTOS. Algunos
state/province to state/province. permettent pas la limitation sur la durée de la garantie estados/provincias no permiten limitaciones en
This is Kohler Co.'s exclusive written warranty. implicite, ou l’exclusion ou la limitation de dommages cuanto a la duración de una garantía implícita o a la
spéciaux, accessoires ou indirects, et, par conséquent, exclusión o limitación de daños particulares,
ces limitations et exclusions pourraient ne pas incidentales o indirectos, por lo que estas
USA/Canada: 1-800-4KOHLER s’appliquer dans votre cas. Cette garantie vous donne limitaciones y exclusiones pueden no aplicar a su
Mexico: 001-800-456-4537 des droits légaux spécifiques. Vous pouvez également caso. Esta garantía le otorga ciertos derechos
www.kohler.com avoir d’autres droits qui varient d’un état/province à legales específicos. Además, usted puede tener
© 2010 Kohler Co. l’autre. otros derechos que varían de estado a estado y
Publication Number: Ceci constitue la garantie écrite exclusive de provincia a provincia.
Numéro de publication: Kohler Co. El presente documento constituye la garantía
Número del documento:
1160682-2-A exclusiva por escrito de Kohler Co.
Spec Seq#: 12
*****
U-2
*****
Spec Seq#: 13
See the roughing-in illustration on the opposite page.
Installation Guide
Se reporter à l'illustration se trouvant sur la page opposée.
Guía de instalación Consulte el diagrama de instalación en la página opuesta.
Plus:
• Hole Cutting Equipment
Et:
• Outil à découper
Más:
• Herramientas para
perforar orificios
Thread Sealant
Ruban d'étanchéité pour filetage
Cinta selladora de roscas
Record your model number below For service parts information, visit Important Information 1 Turn off the water. 2 Install a backer board for
for future reference: www.kohler.com/serviceparts. The urinal complies with ADA Couper l'arrivée d'eau. additional support.
Consigner le numéro de modèle For care and cleaning and other requirements when the rim is Installer une planche d'appui pour
information, visit www.us.kohler.com. Cierre el agua.
ci-dessous pour toute référence mounted no higher than 17” (432 obtenir un support supplémentaire.
ultérieure: Pour tout renseignement sur les mm) from the finished floor.
1172840
Instale una tabla de refuerzo como
Anote abajo el número de su pièces de rechange, visiter Informations importantes soporte adicional.
modelo como referencia futura: www.kohler.com/serviceparts. L'urinoir est conforme aux exigences
Pour tout renseignement sur l'en- ADA lorsque le rebord n'est pas
tretien, le nettoyage et autre, visiter monté à plus de 17” (432 mm) du
www.us.kohler.com. plancher fini.
Para consultar información sobre
piezas de repuesto, visite
* El mingitorio cumple los requisitos
www.kohler.com/serviceparts.
de la ADA cuando el reborde se
Para el cuidado y la limpieza, y
instala a una altura no mayor de 17”
más información, visite
(432 mm) del piso acabado.
www.us.kohler.com.
3 Single bracket installation: Double bracket installation: Install 4 Apply thread sealant tape. Install 5 Position the urinal on the 6 Secure the urinal to the collar
Install the wall hanger. the wall hangers. the collar and gasket. hanger(s). using the screws and washers.
Installation de support unique: Installation de support double: Appliquer du ruban d'étanchéité Positionner l'urinoir sur le(s) Sécuriser l'urinoir sur le collier en
Installer l'étrier mural. Installer les étriers muraux. pour filets. Installer le collier et le étrier(s). utilisant les vis et les rondelles.
Instalación de un solo soporte: Installation de support double: joint statique. Coloque el mingitorio en los Fije el mingitorio al collarín con los
Instale el soporte de suspensión Installer les étriers muraux. Aplique cinta selladora de roscas. soportes de suspensión. tornillos y las arandelas.
mural. Instale el collarín y el empaque.
7 Install the flush valve following the 8 Turn on the water supply. 9 Check for leaks.
manufacturer's instructions. Ouvrir l'arrivée d'eau. Rechercher des fuites.
Installer le robinet de chasse Abra el suministro de agua. Verifique que no haya fugas.
conformément aux instructions du
fabricant.
Instale la válvula de descarga de
acuerdo a las instrucciones del
fabricante.
1172110-2-D
Spec Seq#: 13
K-4972 = 1-1/4" Spud
K-4972 = Raccord de 1-1/4" K-4972 = 1-1/4" Spud Wall Hangers
3/4" Spud K-4972 = Raccord de 1-1/4"
K-4972 = Spud de 1-1/4" Raccord de 3/4" 3/4" Spud Supports muraux
A Raccord de 3/4" K-4972 = Spud de 1-1/4" F
Spud de 3/4" Soportes de
Spud de 3/4"
G suspensión mural
Finished Wall
Mur fini
Pared acabada 2" NPT Tap
Trou taraudé
E 2" NPT Tap E de 2" NPT
2" NPT Tap R B
B Trou taraudé Rosca NPT de 2"
Trou taraudé de 2" NPT
de 2" NPT
Rosca NPT de 2" H
Rosca NPT de 2"
1/4"
D D (6 mm)
I 6" (152 mm)
J
24" (610 mm) Outlet Detail

24" (610 mm) Détail sortie
C *17 (432 mm) C *17 (432 mm) Finished Floor
Sol fini Detalle de la salida
Piso acabado
A R B C D E F G H I J
1172840
3" 14-1/8" 21" 3" 19" 18" 12" 26-7/8" 40-1/2" NA
K-4904-ET NA (483 mm) (457 mm) (305 mm) (683 mm) (1029 mm)
(76 mm) (359 mm) (533 mm) (76 mm)
20-3/4" 14-1/8" 21" 3" 19" 18" 12" 26-7/8" 40-1/2"
K-4904-ER NA NA
(527 mm) (359 mm) (533 mm) (76 mm) (483 mm) (457 mm) (305 mm) (683 mm) (1029 mm)
3" 14-1/8" 21" 3" 19" 18" 12" 28" 40-1/2" NA
K-4960-ET NA (483 mm) (457 mm) (305 mm) (711 mm) (1029 mm)
(76 mm) (359 mm) (533 mm) (76 mm)
20-3/8" 14-1/8" 21" 3" 19" 18" 12" 28" 40-1/2" NA
K-4960-ER NA
2-1/4" 14-1/2" 22-1/8" (5262 mm) 19-1/8" 18-1/4" 12" 27-5/8" 40-1/8" NA
K-4972-ET NA NA
(57 mm) (368 mm) **14-1/8" (359 mm) (486 mm) (464 mm) (305 mm) (702 mm) (1019 mm)
19-1/4" 14-1/2" 22-1/8" (5262 mm) 19-1/8" 18-1/4" 12" 27-5/8" 40-1/8"
K-4972-ER NA NA NA
2-1/4" NA 12-1/2" 17-1/4" 6-3/4" 14-1/4" 16-1/4" 10" 24" 35-1/2" NA
K-4989-T (57 mm) (318 mm) (438 mm) (171 mm) (362 mm) (413 mm) (254 mm) (610 mm) (902 mm)
19-1/4" 12-1/2" 17-1/4" 6-3/4" 14-1/4" 16-1/4" 10" 24" 35-1/2"
K-4989-R NA NA
3" NA 14-1/8" 21" 3" 19" 18" 12" 26-7/8" 40-1/2" NA
K-4991-ET (76 mm) (359 mm) (533 mm) (76 mm) (483 mm) (457 mm) (305 mm) (683 mm) (1029 mm)
20-3/4" 14-1/8" 21" 3" 19" 18" 12" 26-7/8" 40-1/2"
K-4991-ER NA NA
2-3/8" NA 14-1/2" 17-1/2" (445 mm) 6-1/2" 11-3/8" 13-1/2" 6-1/2" 20-3/8" 32-1/2" NA
K-5016-ET (60 mm) (368 mm) **9-1/2" (241 mm) (165 mm) (289 mm) (343 mm) (165 mm) (518 mm) (826 mm)
16-1/8" 14-1/2" 17-1/2" (445 mm) 6-1/2" 11-3/8" 13-1/2" 6-1/2" 20-3/8" 32-1/2"
K-5016-ER NA NA
(410 mm) (368 mm) **9-1/2" (241 mm) (165 mm) (289 mm) (343 mm) (165 mm) (518 mm) (826 mm)
17-1/2" (445 mm) 6-1/2" 11-3/4" 13-3/4" 20-3/4" 30"

2-3/8" NA 14-3/4" NA NA
K-5452-ET **9-1/2" (241 mm) (165 mm) (298 mm) (349 mm) (527 mm) (762 mm)
(60 mm) (375 mm)
16-1/4" 14-3/4" 17-1/2" (445 mm) 6-1/2" 11-3/4" 13-3/4" 20-3/4" 30"
K-5452-ER NA NA NA
*Maximum rim height for ADA compliance. **Maximum outlet height for ADA compliance.
*Hauteur maximum de rebord conforme à l'ADA. **Hauteur de sortie maximum conforme à l'ADA.
*Altura máxima del borde para cumplir con los requisitos de la ADA. **Altura máxima de la salida para cumplir con los requisitos de la ADA.
Need help? Contact the KOHLER Customer Care Center at Besoin d'aide? Appeler le centre de services à la clientèle de KOHLER ¿Necesita ayuda? Comuníquese con el Centro de Atención al Cliente
1-800-4KOHLER (1-800-456-4537). au 1-800-4KOHLER (1-800-456-4537). de KOHLER al 1-800-4KOHLER (1-800-456-4537).
For service parts information, visit www.kohler.com/serviceparts. Pour tout renseignement sur les pièces de rechange, visiter Para consultar información sobre piezas de repuesto, visite
For care and cleaning and other information, visit www.us.kohler.com. www.kohler.com/serviceparts. www.kohler.com/serviceparts.
Pour tout renseignement sur l'entretien, le nettoyage et autre, visiter Para el cuidado y la limpieza, y más información, visite
ONE-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY
www.us.kohler.com. www.us.kohler.com.
KOHLER plumbing products are warranted to be free of defects in
material and workmanship for one year from date of installation. GARANTIE LIMITÉE D'UN AN GARANTÍA LIMITADA DE UN AÑO
Kohler Co. will, at its election, repair, replace or make appropriate Les produits de plomberie KOHLER sont garantis contre tout vice de Se garantizan los productos de plomería KOHLER contra defectos de
adjustment where Kohler Co. inspection discloses any such defects matériau et de fabrication pendant un an à partir de la date de material y mano de obra durante un año a partir de la fecha de
occurring in normal usage within one (1) year after installation. Kohler l'installation. instalación.
Co. is not responsible for removal or installation costs. Use of in-tank Si un vice est découvert au cours d'une utilisation normale, Kohler Co. Kohler Co., a su criterio, reparará, reemplazará o realizará los ajustes
toilet cleaners will void the warranty. choisira, à sa discrétion, la réparation, le remplacement ou la rectification pertinentes en los casos en que la inspección realizada por Kohler Co.
To obtain warranty service contact Kohler Co. either through your Dealer, appropriée après inspection desdits vices par Kohler Co. pendant un determine que dichos defectos hayan ocurrido durante el uso normal
Plumbing Contractor, Home Center or E-tailer, or by writing Kohler Co., (1) an à partir de la date d'installation. Kohler Co. n'est pas responsable en el transcurso de un (1) año a partir de la fecha de instalación. Kohler
Attn.: Customer Care Center, 444 Highland Drive, Kohler, WI 53044, des frais d'enlèvement ou d'installation. L'utilisation de nettoyants à Co. no se hace responsable de costos de desinstalación o de instalación.
USA, or by calling 1-800-4-KOHLER (1-800-456-4537) from within the l'intérieur du réservoir annule la garantie. El uso de limpiadores de inodoro que se colocan dentro del tanque
USA and Canada, and 001-800-456-4537 from within Mexico, or visit Pour obtenir le service de garantie, contacter Kohler Co., par anula la garantía.
www.kohler.com within the USA, www.ca.kohler.com from within l'intermédiaire du vendeur, plombier, centre de rénovation ou revendeur Para obtener el servicio de garantía, comuníquese con Kohler Co. a
Canada, or www.mx.kohler.com in Mexico. par internet, ou bien par écrit à l'adresse suivante Kohler Co., Attn.: través de su distribuidor, contratista de plomería, centro de remodelación
IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING THAT OF MERCHANTABILITY Customer Care Center, 444 Highland Drive, Kohler, WI 53044, USA, o distribuidor por Internet, o escriba a Kohler Co., Atención: Customer
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE EXPRESSLY ou en appelant le 1-800-4-KOHLER (1-800-456-4537) à partir des É.-U. Care Center, 444 Highland Drive, Kohler, WI 53044, EE.UU., o llame
LIMITED IN DURATION TO THE DURATION OF THIS WARRANTY. et du Canada, et le 001-800-456-4537 à partir du Mexique, ou consulter al 1-800-4-KOHLER (1-800-456-4537) desde los EE.UU. y Canadá, o
KOHLER CO. AND/OR SELLER DISCLAIM ANY LIABILITY FOR le site www.kohler.com aux É.-U., www.ca.kohler.com à partir du al 001-800-456-4537 desde México, o visite www.kohler.com desde los
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES. Some Canada, ou www.mx.kohler.com au Mexique. EE.UU., www.ca.kohler.com desde Canadá, o www.mx.kohler.com en
states/provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty LES GARANTIES TACITES, Y COMPRIS CELLES DE México.
lasts, or the exclusion or limitation of special, incidental or consequential COMMERCIALITÉ ET D'ADAPTATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER, TODA GARANTÍA IMPLÍCITA, INCLUIDA LA DE
damages, so these limitations and exclusions may not apply to you. SONT EXPRESSÉMENT LIMITÉE À LA DURÉE DE LA PRÉSENTE COMERCIALIZACIÓN E IDONEIDAD DEL PRODUCTO PARA UN
This warranty gives you specific legal rights. You may also have other GARANTIE. KOHLER CO. ET/OU LE REVENDEUR DÉCLINENT USO DETERMINADO, SE LIMITA EXPRESAMENTE A LA DURACIÓN
rights which vary from state/province to state/province. TOUTE RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRE LES DOMMAGES DE ESTA GARANTÍA. KOHLER CO. Y/O EL VENDEDOR
This is Kohler Co.'s exclusive written warranty. PARTICULIERS, ACCESSOIRES OU INDIRECTS. Certains états et DESCARGAN TODA RESPONSABILIDAD POR CONCEPTO DE
provinces ne permettent pas de limite sur la durée de la garantie tacite, DAÑOS PARTICULARES, INCIDENTALES O INDIRECTOS. Algunos
ni l'exclusion ou la limite des dommages particuliers, accessoires ou estados/provincias no permiten limitaciones en cuanto a la duración de
indirects, et, par conséquent, lesdites limites et exclusions peuvent ne una garantía implícita o a la exclusión o limitación de daños particulares,
pas s'appliquer à votre cas. Cette garantie vous donne des droits incidentales o indirectos, por lo que estas limitaciones y exclusiones
juridiques particuliers. Vous pouvez également avoir d'autres droits qui pueden no aplicar a su caso. Esta garantía le otorga ciertos derechos
varient d'un état ou d'une province à l'autre. legales específicos. Además, usted también puede tener otros derechos
Ceci constitue la garantie écrite exclusive de Kohler Co. que varían de estado a estado y de provincia a provincia.
Esta es la garantía exclusiva por escrito de Kohler Co.
Mexico: 001-800-456-4537
www.kohler.com
1172110-2-D © 2015 Kohler Co.
Spec Seq#: 14
Installation Guide
2.5 mm
941526
www.kohler.com.
6" (152 mm)

Min/Min./Mín
Washer
Rondelle
Arandela
Valve Inlet Gasket

de control.
Setscrew
Vis de retenue
1146817-2-C
Spec Seq#: 14
941526
SERVICE PARTS
www.us.kohler.com.
Mexico: 001-800-456-4537
www.kohler.com
1146817-2-C © 2013 Kohler Co.
Spec Seq#: 15
*****
L-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 16
Installation
Guide
Wall-Mount Lavatories
K-2005, K-2006, K-2007 K-2053, K-2054, K-2084
2432
M product numbers are for Mexico (i.e. K-12345M)
Los números de productos seguidos de
M corresponden a México (Ej.
K-12345M)
Français, page “Français-1”
Español, página “Español-1”
1018370-2-B
Spec Seq#: 16
Tools and Materials
2432
Thank You For Choosing Kohler Company
We appreciate your commitment to Kohler quality. Please take a few
minutes to review this manual before you start installation. If you
encounter any installation or performance problems, please don’t
hesitate to contact us. Our phone numbers and website are listed on
the back cover. Thanks again for choosing Kohler Company.
Before You Begin

Observe all local plumbing and building codes.
Prior to installation, unpack the new lavatory and inspect it for

damage. Return the lavatory to its protective carton until you are
ready to install it.
Inspect the drain and supply tubing. Replace if necessary.
These instructions are for installing the lavatory to wood frame
construction. For other installations, supply suitable bracing and
fastening devices of sufficient size and strength.
The walls and floor must be square, plumb, and level.
1018370-2-B 2 Kohler Co.

Spec Seq#: 16
1. Preparation
2432
Install the water supplies and drain piping according to the
roughing-in information.
Install sufficient backing behind the finished wall to provide a
secure material for the anchoring devices.
Hanger (provided) Installation

Install the hanger according to the roughing-in information. Use
1/4″ lag bolts and washers (neither is provided) or other suitable
fasteners to secure the hanger to the finished wall and backing
material. Make sure the hanger is level.
Concealed Arm Carrier Installation

Install the concealed arm carrier according to the roughing-in
information. Follow the installation information included with the
carrier. Make sure the carrier is level.
Kohler Co. 3 1018370-2-B

Spec Seq#: 16
2432
2. Install the Lavatory
Install the faucet and drain to the lavatory according to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
Installation With Hanger

Temporarily position the lavatory on the hanger, and level. Use a
pencil to mark the anchoring hole locations on the finished wall.
Remove the lavatory.
Drill 1/4” mounting holes at the marked locations on the wall.
CAUTION: Risk of product damage. Do not overtighten the

hardware. Overtightening may damage the product.
Position the lavatory on the hanger, and level. Use 3/8″ lag bolts
and washers (not provided) to secure the lavatory to the finished
wall and backing material.
Connect and tighten the trap to the drain, and complete the water
supply connections to the faucet according to the instructions
packed with the faucet.
Run water into the lavatory and check for leaks.
Clean up with a non-abrasive cleaner.
Installation With Concealed Arm Carrier

CAUTION: Risk of product damage. Do not overtighten the
hardware. Overtightening may damage the product.
1018370-2-B 4 Kohler Co.

Spec Seq#: 16
Install the Lavatory (cont.)
Slide the lavatory completely onto the carrier arms. Adjust the
level of the lavatory by turning the front and rear carrier arm
screws in or out as needed. The lavatory should not rock after it
has been leveled.
Carefully tighten the toggle screws until the lavatory is securely
held in place.
Connect and tighten the trap to the drain, and complete the water
supply connections to the faucet according to the instructions
packed with the faucet.
Run water into the lavatory and check for leaks.
2432
Clean up with a non-abrasive cleaner.
Kohler Co. 5 1018370-2-B

Spec Seq#: 16
Guide d’Installation
Lavabo sur mur
Outils et matériaux
2432
Merci d’avoir opté pour les produits de la Société Kohler
Nous apprécions votre engagement envers la qualité de Kohler.
Veuillez lire attentivement ce guide avant de commencer l’installation.
En cas de problèmes d’installation ou de fonctionnement, n’hesitez pas
à nous contacter. Nos numéros de téléphone et site web sont contenues
au plat verso. Merci encore d’avoir choisi des produits Kohler.
Avant de commencer
Respecter tous les codes de plomberie et de bâtiment locaux.
Avant l’installation, déballer le nouveau lavabo et l’examiner pour

déceler tout dommage. Remettre le lavabo dans l’emballage de
protection en attendant de commencer l’installation.
Vérifier l’état des tubes d’évacuation et d’alimentation. Remplacer
les composants au besoin.
Ces instructions visent l’installation du lavabo contre un mur en
ossature de bois. Pour les autres types d’installation, fournir les
dispositifs d’entretoisement et d’attache ayant les dimensions et la
résistance appropriées.
Kohler Co. Français-1 1018370-2-B

Spec Seq#: 16
Avant de commencer (cont.)
Les murs et le plancher doivent être d’aplomb, à l’équerre et de

niveau.
Ce lavabo peut être installé avec le support inclus ou avec un
bras occulte de renfort. Suivez les étapes qui s’appliquent
particulièrement à votre installation.
S’il est possible, assembler le robinet et le tuyau d’évacuation au
lavabo avant d’installer celui-ci.
Il se peut que vous ayez à utiliser des outils et matériaux
additionnels pour votre installation.
ATTENTION : Risque de blessures. Les lavabos en fonte sont
2432
très lourds. Utilisez l’équipement de sécurité nécessaire pour
l’installation de ce produit.
Si un mastic est fourni avec le lavabo, ne pas en utiliser d’autre.

Ce lavabo offre au consommateur de multiples possibilités
d’installation.
Utiliser ces instructions pour des installations murales, à rebord
intégré et sur comptoir. Suivez les étapes qui s’appliquent
particulièrement à votre installation.
Vous pouvez choisir entre un robinet sur mur ou sur comptoir,
selon le style désiré. Il est conseillé installer un robinet sur mur.

Spec Seq#: 16
2432
1. Préparation
Installer les tuyaux d’arrivée d’eau et d’évacuation, selon
l’information du diagramme de raccordement.
Installer derrière le mur fini une plaque d’appui suffisamment
robuste pour recevoir les ancrages.
Installation du support (fourni)

Installer le support selon le diagramme de raccordement. Utiliser
des tire-fonds de 1/4 po et des rondelles (non-inclus) ou d’autres
dispositifs d’ancrage pour fixer le support au mur fini et à la
plaque d’appui. Vérifier que le support soit de niveau.
Installation du bras de renfort occulte

Installer le bras de renfort selon le diagramme de raccordement.
Suivre l’information qui accompagne le bras de renfort. Vérifier
que le bras de renfort soit de niveau.
1018370-2-B Français-3 Kohler Co.

Spec Seq#: 16
2432
2. Installer le Lavabo
Assembler le robinet et le tuyau d’évacuation au lavabo
conformément à la notice du fabricant.
Installation avec support suspendu

Placer temporairement le lavabo sur le support et mettre de
niveau. Tracer avec un crayon les trous d’ancrage sur le mur fini.
Enlever le lavabo.
Percer des trous de 1/4″ aux emplacements repérés sur le mur.
ATTENTION : Risque d’endommagement du produit. Ne pas

trop serrer les boulons. Le serrage excéssif peut endommager le
produit.
Placer le lavabo sur le support et mettre de niveau. Fixer le

lavabo au mur fini et à la planche d’appui à l’aide de tire-fonds
de 3/8″ et rondelles (non inclus).
Raccorder et fixer le siphon au drain, puis compléter les raccords
d’arrivée d’eau au robinet, selon la notice qui accompagne le
robinet.
Laisser couler l’eau dans le lavabo et vérifier s’il y a des fuites.
Utiliser de nettoyants non abrasifs.
Installation avec bras de renfort occulte

Spec Seq#: 16
Installer le Lavabo (cont.)

ATTENTION : Risque d’endommagement du produit. Ne pas
trop serrer les boulons. Le serrage excéssif peut endommager le
produit.
Glisser le lavabo sur les bras de renfort. Mettre le lavabo de

niveau, en tournant les vis du front et du dos du bras de renfort,
au besoin. Le lavabo ne devrait pas avoir du jeu après la fixation.
Serrer soigneusement les vis à ailettes jusqu’à fixer le lavabo à sa
place.
Raccorder et fixer le siphon au drain, puis compléter les raccords
d’arrivée d’eau au robinet, selon la notice qui accompagne le
robinet.
2432
Laisser couler l’eau dans le lavabo et vérifier s’il y a des fuites.
Utiliser de nettoyants non abrasifs.
1018370-2-B Français-5 Kohler Co.

Spec Seq#: 16
Guía de Instalación
Lavabo de montaje mural
Herramientas y materiales
2432
Gracias por elegir los productos de Kohler
Apreciamos su elección por la calidad de Kohler. Por favor, tome unos
minutos para leer este manual, antes de comenzar la instalación. En
caso de problemas de instalación o de funcionamiento, no dude en
contactarnos. Nuestros números de teléfono y nuestra página web se
encuentran en la solapa posterior. Gracias nuevamente por escoger a
Kohler.
Antes de Comenzar
Cumpla con todos los códigos locales de plomería y de
construcción.
Antes de la instalación, revise con cuidado todas las piezas para

ver si están dañadas. Después, coloque el lavabo nuevamente en
su empaque como protección, hasta el momento de la instalación.
Inspeccione el tubo de suministro y de desagüe. Reemplace de ser
necesario.
Estas instrucciones son para la instalación del lavabo en un marco
de madera. Para otras instalaciones, suministre soporte adecuado
y sujetadores de suficiente tamaño y solidez.
Las paredes y los pisos deben haber sido nivelados y plomados.
Kohler Co. Español-1 1018370-2-B

Spec Seq#: 16
Antes de Comenzar (cont.)
Este lavabo puede ser instalado con el soporte incluido o con un

brazo de soporte oculto. Siga las instrucciones correspondientes a
su instalación.
De ser posible, monte la grifería y el desagüe antes de instalar el
lavabo.
Es posible que su instalación requera el uso de otras herramientas
y materiales.
PRECAUCIÓN: Riesgo de lesiones personales. Los lavabos de

hierro fundido son muy pesados. Utilice el equipo de seguridad
apropiado al instalar estos productos.
2432
Si se incluye un sellador con el lavabo no utilice otro sellador
como sustituto.
Este lavabo le permite ser creativo y flexible con la instalación.
Utilice estas instrucciones para instalaciones murales, con borde
terminado o de sobreponer. Siga las instrucciones
correspondientes a su instalación.
El cliente puede elegir entre una instalación de grifería mural o
sobre el mostrador, dependiendo del decorado y estilo deseado.
Se recomienda el uso de grifería mural.
1018370-2-B Español-2 Kohler Co.

Spec Seq#: 16
2432
1. Preparación
Instale las líneas de suministro y desagüe, de acuerdo al
diagrama de instalación.
Instale suficiente soporte detrás de la pared acabada para los
sujetadores.
Instalación del soporte (incluido):

Instale el soporte de acuerdo a la información del diagrama de
instalación. Utilice pernos de fijación de 1/4″ y arandelas (no
incluidos) u otros sujetadores para asegurar el soporte colgante a
la pared acabada y al material de soporte. Verifique que el
soporte esté nivelado.
Instalación del brazo de soporte oculto

Instale el brazo de soporte oculto según el diagrama de
instalación. Utilice las instrucciones de instalación que se incluyen
con el brazo de soporte. Verifique que el brazo esté nivelado.

Spec Seq#: 16
2432
2. Instale el lavabo
Instale la grifería y el desagüe al lavabo según las instrucciones
del fabricante.
Instalación con soporte

Coloque temporalmente el lavabo sobre el soporte y nivélelo.
Utilice un lápiz para marcar la ubicación de los hoyos de los
sujetadores en la pared acabada. Remueva el lavabo.
Perfore orificios de montaje de 1/4” en los lugares marcados
sobre la pared.
PRECAUCIÓN: Riesgo de daños al producto.No asegure en

exceso los tornillos. El asegurar en exceso puede causar daños al
producto.
Coloque el lavabo en el soporte y nivélelo. Utilice pernos de

fijación de 3/8″ y arandelas (no incluidos) para asegurar el lavabo
a la pared acabada y al material de soporte.
Conecte y asegure el sifón al drenaje y complete las conexiones
del suministro de agua a la grifería, de acuerdo a las instrucciones
que acompañan a la grifería.
Abra los suministros de agua y verifique que no haya fugas.
Utilice limpiadores que no sean abrasivos.
Instalación con brazo de soporte oculto
1018370-2-B Español-4 Kohler Co.

Spec Seq#: 16
Instale el lavabo (cont.)

PRECAUCIÓN: Riesgo de daños al producto.No asegure en
exceso los tornillos. El asegurar en exceso puede causar daños al
producto.
Deslice el lavabo completamente en los brazos de soporte. Ajuste

el nivel del lavabo girando los tornillos del brazo de soporte
oculto. No se debe mover el lavabo despúes de que esté nivelado.
Con cuidado, apriete los tornillos de fiador hasta que el lavabo
esté fijado.
Conecte y asegure el sifón al drenaje y complete las conexiones
del suministro de agua a la grifería, de acuerdo a las instrucciones
que acompañan a la grifería.
2432
Abra los suministros de agua y verifique que no haya fugas.
Utilice limpiadores que no sean abrasivos.

Spec Seq#: 16
2432
USA: 1-800-4-KOHLER
Canada: 1-800-964-5590
México: 001-877-680-1310
kohler.com
©2003 Kohler Co.
1018370-2-B
Stirrup
Estribo
Étrier Stirrup
Stopper EstriboStirrup
Tapón
Bouchon
Stirrup
Estribo
Removable
Removible
Non-removable
No removible
Étrier Estribo
Étrier
Spec Seq#: 17
Détachable Non détachable
Étrier
Centerset and Single Basin Fittings 1/4”

1/4” 1/4”
Gasket
Empaquetadura
Joint
Deck Mounted Faucets Installation Instructions Stirrup
Estribo
Recommended for base numbers 50, 50T, 51, 51T, 333, 335, 349, 350, 525, 526, 527, 700, 701, 730, 797, Étrier
802, 891, 894, 895, 1100, 1102, 1891,1/2”1895 Centerset and Single Basin Fittings, Pop-Up Drain Installation
and Rigid/Swing Convertible Spout Installation. 1/4”
1/2” 1/2”
Overview Spaces may be

Chicago Faucets deck mounted faucets feature cast brass bodies and precision cartridgesrequired
for years
for thinof reliable operation. Metering models with adjustable cycle
wares such as
time offer true water savings. stainless steel
1/2” Podrán necesitarse
espacios para productos
allation Notice
Centerset to theBasin
and Single Installer
Fittings
delgados tales como
el acero inoxidable
• Read this entire instruction sheet before installing to ensure proper installation. Centerset
Centerset Desand
and Single
Single
matériaux Basin
minces Basin Fittings
Fittings
sin comme l’acier inoxydable
sher • Installation must comply with local codes and ordinances. peuvent nécessiter des
Spud bagues d’espacement
Flange Pressurized
Basin Seat
plumbing fixtures shall be installed in accordance
Stopper with manufacturer's recommendations. The supply piping to these devices shall be securely
sher
k anchored to the building structure to prevent installed device Stirrup from unnecessary movement when operated by the user. Care shall be exercised when
installing the
(Use putty device to prevent marring the exposed surface.
or basin Centerset and Single Basin Fittings
washer Spaces may be
Piece NOTE: The information in this manual is required
provided) subject for thinto change without notice.
wares such as
Spaces may be
Spaces may be
required for thin
stainless steel Gasket required for such
wares thin as
Podrán necesitarse waresstainless
such assteel
stainless steel
Please leave this manual with the facilityespacios
manager
delgados tales como after completing the faucet installation. This document contains information
para productos
el acero inoxidable
necessary
Podrán
Podrán necesitarse
necesitarse
espacios for routine maintenance
para productos
1039859
delgados tales como
and servicing. Des matériaux minces
comme l’acier inoxydable
delgados
el acero
Des
tales inoxidable
el acero como
inoxidable
matériaux minces
peuvent nécessiter des comme l’acier
Des matériaux inoxydable
minces
bagues d’espacement commepeuvent
l’acier nécessiter
inoxydabledes
Spaces may be bagues
peuvent d’espacement
nécessiter des
NOTE: Before installation, turn off water supplies to existing faucet and remove
required forfaucet
wares such as
thin if replacing. Clean faucet basin and clear away debris. Flush all supply lines
bagues d’espacement
Pop-Up Drain
before
Pop-Up Installation
connecting to faucet. Failure to do so can result in debris clogging Podrán
Drain Installation thenecesitarse
inlets
stainless steel and/or cartridges.
Pop-Up Drain Installation espacios para productos
delgados tales como
el acero inoxidable
Removable Non- Basin Washer Des matériaux minces
Pop-Upremovable Basin
DrainRondelle
Installation Basin Washer
Arandela del tazón
en C Arandela del tazón
Basin Seat
(Use putty orBasin
basinSeat
peuvent nécessiter des
Single Hole Washer
Slip WasherMixing Fittings
Rondelle en C Spud Flange
Slip Washer Collarín Spud
Arandela toroidal
—Asiento
Spud Flange Base
washer numbers
(Use
provided)
washer
del tazón
putty or basin50, 50T, 51, 51T
(Use provided)
Stopper
Stopper
Slip
Basin Collerette de
Contre-écrou Arandela toroidal
Contre-écrou cuvette
Collarín
Flange
Collerette de Asiento
masilla o arandela del del tazón (Use
tazón provista)masilla o arandela del
Tapón
Stopper
Bouchon Tapón
Lock Nut
Washer
Washer
Contratuerca Lock Nut
cuvette Basin Seattazón provista) Bouchon
Stirrup
Body Shank Queue du tuyauContratuerca Spud Estribo Stirrup
Slip
Lock StopperStirrup
Body Shank Étrier Estribo
Stirrup
Body
Vástago del cuerpo
About de corps Vástago del cuerpo
Queue du tuyau
Flange Basin Seat
Support de cuvette
Étrier
de robinet Shank
About de corps Washer
Nut Support
(utiliser du mastic ou de cuvette Ensure o-rings
de robinet
Lock (Use putty
la rondelle en C(utiliser
qui du mastic ou
Stirrup are in place
Thread sealBody
tape est incluse) la rondelle en C qui
Cinta selladora de Thread
Thread
Shank rosca seal tape Nut or basin est incluse)
Asegúrese que los sellos
Ruban à jointsCinta selladora de rosca
Ruban à joints (Use putty
washer anulares estén en su sitio
seal tape Tail Piece
or basin
Gasket
Thread 1/4” Pieza posterior Tail Piece
Tail Piece
Pieza posterior
Morceau subséquent
provided) Joint
Gasket
Empaquetadura
Empaquetadura S’assurer que les
seal tape Morceau subséquent washer Gasket
Joint
joints annulaires sont
Tail Piece provided) en place
Gasket
Ensure o-rings Ensure o-rings
are in place are in place
Ensure o-rings
anulares estén en su sitio
areAsegúrese
in place que los sellos
S’assurer que les S’assurer que
1/2” anulares estén enles
su sitio
joints annulaires sont joints annulaires sont
en place S’assurer
en placeque les
Rigid Only Spout Installation

1. Ensure O-Rings are 2. Install hoses or tubes. Copper Tube Installation 3. Apply putty to under- 4. Place shank through Ensure 5. Attach hoses or tubes
o-rings
are in place
en place
installed on hoses 2b. C

ut tubes to desired side of faucet body to hole in sink and to supply stops.
or tubes. Removable Removable

Removible
Non-removable
No removible Non-removable
length. assure a good
seal assemble mounting joints
annulaires sont
S’assurer que les
Make sure gasket is Rigid Only Spout Installation
Removable
Removible
Détachable Non- No removible
Non détachable
and level fit. hardware. en place
installed. Rigid Only Spout Installation
Détachable
Removable
removable
Non détachable
Non-
removable
le Basin Fittings
Mixing Tee Installation
Stirrup
Gasket Estribo Stirrup
Estribo
Stirrup Étrier
Étrier
Stirrup
Spacers may 1/4” 1/4”

be required 1/4”
1/4”
for thin
wares such
as stainless
Ensure o-rings steel
are in place
Asegúrese que los sellos ADH ADH
anulares estén en su sitio ESIV ESIV
E ADH E
S’assurer que les 1/2” 1/2” ESIV
1/2” 1/2”
en place ADH E
1. Install tee gasket over 2. Secure coupling nut 3. Attach supply lines 4. Remove outlet and flush ADH
ESIVE
Fittings guide pins and secure of tee to body shank. with coupling nuts. lines for about one SIVE E
Rigid /Swing Convertible Spout Rigid /Swing Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck & V.B. Gooseneck
coupling nut of tee to Installation - Gooseneck
Tighten securely. &Tighten
V.B. Gooseneck
securely. minute. Replace outlet.
nly Spout Installation Rigid /Swing Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck & V.B. Gooseneck
body shank.
Rigid /Swing Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck & V.B. Gooseneck
Centerset
Centerset and
Centerset
Centerset and andand
Single Single
Basin
Single
Single BasinBasinBasin
Fittings Fittings — Base numbers 333, 335, 349, 350, 525, 526, 527, 700, 701,
Fittings
Fittings
Centerset and Single Basin Fittings
730, 797, 802, 891, 894, 895, 1100, 1102, 1891, 1895
Ensure
O-rings
are in
place
Spacers
Spaces maymay
required
be
Spaces
Rigid
may be
for Only Spout Installation
Pop-Up Drain Installation
be Spacers
wares
for required
required
such as
thin
waresmaysuch as
thin
for be
thin
stainless required
steel
stainless steel
Podrán necesitarse
Podrán necesitarse Basin Washer
ADH for para
wares
espacios thin
suchproductos
espacios para productos Arandela del tazón Basin Seat
ESIV delgados tales delgados
as wares
stainless
como
elsuch
tales como Rondelle en C (Use putty or basin
E el acero inoxidableacero inoxidable
Slip Washer Spud Flange washer provided)
asl’acier
steel
comme stainless
Des matériaux Desminces
matériaux minces
inoxydable
Arandela toroidal
Contre-écrou
Collarín
Collerette de Asiento del tazón (Use
masilla o arandela del
steel peuvent
peuvent nécessiter desnécessiter des
bagues d’espacement Lock Nut
cuvette tazón provista)
Contratuerca
Body Shank Queue du tuyau
Vástago del cuerpo
1. Apply putty or rubber 2. Place shank(s) through 3. Attach supply lines with 4. Remove outlet and About de corps
de robinet
Support de cuvette
(utiliser du mastic ou
la rondelle en C qui
washer to underside of holes in sink and coupling nuts and Pop-Up
flush lines
Pop-Up forInstallation
Drain
Drain about
Installation
Thread seal tape est incluse)
Cinta selladora de rosca
Hole
Single faucetMixing
body to assure a
Fittings assemble mounting tighten securely. Attach one minute. Ruban à joints
Tail Piece
Single
Hole
good Mixing
seal andFittings
level fit. hardware. Use spout if provided Replace outlet.Arandela
Basin Washer
Basindel Washer
Arandela
Rondelle
tazón
en C del tazón
Pieza posterior
Basin
Morceau Seat
subséquent
Basin Seat
(Use(Use
puttyputty
or basin
spacers if necessary. separately. Rondelle en C
Slip Washer
Slip Washer
Spud Flange
Spud Flange
Collarín washer or basin
provided)
washer provided) Stopper
Arandela toroidal Collarín
Collerette de Asiento del tazón (Use TapónStopper
Pop-Up
Pop-UpDrain
Pop-UpDrainInstallation
DrainInstallation
Installation SEA
Arandela toroidal
Contre-écrou
Contre-écrou Collerette de
cuvette
cuvette
Asiento
masilla
tazónmasilla
del tazón
o arandela del (Use
o arandela del
provista)
Tapón
Bouchon
Bouchon
Pop-Up
Pop-Up Drain
DrainInstallation
Installation
L ANT
BodyBody
Shank
LockLock
Nut Nut
Contratuerca
Contratuerca
tazón provista) Stirrup
Stirrup
Estribo
Queue du tuyau ÉtrierEstribo
Vástago del Shank Queue du tuyau
Basin Basin
Basin Washer cuerpo
Vástago del cuerpo Support de cuvette
Étrier
Basin
Arandela del tazón Basin Seat About de corps Support de cuvette
Washer
Washer
Rondelle
Washeren C (Use putty or basin
About de corps
de robinet (utiliser du mastic
(utiliser
endu
ou
mastic ou
SpudSpud
de robinet la rondelle C qui
Slip
Slip Washer Spud
Flange
Spud washer provided) Thread seal tape
est incluse)
est incluse)
Slip
Slip
Arandela
vertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck toroidal Flange
Collarín
& V.B. Gooseneck Flange Asiento del tazón (Use
Basin
Threaddeseal
Cinta selladora roscatape Stopper
Stopper
Stopper
Stopper
Pivot Rod
Washer
Contre-écrou Flange
Collerette de
Basin
masilla oSeatSeatdel
arandela Cintaàselladora
joints de rosca
Tapón
Lock Washer
Washer
Nut
cuvette Basin
tazón Seat
provista)
Ruban
Ruban à joints Bouchon
Tail Piece Gasket
Lock Stirrup
Ensure Stirrup
Stirrup
Tail Piece Gasket
Body Body Lock Stirrup
Contratuerca Empaquetadura
Body
Body
Shank Lock
Queue du tuyau
Pieza posterior
Estribo
Pieza posterior Joint Empaquetadura
Shank
Vástago del cuerpo NutNut
Nut O-rings
Morceau subséquent
Étrier
Morceau subséquent Joint
Shank
About deShank (Use
Support
(Use putty are in Ensure Ensure o-rings
duputty
de cuvette
corps (Use putty
(utiliser mastic ou
Ensure o-rings
are in placeare in place
Removable Non-removable
n Installation
Drain Installation Thread
de robinet
orest
or basin
or
basinbasin
la rondelle en C qui place O-rings
Removible
Détachable
No removible
Non détachable
Installation Thread Thread
Thread
seal
seal tape
Cinta selladora
tape
de rosca washer
washer
incluse)
washer
Asegúrese
are in
queAsegúrese
los sellosque los sellos
anulares
anulares estén estén en su sitio
en su sitio Coupling
seal
sealtape
tape
Ruban à joints
Tail Piece provided)
Basin
Basin Washer TailTail
TailPiece
Piece Piece provided)
provided) S’assurer queS’assurer
place
Gasket
joints
les
Gasket
joints
annulaires
que les
annulaires sont
sont Gasket Nut
Basin Washer Gasket
en placeGasket
Empaquetadura
en place
Arandela
Arandela Washer
del tazón
del tazón
Pieza posterior
Basin
Morceau
Seat
subséquent Joint
Rondelle
Rondelle en C
en C
Spud Flange Spud Basin
(UseSeat
putty or basin
SlipArandela
Slip
Slip Washer
Washertoroidal Spud Flange Flange
Collarín
(Usewasher
washer
putty or basin
provided)
provided) Stopper
Stopper
Arandela Washer
toroidal
Contre-écrou
Contre-écrou
Collarín
Collerette de
Collerette
cuvettede Asiento Basin Seat
Asiento
masilla
masilla
del tazón (Use
del tazón
o arandela
tazón
(Use del
o arandela
provista)del
Stopper
Tapón
Tapón
Bouchon
Rigid Only Spout Installation Stirrup
Lock
Lock Nut
Nut Lock
Contratuerca
cuvette tazón provista) Stirrup
BouchonStirrup
Estribo
Étrier
Stirrup
Contratuerca
Nut
Queue du tuyau
Queue du tuyau 1. Assemble tail piece to 2. Fully assemble the 3. Position body shank
Estribo
Rigid
4. Place
Estribo
Étrier Rigid
Only
Rigid Only
stopper Only
Spout
into Spout
Spout Installation
Installation
Installation
5. Removable
Insert pivot ball rod
Support(Use putty
de cuvette
Étrier
Non-removable
Support de cuvette
body shank duor
with basin basin seat and spud toward the lift rod. body shank cavity
(utiliser du mastic ou Removable Non-removable
(utiliser mastic
la rondelle en ou
C qui Removible
assembly
Removible
Détachable through
No removible
No removible
Non détachable
la rondelle
washer
en C qui
est incluse) Détachable Non détachable
Tail Piece
thread seal tape.
est incluse)
provided) flange to body shank Tighten lock nut until orienting the stirrup pivot rod gasket and 1/4”
Tail Piece
Tail Pieza
Piece posterior
Assemble lock nut, assembly. Gasket
properly sealed.Gasket
Gasket
Empaquetadura for removable or coupling nut.
Pieza posteriorsubséquent
Morceau Empaquetadura
Joint
Morceau subséquent slip washer, and basin Removable Removable
Removable Non-
Non-
Non-
removable
removable
Joint non-removable
Removable removable
Non-removable
washer to body shank. Removible Détachable
No removible
Non détachable
stopper as Stirrup
Stirrup
Estribo
desired. (see #6) ÉtrierEstribo
Étrier
1/2”
Stirrup
Stirrup
Stirrup
Stirrup
1/4” 1/4”
Estribo SEA
Removable Non-
Étrier
V-clip LAN T
Removable
removable
Non-removable
Removable
Removible Non-removable
No removible 1/4”
Removible
Détachable No removible
Non détachable 1/4”1/4”
ADH SEAL ADH
ESIV ANT ESIV
1/4” E E
Rigid /Swing Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck & Hanger
V.B. Gooseneck 1/2” 1/2”
Stirrup
Stirrup
Rigid Rigid
Rigid
/Swing Estribo/Swing
/Swing
Stirrup
Estribo
Étrier
Convertible
Convertible
Convertible Spout Spout
Spout Installation
Installation
Installation 1/2” - Gooseneck & V.B. Gooseneck
- Gooseneck
- Gooseneck
1/2”1/2” & V.B.
& V.B. Gooseneck
Gooseneck
Étrier
6. Attach pivot rod 7. Tighten pivot rod 1/2” 8. Insert pop up rod 9. Push pivot ball rod to 10. Test the assembly for
1/4”
assembly to body assembly nut as through holes in lowest position, proper function and
shank. 1/4”
1/4” required to seal and hanger and hand squeeze v-clip and make adjustments as
provide smooth tighten. slide pivot ball rod necessary. Once set, Spaces may be
operation. Centerset
Centersetand
through andSingle
v-clip and Basin
Single Fittings
Basin Fittings
tighten securely. required for thin
wares such as
stainless steel
Centerset and Single Basin
1/2” Fittings appropriate hole in Podrán necesitarse
Centerset
Centersetand Single
and Basin
Single Basin Fittings
Fittings hanger. delgados tales como
el acero inoxidable
Des matériaux minces
1/2” comme l’acier inoxydable
1/2” peuvent nécessiter des
Centerset
Forand Single Basin
additional Fittingsassistance, call 800/TEC-TRUE (800-832-8783) or visit our website at chicagofaucets.com.
technical
1
Spaces may may
Spaces be be
required for thin
required for thin
wares suchsuch
wares as as
stainless steelsteel
Spacers may stainless
Podrán necesitarse
and Single Basin Fittings be required
Spacers may
Podrán
espacios paranecesitarse
productos
Spacers may espacios
delgados tales para
delgados
el acero
comoproductos
tales como
inoxidable
Spec Seq#: 17
ADH
ESIV
ADH E Ensure o-rings
ADH are in place
E
Deck Mounted Faucets Installation Instructions DHESIVE
Spaces may be SIVE A ESIV Asegúrese que los sellos
required for thin E anulares estén en su sitio
wares such as S’assurer que les
stainless steel joints annulaires sont
Rigid (continued)
Podrán necesitarse en place
/Swing Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneckespacios
& V.B. Gooseneck
para productos
delgados tales como
el acero inoxidable
Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck & V.B. Rigid
Gooseneck Des matériaux minces
/Swing Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck & V.B. Gooseneck
Rigid/Swing Convertible Spout Installation RGD1 and RGD2 Figure A
Only Spout Installation
Pin Placement 1-9/32˝ DIA.
Option 2 (33mm)
Split 1/8˝
washers washer
Pin Placement
Option 1
Ensure o-rings
are in place ADH
ESIVE Figure B
1. Remove outlet and For Swing Spouts For Rigid Spouts Only 3. Insert spout assembly
S’assurer que les
assemble spout nut 2a. Assemble two plastic 2b. Place 1/8˝ thick plastic firmly into spout base
en place

over outlet end, until split washers to spout washer into spoutSpout
base Installation
and tighten spout nut.& V.B. Gooseneck 1. Apply supplied adhesive
Rigid /Swing Convertible - Gooseneck to threads of spout and
1039859
it rests on shoulder joint and discard 1/8˝ bore and discard
of spout joint. thick plastic washer. plastic split washers. Rigid Only Spout Installation tighten spout into base.
Back off as necessary for
centered position.
Chicago Faucets deck mounted faucets come with cartridges already installed. Instructions for adjusting the timing on
metering cartridges are shown below. For complete instructions on servicing and replacing Chicago Faucets cartridges,
see our Cartridge Maintenance/Repair Guide, available online at chicagofaucets.com/pdf/CF1081.pdf. You may also
order a copy of the Guide by calling 800-832-8783. Figure C
Supplemental Bubbler Installation Instructions for 748-665CP, 748-665FHCP, 748-244CP and 748-244FHCP Index
Button
Installation with Anti-Rotational Pins (Figure A) Set Screw
ADH
1. Choose Two holes in bubbler base that corresponds with the deck/sink drilling and tap each anti-rotationalESIV pin with a
E
hammer until seated. There should be approximately 1/8˝ length of pin exposed when fully seated. Handle
2. Drill 3/16˝ diameter holes on 1-9/32˝ centers and 1/4˝ deep in the deck/sink for anti-rotational pins if 2. Hand tighten sleeve Adjustment Nut
mounting holesConvertible
Rigid /Swing are not provided.
Spout Installation - Gooseneck & V.B. Gooseneck until flush with body.
3. Attach Bubbler to deck using the anti-rotational washer provided.

Typical Body
Flow Adjustments (Figure B)
1. The projection of water flow can be adjusted by using the 1/8˝ hex wrench provided. Insert hex wrench and rotate
control clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired flow is achieved.
Note: Bubblers have been designed to utilize the 722-013K inlet flow control.
To insure proper performance, it is imperative that the 722-013K be installed with each bubbler.
Figure D
How To Adjust (Top View)
Timing Adjustment on an MVP Metering Cartridge
1. With cartridge and handle installed in body and water supply turned on, purge cartridge of air by pushing handle completely
down 4-8 times repeatedly, then check timing cycle.
2. To change cycle time, remove index button, then handle using a 3/32˝ hex wrench. (Figure C)
3. Using your fingers, change height of adjustment nut by 1/4 turn only. Turn adjustment nut clockwise to increase cycle time Decrease Time
or counter-clockwise to decrease cycle time. (Figure D)
4. If filter and lower valve cartridge have been removed from fitting, replace them by inserting filter first.
5. If gasket has been removed from the actuator assembly, replace it by inserting into bottom of actuator assembly.
6. Assemble actuator assembly to body and tighten to 12-15 ft-lbs torque.

Increase Time
7. Replace handle and verify desired cycle time. NOTE: TIMING MUST BE CHECKED WITH HANDLE IN PLACE.
8. If additional adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 3 through 7 until desired cycle time is achieved. Figure E
Note: Some new installations might produce a slight closing noise. This is normally the result of air trapped in the cartridge. The noise will dissipate over time.
9. Attach handle and tighten set screw with a 3/32˝ hex wrench. If index button is included, snap into handle.
Set Screw
Cap Location
Timing Adjustment on Push-Button (NAIAD) & Tip-Tap Self-Closing Cartridges Gasket for ‘SLO’
1. Turn off water supply. Cartridges
2. Remove cartridge from valve body with 1-1/4˝ flat hex wrench. Use care to prevent damage to cap hex nut.
Timing
3. Locate timing hex nut on bottom of dashpot. Turn hex nut clockwise to increase cycle time or counter-clockwise to decrease cycle time (Figure E). Note: Turn Hex Nut
in 90 degree increments for each adjustment cycle. Fill the dashpot with water, slide it over the bottom of the cartridge, and place both back into the faucet body.
4. Place cartridge into faucet body and fully tighten cap nut with wrench to 15-25 ft-lbs torque. Turn on water and verify cycle time by depressing cartridge fully. Figure F
Note: Insure that cap gasket is in place within cap before assembly into valve body.
NOTE: Cartridges with ‘SLO’ designation include an external timing adjustment via a set screw in the top of the handle. Using a 7/64˝ hex wrench, turn the set screw
clockwise to decrease cycle time or counter-clockwise to increase cycle time. (Figure E)
External
Timing
Set Screw
Timing Adjustment on a Push-Tilt Self-Closing Cartridge
For Push-Tilt cartridges, the timing adjustment procedure is identical to Push-Button Self-Closing Cartridges, except for an external timing adjustment feature
that is integral to Push-Tilt handles. This adjustment can be used for minor cycle time changes without the need to remove the cartridge from the body. Cap Gasket
or external adjustment, lift handle slightly to expose 1/16˝ hex socket set screw (Figure F). Turn adjustment set screw clockwise to increase cycle time or
F
counter-clockwise to decrease cycle time. If greater timing adjustment is required, follow the instructions for adjusting the timing on a Push-Button Self-Closing Cartridge.
Timing Hex Nut
Care and Maintenance

All Chicago Faucets fittings are designed and engineered to meet or exceed industry performance standards. Care should be taken when cleaning this product. Do not use abrasive cleaners,
chemicals or solvents as they can result in surface damage. Use mild soap with warm water for cleaning and protecting the surface of Chicago Faucets fittings.
For additional technical assistance, call 800/TEC-TRUE (800-832-8783) or visit our website at chicagofaucets.com.
CHICAGO FAUCETS LIMITED WARRANTY
TO WHOM DOES THIS WARRANTY APPLY? — The Company extends the following limited warranty to the original user only.
WHAT DOES THIS WARRANTY COVER AND HOW LONG DOES IT LAST?
This warranty covers the following Commercial Products:
LIFETIME FAUCET WARRANTY — The “Faucet,” defined as any metal cast, forged, stamped or formed portion of the Product, not including electronic or moving parts or other
products separately covered by this Limited Warranty or water restricting components or other components, is warranted against material manufacturing defects for the life of the Product.
FIVE YEAR FAUCET WARRANTY — Certain Products and portions of the Product are warranted against material manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase. Products warranted against material
manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase are referred to by the product numbers 42X, 43X, 15XX and E-Tronic® - 4X, 5X, 6X, 7X, 8X and 9X. All zinc die cast portions of Product are warranted against
material manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase.
THREE YEAR ELECTRONICS WARRANTY — Electronic components, including the solenoid, are warranted for three (3) years from the date of installation.
FIVE YEAR CARTRIDGE WARRANTY — The “Cartridge”, defined as the metal portion of any Product typically referred to by the product numbers containing 1-099, 1-100, 377X, The Chicago Faucet Company
217X and 274X, excluding any rubber or plastic components, is warranted against material manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase. 2100 South Clearwater Drive
All Cartridges included in the Company’s Single Control or Shower Products also are warranted against material manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase.
Des Plaines, IL 60018
ONE YEAR FINISH WARRANTY – COMMERCIAL — For Products used in commercial applications, the finish of the Product is warranted against material manufacturing defects for a period Phone: 847/803-5000
of one (1) year from the date of Product purchase.
Fax: 847/803-5454
OTHER WARRANTIES — All other Products not covered above are warranted against material manufacturing defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of Product purchase. Technical: 800/832-8783
Other restrictions and limitations apply. For complete warranty details, call Chicago Faucets Customer Service at 847-803-5000 or visit chicagofaucets.com. www.chicagofaucets.com
2 © 2013 Chicago Faucet Company TAG-258 08/13

Spec Seq#: 17
1039859
Spec Seq#: 17
Care & Maintenance
1039859
Cuidado y mantenimiento
Entretien
All Chicago Faucet fittings are designed and engineered to meet or exceed industry
performance standards. Care should be taken cleaning this product. Do not use
abrasive cleaners, chemicals or solvents as they can result in surface damage. Use
mild soap with warm water for cleaning and protecting the life of Chicago Faucets fittings.
Todos los accesorios de Chicago Faucet están diseñados y

realizados con un fundamento en buena ingeniería para cumplir
o exceder los estándares de desempeño de la industria. Se debe
ejercer cuidado al limpiar este producto. No utilice limpiadores
abrasivos, productos químicos o solventes ya que causan daños
a la superficie. Use jabón suave con agua tibia para limpiar y
proteger la vida de los accesorios Chicago Faucets.
Tous les produits de robinetterie Chicago Faucet sont conçus et

fabriqués de manière à répondre et à dépasser les normes de
qualité de l’industrie. Le nettoyage de ces produits nécessite
cependant certaines précautions. Ne pas utiliser de nettoyants
abrasifs, de produits chimiques ou de solvants, car ils pourraient
endommager la finition des produits. Nettoyer plutôt les produits
de robinetterie Chicago Faucet en utilisant des savons doux et
de l’eau chaude, pour ainsi protéger la vie utile des accessoires
Chicago Faucet.
www.chicagofaucets.com
May 2009
800/323-5060
Spec Seq#: 17
Cartridge Maintenance/
Repair Guide 1039859
Spec Seq#: 17
Introduction
Thank you for choosing Chicago Faucets! All Chicago Faucets products are carefully assembled and tested to
insure the highest quality in the plumbing industry. We are proud to offer you a product that will provide years of
dependable, reliable service.
1039859
The Maintenance and Repair Guide is intended to provide you, as a customer, with step-by-step procedures for
replacing or renewing our most popular cartridges. These procedures are limited to minor problems that are the
result of normal wear and not intended to cover repairs that are the result of damage caused by abuse or vandalism.
Ceramic Cartridge Replacement 3
Renewing Quaturn™ and Slow Compression Operating Cartridges 4
Renewing KLO-SELF™ Cartridges 5
Timing Adjustment of MVP™ Metering Valves 6
Renewing MVP Metering Valves 7
NAIAD™ Push Button Adjustment 8
Renewing NAIAD Cartridges 9
NAIAD Oscillating Cartridge Adjustment 10
Repair NAIAD Oscillating and Dashpot Cartridges 11
Replacement Cartridge Model Numbers 12
ECAST Cartridges 13
Repair Kits 14 - 15
2
Spec Seq#: 17
Installation of Ceramic Cartridge
1039859
Color-coded seat
Stem Identification
Ensure cartridges are in the closed Step 1 Push each cartridge into valve Step 2 Rotate RIGHT handle (and
position before installing into valve body. body until it seats. Add cap nuts and cartridge) counter clockwise to the
Cartridges feature color-coded seats. Blue hand tighten. Add handles. desired closed position.
seat on cold cartridge, red seat on hot
cartridge.
Step 3 Using handle to maintain stem Step 4 Move LEFT handle (without
position, fully tighten right cap nut to 20 moving cartridge) to the open position
to 27 ft. lb. torque. and fully tighten right cap nut to 20 to
27 ft. lb. torque. Return handle to closed
position.
Ceramic Operating Cartridges
Short Stem Long Stem

No. 1-100XKJKNF No. 377-XKLHJKNF
Left Hand Cartridge Left Hand Cartridge
No. 1-099XKJKNF No. 377-XKRHJKNF Note: No replacement parts for ceramic cartridges,
Right Hand Cartridge Right Hand Cartridge sold only as complete assembly.
3
Spec Seq#: 17
Renewing “XT” Quaturn™ or Slow Compression Cartridges
1039859
Step 1 - Turn off water at stop Step 2 - Remove cartridge from Step 3 - Unscrew stem nut (K) at Step 4 - Turn sleeve (D) off
or main valve. Remove handle faucet. Flush out any rust or chips the bottom of the cartridge with stem (C) by holding handle and
assembly and with flat face that may be in body. DO NOT a flat wrench using a handle as turn sleeve by hand. As sleeve
wrench, remove cap nut (A). use file or abrasives to clean out lever to assist removal. is removed from stem, seat (F)
body. O-Ring (G) seat washer (H) retain-
er (I) and washer (J) will be forced
off the stem.
Step 5 - Reassemble sleeve (D) Step 6 - Reposition washer and Step 7 - Replace Cap Nut (A) Step 8 - Turn water on at main
on lightly lubricated stem (C). O-Ring (B) on stem (C) add to and partially tighten. Replace valve or stop. Remove aerator.
With new parts add seat (F) sleeve (D). Replace cartridge in handle and rotate cartridge in Turn faucet on to “full” allowing
O-Ring (G) seat washer (H) retain- faucet. the direction of closing until the sediment to flush from lines and
er (I) and washer (J) on stem (C) cartridge is in the desired position replace aerator cartridge.
and screw nut tightly on stem. for convenient operation. Remove
handle. Lock cartridge in place by
securely tightening Cap Nut (A)
to 20 - 27 ft. lbs torque.
A “XT” TYPE CARTRIDGES

PARTS LIST - Those parts listed in the “Description” column below that are marked with an asterisk (*) are parts that are
B recommended for replacement when renewing these operating cartridges. Other parts not marked may require replacement
depending on the amount of wear they have received and their condition when examined. Most of the parts listed below
are also available in multi-packs (box lots). See chicagofaucets.com or call Chicago Faucets Customer Service for more
information. Note: items without a listed part number are not available to purchase separately.
C Quaturn Cartridges Slow Compression Cartridges

Exposed Cap Concealed Cap Exposed Cap Concealed Cap
Description 1-009XTJKABNF 1-100XTJKABNF 377-XTRHJKABNF 377-XTLHJKABNF 217-XTLHJKABNF 217-XTRHJKABNF 274-XTLHJKABNF 274-XTRHJKABNF
A. Cap 1-214JKCP 1-214JKCP 274-004JKRBF 274-004JKRBF 1-214JKCP 1-214JKCP 274-004JKRBF 274-004JKRBF
B. Packing Assembly* 93-131JKABNF 93-131JKABNF 93-131JKABNF 93-131JKABNF 93-131JKABNF 93-131JKABNF 93-131JKABNF 93-131JKABNF
C. Stem Assy. w/ O-Ring – – – – – – – –

D
D. Sleeve – – – – – – – –
E. O-Ring 2-043JKABNF 2-043JKABNF 2-043JKABNF 2-043JKABNF 2-043JKABNF 2-043JKABNF 2-043JKABNF 2-043JKABNF
F. Seat* 1-327JKABNF 1-327JKABNF 1-327JKABNF 1-327JKABNF 1-327JKABNF 1-327JKABNF 1-327JKABNF 1-327JKABNF

E
G. O-Ring 1-328JKABNF 1-328JKABNF 1-328JKABNF 1-328JKABNF 1-328JKABNF 1-328JKABNF 1-328JKABNF 1-328JKABNF
F
H. Seat Washer* 1-021JKABNF 1-021JKABNF 1-021JKABNF 1-021JKABNF 1-021JKABNF 1-021JKABNF 1-021JKABNF 1-021JKABNF
G I. Retainer 1-022JKABNF 1-022JKABNF 1-022JKABNF 1-022JKABNF 1-022JKABNF 1-022JKABNF 1-022JKABNF 1-022JKABNF
H J. Washer 1-031JKABNF 1-031JKABNF 1-031JKABNF 1-031JKABNF 1-031JKABNF 1-031JKABNF 1-031JKABNF 1-031JKABNF
I K. Nut 333-097JKABNF 333-097JKABNF 333-097JKABNF 333-097JKABNF 333-097JKABNF 333-097JKABNF 333-097JKABNF 333-097JKABNF
J
K
4
Spec Seq#: 17
Renewing KLO-SELF Cartridges
1039859
Step 1 - Turn off water at stop Step 2 - With pliers, grab the car- Step 3 - Holding the flat portion of Step 4 - To reassemble, clean
or main valve. Remove handle, tridge stem and pull up, removing plunger (E) remove stem nut (P). any lime or foreign matter that
loosen cap nut (A) with flat faced it from the body. After stem nut is removed, remove may have built-up on parts.
wrench and remove upper parts washer (O), retainer (N) seat Lubricate plunger surface (E) and
of cartridge consisting of stem washer (M) and Monel seat (L) by place spring (F) and gland (G) on
(C), bonnet (B) and spring (D). tapping bottom of plunger until plunger. Replace the (2) O-Rings
parts are loosened. Now, remove (H) making sure that the leather
O-Rings (H), leather packing is placed between them.
packing (I), gland (G) and spring Slide O-Rings and leather packing
(F) from sleeve (K). on the plunger. Lubricate O-Rings
and leather packing with a light
grease before the plunger is
inserted into the sleeve (K).
Step 5 - Replace Monel seat (L),

seat washer (M), retainer (N), cup
washer (O), and tighten nut (P) 826-XJKABNF Parts Overview
securely.
823-004JKCP - Nut A
B 826-101JKRCF - Bonnet
585-001JKBNF - Stem C
Step 6 - Replace O-Ring (J) with D 823-013JKNF - Spring

new O-Ring, inserting into groove
on the sleeve (K). Lubricate outside
of O-Ring, stem (C) and inside of
bonnet (B). Lubricate spring (D) 823-001JKABNF - Plunger E
and insert into stem. Assemble
upper parts of cartridge (B,C,D)
and tighten nut (A) to faucet
body sufficiently (25 - 32 ft. lbs.) to 823-010JKNF - Spring F
insure that metal to metal contact
of lower seat (L) in faucet body. 711-007JKRBF - Gland G
Bonnet and sleeve must also make H 319-140JKABNF - “O” Rings 319-035JKABNF - Leather Packing I
metal to metal contact. Replace
handle. J 823-015JKABNF - “O” Ring
1-027JKABNF - Seat L
M 244-006JKABNF - Washer
1-022JKABNF - Retainer N
O 1-031JKABNF - Washer
333-97JKABNF - Nut P
Step 7 - Turn water on at stop

or main valve. Remove aerator.
Turn faucet on to “full” allowing
sediment to flush from lines and
replace aerator cartridge.
5
Spec Seq#: 17
MVP™ Metering Valve
665-505JKNF - 3/32˝ hex socket wrench

665-PSHJKCP - Push handle 665-309KJKNF - Red and
with red and blue blue index buttons
index buttons
and set screw 665-116JKNF - Hex socket screw
665-015JKRBF - Spring retainer
1039859
665-105JKABNPF - Stem
665-190KJKABNF - Actuator 668-013JKNF - Return spring

assembly
665-118JKNF - Adjustment nut
Cap assembly
“O” Ring
Retainer ring
665-007JKABNF - (2) “E” ring retainers
665-011JKABNF - Cap sealing washer
Valve sleeve
667-107JKABNF - “O” Ring

671-XJKABNF - Cartridge assembly Poppet/seat assembly
667-202JKABNF - Filter for use with non-dashpot bodies
667-402JKABNF - Large filter
Set
screw
Index t
t
button
Adjustment
t
Nut
1 With handle in place, purge cartridge of air by pushing completely down 4-8 times rapidly,
then check timing cycle.
2 Remove handle with a 3/32 allen wrench.
Typical
t
Body
3 Use a standard pair of pliers (other tools may damage the adjustment nut) to change height
of adjustment nut by 1/4 turn only. Turn adjustment nut clockwise to increase time.
4 Replace handle and time flow. NOTE: TIMING MUST BE CHECKED WITH HANDLE IN PLACE
5 If more adjustment is needed, follow steps 3 and 4 until timing is right.
6 Attach handle and tighten screw. Press index button into handle opening.
6
Spec Seq#: 17
Renewing MVP™ Metering Valve
1039859
Adjustment
Step 1 Remove color coded index button from Step 2 Insert 3/32" allen wrench in handle Step 3 To adjust the flow cycle of the
handle with small, flathead screwdriver. hole, loosen allen screw and remove handle. MVP valve, turn the adjustment nut clockwise
to increase the duration of the flow cycle and
counter clockwise to decrease the flow cycle.
*After adjustment nut has been repositioned,
replace handle, push down and test flow
cycle.**
See page 6 for additional timing adjustment.
Step 4 If MVP cartridge is to be replaced, Step 5 Grasp cartridge valve top with Step 6 Place new filter, screen and MVP
TURN OFF WATER SUPPLY BEFORE needle-nose pliers, remove MVP cartridge cartridge in valve body.
PROCEEDING. Using a wrench, remove from valve body. Be careful not to bend pin.
actuator assembly. Remove filter screen from inside of body with
finger tip.
Step 7 and 8 Replace cap sealing washer and actuator assembly. (Adjust flow cycle as described in Step 9 Replace handle, tighten handle nut
#3.) Do not over tighten cap. with allen wrench and replace index button.
* While the adjustment nut can be hand adjusted, you may have to start the ** To properly test the flow cycle, the
adjustment by using a wrench or pliers. It is important to grip the adjustment valve handle must be in place and
nut loosely so as not to deform or damage the nut. actuated.
7
Spec Seq#: 17
NAIAD™ 333-X and 333-XSLO Push Button Cartridge
A 333-044KJKABCP - Button Assembly (Hot)

333-144KJKABCP - Button Assembly (Cold)
333-244KJKABCP - Button Assembly (Push)
1039859
395-018JKNF - Spring B
319-012JKRBF - Washer C
D 319-035JKABNF - Leather Washer 319-140JKABNF - “O” Rings E
319-003JKCP - Bonnet Cap F

G 1-043JKABNF - Gasket
Sleeve H
I 1-027JKABNF - Seat
244-006JKABNF - Seat Washer J
K 333-026JKABRBF - Retainer
333-040JKABNF - Cup L
M 333-039JKABNF - Washer
1-031JKABNF - Washer N
O 333-097JKABNF - Nut
333-075JKABNF - Dash Pot P
No. 333-X Naiad is used for all No. 333 Basin faucets and all push button stops and contains a fast
closing dashpot. Note: 333-XSLO is the same as No. 333-X, but with an additional external timing
feature located on the button and a 333-073KJKNF adjustable slow closing dashpot.
No. 625-X Naiad operating cartridge is used for all pedal valves. Except for the 625 and 628 on which
the 628X one hole sleeve operating cartridge is used.
An adjustable slow closing model is available for both the 625-X and 628-X, which includes the
333-073KJKNF dashpot and is designated by 625-XSLO and 628-XSLO.
Timing Adjustment on a NAIAD Push Button Slo-Closing Cartridge

Timing can be changed by adjusting the nut located at the lower end of the dashpot.
Shorter running time = LOOSEN (counter clockwise)
Longer running time = TIGHTEN (clockwise)
Note: Do not over tighten adjustment nut as it may cause continual run-on of faucet.
Timing
Nut
t
8
Spec Seq#: 17
Renewing NAIAD™ Cartridges
1039859
Step 1 - Turn off water at stop or main valve. Step 2 - To disassemble cartridge, insert pin Step 3 - Remove washer (N), washer (M), cup
Loosen bonnet cap (F) with flat faced wrench through hole in sleeve (H) and stem (A) to keep (L), retainer (K), washer (J) and seat (I) from stem.
and remove operating cartridge from valve stem from turning while nut (O) is removed. If leakage is occurring through spout outlet,
body. Remove the dashpot (P) from the body. (Same procedure is followed when assembling replace seat (I) and seat washer (J). Replace cup
operating cartridge.) (L), washer (M) and washer (N) as necessary.
Step 4 - If water leakage is occurring around Step 5 - Reassemble lower portion of Step 6 - Replace gasket (G) before placing
the button assembly, remove button and stem cartridge by sliding sleeve (H), seat (I), washer cartridge in valve body. Be sure gasket (G)
assembly (A) from sleeve (H) and bonnet cap (J), retainer (K), cup (L), washers (M and N) is around sleeve (H) before tightening cap (F)
(F). Clean stem thoroughly and lubricate top and nut (O) in the same manner as described to valve body. Turn water on at stop or main
half with grease. Remove O-Rings (E) and wash- in Step 2. Lightly grease exterior of cup (L). valve. Remove aerator. Turn faucet on to “full”
er (C and D) from cap (F). Replace the packing Tighten nut (O) securely on stem using pin allowing sediment to flush from lines and
arrangement on stem assembly (A) by sliding through sleeve (H) and button assembly (A) operating cartridge. Replace aerator.
washer (C) on stem and then leather washer to contain assembly while tightening. Remove
(D) between the two O-Rings (E) onto the stem. pin when complete. Reposition dash pot (P) on
Next slide cap (F) onto stem (A) and firmly slide cartridge.
cap up the stem to allow spring (B) to seat
O-Rings and washers in cap (F).
Step 7 - See page 8 for dashpot timing of

Slo-Closing cartridges.
9
Spec Seq#: 17
NAIAD™ 335-XJKABNF Tip-Tap Cartridge
335-007KJKCP - Hot Push Tilt Handle

335-107KJKCP - Cold Push Tilt Handle
335-207KJKCP - Plain Push Tilt Handle
335-002KJKRBF - Stem
1039859
395-018JKNF - Spring
319-012JKRBF - Washer
319-035JKABNF - Leather Washer 319-140JKABNF - O-Rings
335-005JKCP - Bonnet
1-043JKABNF - Gasket
Sleeve
1-027JKABNF - Seat
244-006JKABNF - Washer
333-026JKABRBF - Retainer
333-040JKABNF - M Cup
333-097JKABNF - Nut
333-073KJKABNF - Dash Pot Assembly

333-028JKABRBF - Washer
333-052JKABNF - Nut
NOTE: See page 9 for disassembly and reassembly of cartridge when renewing components.
Repair Parts Kits

Part No. Description
333-073KJKABNF Dash Pot Assembly (Adjustable)
Timing Adjustment on a NAIAD Tip-Tap Slo-Closing Cartridge

We have two adjustments featured on the Tip-Tap Cartridge.
t
For dashpot adjustments follow step 1. Handle

Adjustment
For handle adjustment follow steps 2-3. Screw
1 By tightening or loosening the 333-052 nut on the lower end of the dashpot, timing adjustment
is made. (Tightening increases running time. It is suggested that the thickness of the felt washer be
approximately 1/16" to 3/32" thick after tightening. This will deliver approximately 6-10 seconds timing.
Loosening decreases running time.)
2 Raise up front of tilt-handle to expose screw B. (use #6 allen key)
3 Set screw B adjusted all the way in gives maximum running time. Adjust set screw B out Timing
counter-clockwise for less running time. Nut
t
10
Spec Seq#: 17
How to Repair a NAIAD™ Cartridge with

Dashpot and Oscillating Handle
1. To uncover operating cartridges on 386-XSLO urinal valves with non-sag handles, unscrew bonnet (17) and remove entire
assembly (23), on self-closing stops as shown on diagram below. For 386-X, remove bonnet (24) and handle (19).
2. Shut-off water at main or supply valve if installed.
3. Either cartridge can now be removed from body by loosening cap (6) with a flat wrench and lifting entire cartridge from
body including the dashpot.
1039859
4. If leakage is occurring through spout outlet, insert 1/8" diameter pin or pin wrench through hole in stem and with crescent
wrench remove stem nut (15) and all parts up to and including (9) seat. Inspect seat washer (10) and replace if necessary,
next inspect seat (9) for nicks or water cutting and replace if necessary. If cup washer (12) has been sticking in dashpot,
replace also.
5. If cartridge has been leaking between oscillating lever and upper cap, remove stem assembly (1) and spring (2) from sleeve (8)
and cap (6) by taking out washer (3) from cap, take out packing arrangement which consists of (2) O-Rings (4) with leather
washer (5) between O-Rings. Grease stem lightly around packing area and put new O-Rings and packing on stem using same
arrangement as indicated, also lubricate O. D. of packing.
6. Place stem with spring, washer and packing properly assembled back into cap and sleeve. Now assemble lower cartridge
parts in proper relation and insert pin or pin wrench in stem hole again and tighten nut (15). Grease cup (12) with light grease
and place cartridge in dashpot.
7. We recommend removing and replacing (7) gasket before cartridge is placed in valve body. Place cartridge in body and lock
cartridge by tightening cap (6) securely, add oscillating lever bonnet sub-assembly to cartridge.
386-XSLO 386-X
1 1 Item Part
No. No. Description
1 386-008KJKRBF Button and Stem Assembly
17
2 395-018JKNF Spring
2 2 3 319-012JKRBF Brass Washer
4 319-140JKABNF O-Ring
3 3
5 319-035JKABNF Leather Washer
4 23 4 6 618-001JKCP Cap Nut
19
5 5 7 1-043JKABNF Gasket
18
8 – Sleeve
4 4
9 1-027JKABNF Monel Seat
6 6 10 244-006JKABNF Rubber Seat Washer
20 24
11 333-026JKABRBF Retainer
7 7
12 333-040JKABNF Rubber Washer
8 21 8 13 333-039JKABNF Washer
14 1-031JKABNF Stem Washer
22 15 333-097JKABNF Stem Nut
9 9 16 333-073KJKABNF Slow Dashpot Assembly
10 10 17 333-075KJKABNF Slow Dashpot Assembly
18 386-010JKCP Bonnet
11 11
19 386-009JKCP Ball Handle
12 12 20 386-011JKCP Plunger
13 13 21 386-013JKNF Spring
22 386-014JKRBF Sleeve
14 14
23 386-010KJKCP Handle Assembly
15 15 24 386-005JKCP Bonnet

16 17
NOTE: Complete assembly of 386-XSLO NOTE: Complete assembly of 386-X unit and

cartridge and 386-010K Oscillating Lever Oscillating Lever and Bonnet for
Handle assembly for Urinal Valves. Self-Closing Stops.
11
Spec Seq#: 17
Replacement Cartridges
Quaturn
™
Compression Cartridge Ceramic Cartridge
n Opens and closes in just a 1/4 turn n Positive 1/4 turn, eliminating handle travel
n Unique design closes with water pressure n Available as a substitute for the Quaturn compression cartridge
n Standard in all centerset and widespread faucets for sink and lavatory n ADA Compliant when used with lever or wing handles
n ADA Compliant when used with lever or wing handles

n
Product No. Description
1039859
Renewable parts available
1-099XKJKABNF Exposed Cap Short Stem, Right Hand
Product No. Description 1-100XKJKABNF Exposed Cap Short Stem, Left Hand
1-099-245JKABNF Exposed Cap, Short Stem, Right Hand Control-A-Flo 377-XKLHJKABNF Concealed Cap, Long Stem, Left Hand
1-099STJKNF Steam Cartridge 377-XKRHJKABNF Concealed Cap, Long Stem, Right Hand
1-099XTJKABNF Exposed Cap, Short Stem, Right Hand 420-XJKABNF For 420 Series Faucets
1-099XTJKSPF Exposed Cap, Short Stem, Right Hand, Silver Plate Finish 430-XJKABNF For 430 Series Faucets
1-099XTJKTPF Exposed Cap, Short Stem, Right Hand, Tin Plate Finish 2300-XJKABNF For Marathon Single Control Kitchen and Lavatory Faucets
1-100-245JKABNF Exposed Cap, Short Stem, Left Hand Control-A-Flo
1-100XTJKABNF Exposed Cap Short Stem, Left Hand
1-100XTJKSPF Exposed Cap, Short Stem, Left Hand, Silver Plate Finish Metering Self-Closing, Adjustable Cartridge
1-100XTJKSPF Exposed Cap, Short Stem, Left Hand, Tin Plate Finish
1105-XLHJKABNF Exposed Cap, Long Stem, Left Hand
n Close either upon release or within a 2-15 second cycle time
1105-XRHJKABNF Exposed Cap, Long Stem, Right Hand n Helps reduce water usage in high traffic locations
377-X245LHJKABNF Concealed Cap, Long Stem, Left Hand Control-A-Flo
377-X245RHJKABNF Concealed Cap, Long Stem, Right Hand Control-A-Flo Product No. Description
377-XTLHJKABNF Concealed Cap, Left Hand NAIAD™ Cartridges
377-XTRHJKABNF Concealed Cap, Right Hand 333-XPSHJKABNF Exposed Cap, Push Button, Immediate Closure
333-XCOLDJKABNF Exposed Cap, Cold Button, Immediate Closure
333-XHOTJKABNF Exposed Cap, Hot Button, Immediate Closure
333-XSLOCJKABNF Exposed Cap, Cold Button, Adjustable Cycle Time
Slow Compression Cartridge 333-XSLOPJKABNF Exposed Cap, Push Button, Adjustable Cycle Time
333-XSLOHOTJKABNF Exposed Cap, Hot Button, Adjustable Cycle Time
n For finer adjustment of water volume
335-XJKABNF Exposed Cap “Tip-Tap” Cartridge, Adjustable Cycle Time
n Most common in laboratory fittings 408-XPSHJKABNF Exposed Cap, Push Button, Adjustable Cycle Time
n Requires approximately one full turn to open and close completely 409-XJKABNF Exposed Cap “Tip-Tap” Cartridge, Adjustable Cycle Time
n ADA Compliant when used with lever or wing handles 807-XPSHJKABNF Exposed Cap, Push Button, Adjustable Cycle Time
Pedal Box Cartridges
Product No. Description 625-XJKABNF Pedal Box Cartridge, No Index, High Flow Characteristics
628-XJKABNF Pedal Box Cartridge, No Index, Low Flow Characteristics
217-XMLHJKABNF Exposed Cap, Left Hand, Short Stem, Metal to Metal
625-XSLOJKABNF Pedal Box Cartridge, No Index, Slow Closing
217-XMVCLHJKABNF Exposed Cap, Left Hand, Short Stem, Metal to Metal, Volume Control
628-XSLOJKABNF Pedal Box Cartridge, No Index, Slow Closing
217-XTLHJKABNF Exposed Cap, Left Hand, Short Stem
628-XJKABTPF Pedal Box Cartridge, No Index, Slow Closing, Tin Plate Finish
217-XTLHJKSPF Exposed Cap, Left Hand, Short Stem, Silver Plate Finish
MVP™ Adjustable Timing Cartridges
217-XTLHJKTPF Exposed Cap, Left Hand, Short Stem, Tin Plate Finish
665-190KJKABNF MVP Actuator Assembly
217-XTRHJKABNF Exposed Cap, Right Hand, Short Stem
667-080KJKABNF MVP Actuator Assembly and MVP Valve with Filter Screen
217-XTRHJKSPF Exposed Cap, Right Hand, Short Stem, Silver Plate Finish
668-100KJKABNF MVP Cartridge Rebuilding Kit
217-XTRHJKTPF Exposed Cap, Right Hand, Short Stem, Tin Plate Finish
671-XJKABNF MVP Valve with Filter Screen
274-XTLHJKABNF Concealed Cap, Left Hand, Long Stem
3300-003KJKABNF MVP Cartridge for 3300 Series Faucets
274-XTLHJKTPF Concealed Cap, Left Hand, Long Stem, Tin Plate Finish
3300-103KJKABNF Actuator Assembly, Valve, Filter Screen for 3300 Series Faucets
274-XTRHJKABNF Concealed Cap, Right Hand, Long Stem
Miscellaneous Cartridges
274-XTRHJKTPF Concealed Cap, Right Hand, Long Stem, Tin Plate Finish
313-XJKABNF Glass Filler Cartridge
376-CXJKABNF Slow Compression Cartridge with Integral Check Valve
386-LEDXJKABNF Glass Filler Cartridge, Less Dashpot
828-111KJKNF Needle Point Cartridge for Lab Use, Polypropylene
386-XSLOJKNF Urinal Valve Cartridge
870-110KJKPVC Needle Point Cartridge for Lab Use, Polyvinyl Chloride
386-XSLOCJKNF Urinal Valve Cartridge With Handle and Button Assembly
937-XSTNF Steam Cartridge
745-XJKABNF Knee Valve Cartridge
962-XJKNF Needle Point Cartridge for Lab Use
962-XJKSAM Needle Point Cartridge for Lab Use, Satin Antimicrobial Finish
Klo-Self
966-XJKNF Micro Needle Point/Brass Seat Cartridge for Lab Use ™
966-XSSJKNF Micro Needle Point/Stainless Steel Seat Cartridge for Lab Use Self-Closing Vandal Resistant Cartridge
n Self-closing, closes upon release of the handle by the user
Product No. Description

825-XJKABNF For Concealed Cap Installations, Instant Closing
826-XJKABNF For Exposed Cap Installations, Instant Closing
826-XJKSPF For Concealed Cap Installations, Instant Closing, Silver Plate Finish
826-XJKTPF For Concealed Cap Installations, Instant Closing, Tin Plate Finish
Klo-Self cartridges are interchangeable with right or left hand installation.
12
Spec Seq#: 17
ECAST® Cartridges
How To Identify ECAST Cartridges
1039859
ECAST®, from Chicago Faucets, is the line of durable, high quality brass faucets and fittings that are designed and
manufactured with less than one quarter of one percent (0.25%) total lead content by weighted average. These products are
intended for installation in locations where federal law, state law, and local codes mandate lead content levels or wherever
lead content is a concern.
In order to maintain the low-lead characteristics and certified status of your existing ECAST installations, it is critical that you
identify and install the correct ECAST replacement parts. All replacement cartridges for ECAST products feature distinctive
markings to make them easy to identify on the job site.
Replacement cartridges for existing ECAST

installations feature two engraved rings around
the top of the cartridge sleeve.
13
Spec Seq#: 17
Repair Kits
Repair Kit for Quaturn™ and Slow Compression Operating Cartridges

One
Jiffy Minute Junior
Repair Repair Repair Description Part No.
1039859
Kit Kit Kit
1277-DAB 1273-ABNF 1276-ABNF
– 3 1 Left Hand Stem (HOT) –
– 3 1 Right Hand Stem (COLD) –
– 1 – Left Hand Long Stem –
– 1 – Right Hand Long Stem –
– 2 – Left Hand (HOT) Sleeves –
– 2 – Right Hand (COLD) Sleeves –
4 100 50 Seat Washers 1-021JKNABF
– 25 3 Washer Retainers 1-022JKABNF
– 12 6 Stem Nut Washers 1-031JKNF
2 – – Gasket 1-043JKABNF
– 4 1 Complete Right Hand (COLD) Cartridges 1-099XTJKABNF
– 4 1 Complete Left hand (HOT) Cartridges 1-100XTJKABNF
– 4 2 Chrome Plated Caps 1-214JKCP
2 24 9 O-Rings 1-219JKABNF
– 50 25 Seats 1-327JKABNF
2 48 9 O-Ring 1-519JKABNF
2 24 6 Cap Thread Gaskets 2-043JKABNF
– 1 – Metal Box with Compartments 273-061JKNF
– – 1 Metal Box with Compartments 276-060JKNF
4 12 6 Stem Nuts 333-097JKABNF
– 1 – Complete Left Hand Long Stem Cartridge 377-XTLHJKABNF
– 1 – Complete Right Hand Long Stem Cartridge 377-XTRHJKABNF
– 6 – Handle Screws 420-010JKRCF
2 – – Brass Washers 93-031JKABRBF
2 24 9 Brass Washer 93-131JKABRBF
Repair Kit for Klo-Self™ Type Cartridges
One
Jiffy Minute Junior
Kit Kit Kit
847-DAB 883-ABNF 884-ABNF
— 4 — Sleeves –
— 25 15 Washer Retainers 1-022JKABNF
2 50 25 Seats 1-027JKABNF
— 16 6 Stem Nut Washers 1-031JKABNF
— 20 6 Cap Thread Gaskets 1-043JKABNF
2 100 25 Soft Seat Washers 244-006JKABNF
2 8 2 Leather Packing 319-035JKABNF
— 18 6 Stem Nuts 333-097JKABNF
— 25 6 Handle Screws 420-010JKRCF
— 6 2 Stems 585-001JKBNF
— 12 2 Packing Glands 711-007JKRBF
— 12 2 Plungers 823-001JKNF
— 6 2 Cap Nuts, Chrome Plated 823-004JKCP
2 18 2 Springs 823-010JKNF
— 12 2 Springs 823-013JKNF
— 6 2 Bonnets 826-101JKRCF
14
Spec Seq#: 17
Repair Kits
Repair Kit for NAIAD™ Push Button & Oscillating Handle Operating Cartridges
One
Jiffy Minute Junior
Kit Kit Kit
1039859
849-DAB 820-ABNF 821-ABNF
— 2 — Sleeves –
2 12 6 Seats 1-027JKABNF
— 6 3 Stem Nut Washers 1-031JKABNF
2 20 6 Cap Thread Gaskets 1-043JKABNF
2 50 25 Soft Seat Washers 244-006JKABNF
— 2 1 Pin Wrenches 244-025JKNF
— 12 6 Brass Washers 319-012JKRBF
2 7 3 Leather Packing 319-035JKABNF
— 12 4 Washer Retainers 333-026JKABRBF
— 12 6 Guide Washers 333-039JKABNF
2 20 10 Cup Washers 333-040JKABNF
— 4 — Slow Dash Pot Assembly 333-073KJKABNF
— 4 2 Dashpot 333-075JKABNF
— 6 3 Stem Nuts 333-097JKABNF
— 4 2 Complete Naiad Cartridges 333-XPSHJKABNF
2 4 2 Springs 395-018JKNF
MVP™ Repair Kits

(See illustration on page 6 for details)

Part No. Description
665-190KJKABNF Actuator Assembly for Faucets with MVP Cartridge
667-080KJKABNF One Each of Kits 665-190KJKABNF and 671-XJKABNF
668-100KJKABNF (2) E Ring Retainer, Retainer Ring, Actuator O-Ring, Cartridge O-Ring,
Cap Sealing Washer, Large Filter and Small Filter
671-XJKABNF Metering Valve Unit
3300-003KJKABNF Actuator Assembly for 3300 Series Faucets
15
Spec Seq#: 17
EN BU
RE I
U.S. G
LD
ING
CO
UNCIL
M
E M B E R
We are a member of the U.S. Green Building Council and support the
Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Green Building
Rating System™, to measure the efficiency and sustainability of buildings
in the U.S. and Canada. If you are trying to achieve LEED Certification
for your building, our low-flow outlets, metering cartridges, and sensor-
1039859
operated faucets can contribute points in these areas: Water Efficiency
Credit 2: Innovative Wastewater Technologies and Water Efficiency
Credit 3: Water Use Reduction.
We are proud to be a partner with WaterSense®, sponsored by the

EPA and designed to protect the future of our nation’s water supply
by promoting efficiency and enhancing the market for water efficient
products, programs, and practices.
We are a charter sponsor of the Alliance for Water Efficiency, a non-

profit organization that is dedicated to the efficient and sustainable use
of water. It brings together a diverse range of stakeholders to advocate
water efficiency and conservation.
Chicago Faucets, a member of the Geberit Group, is the leading brand of commercial faucets and fittings in the United States,
offering a complete range of products for schools, laboratories, hospitals, office buildings, food service, airports, and sports
facilities. Whatever your requirements may be, Chicago Faucets offers standard and made-to-order products that are designed
to meet any commercial application.
The Chicago Faucet Company

2100 South Clearwater Drive
Phone: 847/803-5000
Fax: 847/803-5454
Technical: 800/832-8783
www.chicagofaucets.com
© 2013 The Chicago Faucet Company. Product specifications subject to change without notice. CF1081 08/13
Spec Seq#: 21
Bulletin G-170A
INSTALLATION & SERVICE August, 2018
INSTRUCTIONS MODEL 170A-LF
170A-LF 3/8” COMPRESSION PERFORMANCE:
ASSE 1070 CERTIFIED  Maximum Pressure: 125 PSI (8.6 BAR)
WARNING: This product can expose you to  Maximum Hot water temperature: 180F (82°C)
chemicals including lead, which is known to the State  Hot water inlet temperature range: 120-180F (49-82°C)
! of California to cause cancer. For more information, go  Cold water inlet temperature range: 33-80F (1-27°C)
to www.P65Warnings.Ca.gov
1303876
NOTE: DO NOT USE THREAD  Outlet temperature range: 95-120F (35-49°C)
SEALANT ON COMPRESSION  Minimum flow certified to ASSE 1070: 0.25 GPM
CONNECTIONS  Maximum flow: 4 GPM
1. Valve should be installed where it can be easily cleaned, adjusted or repaired.
WARNING!! Leonard recommends that shutoffs are installed on the inlets to the mixing valve.
WATER TEMPERATURES IN EXCESS OF 110°F (43°C) 2. Inlets are furnished with 3/8” compression connections. If using copper tubing,
MAY CAUSE SCALDING, SEVERE INJURY, OR DEATH!! do NOT extend tubing more than 3/16” beyond the compression ferrule.
IMPORTANT! DO NOT use thread sealant.
This thermostatic water mixing valves is NOT pre-set and 3. Tighten compression nuts by hand, then tighten only 1/4 turn, overtightening will
can be adjusted to deliver water at temperatures exceeding cause leaks and possibly crush checks.
110°F (43°C). After installation, the installer must check the 4. Flush the hot and cold water lines before installing mixing valve.
outlet water temperature and adjust the temperature setting 5. “H” and “C” are clearly marked on the inlets, install hot water line to inlet
to ensure delivery of a safe water temperature not exceeding marked “H” and cold water line to the inlet marked “C”. Valve can be installed in
110°F (43°C). any position.
Periodic inspection and maintenance is required 6. Valve is NOT pre-set and must be set after installation. Run water for at least 1-2
Regular inspection of the valve and the outlet temperature minutes to allow water to stabilize.
are required. Cleaning at a minimum of annually will help 7. Loosen locknut on stem, turn stem (screwdriver adjustment) counter-clockwise
(stem coming out of valve) for hotter and clockwise (stem going into valve) for
assure proper function of the mixing valve. Frequency of
colder outlet temperature. Do not force the valve to below 90 F.
cleaning and inspection of the outlet temperature depends
8. Tighten down the locknut to prevent unauthorized adjustment.
upon local water quality conditions.
9. Verify the outlet temperature is set to the correct temperature.
TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM CAUSE SOLUTION
Cannot reach desired outlet temperature Valve is full of debris or Flush valve with water
Inlets supplies are reversed Pipe hot to hot inlet, cold to cold inlet
Flow rate reduced or fluctuating Inlet screen filled with debris Check inlet screens for debris
No flow from outlet Hot or Cold water supply failure Restore Hot and Cold water inlet supplies
No flow from outlet Inlet supply tube extending more than 3/16” beyond Shorten tube and replace inlet checks
ferrule
Hot water flows into Cold water supply or vice versa Check valve has debris, inlets were not properly flushed Replace inlet check valves and screens
Outlet temperature not warm enough Hot water supply not 10 F above required outlet Increase Hot water inlet temperature
temperature (5 F with equal pressures)
INSTALLATION
LIMITED WARRANTY
170A - BP ONLY Leonard Valve Company warrants the original purchaser that
products manufactured by them (not by others) will be free from
defects in materials and workmanship under normal conditions of
use, when properly installed and maintained in accordance with
PACKING Leonard Valve Company's instructions, for a period of one year
MIXED MIXED PART # 7539 from date of shipment. During this period the Leonard Valve
OUTLET OUTLET Company will at its option repair or replace any product, or part
thereof, which shall be returned, freight prepaid, to the Leonard
H
C
H
C
factory and determined by Leonard to be defective in materials or
workmanship. There are no warranties, express or implied, which
extend beyond the description contained herein. There are no
implied warranties of merchantability or of fitness for a particular
CHECK KIT - KIT 4/170A purpose. In no event will Leonard be liable for labor or incidental
HOT WATER COLD WATER HOT WATER COLD WATER INCLUDES CHECKS or consequential damages. Any alteration or improper installation
SUPPLY SUPPLY SUPPLY SUPPLY AND SCREENS or use of the product will void this limited warranty.
1360 Elmwood Avenue, Cranston, RI 02910 USA

© 2016 Leonard Valve Company Phone: 401.461.1200 Fax: 401.941.5310
Printed in USA Email: info@leonardvalve.com
Web Site: http://www.leonardvalve.com
Spec Seq#: 21
Boletín G-170A
INSTALACIÓN Y SERVICIO 22 de Junio de 2016
INSTRUCCIONES PARA MODELO 170A-LF
170A-LF COMPRESIÓN DE 3/8” •FUNCIONAMIENTO:
•Presión máxima: 125 PSI (8,6 BAR)
CERTIFICACIÓN ASSE 1070
•Temperatura máxima de agua caliente: 180˚F (82° C)
•Límites de temperatura de entrada de agua caliente: 120-180˚F (49-82° C)
•Límites de temperatura de entrada de agua fría: 33-80˚F (1-27° C)
1303876
NOTA: NO UTILICE CINTA •Límites de temperatura de salida: 95-120˚F (35-49° C)
SELLADORA DE ROSCAS EN LAS •Minimo flujo certificado por ASSE 1070: 0.20 GPM
CONEXIONES DE COMPRESIÓN •Flujo máximo: 4 GPM
1. La válvula debe ser instalada donde se pueda limpiar, ajustar o reparar fácilmente. Leonard
¡ADVERTENCIA! 2.
recomienda que las llaves de paso sean instaladas en las entradas de la válvula mezcladora.
Las entradas están equipadas con conexiones de compresión de 3/8”. Si se utiliza tubería
¡TEMPERATURAS DE AGUA SUPERIORES A 110 ° F (43 ° de cobre, no extienda la tubería mas de 3/16” más allá de la tuerca o férula de compression.
C) PUEDEN CAUSAR QUEMADURAS, GRAVES NO UTILICE CINTA SELLADORA DE ROSCAS
LESIONES, O MUERTE! 3. Apriete las tuercas o férula de compresión con la mano, apriete con una vuelta de un ¼
solamente , sobre apretarla causará fugas y posible aplaste de los plásticos utilizados para
¡IMPORTANTE! prevenir el flujo cruzado.
Esta válvula termostatica mezcladora de agua no se ha ajustado o 4. Limpie las tuberías de agua caliente y fría antes de instalar la válvula mezcladora.
calibrado previamente y puede ajustarse o calibrarse para 5. “H” y “C”están marcadas claramente en las entradas, instale la tubería de agua caliente con
la entrada marcada “H” y la tuberia de agua fría con la entrada marcada “C”. La válvula
proporcionar agua a temperaturas superiores de 110 ° F (43 ° C).
puede ser instalada en cualquier posición.
Después de la instalación, el técnico debe verificar la temperatura de 6. La válvula no está pre-ajustada o precalibrada y se require que sea ajustada o precalibrada
agua y ajustar la temperatura para proporcionar agua potable que no después de la instalación. Deje correr el agua por lo menos de 1 a 2 minutos para permitir
exceda una temperatura de 110° F (43° C). que el agua se estabilice.
Mantenimiento y la inspección periódica son necesarias 7. Flojar las tuercas del tubo, gire el tubo (ajuste con el detornillador) en sentido contrario a las
manecillas del reloj (el tubo está saliendo de la válvula) para más caliente y hacia la derecha
Se require la inspección regular de la válvula y de la temperatura de (el tubo está entrando a la válvula) para la salida de temperaturas más frías. No forzar la
salida. Una limpieza anual como minimo, ayuda a garantizar un válvula a funcionar por debajo 90˚F.
funcionamiento correcto de la válvula mezcladora . La frecuencia 8. Apriete las tuercas hacia abajo para prevenir ajustes no autorizados.
de la limpieza e inspección de la temperatura de salida depende de 9. Verifique que la temperatura de salida está ajustada correctamente.
las condiciones de calidad del agua local.
RESOLVER PROBLEMAS
PROBLEMA CAUSA SOLUCIÓN
No puede alcanzar la Temperaratura deseada La válvula está llena de residuos o las fuentes de Limpiar la válvula con agua, la tubería caliente con la
entradas están invertidas entrada caliente, fría con la entrada fría
Caudal reducido o flutuante El filtro de entrada está lleno de residuos Verificar si los filtros de entrada tienen residuos
No flujo en la salida No hay suministro de agua caliente o fría (La linea Restablecer el suministro de entradas de agua caliente y
suplidora de agua caliente o fría falla) fría
No flujo en la salida La tubería de la linea suplidora se extiende mas alla de Acortar el tubo y remplazar los controladores de entrada
3/16” de la tuerca de la fuente de entrada
Flujos de agua caliente en agua fría o viceversa Verifique si la válvula tiene residuos o si las entradas no Remplazar los filtros y válvulas de retención de entrada
fueron debidamente limpiadas
La temperatura del agua de salida no se calienta lo La fuente de agua caliente no se require arriba de 10˚F y Aumentar la temperatura del agua caliente
suficiente la temperature de salida (5˚F con igual presión)
INSTALACIÓN GARANTÍA LIMITADA

La compañía Leonard Valve le garantiza al comprador original
que los productos fabricados por Leonard (no por otros) estará
170A - DESVIACIÓN SOLAMENTE
libres de defectos en materiales y mano de obra bajo condiciones
normales de uso, cuando son correctamente instalados y
mantenidos o tratados según las instrucciones de Leonard Valve
ANILLO DE GOMA Co., por un período de un año a partir de la fecha de embarque.
TUBERíA DE TUBERíA DE # 7539
DESAGUE Durante este período la compañía Leonard Valve a su discreción
DESAGUE
reparará o reemplazará cualquier producto o parte del mismo, que
H
deberá devolverse, manejo y envío pre pagado a la fábrica de
H
C C Leonard y Leonard determinará si el producto esta defectuoso en
materiales o mano de obra. No hay ninguna garantía, expresa o
implícita, que se extienda más allá de la descripción contenida en
ESTUCHE DE PIEZAS - KIT 4/170A
este documento. No hay ninguna garantía implícita de
INCLUYE LOS PLÁSTICOS PARA
comerciabilidad o de idoneidad para un propósito en particular. En
ABASTECIMIENTO DE ABASTECIMIENTO DE ABASTECIMIENTO DE ABASTECIMIENTO DE PREVENIR EL FLUJO CRUZADO
ningún caso Leonard será responsable de la mano de obra o daños
AGUA CALIENTE AGUA FRÍA AGUA CALIENTE AGUA FRÍA Y LOS FILTROS
incidentales o consecuentes. Cualquier alteración, instalación
incorrecta de uso del producto anulará esta garantía limitada.
© 2018 Leonard Valve Company Phone: 401.461.1200 Fax: 401.941.5310
Printed in USA Email: info@leonardvalve.com
Spec Seq#: 22
Installation
Print This Page
NEW E-Z Tear-To-Fit feature and

E-Z Grip built-in fasteners make installation fast and easy!
9351
1. Tear-To-Fit on internal, dimensioned 2. Press seams together at finger 3. That’s it... you’re done... with NEW
tear lines for quick, clean, accurate recesses to engage E-Z Grip internal Lav Guard®2 E-Z Series from
trimming to fit virtually any piping fasteners for a secure, safe, tamper- Truebro!
cofiguration. Covers flex to install over resistant installation. To remove cover,
pipes. firmly pull seam apart using a strong
grip. To reinstall, press seams back
together.
[ close window ]
Spec Seq#: 23
*****
WF-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 24
1343251
Spec Seq#: 24
1343251
Spec Seq#: 24
1343251
Spec Seq#: 24
1343251
Spec Seq#: 24
1343251
Spec Seq#: 24
1343251
Spec Seq#: 24
1343251
Spec Seq#: 24
1343251
Spec Seq#: 24
1343251
Spec Seq#: 24
1343251
Spec Seq#: 24
1343251
Spec Seq#: 24
INSTALLATION, OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Please visit www.acorneng.com
for most current specifications.
Programable Piezo Pushbutton

Programming Instructions (Flow Time Adjustment)
1343251
The Button is factory set an 8 sec. timing cycle, if an 8 sec. cycle is adequate, then no programming adjustment
is required.
NOTE: Read the entire document before
trying to program the piezo pushbutton.
THE TIME SETTINGS PROGRAM USES 3 DIFFERENT TIMING MODES:

— 1 second timing mode: Each push of the button adds 1 second to the total timing cycle.
— 5 second timing mode: Each push of the button adds 5 seconds to the total timing cycle.
— 20 second timing mode: Each push of the button adds 20 seconds to the total timing cycle.
To program the piezo pushbutton, you will need to be able to see the back of the piezo pushbutton.
Prevision must be made to access the back of the piezo pushbutton. There is an LED on the back of the piezo
pushbutton under a layer of transparent epoxy, used as a programming indicator light.
NOTE: This programming procedure moves along rapidly, there is
only about 2 or 3 seconds between programming operations.
In order to start the programming the piezo pushbutton, the button must be powered down. Disconnect the red power
cable and wait 20 seconds, then reconnect the red power cable.
As soon as the cable is reconnected the LED will start flashing, it will flash 4 times, then stays on for 3 seconds.
During the 3 second period, push the piezo button once, the LED will go out, now you are in the 1 sec timing mode
and each time the button is pushed the LED will flash, adding 1 sec to the total timing cycle.
To move on to the 5 sec timing mode, pause and wait for the LED to flash 2 times, now you are in the 5 sec timing
mode. Each time the button is pushed the LED will flash, adding 5 sec to the total timing cycle.
To move on to the 20 sec timing mode, pause and wait for the LED to flash 3 times, now you are in the 20 sec timing
mode and each time the button is pushed the LED will flash, adding 20 sec to the total timing cycle. After programing
is complete, pause and wait for the LED to flash 4 times and then 5 times, which completes the programming.
— When a timing mode is not required then do not push the button and wait for the next timing mode.
— Each timing mode (1 sec, 5 sec or 20 sec timing mode) can be sequenced up to 100 times, that is
the number of times, the button can be pushed, to increase the total timing cycle in each timing mode.
Part #: 9940-009-001 New: 10/01/13

ACORN ENGINEERING FIELD SERVICE
TOLL FREE 800-743-8259 • LOCAL 626-855-4866 • FAX 626-855-4863
Spec Seq#: 24

Programmable Piezo Pushbutton

Programming Instructions (Flow Time Adjustment)
1343251
WORKSHEET
(FILL IN ALL BOXES, WHICH WILL SIMPLIFY THE PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE)
Fill in all the PROGRAMING STEPS:
Boxes below — Power down piezo button for 10 seconds.
Ÿ Reconnect power.
Determine the Ÿ LED flashes, then stay on.

number of seconds
per timing cycle Ÿ While the LED is steady on, push button.
Ÿ LED turns off.
1 Push = 1 Second Ÿ You are in the 1 sec timing mode, immediately push the button, 1 push
equals 1 sec added to the total timing cycle.
x1=
sec
Ÿ Pause and wait for the LED to flash 2 times.
ADD
1 Push = 5 Seconds
Ÿ You are in the 5 sec timing mode, immediately push the button, 1 push
equals 5 sec added to the total timing cycle.
x5=
sec
Ÿ Pause and wait for the LED to flash 3 times.
ADD
1 Push = 20 Seconds
Ÿ You are in the 20 sec timing mode, immediately push the button, 1
x 20 =
sec
push equals 20 sec added to the total timing cycle.
EQUALS
Total timing cycle equals
seconds
Part #: 9940-009-001 New: 10/01/13

Spec Seq#: 24

1343251
Black Solenoid
Cable
Red Power
Cable
#3543 Sprayhead
Shown For
Reference
Piezo
Programming Indicator Pushbutton
LED Light
CK
BLA
RED
Tranparent
Epoxy Filling
Part #: 9940-009-001 New: 10/01/13

Spec Seq#: 25
*****
SH-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 28
Bulletin P-2G
August, 2018
AQUATROL® 4500
PRESSURE BALANCING MIXING VALVE (1/2”)
1016
INSTALLATION, ADJUSTMENT, & SERVICE
1176864
Serial No. 450015125 and higher
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Determine what type of installation will be utilized.
A INSTALLATION THROUGH a. standard installation with plasterguard/mounting bracket.
WALL WITH SERVICE b. thin wall installation with mounting bracket.
STOPS OR CHECKSTOPS. c. valve only installation with plasterguard (service stops
or check stops are recommended).
1. Cut finished hole in wall 6” (152 mm)
max. diameter. 2. Install hot to the left inlet and cold to the right inlet (see H and C
2. Install plaster mask/mounting bracket marks on valve body).
over body of valve, and line up holes
with the holes on the valve body tabs. 3. Thread sealant, or solder flux must be used sparingly. After
3. Finish wall flush with plaster mask installation, flush pipes thoroughly (remove internal parts if
front. necessary), to eliminate debris that may become lodged on the
4. Remove and discard plaster mask. working parts of the valve.
4. Shower only applications require the bottom outlet to be plugged,
B INSTALLATION FOR tub only applications require the top outlet to be plugged. A tub
FIBERGLASS, METAL OR diverter is required for tub/shower combinations.
PLASTIC ENCLOSURES.
5. Apply foam pointer gasket to wall flange. Mount wall flange and
1/16” (1.6mm) to 7/8” (22mm)
1. Cut finished hole in enclosure to 5” dial plate to the valve body with the wall flange screws provided.
(127mm) max. diameter. 6. We recommend to seal the flange to the wall with silicone to
2. Break away plaster mask from prevent water from penetrating the wall.
mounting bracket, discard plaster
mask and install mounting bracket 7. Check high temperature limit stop (see instructions, page 2).
over valve body. Line up holes of
mounting bracket with the holes on 8. Attach the pointer to the valve stem (using the pointer screw with
the valve body tabs. loctite #242 if required and washer), and insert snap cap. The top
3. Install escutcheon and dial plate over (short) end of the pointer should point to “OFF” on the dial plate.
enclosure by securing with screws
furnished. !!! WARNING !!!
WARNING! THIS MIXING VALVE IS EQUIPPED WITH AN
C INSTALLATION ADJUSTABLE HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT STOP
WITHOUT SERVICE FACTORY SET AT APPROXIMATELY 110°F (43°C) WITH
STOPS OR CHECKSTOPS AN INCOMING HOT WATER SUPPLY OF 135°F (57°C) IF
INCOMING HOT WATER ON THE JOB IS HIGHER THAN
135°F, THE VALVE WHEN TURNED TO FULL HOT MAY
1. Cut finished hole in wall to 4” DELIVER WATER IN EXCESS OF 110°F, AND THE HIGH
(102mm) max. diameter. TEMPERATURE LIMIT STOP MUST BE RESET BY THE
2. Break away mounting bracket from INSTALLER (SEE PAGE 2).
plaster mask and discard mounting
bracket. Install plaster mask over WARNING! HOT WATER IN EXCESS OF 110°F IS
valve body DANGEROUS AND MAY CAUSE SCAULDING!
3. Finish wall.
4. Remove and discard plaster mask.
WARNING: This product can expose you to
chemicals including lead, which is known to the State
! of California to cause cancer. For more information, go

Phone: 401.461.1200 Fax: 401.941.5310
Email: info@leonardvalve.com
Spec Seq#: 28
OPERATION SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS

The AQUATROL® is a pressure-actuated water-mixing valve, 1 Remove escutcheon pointer (MU-5D) and wall flange (PAM-32B)(See
which will compensate for changes in the pressure of hot and cold DWG 1).
supplies and maintain bathing temperatures. The easy to read dial 2 Turn off hot and cold supplies using checkstops.
with directional indicators help to eliminate confusion as to where 3 Temporarily place escutcheon pointer on spline and turn LEFT to
the handle should be located for a particular temperature. Turn the maximum “HOT” position. Unscrew cover and remove complete
handle counter-clockwise from the “OFF” position through the interior assembly (See DWG 4).
BLUE (or COLD) area on the dial plate, the shower is on and the 4 If the valve will not shut off (ie. It drips), replace PV-8-1 upper
temperature is cold. As the handle enters the lighter RED area, packing, PV-2 lower packing, and inspect upper and lower valve seats
1176864
shower temperature becomes progressively WARMER until the in PV-3 sleeve (DWG 5).
high temperature limit is reached in the full RED (or HOT) 5 If the valve will not mix properly, piston in PV-CR-2 control rod group
position. To turn OFF, move handle back in clockwise direction to may be sticking due to some deposit of foreign matter (DWG 5). To
the “OFF” position. free piston,
a. Tap either end of control rod against a wooden surface or hit
with a plastic mallet.
b. Remove PV-2 packing and screw and tap piston loose with
a small drift pin.
c. Submerge lower end of PV-CR-2 control rod group in a
non-corrosive cleaning solution and flush with clean water.
1016
NOTE: Before reinserting assembly in valve (with cover gasket) make
sure escutcheon pointer has been turned LEFT to the maximum RED
(“HOT”) position.
!!! WARNING !!!
THIS VALVE IS EQUIPPED WITH AN ADJUSTABLE HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT STOP FACTORY
SET AT APPROXIMATELY 110°F (43°C) WITH AN INCOMING HOT WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE
OF 135°F. THE VALVE WHEN TURNED TO FULL HOT MAY DELIVER WATER IN EXCESS OF 110°F,
AND THE HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT STOP MUST BE RESET BY THE INSTALLER, (SEE BELOW).
TO RESET HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT

STOP (DWG 2.):
1. Remove pointer (MU-5D). Loosen 1354 stop screw, until it is flush with
cover.
2. Replace pointer and turn to left or right until the valve is delivering the
highest temperature of 110°F (43°C) or LOWER and remove pointer.
3. Tighten 1354 Stop Screw.
4. Reinstall pointer so small end is pointing to the extreme RED (“HOT”)

1016
position, shut valve off.
IMPORTANT! TEST THE NEW HIGH TEMPERATURE

SETTING USING A DIAL THERMOMETER TO MAKE
CERTAIN IT IS AS DESIRED. HOT WATER IN EXCESS
OF 110°F IS DANGEROUS AND MAY CAUSE
SCALDING!!.
REMEMBER!! THIS IS A CONTROL DEVICE WHICH MUST BE CLEANED AND MAINTAINED ON A

REGULAR BASIS (SEE MAINTENANCE GUIDE AND RECORD MGR-1000).
1360 Elmwood Avenue, Cranston RI 02910 USA

Phone : 401-461-1200, Fax: 401-941-5310
Spec Seq#: 28
1176864
SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS
SYMPTOM: KIT REQUIRED: PARTS INCLUDED:
PACKINGS & 1. Leak at handle. Kit 1/ST/N PV-2, PV-4B, PV-8-1, LVC-16B, 1358,
2. Valve will not shut off completely. 1356, PV-16 (2)
O'RINGS
3. Valve is difficult to pull apart.
4. Leak at stop screw.
1358, PV-CR-2, PV-3, PV-16 (2) (also
CONTROL ROD 5. Valve delivers either all hot or all cold Kit R/67 PV-45 if ¼” hex tool not
water, or will not mix consistently. available).
GROUP
6. After replacing packings and O-rings, PV-3, PV-16 (2)

INSERTED
valve will not shut off completely.
SEAT
7. Supplies cannot be shut off completely.

CHECKSTOPS, SEE DWG # 5, 6, or 7 ABOVE FOR
8. Leak at checkstop (or stop) bonnet or stem. REPAIR KITS
STOPS

Phone: 401-461-1200, Fax: 401-941-5310
Spec Seq#: 28
INSTALLATION
LIMITED WARRANTY
1176864
Leonard Valve Company warrants the original purchaser that products manufactured by them (not by others) will be free from defects in materials
and workmanship under normal conditions of use, when properly installed and maintained in accordance with Leonard Valve Company's
instructions, for a period of one year from date of shipment. During this period the Leonard Valve Company will at its option repair or replace any
product, or part thereof, which shall be returned, freight prepaid, to the Leonard factory and determined by Leonard to be defective in materials or
workmanship. There are no warranties, express or implied, which extend beyond the description contained herein. There are no implied warranties
of merchantability or of fitness for a particular purpose. In no event will Leonard be liable for labor or incidental or consequential damages. Any
alteration or improper installation or use of the product will void this limited warranty.
Phone: 401-461-1200, Fax: 401-941-5310
© 2018 Leonard Valve Company Email: info@leonardvalve.com
Printed in USA Web Site: http://www.leonardvalve.com
Spec Seq#: 29
*****
SH-2
*****
Spec Seq#: 31
Bulletin P-2G
August, 2018
AQUATROL® 4500
PRESSURE BALANCING MIXING VALVE (1/2”)
1016
INSTALLATION, ADJUSTMENT, & SERVICE
Serial No. 450015125 and higher
972099
1. Determine what type of installation will be utilized.
A INSTALLATION THROUGH a. standard installation with plasterguard/mounting bracket.
WALL WITH SERVICE b. thin wall installation with mounting bracket.
STOPS OR CHECKSTOPS. c. valve only installation with plasterguard (service stops
or check stops are recommended).
1. Cut finished hole in wall 6” (152 mm)
max. diameter. 2. Install hot to the left inlet and cold to the right inlet (see H and C
2. Install plaster mask/mounting bracket marks on valve body).
over body of valve, and line up holes
with the holes on the valve body tabs. 3. Thread sealant, or solder flux must be used sparingly. After
3. Finish wall flush with plaster mask installation, flush pipes thoroughly (remove internal parts if
front. necessary), to eliminate debris that may become lodged on the
4. Remove and discard plaster mask. working parts of the valve.
4. Shower only applications require the bottom outlet to be plugged,
B INSTALLATION FOR tub only applications require the top outlet to be plugged. A tub
FIBERGLASS, METAL OR diverter is required for tub/shower combinations.
PLASTIC ENCLOSURES.
5. Apply foam pointer gasket to wall flange. Mount wall flange and
1/16” (1.6mm) to 7/8” (22mm)
1. Cut finished hole in enclosure to 5” dial plate to the valve body with the wall flange screws provided.
(127mm) max. diameter. 6. We recommend to seal the flange to the wall with silicone to
2. Break away plaster mask from prevent water from penetrating the wall.
mounting bracket, discard plaster
mask and install mounting bracket 7. Check high temperature limit stop (see instructions, page 2).
over valve body. Line up holes of
mounting bracket with the holes on 8. Attach the pointer to the valve stem (using the pointer screw with
the valve body tabs. loctite #242 if required and washer), and insert snap cap. The top
3. Install escutcheon and dial plate over (short) end of the pointer should point to “OFF” on the dial plate.
enclosure by securing with screws
furnished. !!! WARNING !!!
WARNING! THIS MIXING VALVE IS EQUIPPED WITH AN
C INSTALLATION ADJUSTABLE HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT STOP
WITHOUT SERVICE FACTORY SET AT APPROXIMATELY 110°F (43°C) WITH
STOPS OR CHECKSTOPS AN INCOMING HOT WATER SUPPLY OF 135°F (57°C) IF
INCOMING HOT WATER ON THE JOB IS HIGHER THAN
135°F, THE VALVE WHEN TURNED TO FULL HOT MAY
1. Cut finished hole in wall to 4” DELIVER WATER IN EXCESS OF 110°F, AND THE HIGH
(102mm) max. diameter. TEMPERATURE LIMIT STOP MUST BE RESET BY THE
2. Break away mounting bracket from INSTALLER (SEE PAGE 2).
plaster mask and discard mounting
bracket. Install plaster mask over WARNING! HOT WATER IN EXCESS OF 110°F IS
valve body DANGEROUS AND MAY CAUSE SCAULDING!
3. Finish wall.
4. Remove and discard plaster mask.
WARNING: This product can expose you to
chemicals including lead, which is known to the State
! of California to cause cancer. For more information, go

Phone: 401.461.1200 Fax: 401.941.5310
Spec Seq#: 31
OPERATION SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS

The AQUATROL® is a pressure-actuated water-mixing valve, 1 Remove escutcheon pointer (MU-5D) and wall flange (PAM-32B)(See
which will compensate for changes in the pressure of hot and cold DWG 1).
supplies and maintain bathing temperatures. The easy to read dial 2 Turn off hot and cold supplies using checkstops.
with directional indicators help to eliminate confusion as to where 3 Temporarily place escutcheon pointer on spline and turn LEFT to
the handle should be located for a particular temperature. Turn the maximum “HOT” position. Unscrew cover and remove complete
handle counter-clockwise from the “OFF” position through the interior assembly (See DWG 4).
BLUE (or COLD) area on the dial plate, the shower is on and the 4 If the valve will not shut off (ie. It drips), replace PV-8-1 upper
temperature is cold. As the handle enters the lighter RED area, packing, PV-2 lower packing, and inspect upper and lower valve seats
shower temperature becomes progressively WARMER until the in PV-3 sleeve (DWG 5).
972099
high temperature limit is reached in the full RED (or HOT) 5 If the valve will not mix properly, piston in PV-CR-2 control rod group
position. To turn OFF, move handle back in clockwise direction to may be sticking due to some deposit of foreign matter (DWG 5). To
the “OFF” position. free piston,
a. Tap either end of control rod against a wooden surface or hit
with a plastic mallet.
b. Remove PV-2 packing and screw and tap piston loose with
a small drift pin.
c. Submerge lower end of PV-CR-2 control rod group in a
non-corrosive cleaning solution and flush with clean water.
1016
NOTE: Before reinserting assembly in valve (with cover gasket) make
sure escutcheon pointer has been turned LEFT to the maximum RED
(“HOT”) position.
!!! WARNING !!!
THIS VALVE IS EQUIPPED WITH AN ADJUSTABLE HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT STOP FACTORY
SET AT APPROXIMATELY 110°F (43°C) WITH AN INCOMING HOT WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE
OF 135°F. THE VALVE WHEN TURNED TO FULL HOT MAY DELIVER WATER IN EXCESS OF 110°F,
AND THE HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT STOP MUST BE RESET BY THE INSTALLER, (SEE BELOW).
TO RESET HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT

STOP (DWG 2.):
1. Remove pointer (MU-5D). Loosen 1354 stop screw, until it is flush with
cover.
2. Replace pointer and turn to left or right until the valve is delivering the
highest temperature of 110°F (43°C) or LOWER and remove pointer.
3. Tighten 1354 Stop Screw.
4. Reinstall pointer so small end is pointing to the extreme RED (“HOT”)

1016
position, shut valve off.
IMPORTANT! TEST THE NEW HIGH TEMPERATURE

SETTING USING A DIAL THERMOMETER TO MAKE
CERTAIN IT IS AS DESIRED. HOT WATER IN EXCESS
OF 110°F IS DANGEROUS AND MAY CAUSE
SCALDING!!.
REMEMBER!! THIS IS A CONTROL DEVICE WHICH MUST BE CLEANED AND MAINTAINED ON A


Phone : 401-461-1200, Fax: 401-941-5310
Spec Seq#: 31
972099
SERVICING INSTRUCTIONS
SYMPTOM: KIT REQUIRED: PARTS INCLUDED:
PACKINGS & 1. Leak at handle. Kit 1/ST/N PV-2, PV-4B, PV-8-1, LVC-16B, 1358,
2. Valve will not shut off completely. 1356, PV-16 (2)
O'RINGS
3. Valve is difficult to pull apart.
4. Leak at stop screw.
1358, PV-CR-2, PV-3, PV-16 (2) (also
CONTROL ROD 5. Valve delivers either all hot or all cold Kit R/67 PV-45 if ¼” hex tool not
water, or will not mix consistently. available).
GROUP
6. After replacing packings and O-rings, PV-3, PV-16 (2)

INSERTED
valve will not shut off completely.
SEAT
7. Supplies cannot be shut off completely.

CHECKSTOPS, SEE DWG # 5, 6, or 7 ABOVE FOR
8. Leak at checkstop (or stop) bonnet or stem. REPAIR KITS
STOPS

Phone: 401-461-1200, Fax: 401-941-5310
Spec Seq#: 31
INSTALLATION
LIMITED WARRANTY
972099
Leonard Valve Company warrants the original purchaser that products manufactured by them (not by others) will be free from defects in materials
and workmanship under normal conditions of use, when properly installed and maintained in accordance with Leonard Valve Company's
instructions, for a period of one year from date of shipment. During this period the Leonard Valve Company will at its option repair or replace any
product, or part thereof, which shall be returned, freight prepaid, to the Leonard factory and determined by Leonard to be defective in materials or
workmanship. There are no warranties, express or implied, which extend beyond the description contained herein. There are no implied warranties
of merchantability or of fitness for a particular purpose. In no event will Leonard be liable for labor or incidental or consequential damages. Any
alteration or improper installation or use of the product will void this limited warranty.
Phone: 401-461-1200, Fax: 401-941-5310
© 2018 Leonard Valve Company Email: info@leonardvalve.com
Printed in USA Web Site: http://www.leonardvalve.com
Spec Seq#: 32
*****
S-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 33
Care and Cleaning Sheet

Maintaining the beauty of Stainless, the easy care way...
Much of the beauty of stainless lies in its long-lasting wear and enduring good
looks. Follow these few simple steps, and your stainless products from Just will
138213
retain their original beauty for years to come.
An ounce of prevention ...
Forget the pound of cure. Stainless is easily kept stain-free with these simple steps:
* Since most soaps and detergents contain chlorides, Just recommends frequent rinsing of your stainless sink,
preferably after each use.
* Combine this simple daily treatment with a weekly cleansing with an abrasive cleaner, ideally Bon-Ami or Zud.
Unlike porcelain sinks, durable stainless stands up strongly to abrasive cleansers. Remember always to scrub in
the direction of the polish lines so that your efforts blend with the surface of your sink.For a less aggressive
approach, try cleaning your sink with a paste of baking soda and water. Rinse well and dry. Regularly drying your
sink works wonders to prevent water and surface rust marks.
* Looking for that extra sparkle? Use flour power to polish your sink by applying dry flour when the look you're after is
a gleaming finish. Rub the flour in with a soft cloth, and then rinse and dry.
* Club soda will do the sparkle trick as well. After placing the stopper in your sink, pour some club soda in and rub with
a soft cloth. As always, dry with a soft cloth to prevent water spots and surface rust.
* Add some shine with a few drops of baby oil. Wipe off with paper toweling and repeat for added shine.
Some things are best avoided: A few DONT's for Stainless care...
* Don't let soap cleansers dry on the sink's surface. Rinse regularly to keep the chlorides found in most cleansers from
affecting the natural luster of stainless.
* Steer clear of steel wool pads. The iron particles that are left behind can lead to rust and corrosion. For hard-to-
clean projects, try a ScotchBrite scouring pad when the job at hand requires a little extra effort, again in the direction
of the grain.
• Avoid leaving steel and cast iron cookware in your sink for extended periods of time. Iron plus moisture on top of
stainless can lead to surface rust and staining.
* Rubber dish mats, wet sponges and cleaning pads are a no-no for a lengthy stay in your sink. Since they trap water,
discoloration and staining can result.
* Just as you don't use your cutting board to clean the dishes, don't use your sink as a cutting board. Knives and other
sharp kitchen instruments will naturally damage the surface of your sink.
JUST MANUFACTURING COMPANY 9233 KING STREET . FRANKLIN PARK . ILLINOIS . 60131-2111
PH: 847-678-5150 . FAX: 847-678-6817 . E-MAIL: custserv@justmfg.com . www.justmfg.com
©2011-JUST MFG
Stirrup
Estribo
Étrier Stirrup
Stopper EstriboStirrup
Tapón
Bouchon
Stirrup
Estribo
Removable
Removible
Non-removable
No removible
Étrier Estribo
Étrier
Spec Seq#: 34
Étrier
Centerset and Single Basin Fittings 1/4”

1/4” 1/4”
Gasket
Empaquetadura
Joint
Deck Mounted Faucets Installation Instructions Stirrup
Estribo
Recommended for base numbers 50, 50T, 51, 51T, 333, 335, 349, 350, 525, 526, 527, 700, 701, 730, 797, Étrier
802, 891, 894, 895, 1100, 1102, 1891,1/2”1895 Centerset and Single Basin Fittings, Pop-Up Drain Installation
and Rigid/Swing Convertible Spout Installation. 1/4”
1/2” 1/2”
Overview Spaces may be

Chicago Faucets deck mounted faucets feature cast brass bodies and precision cartridgesrequired
for years
for thinof reliable operation. Metering models with adjustable cycle
wares such as
time offer true water savings. stainless steel
1/2” Podrán necesitarse
allation Notice
Centerset to theBasin
and Single Installer
Fittings
delgados tales como
el acero inoxidable
• Read this entire instruction sheet before installing to ensure proper installation. Centerset
Centerset Desand
and Single
Single
matériaux Basin
minces Basin Fittings
Fittings
sin comme l’acier inoxydable
sher • Installation must comply with local codes and ordinances. peuvent nécessiter des
Spud bagues d’espacement
Flange Pressurized
Basin Seat
plumbing fixtures shall be installed in accordance
Stopper with manufacturer's recommendations. The supply piping to these devices shall be securely
sher
k anchored to the building structure to prevent installed device Stirrup from unnecessary movement when operated by the user. Care shall be exercised when
installing the
(Use putty device to prevent marring the exposed surface.
or basin Centerset and Single Basin Fittings
washer Spaces may be
Piece NOTE: The information in this manual is required
provided) subject for thinto change without notice.
wares such as
Spaces may be
Spaces may be
required for thin
stainless steel Gasket required for such
wares thin as
Podrán necesitarse waresstainless
such assteel
stainless steel
Please leave this manual with the facilityespacios
manager
delgados tales como after completing the faucet installation. This document contains information
para productos
el acero inoxidable
necessary
Podrán
Podrán necesitarse
necesitarse
espacios for routine maintenance
para productos
1075120
delgados tales como
and servicing. Des matériaux minces
delgados
el acero
Des
tales inoxidable
el acero como
inoxidable
matériaux minces
peuvent nécessiter des comme l’acier
Des matériaux inoxydable
minces
bagues d’espacement commepeuvent
l’acier nécessiter
inoxydabledes
Spaces may be bagues
peuvent d’espacement
nécessiter des
NOTE: Before installation, turn off water supplies to existing faucet and remove
required forfaucet
wares such as
thin if replacing. Clean faucet basin and clear away debris. Flush all supply lines
Pop-Up Drain
before
Pop-Up Installation
connecting to faucet. Failure to do so can result in debris clogging Podrán
Drain Installation thenecesitarse
inlets
stainless steel and/or cartridges.
Pop-Up Drain Installation espacios para productos
delgados tales como
el acero inoxidable
Removable Non- Basin Washer Des matériaux minces
Pop-Upremovable Basin
DrainRondelle
Installation Basin Washer
Arandela del tazón
en C Arandela del tazón
Basin Seat
(Use putty orBasin
basinSeat
Single Hole Washer
Slip WasherMixing Fittings
Rondelle en C Spud Flange
Slip Washer Collarín Spud
Arandela toroidal
—Asiento
Spud Flange Base
washer numbers
(Use
provided)
washer
del tazón
putty or basin50, 50T, 51, 51T
(Use provided)
Stopper
Stopper
Slip
Basin Collerette de
Contre-écrou Arandela toroidal
Contre-écrou cuvette
Collarín
Flange
Collerette de Asiento
masilla o arandela del del tazón (Use
tazón provista)masilla o arandela del
Tapón
Stopper
Bouchon Tapón
Lock Nut
Washer
Washer
Contratuerca Lock Nut
cuvette Basin Seattazón provista) Bouchon
Stirrup
Body Shank Queue du tuyauContratuerca Spud Estribo Stirrup
Slip
Lock StopperStirrup
Body Shank Étrier Estribo
Stirrup
Body
Vástago del cuerpo
About de corps Vástago del cuerpo
Queue du tuyau
Flange Basin Seat
Support de cuvette
Étrier
de robinet Shank
About de corps Washer
Nut Support
(utiliser du mastic ou de cuvette Ensure o-rings
de robinet
Lock (Use putty
la rondelle en C(utiliser
qui du mastic ou
Stirrup are in place
Thread sealBody
tape est incluse) la rondelle en C qui
Cinta selladora de Thread
Thread
Shank rosca seal tape Nut or basin est incluse)
Ruban à jointsCinta selladora de rosca
Ruban à joints (Use putty
washer anulares estén en su sitio
seal tape Tail Piece
or basin
Gasket
Thread 1/4” Pieza posterior Tail Piece
Tail Piece
Pieza posterior
Morceau subséquent
provided) Joint
Gasket
Empaquetadura
Empaquetadura S’assurer que les
seal tape Morceau subséquent washer Gasket
Joint
Tail Piece provided) en place
Gasket
Ensure o-rings Ensure o-rings
are in place are in place
Ensure o-rings
areAsegúrese
in place que los sellos
S’assurer que les S’assurer que
1/2” anulares estén enles
su sitio
joints annulaires sont joints annulaires sont
en place S’assurer
en placeque les

1. Ensure O-Rings are 2. Install hoses or tubes. Copper Tube Installation 3. Apply putty to under- 4. Place shank through Ensure 5. Attach hoses or tubes
o-rings
are in place
en place
installed on hoses 2b. C

ut tubes to desired side of faucet body to hole in sink and to supply stops.
or tubes. Removable Removable

Removible
Non-removable
No removible Non-removable
length. assure a good
seal assemble mounting joints
annulaires sont
S’assurer que les
Make sure gasket is Rigid Only Spout Installation
Removable
Removible
Détachable Non- No removible
Non détachable
and level fit. hardware. en place
installed. Rigid Only Spout Installation
Détachable
Removable
removable
Non détachable
Non-
removable
le Basin Fittings
Mixing Tee Installation
Stirrup
Gasket Estribo Stirrup
Estribo
Stirrup Étrier
Étrier
Stirrup
Spacers may 1/4” 1/4”

be required 1/4”
1/4”
for thin
wares such
as stainless
Ensure o-rings steel
are in place
Asegúrese que los sellos ADH ADH
anulares estén en su sitio ESIV ESIV
E ADH E
S’assurer que les 1/2” 1/2” ESIV
1/2” 1/2”
en place ADH E
1. Install tee gasket over 2. Secure coupling nut 3. Attach supply lines 4. Remove outlet and flush ADH
ESIVE
Fittings guide pins and secure of tee to body shank. with coupling nuts. lines for about one SIVE E
Rigid /Swing Convertible Spout Rigid /Swing Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck & V.B. Gooseneck
coupling nut of tee to Installation - Gooseneck
Tighten securely. &Tighten
V.B. Gooseneck
securely. minute. Replace outlet.
nly Spout Installation Rigid /Swing Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck & V.B. Gooseneck
body shank.
Centerset
Centerset and
Centerset
Centerset and andand
Single Single
Basin
Single
Single BasinBasinBasin
Fittings Fittings — Base numbers 333, 335, 349, 350, 525, 526, 527, 700, 701,
Fittings
Fittings
730, 797, 802, 891, 894, 895, 1100, 1102, 1891, 1895
Ensure
O-rings
are in
place
Spacers
Spaces maymay
required
be
Spaces
Rigid
may be
for Only Spout Installation
Pop-Up Drain Installation
be Spacers
wares
for required
required
such as
thin
waresmaysuch as
thin
for be
thin
stainless required
steel
stainless steel
Podrán necesitarse
Podrán necesitarse Basin Washer
ADH for para
wares
espacios thin
suchproductos
espacios para productos Arandela del tazón Basin Seat
ESIV delgados tales delgados
as wares
stainless
como
elsuch
tales como Rondelle en C (Use putty or basin
E el acero inoxidableacero inoxidable
Slip Washer Spud Flange washer provided)
asl’acier
steel
comme stainless
Des matériaux Desminces
matériaux minces
inoxydable
Arandela toroidal
Contre-écrou
Collarín
Collerette de Asiento del tazón (Use
masilla o arandela del
steel peuvent
peuvent nécessiter desnécessiter des
bagues d’espacement Lock Nut
cuvette tazón provista)
Contratuerca
Body Shank Queue du tuyau
Vástago del cuerpo
1. Apply putty or rubber 2. Place shank(s) through 3. Attach supply lines with 4. Remove outlet and About de corps
de robinet
Support de cuvette
(utiliser du mastic ou
washer to underside of holes in sink and coupling nuts and Pop-Up
flush lines
Pop-Up forInstallation
Drain
Drain about
Installation
Thread seal tape est incluse)
Cinta selladora de rosca
Hole
Single faucetMixing
body to assure a
Fittings assemble mounting tighten securely. Attach one minute. Ruban à joints
Tail Piece
Single
Hole
good Mixing
seal andFittings
level fit. hardware. Use spout if provided Replace outlet.Arandela
Basin Washer
Basindel Washer
Arandela
Rondelle
tazón
en C del tazón
Pieza posterior
Basin
Morceau Seat
subséquent
Basin Seat
(Use(Use
puttyputty
or basin
spacers if necessary. separately. Rondelle en C
Slip Washer
Slip Washer
Spud Flange
Spud Flange
Collarín washer or basin
provided)
washer provided) Stopper
Arandela toroidal Collarín
Collerette de Asiento del tazón (Use TapónStopper
Pop-Up
Pop-UpDrain
Pop-UpDrainInstallation
DrainInstallation
Installation SEA
Arandela toroidal
Contre-écrou
Contre-écrou Collerette de
cuvette
cuvette
Asiento
masilla
tazónmasilla
del tazón
o arandela del (Use
o arandela del
provista)
Tapón
Bouchon
Bouchon
Pop-Up
Pop-Up Drain
DrainInstallation
Installation
L ANT
BodyBody
Shank
LockLock
Nut Nut
Contratuerca
Contratuerca
tazón provista) Stirrup
Stirrup
Estribo
Queue du tuyau ÉtrierEstribo
Vástago del Shank Queue du tuyau
Basin Basin
Basin Washer cuerpo
Vástago del cuerpo Support de cuvette
Étrier
Basin
Arandela del tazón Basin Seat About de corps Support de cuvette
Washer
Washer
Rondelle
Washeren C (Use putty or basin
About de corps
de robinet (utiliser du mastic
(utiliser
endu
ou
mastic ou
SpudSpud
de robinet la rondelle C qui
Slip
Slip Washer Spud
Flange
Spud washer provided) Thread seal tape
est incluse)
est incluse)
Slip
Slip
Arandela
vertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck toroidal Flange
Collarín
& V.B. Gooseneck Flange Asiento del tazón (Use
Basin
Threaddeseal
Cinta selladora roscatape Stopper
Stopper
Stopper
Stopper
Pivot Rod
Washer
Contre-écrou Flange
Collerette de
Basin
masilla oSeatSeatdel
arandela Cintaàselladora
joints de rosca
Tapón
Lock Washer
Washer
Nut
cuvette Basin
tazón Seat
provista)
Ruban
Ruban à joints Bouchon
Tail Piece Gasket
Lock Stirrup
Ensure Stirrup
Stirrup
Tail Piece Gasket
Body Body Lock Stirrup
Contratuerca Empaquetadura
Body
Body
Shank Lock
Queue du tuyau
Pieza posterior
Estribo
Pieza posterior Joint Empaquetadura
Shank
Vástago del cuerpo NutNut
Nut O-rings
Morceau subséquent
Étrier
Morceau subséquent Joint
Shank
About deShank (Use
Support
(Use putty are in Ensure Ensure o-rings
duputty
de cuvette
corps (Use putty
(utiliser mastic ou
Ensure o-rings
are in placeare in place
Removable Non-removable
n Installation
Drain Installation Thread
de robinet
orest
or basin
or
basinbasin
la rondelle en C qui place O-rings
Removible
Détachable
No removible
Non détachable
Installation Thread Thread
Thread
seal
seal tape
Cinta selladora
tape
de rosca washer
washer
incluse)
washer
Asegúrese
are in
queAsegúrese
los sellosque los sellos
anulares
anulares estén estén en su sitio
en su sitio Coupling
seal
sealtape
tape
Ruban à joints
Tail Piece provided)
Basin
Basin Washer TailTail
TailPiece
Piece Piece provided)
provided) S’assurer queS’assurer
place
Gasket
joints
les
Gasket
joints
annulaires
que les
annulaires sont
sont Gasket Nut
Basin Washer Gasket
en placeGasket
Empaquetadura
en place
Arandela
Arandela Washer
del tazón
del tazón
Pieza posterior
Basin
Morceau
Seat
subséquent Joint
Rondelle
Rondelle en C
en C
Spud Flange Spud Basin
(UseSeat
putty or basin
SlipArandela
Slip
Slip Washer
Washertoroidal Spud Flange Flange
Collarín
(Usewasher
washer
putty or basin
provided)
provided) Stopper
Stopper
Arandela Washer
toroidal
Contre-écrou
Contre-écrou
Collarín
Collerette de
Collerette
cuvettede Asiento Basin Seat
Asiento
masilla
masilla
del tazón (Use
del tazón
o arandela
tazón
(Use del
o arandela
provista)del
Stopper
Tapón
Tapón
Bouchon
Rigid Only Spout Installation Stirrup
Lock
Lock Nut
Nut Lock
Contratuerca
cuvette tazón provista) Stirrup
BouchonStirrup
Estribo
Étrier
Stirrup
Contratuerca
Nut
Queue du tuyau
Queue du tuyau 1. Assemble tail piece to 2. Fully assemble the 3. Position body shank
Estribo
Rigid
4. Place
Estribo
Étrier Rigid
Only
Rigid Only
stopper Only
Spout
into Spout
Spout Installation
Installation
Installation
5. Removable
Insert pivot ball rod
Support(Use putty
de cuvette
Étrier
Non-removable
Support de cuvette
body shank duor
with basin basin seat and spud toward the lift rod. body shank cavity
(utiliser du mastic ou Removable Non-removable
(utiliser mastic
la rondelle en ou
C qui Removible
assembly
Removible
Détachable through
No removible
No removible
Non détachable
la rondelle
washer
en C qui
est incluse) Détachable Non détachable
Tail Piece
thread seal tape.
est incluse)
provided) flange to body shank Tighten lock nut until orienting the stirrup pivot rod gasket and 1/4”
Tail Piece
Tail Pieza
Piece posterior
Assemble lock nut, assembly. Gasket
properly sealed.Gasket
Gasket
Empaquetadura for removable or coupling nut.
Pieza posteriorsubséquent
Morceau Empaquetadura
Joint
Morceau subséquent slip washer, and basin Removable Removable
Removable Non-
Non-
Non-
removable
removable
Joint non-removable
Removable removable
Non-removable
washer to body shank. Removible Détachable
No removible
Non détachable
stopper as Stirrup
Stirrup
Estribo
desired. (see #6) ÉtrierEstribo
Étrier
1/2”
Stirrup
Stirrup
Stirrup
Stirrup
1/4” 1/4”
Estribo SEA
Removable Non-
Étrier
V-clip LAN T
Removable
removable
Non-removable
Removable
Removible Non-removable
No removible 1/4”
Removible
Détachable No removible
Non détachable 1/4”1/4”
ADH SEAL ADH
ESIV ANT ESIV
1/4” E E
Rigid /Swing Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck & Hanger
V.B. Gooseneck 1/2” 1/2”
Stirrup
Stirrup
Rigid Rigid
Rigid
/Swing Estribo/Swing
/Swing
Stirrup
Estribo
Étrier
Convertible
Convertible
Convertible Spout Spout
Spout Installation
Installation
Installation 1/2” - Gooseneck & V.B. Gooseneck
- Gooseneck
- Gooseneck
1/2”1/2” & V.B.
& V.B. Gooseneck
Gooseneck
Étrier
6. Attach pivot rod 7. Tighten pivot rod 1/2” 8. Insert pop up rod 9. Push pivot ball rod to 10. Test the assembly for
1/4”
assembly to body assembly nut as through holes in lowest position, proper function and
shank. 1/4”
1/4” required to seal and hanger and hand squeeze v-clip and make adjustments as
provide smooth tighten. slide pivot ball rod necessary. Once set, Spaces may be
operation. Centerset
Centersetand
through andSingle
v-clip and Basin
Single Fittings
Basin Fittings
tighten securely. required for thin
wares such as
stainless steel
Centerset and Single Basin
1/2” Fittings appropriate hole in Podrán necesitarse
Centerset
Centersetand Single
and Basin
Single Basin Fittings
Fittings hanger. delgados tales como
el acero inoxidable
Des matériaux minces
1/2” comme l’acier inoxydable
1/2” peuvent nécessiter des
Centerset
Forand Single Basin
additional Fittingsassistance, call 800/TEC-TRUE (800-832-8783) or visit our website at chicagofaucets.com.
technical
1
Spaces may may
Spaces be be
required for thin
required for thin
wares suchsuch
wares as as
stainless steelsteel
Spacers may stainless
Podrán necesitarse
and Single Basin Fittings be required
Spacers may
Podrán
espacios paranecesitarse
productos
Spacers may espacios
delgados tales para
delgados
el acero
comoproductos
tales como
inoxidable
Spec Seq#: 34
ADH
ESIV
ADH E Ensure o-rings
ADH are in place
E
Deck Mounted Faucets Installation Instructions DHESIVE
Spaces may be SIVE A ESIV Asegúrese que los sellos
required for thin E anulares estén en su sitio
wares such as S’assurer que les
stainless steel joints annulaires sont
Rigid (continued)
Podrán necesitarse en place
/Swing Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneckespacios
& V.B. Gooseneck
para productos
delgados tales como
el acero inoxidable
Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck & V.B. Rigid
Gooseneck Des matériaux minces
/Swing Convertible Spout Installation - Gooseneck & V.B. Gooseneck
Rigid/Swing Convertible Spout Installation RGD1 and RGD2 Figure A
Only Spout Installation
Pin Placement 1-9/32˝ DIA.
Option 2 (33mm)
Split 1/8˝
washers washer
Pin Placement
Option 1
Ensure o-rings
are in place ADH
ESIVE Figure B
1. Remove outlet and For Swing Spouts For Rigid Spouts Only 3. Insert spout assembly
S’assurer que les
assemble spout nut 2a. Assemble two plastic 2b. Place 1/8˝ thick plastic firmly into spout base
en place

over outlet end, until split washers to spout washer into spoutSpout
base Installation
and tighten spout nut.& V.B. Gooseneck 1. Apply supplied adhesive
Rigid /Swing Convertible - Gooseneck to threads of spout and
1075120
it rests on shoulder joint and discard 1/8˝ bore and discard
of spout joint. thick plastic washer. plastic split washers. Rigid Only Spout Installation tighten spout into base.
Back off as necessary for
centered position.
Chicago Faucets deck mounted faucets come with cartridges already installed. Instructions for adjusting the timing on
metering cartridges are shown below. For complete instructions on servicing and replacing Chicago Faucets cartridges,
see our Cartridge Maintenance/Repair Guide, available online at chicagofaucets.com/pdf/CF1081.pdf. You may also
order a copy of the Guide by calling 800-832-8783. Figure C
Supplemental Bubbler Installation Instructions for 748-665CP, 748-665FHCP, 748-244CP and 748-244FHCP Index
Button
Installation with Anti-Rotational Pins (Figure A) Set Screw
ADH
1. Choose Two holes in bubbler base that corresponds with the deck/sink drilling and tap each anti-rotationalESIV pin with a
E
hammer until seated. There should be approximately 1/8˝ length of pin exposed when fully seated. Handle
2. Drill 3/16˝ diameter holes on 1-9/32˝ centers and 1/4˝ deep in the deck/sink for anti-rotational pins if 2. Hand tighten sleeve Adjustment Nut
mounting holesConvertible
Rigid /Swing are not provided.
Spout Installation - Gooseneck & V.B. Gooseneck until flush with body.
3. Attach Bubbler to deck using the anti-rotational washer provided.

Typical Body
Flow Adjustments (Figure B)
1. The projection of water flow can be adjusted by using the 1/8˝ hex wrench provided. Insert hex wrench and rotate
control clockwise or counterclockwise until the desired flow is achieved.
Note: Bubblers have been designed to utilize the 722-013K inlet flow control.
To insure proper performance, it is imperative that the 722-013K be installed with each bubbler.
Figure D
How To Adjust (Top View)
1. With cartridge and handle installed in body and water supply turned on, purge cartridge of air by pushing handle completely
down 4-8 times repeatedly, then check timing cycle.
2. To change cycle time, remove index button, then handle using a 3/32˝ hex wrench. (Figure C)
3. Using your fingers, change height of adjustment nut by 1/4 turn only. Turn adjustment nut clockwise to increase cycle time Decrease Time
or counter-clockwise to decrease cycle time. (Figure D)
4. If filter and lower valve cartridge have been removed from fitting, replace them by inserting filter first.
5. If gasket has been removed from the actuator assembly, replace it by inserting into bottom of actuator assembly.
6. Assemble actuator assembly to body and tighten to 12-15 ft-lbs torque.

Increase Time
7. Replace handle and verify desired cycle time. NOTE: TIMING MUST BE CHECKED WITH HANDLE IN PLACE.
8. If additional adjustment is necessary, repeat steps 3 through 7 until desired cycle time is achieved. Figure E
Note: Some new installations might produce a slight closing noise. This is normally the result of air trapped in the cartridge. The noise will dissipate over time.
9. Attach handle and tighten set screw with a 3/32˝ hex wrench. If index button is included, snap into handle.
Set Screw
Cap Location
Timing Adjustment on Push-Button (NAIAD) & Tip-Tap Self-Closing Cartridges Gasket for ‘SLO’
1. Turn off water supply. Cartridges
2. Remove cartridge from valve body with 1-1/4˝ flat hex wrench. Use care to prevent damage to cap hex nut.
Timing
3. Locate timing hex nut on bottom of dashpot. Turn hex nut clockwise to increase cycle time or counter-clockwise to decrease cycle time (Figure E). Note: Turn Hex Nut
in 90 degree increments for each adjustment cycle. Fill the dashpot with water, slide it over the bottom of the cartridge, and place both back into the faucet body.
4. Place cartridge into faucet body and fully tighten cap nut with wrench to 15-25 ft-lbs torque. Turn on water and verify cycle time by depressing cartridge fully. Figure F
Note: Insure that cap gasket is in place within cap before assembly into valve body.
NOTE: Cartridges with ‘SLO’ designation include an external timing adjustment via a set screw in the top of the handle. Using a 7/64˝ hex wrench, turn the set screw
clockwise to decrease cycle time or counter-clockwise to increase cycle time. (Figure E)
External
Timing
Set Screw
Timing Adjustment on a Push-Tilt Self-Closing Cartridge
For Push-Tilt cartridges, the timing adjustment procedure is identical to Push-Button Self-Closing Cartridges, except for an external timing adjustment feature
that is integral to Push-Tilt handles. This adjustment can be used for minor cycle time changes without the need to remove the cartridge from the body. Cap Gasket
or external adjustment, lift handle slightly to expose 1/16˝ hex socket set screw (Figure F). Turn adjustment set screw clockwise to increase cycle time or
F
counter-clockwise to decrease cycle time. If greater timing adjustment is required, follow the instructions for adjusting the timing on a Push-Button Self-Closing Cartridge.
Timing Hex Nut
Care and Maintenance

All Chicago Faucets fittings are designed and engineered to meet or exceed industry performance standards. Care should be taken when cleaning this product. Do not use abrasive cleaners,
chemicals or solvents as they can result in surface damage. Use mild soap with warm water for cleaning and protecting the surface of Chicago Faucets fittings.
For additional technical assistance, call 800/TEC-TRUE (800-832-8783) or visit our website at chicagofaucets.com.
CHICAGO FAUCETS LIMITED WARRANTY
TO WHOM DOES THIS WARRANTY APPLY? — The Company extends the following limited warranty to the original user only.
WHAT DOES THIS WARRANTY COVER AND HOW LONG DOES IT LAST?
This warranty covers the following Commercial Products:
LIFETIME FAUCET WARRANTY — The “Faucet,” defined as any metal cast, forged, stamped or formed portion of the Product, not including electronic or moving parts or other
products separately covered by this Limited Warranty or water restricting components or other components, is warranted against material manufacturing defects for the life of the Product.
FIVE YEAR FAUCET WARRANTY — Certain Products and portions of the Product are warranted against material manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase. Products warranted against material
manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase are referred to by the product numbers 42X, 43X, 15XX and E-Tronic® - 4X, 5X, 6X, 7X, 8X and 9X. All zinc die cast portions of Product are warranted against
material manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase.
THREE YEAR ELECTRONICS WARRANTY — Electronic components, including the solenoid, are warranted for three (3) years from the date of installation.
FIVE YEAR CARTRIDGE WARRANTY — The “Cartridge”, defined as the metal portion of any Product typically referred to by the product numbers containing 1-099, 1-100, 377X, The Chicago Faucet Company
217X and 274X, excluding any rubber or plastic components, is warranted against material manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase. 2100 South Clearwater Drive
All Cartridges included in the Company’s Single Control or Shower Products also are warranted against material manufacturing defects for a period of five (5) years from the date of Product purchase.
ONE YEAR FINISH WARRANTY – COMMERCIAL — For Products used in commercial applications, the finish of the Product is warranted against material manufacturing defects for a period Phone: 847/803-5000
of one (1) year from the date of Product purchase.
Fax: 847/803-5454
OTHER WARRANTIES — All other Products not covered above are warranted against material manufacturing defects for a period of one (1) year from the date of Product purchase. Technical: 800/832-8783
Other restrictions and limitations apply. For complete warranty details, call Chicago Faucets Customer Service at 847-803-5000 or visit chicagofaucets.com. www.chicagofaucets.com
2 © 2013 Chicago Faucet Company TAG-258 08/13

Spec Seq#: 39
Z1180 Solids Interceptor

®
Operation and Maintenance Instructions
Inlet/Outlet Flow Rate Approx.

Inches GPM Wt. Lbs.
[L] [kg]
1 1/2, 2** [38, 51] 15 [57] 6 [3]
1103238
SIZING
There are no sizing requirements for this interceptor, except to specify the inlet and outlet size. All units are made with a
standard 2 [51] pipe size inlet and outlet, reduced to 1 1/2 [38] with a bushing when specified and are capable of handling
drainage volumes standard to their respective pipe size.
DESIGN
The Zurn Z1180 Solids Interceptor is designed to recover all types of solids from precious metal particles, to plaster, clay
or similar materials. This is accomplished through the principal of gravity separation. Particles of various sizes and
weights are trapped in the bucket.
OPERATION
The waste water flows from the inlet piping into the removable bucket, passing through the screen, into the main body
chamber, then exits the interceptor to the sanitary drain system.
MAINTENANCE
Cleaning should be done on a regular basis, either before or after the bucket becomes clogged. First unlatch and remove
the cover/bucket assembly, twist and lift the bucket to remove from cover, take out the screen and clean out all debris.
Replace the screen in the bucket, next place the bucket back on the cover, twist to reattach. Make certain cover gasket is
intact and clean. Apply a light coating of oil on the cover gasket, which helps prevent cover gasket from adhering to cover
and aids in maintaining a complete seal. The cover/bucket assembly should then be placed back in the unit, MAKING
SURE THE SCREEN IN THE BUCKET IS ON THE OUTLET SIDE AS SHOWN, and relatch to secure cover. Efficiency of
operation is directly related to the level of maintenance.
Form # IT59 Date: 2/8/07 C.N. No. 96173 Rev. B

ZURN INDUSTRIES, INC. ♦ SPECIFICATION DRAINAGE OPERATION ♦ 1801 Pittsburgh Ave. ♦ Erie, PA 16514
Phone: 814\455-0921 ♦ Fax: 814\454-7929 ♦ World Wide Web: www.zurn.com
In Canada: ZURN INDUSTRIES LIMITED ♦ 3544 Nashua Drive ♦ Mississauga, Ontario L4V1L2 ♦ Phone: 905\405-8272 Fax: 905\405-1292
Spec Seq#: 39
Z-1180 & Z-1184

Chemical Resistance Chart
For Composite Material in
Light Acid Concentration Environment Only
Key:
E = Excellent Corrosion Resistance
G = Good
1103238
F = Fair
P = Poor
General Outdoor E
Marine Outdoor E
General Industrial E
Water-pure E
Water-sea E
ACIDS
Acetic E
Boric E
Chromic F
Citric E
Fatty E
Formic E
Hydrochloric G
Hydrofluoric F-P
Nitric F
Phosphoric G
Picric G
Sulfuric G
BASES
Ammonium Hydroxide E
Potassium or Sodium Hydroxide F-G
Form # IT76 Date: 9/20/02 C.N. No. 89933 Rev

Spec Seq#: 39
SALTS
Aluminum Sulfate E
Ammonium
Chloride E
Nitrate E
Phosphate E
Sulfate E
1103238
Borax E
Copper Sulfate E
Ferric
Chloride E
Sulfate E
Magnesium
Chloride E
Sulfate E
Mercuric Chloride E
Nickel
Chloride E
Sulfate E
Potassium
Chloride E
Sulfate E
Sodium
Bicarbonate E
Bisulfate E
Chloride E
Hypochlorite E
Nitrate E
Phosphate E
Silicate E
Sulfate E
Thiosulfate E
Zinc
Chloride E
Sulfate E
Calcium Chloride E
Sodium Carbonate E
GASES (WET)
Ammonia E
Spec Seq#: 39
Carbon Dioxide E
Chlorine E
Hydrogen Sulfide E
Nitrogen Dioxide G-E
Sulfur Dioxide E
Carbon Disulfide E
1103238
SOLVENTS
Acetone E
Benzene E
Carbon Tetrachloride E
Ethyl Acetate E
Ethyl Alcohol E
Ethyl Ether E
Ethylene Dichloride E
Ethylene Glyco1 E
Freon E
Methyl Alcohol E
Methyl Ethyl Ketone E
Methylene Chloride E
Perchloroethylene E
Trichloroethylene E
Toluene E
Xylene E
OILS, FUELS AND OTHER

ASTM No. 1 Oil E
ASTM No. 3 Oil E
Detergents E
Gasoline E
Grease E
Jet Fuel E
Hydraulic Fluid (Ester) E
Kerosene E
Motor Oil E

Spec Seq#: 39
Z1180/Z1184 Solids Interceptor

®
Parts List
Dimensional Data (inches and [ mm ]) are Subject to Manufacturing Tolerances and Change Without Notice
1103238
Form # IT101 Date: 4/19/07 C.N. No. 96485 Rev. B
ZURN INDUSTRIES, INC. ♦ SPECIFICATION DRAINAGE OPERATION ♦ 1801 Pittsburgh Ave. ♦ Erie, PA 16514
Phone: 814/455-0921 ♦ Fax: 814/454-7929 ♦ World Wide Web: www.zurn.com
In Canada: ZURN INDUSTRIES LIMITED ♦ 3544 Nashua Drive ♦ Mississauga, Ontario L4V1L2 ♦ Phone: 905/405-8272 Fax: 905/405-1292
Spec Seq#: 40
*****
SS-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 41

NN

NN

NN
498

NN

NN

NN

NN

NN
710089-100 Rev.A
Spec Seq#: 41

NN

NN

NN
498

NN

NN

NN

NN

NN
710089-100 FR Rév.A
Spec Seq#: 42
494
Spec Seq#: 43
®
AQUASPEC FAUCETS
MODEL - Z84300 SERIES
SINK FAUCET
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
MAXIMUM PRESSURE: 125 PSI
F
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE: 180O F
HANDLE NUT TORQUE: 15-20 FT - LBS.
152090
CARTRIDGE STYLE: QUARTER TURN CERAMIC DISK
1. 1/2” IP NIPPLE SHOULD PROTRUDE 3/8” FROM THE FINISHED WALL ON 8” CENTERS. SUPPLY PIPES SHOULD BE
SECURED TO SUPPORT THE FAUCET.
2. APPLY PIPE SEALANT TO 1/2” THREADS OF SUPPLY PIPE AND SCREW SUPPLY ARM ASSEMBLY (ITEM #5) ONTO PIPE.
POSITION SUPPLIES SO THAT THE BODY CONNECTIONS END UP AT 8” CENTERS ON A HORIZONTAL PLANE.
3. INSERT SINK FAUCET BODY (ITEM #4) TO SUPPLY ARMS PLACING GASKET (ITEM #5A) BETWEEN BODY AND SUPPLY
ARM.
4. ASSEMBLE SPOUT TO BODY USING HARDWARE.
5. INSTALL WALL BRACE BY SCREWING THE SUPPORT ROD INTO THE THREADED SPOUT CONNECTION. ADJUST THE
SUPPORT ROD TO DESIRED LENGTH AND SECURE TO FINISHED WALL USING THE TWO WOOD SCREWS PROVIDED.
NOTE: SUPPORT FOR FINISHED WALL IS RECOMMENDED WHERE WALL BRACE MOUNTS FOR MAXIMUM SUPPORT.
6. TURN WATER SUPPLY ON AND OPERATE FAUCET CHECKING FOR LEAKS.
7. IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO SHUT WATER OFF AND REMOVE CARTRIDGES TO CLEAN SUPPLY LINES. CARTRIDGES
CAN BE REMOVED BY FIRST REMOVING THE HANDLES. COLOR INDEXES CAN BE REMOVED BY INSERTING A PIN
INTO THE HOLE ON THE UNDERSIDE OF THE HANDLE. AFTER THE HANDLES HAVE BEEN REMOVED UNSCREW THE
HANDLE NUTS AND PULL OUT ON THE CARTRIDGE. ZURN WILL SUPPLY HANDLE PORT PLUGS (ZURN PART
#61094001) AT YOUR REQUEST.
8. REPLACE CARTRIDGES IN BODY AND HAND TIGHTEN HANDLE NUTS. PLACE HANDLES ON THE CARTRIDGE STEM
AND LOCATE THEM AS DESIRED. TIGHTEN HANDLE NUTS.
9. REPLACE HANDLE SCREWS AND COLOR INDEX BUTTON.
10. IF NECESSARY, INSTALL AERATOR INTO SPOUT AND HAND TIGHTEN. IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO UNSCREW AND
CLEAN AERATOR AT START-UP.
CAUTION-FOR INSTALLATION WITH ATMOSPHERIC VACUUM BREAKERS (AVB’S). THIS DEVICE SHOULD NEVER
BE USED IN INSTALLATIONS THAT ARE UNDER CONTINUOUS PRESSURE WHEN INSTALLED WITH SPOUTS HAVING
ATMOSPHERIC VACUUM BREAKERS (AVB’S). THEREFORE, NEVER PLACE A SELF-CLOSING, SHUT-OFF VALVE DOWN-
STREAM OF AN AVB.
SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS
1. YOUR ZURN AQUASPEC FAUCET IS FURNISHED WITH INTEGRAL SUPPLY STOPS (ITEM #4B) TO PROVIDE A COMPLETE
SHUT OFF OF THE WATER SUPPLY. TURN SCREW STOPS INTO BODY USING 5/16” HEX KEY WRENCH UNTIL WATER
SHUTS OFF COMPLETELY. TURN STOP NO MORE THAN THREE (3) COMPLETE TURNS TO ACTIVATE WATER FLOW.
ZURN INDUSTRIES, LLC. ♦ COMMERCIAL BRASS OPERATION ♦ 5900 ELWIN BUCHANAN DRIVE ♦ SANFORD NC 27330
Phone: 1-800-997-3876 ♦ Fax: 919-775-3541 ♦ World Wide Web: www.zurn.com
In Canada: ZURN INDUSTRIES LIMITED ♦ 3544 Nashua Drive ♦ Mississauga, Ontario L4V1L2 ♦ Phone: 905-405-8272 Fax: 905-405-1292
PAGE 1 OF 2 Form # CF732 Date: 12/20/11
C.N. No. 128437 Rev. F
Spec Seq#: 43
MAINTENANCE
1. YOUR ZURN AQUASPEC FAUCET HAS A HIGHLY POLISHED NICKEL CHROME PLATED FINISH. CLEAN WITH SOAP
AND WATER OR A MILD CLEANER WHICH IS SAFE FOR CHROME PLATING. DO NOT USE ACIDS OR TOILET BOWL
CLEANER AS THEY WILL DAMAGE THE FINISH.
2. AQUASPEC FAUCETS CONTAIN CERAMIC DISK CARTRIDGES WHICH REQUIRE NO MAINTENANCE. TO REMOVE THE
CARTRIDGE, SHUT THE WATER OFF, LOOSEN THE HANDLE NUTS AND PULL UP ON THE CARTRIDGE.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
152090
COLD WATER CARTRIDGE 59517001
HOT WATER CARTRIDGE 59517002
INDEX BUTTONS G60500
STOP PLUG ASSEMBLY G67807
Z843M1 PICTURED
Z84300 PARTS LIST
ITEM QTY ITEM QTY
1 59440001 HANDLE NUT 2 4B G67807 STOP PLUG ASSEMBLY 2

2 59517001 SHORT COLD CARTRIDGE 1 59536002 STOP PLUG 1
3 59517002 SHORT HOT CARTRIDGE 1 58155013 O-RING 1
4 66168001 SINK BODY ASSEMBLY 1 5 G65336 SHORT SUPPLY ARM ASS’Y. 2
4A 66156001 SINK BODY 1 5A 59748001 GASKET 2
PAGE 2 OF 2
Form # CF732 Date: 12/20/11
C.N. No. 128437 Rev. F
Spec Seq#: 44
115578
Spec Seq#: 46
*****
EWC-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 47
EMABFTL8WS*1E EMABFTLDDWS*E LMABFTL8WS*1E LMABFTLDDWS*E
INSTALLATION, CARE & USE MANUAL

Manual de Instalación, Cuidado y Utilización
Manuel d’installation/entretien/utilisation
EMABF8TL & LMABF8TL Series Bottle Filling Stations & Coolers
1211249
EMABF8TL & LMABF8TL Serie Botella Bombas y Enfriadores
EMABF8TL & LMABF8TL Stations de Remplissage de Bouteille Série et Refroidisseurs
Page 1 1000001718 (Rev. J - 12/17)

Spec Seq#: 47
Note: Danger! Electric shock hazard. Disconnect power before servicing unit.
Nota: peligro! Peligro de descarga eléctrica. Desconecte antes de reparar la unidad.
Remarque : Danger ! Risque d'électrocution. Débrancher avant de réparer l'appareil.
Pictured is unit only without bottle filler.

Uses HFC-134A refrigerant
Usa refrigerante HFC-134A 3 5 18 3
8
Utilise du fluide frigorigéne HFC-134A
1211249
23
24
30 30
12
25
26
20 2
4B
See Fig. 4 for Push Bar Mechanism
Vea la Fig. 4 para el Mechanisme de la Barra de Empuje
Voir Fig. 4 pour ie Mechanisme de Barre-poussoir
30 4A
15 7, 13
9
30
37 24
17
14
30
38 22
36
39 40
11 26 25
21 6
Fig.1
NOTE: Non-refrigerated units do not include all electrical and refrigeration components shown above. Other components and rough-in are the same as shown.
NOTA: Las unidades no frigorificadas no incluyen todos los componentes eléctricos y de la refrigeración demostrados arriba. Otros componentes y a’spero-en
son iguales según lo demostrado.
NOTE: Les unités non frigorifiées n’incluent pas tous les composants électriques et de réfrigération montrés ci-dessus. D’autres composants et rugueux-dans sont
identiques que montrés.
1000001718 (Rev. J - 12/17) Page 2

7/16"
O 11mm 17 7/8"
454mm
MOUNTING HOLES 7" 7"
EMABFTL8WS 3 9/16"
(6) 178mm 178mm 90mm
15"
381mm
5 3/4" 5 3/4"
146mm 146mm 18 7/8"
479mm
ACTIVATION 18 1/16"
SENSOR 459mm 18 5/8"
472mm
HANGER BRACKET
3 3/16" 5 3/4" 5 3/4"

82mm 146mm 146mm
1 3/8" 1 3/8"
EMABFTL8WS*1E
35mm 35mm
6 1/2" 1 3/8" 1 3/8" 5/16" (8mm) DIA.
165mm 35mm 35mm (10 HOLES)
4 9/16"
116mm
58 9/16" E
CL
1488mm D
11/16" E
7 1/4" 18mm
185mm 8"
F A 203mm
45 9/16" CL 39 1/2"
EMABFTLDDWS*E
1157mm 1003mm
C
Page 3
33"
Fig. 2
37 1/2" 838mm
952mm ORIFICE
2 9/16" 2 7/16" F HEIGHT
65mm 63mm 25 1/8"
638mm 4 1/8"
5" 10" 20 1/8" 31 15/16" 105mm
127mm 254mm 511mm 811mm
RIM HEIGHT
3 1/2" 18 3/4"
20 3/8" 89mm
B 476mm
*
518mm
LMABFTL8WS*1E
27" 6 3/4"
4 1/2" 686mm 172mm
114mm 13 7/8"
352mm ADA 12 5/16"
6 1/4" REQUIREMENT*
159mm 313mm
FINISHED FLOOR
*
REDUCE HEIGHT BY 3" FOR INSTALLATION OF CHILDREN’S ADA COOLER *ADA REQUIREMENT
LMABFTLDDWS*E
*REQUISITO DE A.D.A.
*EXIGENCE ADA
LEGEND/LEYENDA/LÉGENDE LEGEND/LEYENDA/LÉGENDE
A = RECOMMENDED WATER SUPPLY LOCATION 3/8 O.D. UNPLATED COPPER TUBE CONNECT STUB WITH SHUT OFF (BY OTHERS) 3 IN. (76mm) D = ELECTRICAL SUPPLY (3) WIRE RECESSED BOX DUPLEX OUTLET**
MAXIMUM OUT FROM WALL SUMINISTRO ELÉCTRICO (3) CAJA ENCHUFE DE ALAMBRE SALIDA DÚPLEX
La UBICACION 3/8 O RECOMENDADA de ABASTECIMIENTO DE AGUA. D. El TUBO del COBRE de UNPLATED CONECTA TALONARIO CON APAGO ALIMENTATION ÉLECTRIQUE (3) BOÎTIER ENCASTRÉ
(POR OTROS) 3 en. (76 Mm) el MAXIMO FUERA DE PARED E = INSURE PROPER VENTILATION BY MAINTAINING 6” (152 mm) (MIN.) CLEARANCE FROM CABINET LOUVERS TO WALL.
L’O.D de 3/8 d’EMPLACEMENT DE PROVISION D’EAU RECOMMANDE. LE TUBE DE CUIVRE DE UNPLATED CONNECTE STUB AVEC ETEINT (PAR ASEGURE UNA VENTILACIÓN ADECUADA MANTENIENDO UN ESPACIO E 6” (152 mm) (MÍN.) DE HOLGURA ENTRE LA REJILLA
LES AUTRES) 3 dans. (76 mm) le MAXIMUM HORS DU MUR DE VENTILACIÓN DEL MUEBLE Y LA PARED.
B = RECOMMENDED LOCATION FOR WASTE OUTLET 1-1/2” O.D. DRAIN STUB 2 IN. OUT FROM WALL ASSUREZ-VOUS UNE BONNE VENTILATION EN GARDANT 6” (152 mm) (MIN.) ENTRE LES ÉVENTS DE L’ENCEINTE ET LE MUR.
UBICACIÓN RECOMENDADA PARA EL DRENAJE DE SALIDA DE AGUA, DE 1-1/2” DE DIÁMETRO. El TALONARIO 2 FUERA DE PARED F = 7/16 BOLT HOLES FOR FASTENING UNIT TO WALL
EMPLACEMENT RECOMMANDÉ POUR LE DRAIN DE D.E. 1-1/2” DE SORTIE D’EAU. STUB 2 HORS DU MUR AGUJEROS DE LAS TUERCAS DE 7/16 PARA SUJETAR LA UNIDAD A LA PARED
C = 1-1/2” TRAP NOT FURNISHED TROUS D’ÉCROUS 7/16 POUR FIXER L’APPAREIL AU MUR
PURGADOR DE 1-1/2” NO PROPORCIONADO **NEW INSTALLATIONS MUST USE GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER (GFCI)
SIPHON 1-1/2” NON FOURNI **Las nuevas instalaciones deben utilizar el interruptor de circuito de tierra de la avería (GFCI)
**Les nouvelles installations doivent employer l’interrupteur de circuit moulu de défaut (GFCI)
1000001718 (Rev. J - 12/17)

Spec Seq#: 47
1211249
Spec Seq#: 47
IMPORTANT IMPORTANTE IMPORTANT

ALL SERVICE TO BE PERFORMED BY AN TODO EL SERVICIO DEBERÁ SER EFECTUADO POR TOUT ENTRETIEN DOIT ÊTRE EFFECTUÉ PAR
AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSON UNA PERSONA DE SERVICIO AUTORIZADA UN REPRÉSENTANT AUTORISÉ
HANGER BRACKETS & TRAP INSTALACIÓN DE FIJADOR DE INSTALLATION DU SIPHON ET DU
INSTALLATION SUSPENSIÓN Y DEL PURGADOR SUPPORT DE SUSPENSION
1) Remove hanger bracket fastened to back of 1) Quite el fijador de suspensión sujetados a la parte posterior 1) Retirez le support de suspension à l’arrière du refroidis-
cooler by removing one (1) screw. del enfriador quitando un (1) tornillo. seur en enlevant une (1) vis.
2) Mount the hanger bracket and trap as shown in 2) Monte el fijador de suspensión y quite el purgador como se 2) Installez le support et le siphon tel qu’indiqué à la
Figure 2. muestra en la Fig. 2. fig. 2.
NOTE: Hanger Bracket MUST be supported se- NOTA: El fijador de suspensión DEBE de ser sostenido con se- NOTE : Le support de suspension DOIT être bien retenu en
curely. Add fixture support carrier if wall will not guridad. Coloque portadores de soporte de instalaciones fijas place. Ajoutez des ferrures de fixation si le mur n’offre
provide adequate support. si la pared no proveerá un soporte adecuado. pas le soutien voulu.
IMPORTANT: IMPORTANTE: IMPORTANT :
1211249
• 4 1/8 in. (105mm) dimension from wall to center- • Se debe mantener una dimensión de 4 1/8 pulgadas (105mm) • Pour avoir une bonne position, on doit garder une
line of trap must be maintained for proper fit. desde la pared hasta la línea central del purgador para que dimension de 4 1/8 po. (105mm) du mur à l’axe central
• Anchor hanger securely to wall using all five (5) calce de forma adecuada. du siphon.
7/16" dia. mounting holes. • Ancle el suspensor de forma segura a la pared usando todos • Ancrez solidement le support au mur à l’aide des five
3) Install straight valve for 3/8" O.D. tube. los cinco (5) agujeros de montaje de 7/16" de diámetro. (5) trous de fixation d’un diam. 7/16 po.
3) Instale la válvula directa para el tubo de 3/8" de diámetro 3) Installez la soupape droite dans le tuyau de D.E. 3/8".
externo.
INSTALLATION OF COOLER INSTALACIÓN DEL ENFRIADOR DE AGUA INSTALLATION DU REFROIDISSEUR
4) Hang the cooler on the hanger bracket. Be 4) Suspenda el enfriador en el fijador de suspensión. Asegúrese 4) Installez le refroidisseur sur les supports en vous as-
certain the hanger bracket is engaged properly que el fijador de suspensión calce correctamente en las surant que ceux-ci sont bien installés dans les fentes à
in the slots on the cooler back as shown in Fig. ranuras de la parte posterior del enfriador como se indica en l’arrière du refroidisseur tel qu’indiqué à la figure 4.
4. la figura 4. 5) Dégagez les deux (2) vis retenant le panneau inférieur
5) Loosen the two (2) screws holding the lower front 5) Afloje los dos (2) tornillos que sostienen la parte inferior del avant au bas de la base du refroidisseur ainsi que
panel at the bottom of cooler base and two (2) panel en la parte inferior de la base del enfriador y los dos (2) deux (2) vis sur le dessus. Retirez le panneau avant et
screws at the top. Remove the front panel and tornillos en la parte superior. Quite el panel frontal y póngalo mettez-le de côté.
set aside. a un lado. 6) Connectez l’alimentation en eau. - Voir note 4 des
6) Connect water inlet line--See Note 4 of General 6) Conectar el tubo de entrada de agua. Ver la Nota 4 en las instructions générales.
Instructions. Instrucciones Generales. 7) Retirez l’écrou coulissant et le joint du siphon et
7) Remove the slip nut and gasket from the trap and 7) Quite la tuerca de retención y el obturador del purgador y installez-les sur la conduite résiduaire du refroidisseur
install them on the cooler waste line making sure instálelos en el tubo de desagüe asegurándose que la parte en vous assurant que le bout de la conduite entre bien
that the end of the waste line fits into the trap. final del tubo de desagüe calce en el purgador. Ensamble la dans le siphon. Installez l’écrou coulissant et le joint au
Assemble the slip nut and gasket to the trap and tuerca de la ranura y el obturador y apriete en forma segura. siphon et resserrez bien.
tighten securely.
START UP PUESTA EN MARCHA MISE EN MARCHE

Also See General Instructions Vea Manual de los Instrucciones Generales Voir Manuel de les Directives Generales
8) Stream height is factory set for 45-50 PSI 8) Altura del chorro viene configurado de fábrica para el suminis- 8) Hauteur de flux est réglé en usine pour la fourniture
supply. If supply pressure varies greatly from this, tro de 45-50 PSI. Si la presión del suministro varía demasiado de 45 à 50 lb/po2. Si la pression varie beaucoup de ce
adjust screw, accessible by removing front push de este valor, ajuste el tornillo, sacando el panel frontal de point, ajustez la vis que l’on peut atteindre en retirant le
panel (Item 35 , Fig. 4). CW adjustment will raise empuje (Artículo 35, Figura 4). El ajuste en el sentido de las panneau avant (article 35, fig. 4). Si vous ajustez dans
stream and CCW adjustment will lower stream. manecillas del reloj elevará el chorro y contra el sentido de las le sens des aiguilles d’une montre, le jet augmentera
For best adjustment, stream should hit basin manecillas del reloj lo bajará. Para un mejor juste, el chorro et dans le sens contraire, le jet diminuera. Le meilleur
approximately 6-1/2” (165mm) from bubbler. deberá pegar en el estanque a una distancia de aproximada- ajustement est lorsque le jet frappe le bassin à environ
9) Replace the front panel and secure by retighten- mente 6½” (165mm) del borboteador. 6-1/2" (165mm) du barboteur.
ing four (4) screws. 9) Vuelva a colocar el panel frontal y asegúrelo apretando nue- 9) Replacez le panneau avant et fixez le en place en
10) If a taste, odor or sediment problem is prevalent, vamente los cuatro (4) tornillos. resserrant les quatre (4) vis.
try installing our water filter module. 10) Si se suscitara un problema de sabor, olor o sedimentación, 10) S’il existe un problème de goût, d’odeur ou de sédiment,
trate de instalar nuestro módulo de filtro de agua. essayez d’installer notre module filtre d’eau.
HANGER BRACKET
FIJADOR DE SUSPENSIÓN
SUPPORT DE SUSPENSION
COOLER BACK
ARRIÈRE DU REFROIDISSEUR
Fig. 3
1000001718 (Rev. J - 12/17) Page 4

Spec Seq#: 47
PUSH BAR MECHANISM

29 MECANISMO DE BARRA DE EMPUJE
19
29 MÉCANISME DU BOUTON-POUSSOIR
19
34 20
27
2 A
1211249
1
29 29
35 19 27
33
19
29 16 B
10 29
25 19
30 C 27 Fig. 4
Water Valve Mechanism - ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE: LEGEND/LEYENDA/LÉGENDE
- Turn adjustment screw “Counter-Clockwise” until water flow A) Note: Water flow direction
from bubbler starts. Nota: Dirección del flujo de agua
- Turn adjustment screw “Clockwise” until water flow stops, THEN turn Note: Direction de l’eau
an additional 1/2 turn. B) Adjust this screw to eliminate mechanism
NOTE: Adjustments stated above are viewed from underneath unit “Free Play” or continuous flow from bubbler
(bottom side of dispenser panel) conditions. (See ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE)
NOTE: If continuous flow occurs at the end of the compressor cycle, turn Adjuste este tornillo para eliminar el mecanismo
cold control counterclockwise 1/4 turn. de “juego libre” o el flujo continuo del borboteador
(vea PROCEDIMIENTO DE AJUSTE)
Mecanismo de la Válvula de Agua-PROCEDIMIENTO DE AJUSTE: Ajustez cette vis pour éliminer tout “jeu” du
- Gire el tornillo de ajuste “en sentido contrario de las manecillas del mécanisme ou tout débit continu du barboteur
reloj” hasta que comience el flujo de agua del borboteador. (voir PROCÉDURE DE RÉGLAGE)
- Gire el tornillo de ajuste “en el sentido de las manecillas del reloj” hasta C) Stream height adjustment (see note #8)
que el flujo de agua se detenga, DESPUÉS gire una media vuelta Ajuste de la altura del chorro (vea la nota #8)
adicional. Ajustement de la hauteur du jet (voir la note #8)
NOTA: Los ajustes especificados anteriormente son correctos viendo
desde la parte de abajo de la unidad (parte inferior del panel del
OVERLOAD
distribuidor). 3
NOTA: Si hay un flujo continuo al final del ciclo del compresor, girar el
tornillo del control en contra del sentido de las agujas 1 2
del reloj 1/4 de vuelta. COLD CONTROL
(WATER)
COMPRESSOR
Mécanisme de soupape d’eau - PROCÉDURE DE RÉGLAGE : C
- Tournez la vis de réglage dans le sens contraire aux aiguilles d’une
montre jusqu’à ce que le débit d’eau du barboteur commence. S M
- Tournez la vis de réglage dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre
jusqu’à ce que le débit d’eau du barboteur s’arrête, PUIS tournez RELAY
6 5
encore de 1/2 tour. BLK
2 FAN
NOTE: Les ajustements sont décrits tels qu’on les voit d’en dessous de 3
l’appareil (côté inférieur du panneau distributeur). 1
WHT GND
NOTE: S’il y a débit continu à la fin du cycle du compresseur, tournez la
commande d’eau froide vers le côté gauche de 1/4 de tour.
Fig. 5
115V Wiring Diagram
Diagrama de Cableado de 115 Voltios
Schéma de Câblage de 115 Volts
Page 5 1000001718 (Rev. J - 12/17)

Spec Seq#: 47
7/16” BOLT HOLES FOR MOUNTING

FASTENING UNIT TO WALL TOP COVER SCREWS
UNIT CENTER LINE 41
1211249
Fig. 6 Fig. 7
BRACKET & SCREWS
Fig. 8 Fig. 9
Bottle Filler Installation Instructions

1) Remove two (2) mounting screws with 5/32” Allen wrench holding top cover to Bottle Filler (See Fig. 9). Remove top cover. Note do not discard mounting
screws, they will be needed to reinstall top cover.
2) Remove wall mounting plate from Bottle Filler. Place wall plate against wall on top of basin. Center the wall plate side to side with the basin. Mark
the six (6) mounting holes with a pencil (See Fig. 6).
3) Remove wall mounting plate from wall. NOTE: Mounting plate MUST be supported securely. Add fixture support carrier if wall will not provide adequate
support.
4) Install wall mounting plate to wall using six (6) 7/16” obround mounting holes (mounting bolts not included) (See Fig. 6). Use appropriate fasteners for
your wall type.
5) Feed power cord & 3/8” water line through hole in tower/basin gasket (See Fig 8).
6) Install gasket on bottom of bottle filler tower with gasket support bracket and (2) screws (See Fig 9).
7) Lay Bottle Filler on water cooler basin and cut insulation from tube even with bottom of gasket, remove this insulation from the 3/8” tube, but do not discard.
Feed the power cord and waterline through the hole on top of water cooler. NOTE: To prevent scratching the basin place a towel or soft
cloth over the entire basin when working above it.
8) With the power cord and waterline through hole on top of water cooler place Bottle Filler on the three (3) angled tabs protruding from the wall
mounting plate installed on wall. Make sure round boss in gasket fits in hole of basin. (See Fig. 12).
9) Once Bottle Filler is installed on wall plate tabs, water line and power cord are installed properly, push top of Bottle Filler toward
wall and line up top cover two (2) holes.
10) Reinstall Top Cover on Bottle Filler (See Fig. 7) with two mounting screws from step 1 above. Caution, do not over tighten screws.
11) Install remaining tube insulation to the water line from bottle filler, connect Bottle Filler waterline inside of the water cooler by connecting the 3/8” water line to the tee.
12) Install filter cartridge, remove filter from carton, remove protective cap, attach filter to filter head by firmly inserting into head and rotating filter
clockwise. NOTE: If existing plumbing rough in locations (Drain, Water In, and Electric Supply) do not allow the filter to be mounted inside the cooler cabinet
the filter can be installed horizontally below the unit. A retrofit kit is available to mount the filter beneath the cooler.
13) Turn water supply on and inspect for leaks. Fix all leaks before continuing.
14) Once unit has been inspected for leaks and any leaks found corrected, plug Bottle Filler and unit into wall. Be sure to reinstall fuse to the circuit or
switch the circuit breaker back to the “ON” position.
15) Once power is applied to Bottle Filler, the GREEN LED light should illuminate showing good filter status along with the LCD Bottle Counter.
16) Verify proper dispensing by placing cup, hand, or any opaque object in front of sensor area and verify water dispenses. Note: the first initial dispenses
might have air in line which may cause a sputter. This will be eliminated once all air is purged from the line.
17) Once unit tests out, install Lower Panel back on water cooler(s). Unit is now ready for use.
1000001718 (Rev. J - 12/17) Page 6

Spec Seq#: 47
BF11 - BF12 PROGRAM

SETTING THE CONTROL BOARD
VERIFY CONTROL BOARD SOFTWARE Continued from below:
1) To verify the software program of the control board the unit will 2) When the display changes to “SETTINGS”, depress the button again.
need to be shut down and restarted. The chiller (if present) does The display will change to show
not need to be shut down and restarted. “RNG SET” - Range set for IR sensor.
2) The units lower panel must be open to access the power cord and “UNIT TYP” - Type of unit (REFRIG or NON-RFRG)
wall outlet. “FLT SIZE” - Select filter capacity
3) Shut down the unit by unplugging the power cord from the wall “RST BCNT” - Reset bottle count
outlet. 3) When display shows “UNIT TYPE” push program button once the
4) Restart the unit by plugging the power cord back into the wall display will show current value. Can be REFRIG or NON-RFRG
outlet. 4) Push button once to change value. Once value is selected the display
1211249
5) Upon start up, the bottle count display will show the software will show the new value. (Can be REFRIG or NON-RFRG)
designation of BF11 or BF12. “REFRIG“ - stands for refrigerated product. In this setting the flow rate is
ACCESSING THE PROGRAMMING BUTTON estimated at 1.0 gallon per minute.
1) To access the program button, remove the top cover of the bottle- “NON-RFRG“ - stands for nonrefrigerated product. In this setting the
filler. Remove the two (2) screws holding top cover to bottle-filler flow rate is estimated at 1.5 gallons per minute. Both “REFRIG“ and
with a 5/32” allen wrench. Remove top cover. Do not discard “NON-RFRG“ simulate 1 bottle equal to 20 oz.
mounting screws, they will be needed to reinstall the top cove after 5) Allow approximately 4 seconds to pass and the display will return to
programming operations are completed. The programming button bottle counter and be in run mode.
is located at the top right side of the unit on the control board. RESETTING BOTTLE COUNT
NOTE: When applicable, there is also an alternate reset button 1) Depress the program button for approximately 2 seconds until the
located on the lower part of the water cooler. After removing display changes then release. The display will change and scroll
the bottom cover, the reset button will be located on the left through two messages:
side of the cooler, mounted on the side panel support. “RST FLTR” – Reset Filter Status LED
RESET THE FILTER MONITOR “SETTINGS” – System Settings Sub Menu
1) Instructions apply to filtered units only. If the program button is not pushed again the display will scroll through
2) Depress the program button for approximately 2 seconds until the two messages above for three cycles and then default back to bottle
the display changes then release. The display will change and count and be back in run mode.
scroll through two messages: 2) When the display changes to “SETTINGS”, depress the button again.
“RST FLTR” – Reset Filter Monitor The display will change to show:
“SETTINGS” – System Settings Sub Menu “RNG SET”- Range set for IR sensor.
If the program button is not pushed again the display will scroll “UNIT TYP” - Type of unit (REFRIG or NON-RFRG)
through the two messages above for three cycles and then default “FLT SIZE” - Select filter capacity
back to bottle count and be back in run mode. “RST BCNT” - Reset bottle count
3) When the display changes to “RST FLTR”, depress the button If the button is not pushed again the display will scroll through the four
again. The display will change to show “FLTR =”. Depress the messages above for three cycles and return to run mode.
button again and the display will show “FLTR =0” 3) When display shows “RST BCNT” push program button once the
4) The Green LED should be illuminated indicating that the visual display will show current value, e.g. “0033183”.
filter monitor has been reset. 4) Once display shows current value push the program button once more
SETTING RANGE OF THE IR SENSOR WHERE APPLICABLE to reset back to 0. The display will show BTLCT = 0 for approximately 2
1) Depress the program button for approximately 2 seconds until seconds and then return to run mode showing 00000000 bottles.
the display changes then release. The display will change and NOTE: Once the bottle count is reset to zero there is no way to
scroll through two messages: return to the previous bottle count.
“RST FLTR” – Reset Filter Status LED 5) Testing the bottle counter:
“SETTINGS” – System Settings Sub Menu REFRIG units: Place bottle or hand in front of sensor for approximately
If the program button is not pushed again the display will scroll 9 seconds to see bottle counter count 00000001,
through the two messages above for three cycles and then default (This is based on filling a 20 oz. bottle).
back to bottle count and be back in run mode. NON-RFRG units: Place bottle or hand in front of sensor for
2) When the display changes to “SETTINGS”, depress the button approximately 6 seconds to see bottle counter count 00000001,
again. The display will change to show (This is based on filling a 20 oz bottle).
“RNG SET” - Range set for IR sensor. SETTING FILTER CAPACITY
“UNIT TYP” - Type of unit (REFRIG or NON-RFRG) 1) Depress the program button for approximately 2 seconds until the
“FLT SIZE” - Select filter capacity display changes then release. The display will change and scroll through
“RST BCNT” - Reset bottle count two messages:
3) When display shows “RNG SET” push program button once the “RST FLTR” – Reset Filter Status LED
display will show current value (can be 1 – 10) e.g. “RNG = 3”. “SETTINGS” – System Settings Sub Menu
4) Once display shows current value push the program button to If the program button is not pushed again the display will scroll through
scroll through value of 1 – 10. Select the desired range setting, the two messages above for three cycles and then default back to bottle
"1" being closest to sensor and "10" being farthest away. count and be back in run mode.
5) Once range is selected allow approximately 4 seconds to pass and 2) When the display changes to “SETTINGS”, depress the button again.
then the display will go back to bottle counter and be in run mode. The display will change to show:
6) Test bottle filler by placing bottle or hand in front of sensor to “RNG SET“- Range set for IR sensor.
make sure water is dispensed. “UNIT TYP“ - Type of unit (REFRIG or NON-RFRG)
SETTING UNIT TYPE “FLT SIZE” - Select filter capacity
1) Depress the program button for approximately 2 seconds until the “RST BCNT“ - Reset bottle count
display changes then release. The display will change and scroll If the button is not pushed again the display will scroll through the four
through two messages: messages above for three cycles and return to run mode.
“RST FLTR” – Reset Filter Status LED 3) When display shows “FLT SIZE” push program button once. The display
“SETTINGS” – System Settings Sub Menu will show current value. Can be 3000GAL or 6000GAL.
If the program button is not pushed again the display will scroll 4) Push program button again to display the desired “FLT SIZE”.
through the two messages above for three cycles and then default 5) Allow approximately 4 seconds to pass and the display will return to
back to bottle count and be back in run mode. bottle counter and be in run mode.
Page 7 1000001718 (Rev. J - 12/17)

Spec Seq#: 47
13 13
32
28 31
4A
1211249
4B
13
13 32
Fig. 10
Fig. 11
WALL MOUNTING PLATE
BOTTLE FILLING UNIT
Fig. 12
1000001718 (Rev. J - 12/17) Page 8

Spec Seq#: 47
Superseal Fitting Assembly

Supersello Accesorio de Montaje
Superseal Montage Assemblage
OPERATION OF QUICK CONNECT FITTINGS
SIMPLY PUSH
SIMPLY PUSHIN
IN TUBE
TUBEISIS SECURED
SECURED PUSH
PUSHIN
IN COLLET
COLLET
TUBE TO
TUBE TOATTACH
ATTACH INPOSITION
IN POSITION TORELEASE
TO RELEASE TUBE
TUBE
A
A B C
1211249
PUSHING
PUSHINGTUBE
TUBE IN BEFORE
IN BEFORE
Note: Screw the locknut hand tight to seal. PULLING
PULLING IT
IT OUT
OUT HELPS TO
HELPS TO
RELEASE
RELEASE TUBE
TUBE
Nota: Apriete la mano de la contratuerca para sellar.
Remarque : Visser la main de l'écrou de blocage pour assurer l'étanchéité.
Fig. 13 Fig. 14
2 2
FILTER PARTS LIST LISTA DE PIEZAS DEL FIL- LISTE DES PIÈCES DU
(See Fig. 15) TRO (Vea la Fig. 15) FILTRE (Voir Fig. 15)
ITEM PART
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPCIÓN DESCRIPTION
NO. NO.
1 51300C Filter Assy-3000 Gal. Ensamblado del Filtro-3000 Galón Ens. filtre-3000 Gallon
2 98926C Kit-Filter Head Fitting includes Kit filtro cabeza montaje incluye Kit filtre raccord de tête comprend
John Guest Fittings Accesorios John Guest Raccords John Guest
3 0000000746 Assy-Filter & Bracket includes Conjunto del Filtro y Soporte, Assemblêe-Filtre et Support Inclut
Fltr Head/Mtg Bkt/ Incluye Filtro Soporte/John Guest Filtre/Montage Support/John
Fig. 15 John Guest Ftgs/Screws Guarniciones/Tornillos de Montaje Guest/Vis à Têtê
de Cabeza
Page 9 1000001718 (Rev. J - 12/17)

Spec Seq#: 47
PARTS LIST/ LISTA DE PIEZAS/ LISTE DES PIÈCES
ITEM
NO. PART NO DESCRIPTION DESCRIPCIÓN DESCRIPTION
1 22897C Panel - Bottom Dispenser Panel - Dispensador Inferior Panneau - Distributeur Inférieur
2 23003C Bracket - Regulator Mounting Fijador - Montaje Regulador Support de Guidon-Kit
3 28551C Hanger Bracket Fijador de Suspensión Support de Suspension
4A 28960C Basin - Stainless Steel Estanque - Acero Inoxidable Bassin - Acier Inoxydable
4B 0000001338 Basin - Stainless Steel (BF) Estanque - Acero Inoxidable (BF) Bassin - Acier Inoxydable (BF)
5 36208C Power Cord Cable Eléctrico Cordon d’Alimentation
6 *36322C Compressor Serv. Pak EMIS70HHR Paquete de Serv. del Compresor EMIS70HHR Trousse D’entr. Surpresseur EMIS70HHR
7 40322C Orifice Assembly Ensamblado del Orificio Ens. Orifice
8 1000002055 Kit - Drain Tube Assembly Kit - Montaje del Tubo de Desagüe Kit - Assemblage de Tube de Vidange
9 1000002062 Kit - Tee - 1/4 x 1/4 x 3/8 (3 Pack) Kit - Tee -1/4 x 1/4 x 3/8 (Paquete de 3) Tee -1/4 x 1/4 x 3/8 (Pack de 3)
10 55931C Cover - Dispenser Bottom Cubierta - Dispensador Inferior Couvercle - Distributeur Inférieur
11 55996C Strainer (See "General Instructions") Filtro Bifurcado (Vea "Instrucciones Generales") Grille (Voir "Directives Générales")
1211249
12 56092C Tubing - Poly (Cut To Length) Tubería de Polietileno (Corte a la Longitud) Tubes - Polyéthylène (Couper à la Longueur)
13 56274C Bubbler Assembly Ensamblado del Borboteador Ens. Barboteur
14 66703C Drier Secador Déshydrateur
15 1000001994 Kit - Tee - 1/4” (3 Pack) Kit - La te 1/4 (Paquete de 3) Kit - Tee 1/4" (Pack de 3)
16 70935C Screw - Shoulder x 1/2" Lg. Tornillo - Hombro x 1/2"Lg. Vis - épaulement x 1/2" lg.
17 1000001602 Kit-75583C Elbow 5/16” - 1/4” Kit - 75583C Codo 5/16 “- 1/4” Coude Kit - 75583C 5/16” - 1/4”
18 98724C Kit - Evaporator Assembly Kit - Ensamblado del Evaporizador Kit - Ens. D’évaporateurKit - Guidon/Pivot Blocs/
19 98537C Kit - Pushbar/Pivot Blocks/Bumpers Kit - Manillar/Pivote Bloques/Topes Pare-chocs
20 98732C Kit - Regulator - Green Spring Kit - Regulador - Verde Primavera Kit - Régulateur - Vert Printemps
21 0000000238 Kit - Electricals /OL/Relay/Cvr Kit - Eléctrico/Sobrecarga/Relé/Cubierta Kit-électriques/Surcharge/Relais/Couverture
22 98773C Kit - Cold Control/Screws Kit - Control del Enfriamiento/Tornillo Kit - Contrôle de Refroidissement/Vis
23 98775C Kit - Fan Motor Assy/Blade/Motor/ Kit - Ventilador Motor Montaje/Hoja/Motor/ Kit - Ventilateur Moteur Assemblée/Lame/Moteur/
Shroud/Screws/Nut Cubierta/Tornillos/Tuerca Cache/Vis/écrou
24 98776C Kit - Condenser/Drier Kit - Condensador/Secador Kit - Condensateur/Déshydrateur
25 98777C Kit - Compr Mtg Hdwe/Grommets/ Kit - Compresor Hardware/Arandelas/Clips/Pernos Kit - Compresseur Matériel/Oeillets/Clips/Tiges
Clips/Studs de Montaje Filetées de Fixation
26 98778C Kit - Heat Exchanger/Drier Kit - Intercambiador de Calor/Secador Kit - Échangeur Thermique/Déshydrateur
27 98789C Kit - Pushbar Brackets/Screws Kit - Hay/Soportes/Tornillos Kit - Barres/Fixations/Vis
28 0000000964 Kit - Drain/Plate/Plug/Elbow/Nut Kit - De desagüe/Placa/Enchufe/Codo/Tuerca Kit - Plaque/Plug/Coude/écrou de Vidange
29 0000000872 Kit - Pushbar/Nuts Kit - Manillar/Tuercas Kit - Guidon/Noix
30 98899C Kit - Hardware Kit - Juego de Accesorios Kit - De Visserie
31 1000001890 Kit - Drain/Plate/Plug/Elbow/Nut Kit - De desagüe/Placa/Enchufe/Codo/Tuerca Kit - Plaque/Plug/Coude/écrou de Vidange
32 1000001812 Kit - Bottle Filler Drain Kit - de Drenaje de Llenada de la Botella Kit de Remplissage de Bouteille de Vidange
33 28125C Panel - Right Side (L) Panel-Lado Derecho (L) Panneau - Côté Droit (L)
28124C Panel - Right Side (SS) Panel-Lado Derecho (SS) Panneau - Côté Droit (SS)
34 28129C Panel - Left Side (L) Panel-Lado Izquierdo (L) Panneau - Côté Gauche (L)
28128C Panel - Left Side (SS) Panel-Lado Izquierdo (SS) Panneau - Côté Gauche (SS)
35 28707C Panel - Front Push (L) Panel-Presión Frontal (L) Panneau - Avant (L)
28706C Panel - Front Push (SS) Panel-Presión Frontal (SS) Panneau - Avant (SS)
36 28146C Panel - Right Rear (L) Panel-Retrovisor Derecho (L) Panneau - Arrière Droit (L)
28525C Panel - Right Rear (SS) Panel-Retrovisor Derecho (SS) Panneau - Arrière Droit (SS)
37 28150C Panel - Left Rear (L) Panel-Retrovisor Izquierdo (L) Panneau - Arrière Gauche (L)
28528C Panel - Left Rear (SS) Panel-Retrovisor Izquierdo (SS) Panneau - Arrière Gauche (SS)
38 28541C Panel - Right Rear BL (L) Panel - Derecha Trasera dos Niveles (L) Panneau-à Droite Arrière à Deux Niveaux (L)
28539C Panel - Right Rear BL (SS) Panel - Derecha Trasera dos Niveles (SS) Panneau-à Droite Arrière à Deux Niveaux (SS)
39 28538C Panel - Left Rear BL (L) Panel - Izquierdo Trasero de dos Niveles (L) Panneau-Gauche Arrière à Deux Niveaux (L)
28536C Panel - Left Rear BL (SS) Panel - Izquierdo Trasero de dos Niveles (SS) Panneau-Gauche Arrière à Deux niveaux (SS)
40 0000000804 Panel - Front Lower/Nmplt (L) Panel - Frontal Inferior/Placa de Identificación (L) Panneau-Front Bas/Plaque Signalétique (L)
0000000834 Panel - Front Lower/Nmplt (SS) Panel - Frontal Inferior/Placa de Identificación (SS) Panneau-Front Bas/Plaque Signalétique (SS)
- See Filter Table Water Filter Kit (When Provided) Kit de Filtro de Agua (Cuando Provisto) Kit de Filtrage d’Eau (Si Fourni)
*REPLACE WITH SAME COMPRESSOR *REEMPLACE CON EL MISMO COMPRESOR USADO *REMPLACEZ AVEC LE MÊME SURPRESSEUR
USED IN ORIGINAL ASSEMBLY. EN EL ENSAMBLADO INICIAL. QUE CELUI UTILISÉ ORIGINALEMENT.
NOTE: All correspondence pertaining to any NOTA: Toda la correspondencia relacionada con el NOTE : Toute correspondance au sujet des refroidis
of the above water coolers or orders for repair enfriador de agua anterior o con una orden de repa seurs d’eau courante ou toute commande de pièce
parts MUST include Model No. and Serial No. ración piezas DEBERÁ incluir el número de modelo y de rechange DOIT inclure le numéro de modèle et le
of cooler, name and part number of número de serie del enfriador, el nombre y número de numéro de série du refroidisseur ainsi que le nom et
replacement part. pieza de la pieza de repuesto. le numéro de pièce à remplacer.
BOTTLEFILLER REPLACEMENT PART KITS

ITEM
PART NO. DESCRIPTION DESCRIPCIÓN DESCRIPTION
NO.
NS 98543C Kit - Electrical Package Paquete Kit - Eléctrico Forfait Kit - Electriqueso
NS 98544C Kit - IR Sensor Sensor Kit - IR Kit - Rcepteur IR
NS 98545C Kit - Solenoid Valve Replacement Reemplazo de la Válvula de Solenoide Kit Remplacement de la Valve Solénoïde - Kit
NS 98546C Kit - Aerator Replacement Reemplazo Kit - Aireador Remplacement du Kit - Aérateur
41 98547C Kit - Top Cover Replacement Kit - Tapa Cubierta Reemplazo Remplacement du Kit - Top Couvercle
NS 98549C Kit - Hardware & Waterway Parts Piezas del Kit - De Hardware y Por Vía Navegable Pièces Kit - Matériel et Voie Navigable
NS 98551C Kit - Filter Mounting Cover (L) Cubierta del Filtro de Kit - De Montaje (L) Couvercle de Filtre - Kit Montage (L)
NS 98669C Kit - Filter Mounting Cover (SS) Cubierta del Filtro de Kit - De Montaje (SS) Couvercle de Filtre - Kit Montage (SS)
NS 98552C Kit - Retro Filter Mounting Montaje de Filtro Kit - Retro Montage de Retro - Kit Filtre
NS 1000001813 Kit - Tower/Basin Gasket Kit - Torre/Cuenca Junta Kit - Tour/Collecteur
NS = NOT SHOWN
REPAIR SERVICE INFORMATION TOLL FREE NUMBER 1.800.260.6640

NÚMERO GRATIS DE SERVICIO 1.800.260.6640
INFORMATIONS POUR LE SERVICE PAR NUMERO SANS FRAIS 1.800.260.6640
FOR PARTS, CONTACT YOUR LOCAL DISTRIBUTOR OR CALL 1.800.834.4816
PARA PIEZAS, CONTACTE A SU DISTRIBUIDOR LOCAL O LLAME AL 1.800.834.4816
PRINTED IN U.S.A. POUR OBTENIR DES PIÈCES, CONTACTEZ VOTRE DISTRIBUTEUR LOCAL OU COMPOSEZ LE 1.800.834.4816
IMPRESO EN LOS E.E.U.U.
IMPRIMÉ AUX É.-U.
ELKAY MANUFACTURING COMPANY • 2222 CAMDEN COURT • OAK BROOK, IL 60523 • 630.574.8484 • www.elkay.com
1000001718 (Rev. J - 12/17) Page 10
Spec Seq#: 49
*****
EWC-2
*****
Spec Seq#: 50
EMABF8WS*1D EMABFDWS*D LMABF8WS*1D LMABFDWS*D
INSTALLATION & USE MANUAL

Manual de instalación y uso
Manuel d’installation et utilisation
EMABF8 & LMABF8 Series Bottle Filling Stations & Coolers
EMABF8 & LMABF8 Serie Botella Bombas y Enfriadores
1285725
EMABF8 & LMABF 8 Stations de Remplissage de Bouteille Série et Refroidisseurs
Page 1 1000001717 (Rev. K - 12/17)

Spec Seq#: 50
Note: Danger! Electric shock hazard. Disconnect power before servicing unit.
Nota: peligro! Peligro de descarga eléctrica. Desconecte antes de reparar la unidad.
Remarque : Danger ! Risque d'électrocution. Débrancher avant de réparer l'appareil.
Pictured is unit only without bottle filler.

Uses HFC-134A refrigerant
Usa refrigerante HFC-134A
5 18 3
Utilise du fluide frigorigéne HFC-134A
1285725
21
22
26
27
27
26
See Fig. 4 for Push Bar Mechanism 19 2

Vea la Fig. 4 para el Mechanisme de la Barra de Empuje 12
Voir Fig. 4 pour ie Mechanisme de Barre-poussoir
4
8, 13
27 27
9
10
27 27
15
11
20 14, 18, 22, 24
33 32
24
35
6 23
7
Fig. 1
NOTE: Non-refrigerated units do not include all electrical and refrigeration components shown above. Other components and rough-in are the same as shown.
NOTA: Las unidades no frigorificadas no incluyen todos los componentes eléctricos y de la refrigeración demostrados arriba. Otros componentes y a’spero-en
son iguales según lo demostrado.
NOTE: Les unités non frigorifiées n’incluent pas tous les composants électriques et de réfrigération montrés ci-dessus. D’autres composants et rugueux-dans sont
identiques que montrés.
1000001717 (Rev. K - 12/17) Page 2
EMABF8WS
17 7/8"
454mm 3 9/16"
90mm
7" 7"
178mm 178mm
7/16"
11mm O
MOUNTING HOLES
(6)
5 3/4" 5 3/4" 18 1/2" 18 7/8"
146mm 146mm 471mm 479mm
15"
ACTIVATION 381mm
SENSOR
HANGER BRACKET
2 5/8"
67mm
5/16" (8mm) DIA. (5 HOLES) 3 3/16"

82mm
EMABF8WS*1D
1 3/8" 1 3/8"
35mm 35mm
E 4 9/16"
52 1/16" 116mm
1323mm
CL E 8"
33" 203mm
B 838mm
39 1/16" ORIFICE C
11/16"
EMABFDWS*D
991mm 18mm HEIGHT

D 31 13/16" 6 1/4"
31" 2 1/2" 7 1/4" 808mm 159mm
Page 3
787mm 64mm 185mm
Fig. 2
RIM 1 1/2"
A F HEIGHT 38mm
25"
635mm
*
2 9/16" 27"
65mm 686mm
21 3/8" ADA
543mm 2 7/16" REQUIREMENT*
63mm
6 3/4"
LMABF8WS*1D
18 3/8"
467mm 3 1/2" 172mm
89mm 13 7/8"
4 1/2" 352mm 12 5/16"
114mm 313mm
5" 10" FINISHED FLOOR
127mm 254mm
LMABFDWS*D
*
REDUCE HEIGHT BY 3" FOR INSTALLATION OF CHILDREN'S ADA COOLER
*ADA REQUIREMENT
*REQUISITO DE A.D.A.
*EXIGENCE ADA
LEGEND/LEYENDA/LÉGENDE LEGEND/LEYENDA/LÉGENDE
A = RECOMMENDED WATER SUPPLY LOCATION 3/8 O.D. UNPLATED COPPER TUBE CONNECT STUB WITH SHUT OFF (BY OTHERS) 3 IN. (76mm) D = ELECTRICAL SUPPLY (3) WIRE RECESSED BOX DUPLEX OUTLET**
MAXIMUM OUT FROM WALL SUMINISTRO ELÉCTRICO (3) CAJA ENCHUFE DE ALAMBRE SALIDA DÚPLEX
La UBICACION 3/8 O RECOMENDADA de ABASTECIMIENTO DE AGUA. D. El TUBO del COBRE de UNPLATED CONECTA TALONARIO CON APAGO ALIMENTATION ÉLECTRIQUE (3) BOÎTIER ENCASTRÉ
(POR OTROS) 3 en. (76 Mm) el MAXIMO FUERA DE PARED E = INSURE PROPER VENTILATION BY MAINTAINING 6” (152 mm) (MIN.) CLEARANCE FROM CABINET LOUVERS TO WALL.
L’O.D de 3/8 d’EMPLACEMENT DE PROVISION D’EAU RECOMMANDE. LE TUBE DE CUIVRE DE UNPLATED CONNECTE STUB AVEC ETEINT (PAR ASEGURE UNA VENTILACIÓN ADECUADA MANTENIENDO UN ESPACIO E 6” (152 mm) (MÍN.) DE HOLGURA ENTRE LA REJILLA
LES AUTRES) 3 dans. (76 mm) le MAXIMUM HORS DU MUR DE VENTILACIÓN DEL MUEBLE Y LA PARED.
B = RECOMMENDED LOCATION FOR WASTE OUTLET 1-1/2” O.D. DRAIN STUB 2 IN. OUT FROM WALL ASSUREZ-VOUS UNE BONNE VENTILATION EN GARDANT 6” (152 mm) (MIN.) ENTRE LES ÉVENTS DE L’ENCEINTE ET LE MUR.
UBICACIÓN RECOMENDADA PARA EL DRENAJE DE SALIDA DE AGUA, DE 1-1/2” DE DIÁMETRO. El TALONARIO 2 FUERA DE PARED F = 7/16 BOLT HOLES FOR FASTENING UNIT TO WALL
EMPLACEMENT RECOMMANDÉ POUR LE DRAIN DE D.E. 1-1/2” DE SORTIE D’EAU. STUB 2 HORS DU MUR AGUJEROS DE LAS TUERCAS DE 7/16 PARA SUJETAR LA UNIDAD A LA PARED
C = 1-1/4” TRAP NOT FURNISHED TROUS D’ÉCROUS 7/16 POUR FIXER L’APPAREIL AU MUR
PURGADOR DE 1-1/4” NO PROPORCIONADO **NEW INSTALLATIONS MUST USE GROUND FAULT CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER (GFCI)
SIPHON 1-1/4” NON FOURNI **Las nuevas instalaciones deben utilizar el interruptor de circuito de tierra de la avería (GFCI)
**Les nouvelles installations doivent employer l’interrupteur de circuit moulu de défaut (GFCI)
1000001717 (Rev. K - 12/17)

Spec Seq#: 50
1285725
Spec Seq#: 50
IMPORTANT IMPORTANTE IMPORTANT

ALL SERVICE TO BE PERFORMED BY AN TODO EL SERVICIO DEBERÁ SER EFECTUADO POR UNA TOUT ENTRETIEN DOIT ÊTRE EFFECTUÉ PAR UN
AUTHORIZED SERVICE PERSON PERSONA DE SERVICIO AUTORIZADA REPRÉSENTANT AUTORISÉ
HANGER BRACKETS & TRAP INSTALACIÓN DE FIJADOR DE INSTALLATION DU SIPHON ET DU

INSTALLATION SUSPENSIÓN Y DEL PURGADOR SUPPORT DE SUSPENSION
1) Remove hanger bracket fastened to back of 1) Quite el fijador de suspensión sujetados a la parte posterior 1) Retirez le support de suspension à l’arrière du refroidis-
cooler by removing one (1) screw. del enfriador quitando un (1) tornillo. seur en enlevant une (1) vis.
2) Mount the hanger bracket and trap as shown in 2) Monte el fijador de suspensión y quite el purgador como se 2) Installez le support et le siphon tel qu’indiqué à la fig. 2.
Figure 2. muestra en la Fig. 2. NOTE : Le support de suspension DOIT être bien retenu en
NOTE: Hanger Bracket MUST be supported se- NOTA: El fijador de suspensión DEBE de ser sostenido con se- place. Ajoutez des ferrures de fixation si le mur n’offre
curely. Add fixture support carrier if wall will not guridad. Coloque portadores de soporte de instalaciones fijas pas le soutien voulu.
provide adequate support. si la pared no proveerá un soporte adecuado. IMPORTANT :
IMPORTANT: IMPORTANTE: • Pour avoir une bonne position, on doit garder une
1285725
• 6 1/4 in. (159mm) dimension from wall to center- • Se debe mantener una dimensión de 6 1/4 pulgadas (159mm) dimension de 6 1/4 po. (159mm) du mur à l’axe central
line of trap must be maintained for proper fit. desde la pared hasta la línea central del purgador para que du siphon.
• Anchor hanger securely to wall using all five (5) calce de forma adecuada. • Ancrez solidement le support au mur à l’aide des five
7/16" dia. mounting holes. • Ancle el suspensor de forma segura a la pared usando todos (5) trous de fixation d’un diam. 7/16 po.
3) Install straight valve for 3/8" O.D. tube. los cinco (5) agujeros de montaje de 7/16" de diámetro. 3) Installez la soupape droite dans le tuyau de D.E. 3/8".
3) Instale la válvula directa para el tubo de 3/8" de diámetro
externo.
INSTALLATION OF COOLER INSTALACIÓN DEL ENFRIADOR DE AGUA INSTALLATION DU REFROIDISSEUR

4) Hang the cooler on the hanger bracket. Be 4) Suspenda el enfriador en el fijador de suspensión. Asegúrese 4) Installez le refroidisseur sur les supports en vous as-
certain the hanger bracket is engaged properly que el fijador de suspensión calce correctamente en las surant que ceux-ci sont bien installés dans les fentes à
in the slots on the cooler back as shown in Fig. ranuras de la parte posterior del enfriador como se indica en l’arrière du refroidisseur tel qu’indiqué à la figure 3.
3. la figura 3. 5) Dégagez les deux (2) vis retenant le panneau inférieur
5) Loosen the two (2) screws holding the lower front 5) Afloje los dos (2) tornillos que sostienen la parte inferior del avant au bas de la base du refroidisseur ainsi que
panel at the bottom of cooler base and two (2) panel en la parte inferior de la base del enfriador y los dos (2) deux (2) vis sur le dessus. Retirez le panneau avant et
screws at the top. Remove the front panel and tornillos en la parte superior. Quite el panel frontal y póngalo mettez-le de côté.
set aside. a un lado. 6) Connectez l’alimentation en eau. - Voir note 4 des
6) Connect water inlet line--See Note 4 of General 6) Conectar el tubo de entrada de agua. Ver la Nota 4 en las instructions générales.
Instructions. Instrucciones Generales. 7) Retirez l’écrou coulissant et le joint du siphon et
7) Remove the slip nut and gasket from the trap and 7) Quite la tuerca de retención y el obturador del purgador y installez-les sur la conduite résiduaire du refroidisseur
install them on the cooler waste line making sure instálelos en el tubo de desagüe asegurándose que la parte en vous assurant que le bout de la conduite entre bien
that the end of the waste line fits into the trap. final del tubo de desagüe calce en el purgador. Ensamble la dans le siphon. Installez l’écrou coulissant et le joint au
Assemble the slip nut and gasket to the trap and tuerca de la ranura y el obturador y apriete en forma segura. siphon et resserrez bien.
tighten securely.
START UP PUESTA EN MARCHA MISE EN MARCHE

Also See General Instructions Vea Manual de los Instrucciones Generales Voir Manuel de les Directives Generales
8) Stream height is factory set for 45-50 PSI 8) Altura del chorro viene configurado de fábrica para el suminis- 8) Hauteur de flux est réglé en usine pour la fourniture
supply. If supply pressure varies greatly from this, tro de 45-50 PSI. Si la presión del suministro varía demasiado de 45 à 50 lb/po2. Si la pression varie beaucoup de ce
adjust screw, accessible by removing front push de este valor, ajuste el tornillo, sacando el panel frontal de point, ajustez la vis que l’on peut atteindre en retirant le
panel (Item 31 , Fig. 4). CW adjustment will raise empuje (Artículo 31, Figura 4). El ajuste en el sentido de las panneau avant (article 31, fig. 4). Si vous ajustez dans
stream and CCW adjustment will lower stream. manecillas del reloj elevará el chorro y contra el sentido de las le sens des aiguilles d’une montre, le jet augmentera
For best adjustment, stream should hit basin manecillas del reloj lo bajará. Para un mejor juste, el chorro et dans le sens contraire, le jet diminuera. Le meilleur
approximately 6-1/2” (165mm) from bubbler. deberá pegar en el estanque a una distancia de aproximada- ajustement est lorsque le jet frappe le bassin à environ
9) Replace the front panel and secure by retighten- mente 6½” (165mm) del borboteador. 6-1/2" (165mm) du barboteur.
ing four (4) screws. 9) Vuelva a colocar el panel frontal y asegúrelo apretando nue- 9) Replacez le panneau avant et fixez le en place en
10) If a taste, odor or sediment problem is prevalent, vamente los cuatro (4) tornillos. resserrant les quatre (4) vis.
try installing our water filter module. 10) Si se suscitara un problema de sabor, olor o sedimentación, 10) S’il existe un problème de goût, d’odeur ou de sédiment,
trate de instalar nuestro módulo de filtro de agua. essayez d’installer notre module filtre d’eau.
HANGER BRACKET
FIJADOR DE SUSPENSIÓN
COOLER BACK
ARRIÈRE DU REFROIDISSEUR
Fig. 3
1000001717 (Rev. K - 12/17) Page 4

Spec Seq#: 50
PUSH BAR MECHANISM

34
17 MECANISMO DE BARRA DE EMPUJE
34 MÉCANISME DU BOUTON-POUSSOIR
30
2
25
19
1285725
31 A
34 1 34
25
17 29
34 16 B 17
10 34
27 25 17 25
C
Fig. 4
Water Valve Mechanism - ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE: LEGEND/LEYENDA/LÉGENDE

- Turn adjustment screw “Counter-Clockwise” until water flow A) Note: Water flow direction
from bubbler starts. Nota: Dirección del flujo de agua
- Turn adjustment screw “Clockwise” until water flow stops, THEN turn Note: Direction de l’eau
an additional 1/2 turn. B) Adjust this screw to eliminate mechanism
NOTE: Adjustments stated above are viewed from underneath unit “Free Play” or continuous flow from bubbler
(bottom side of dispenser panel). conditions. (See ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE)
NOTE: If continuous flow occurs at the end of the compressor cycle, turn Adjuste este tornillo para eliminar el mecanismo
cold control counterclockwise 1/4 turn. de “juego libre” o el flujo continuo del borboteador
(vea PROCEDIMIENTO DE AJUSTE)
Ajustez cette vis pour éliminer tout “jeu” du
Mecanismo de la Válvula de Agua-PROCEDIMIENTO DE AJUSTE:
mécanisme ou tout débit continu du barboteur
- Gire el tornillo de ajuste “en sentido contrario de las manecillas del
(voir PROCÉDURE DE RÉGLAGE)
reloj” hasta que comience el flujo de agua del borboteador.
C) Stream height adjustment (see note #8)
- Gire el tornillo de ajuste “en el sentido de las manecillas del reloj” hasta
Ajuste de la altura del chorro (vea la nota #8)
que el flujo de agua se detenga, DESPUÉS gire una media vuelta
Ajustement de la hauteur du jet (voir la note #8)
adicional.
NOTA: Los ajustes especificados anteriormente son correctos viendo
desde la parte de abajo de la unidad (parte inferior del panel del
distribuidor).
NOTA: Si hay un flujo continuo al final del ciclo del compresor, girar el
tornillo del control en contra del sentido de las agujas
del reloj 1/4 de vuelta.
Mécanisme de soupape d’eau - PROCÉDURE DE RÉGLAGE :

- Tournez la vis de réglage dans le sens contraire aux aiguilles d’une montre
jusqu’à ce que le débit d’eau du barboteur commence.
- Tournez la vis de réglage dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre jusqu’à ce
que le débit d’eau du barboteur s’arrête, PUIS tournez encore de 1/2 tour.
NOTE: Les ajustements sont décrits tels qu’on les voit d’en dessous de
l’appareil (côté inférieur du panneau distributeur).
NOTE: S’il y a débit continu à la fin du cycle du compresseur, tournez la
commande d’eau froide vers le côté gauche de 1/4 de tour.
Page 5 1000001717 (Rev. K - 12/17)

Spec Seq#: 50
7/16” BOLT HOLES FOR MOUNTING

FASTENING UNIT TO WALL TOP COVER SCREWS
UNIT CENTER LINE 36
1285725
Fig. 5 Fig. 6
BRACKET & SCREWS
Fig. 7 Fig. 8
Bottle Filler Installation Instructions
1) Remove two (2) mounting screws with 5/32” Allen wrench holding top cover to Bottle Filler (See Fig. 9). Remove top cover. Note do not discard mounting
screws, they will be needed to reinstall top cover.
2) Remove wall mounting plate from Bottle Filler. Place wall plate against wall on top of basin. Center the wall plate side to side with the basin. Mark
the six (6) mounting holes with a pencil (See Fig. 5).
3) Remove wall mounting plate from wall. NOTE: Mounting plate MUST be supported securely. Add fixture support carrier if wall will not provide adequate
support.
4) Install wall mounting plate to wall using six (6) 7/16” obround mounting holes (mounting bolts not included) (See Fig. 5). Use appropriate fasteners for
your wall type.
5) Feed power cord & 3/8” water line through hole in tower/basin gasket (See Fig 7).
6) Install gasket on bottom of bottle filler tower with gasket support bracket and (2) screws (See Fig 8).
7) Lay Bottle Filler on water cooler basin and cut insulation from tube even with bottom of gasket, remove this insulation from the 3/8” tube, but do not discard.
Feed the power cord and waterline through the hole on top of water cooler. NOTE: To prevent scratching the basin place a towel or soft
cloth over the entire basin when working above it.
8) With the power cord and waterline through hole on top of water cooler place Bottle Filler on the three (3) angled tabs protruding from the wall
mounting plate installed on wall. Make sure round boss in gasket fits in hole of basin. (See Fig. 10).
9) Once Bottle Filler is installed on wall plate tabs, water line and power cord are installed properly, push top of Bottle Filler toward
wall and line up top cover two (2) holes.
10) Reinstall Top Cover on Bottle Filler (See Fig. 6) with two mounting screws from step 1 above. Caution, do not over tighten screws.
11) Install remaining tube insulation to the water line from bottle filler, connect Bottle Filler waterline inside of the water cooler by connecting the 3/8” water line to the tee.
12) Install filter cartridge, remove filter from carton, remove protective cap, attach filter to filter head by firmly inserting into head and rotating filter
clockwise. NOTE: If existing plumbing rough in locations (Drain, Water In, and Electric Supply) do not allow the filter to be mounted inside the cooler cabinet
the filter can be installed horizontally below the unit. A retrofit kit is available to mount the filter beneath the cooler.
13) Turn water supply on and inspect for leaks. Fix all leaks before continuing.
14) Once unit has been inspected for leaks and any leaks found corrected, plug Bottle Filler and unit into wall. Be sure to reinstall fuse to the circuit or
switch the circuit breaker back to the “ON” position.
15) Once power is applied to Bottle Filler, the GREEN LED light should illuminate showing good filter status along with the LCD Bottle Counter.
16) Verify proper dispensing by placing cup, hand, or any opaque object in front of sensor area and verify water dispenses. Note: the first initial dispenses
might have air in line which may cause a sputter. This will be eliminated once all air is purged from the line.
17) Once unit tests out, install Lower Panel back on water cooler(s). Unit is now ready for use.
1000001717 (Rev. K - 12/17) Page 6

Spec Seq#: 50
BF11 - BF12 PROGRAM

SETTING THE CONTROL BOARD
VERIFY CONTROL BOARD SOFTWARE Continued from below:
1) To verify the software program of the control board the unit will 2) When the display changes to “SETTINGS”, depress the button again.
need to be shut down and restarted. The chiller (if present) does The display will change to show
not need to be shut down and restarted. “RNG SET” - Range set for IR sensor.
2) The units lower panel must be open to access the power cord and “UNIT TYP” - Type of unit (REFRIG or NON-RFRG)
wall outlet. “FLT SIZE” - Select filter capacity
3) Shut down the unit by unplugging the power cord from the wall “RST BCNT” - Reset bottle count
outlet. 3) When display shows “UNIT TYPE” push program button once the
4) Restart the unit by plugging the power cord back into the wall display will show current value. Can be REFRIG or NON-RFRG
outlet. 4) Push button once to change value. Once value is selected the display
1285725
5) Upon start up, the bottle count display will show the software will show the new value. (Can be REFRIG or NON-RFRG)
designation of BF11 or BF12. “REFRIG“ - stands for refrigerated product. In this setting the flow rate is
ACCESSING THE PROGRAMMING BUTTON estimated at 1.0 gallon per minute.
1) To access the program button, remove the top cover of the bottle- “NON-RFRG“ - stands for nonrefrigerated product. In this setting the
filler. Remove the two (2) screws holding top cover to bottle-filler flow rate is estimated at 1.5 gallons per minute. Both “REFRIG“ and
with a 5/32” allen wrench. Remove top cover. Do not discard “NON-RFRG“ simulate 1 bottle equal to 20 oz.
mounting screws, they will be needed to reinstall the top cove after 5) Allow approximately 4 seconds to pass and the display will return to
programming operations are completed. The programming button bottle counter and be in run mode.
is located at the top right side of the unit on the control board. RESETTING BOTTLE COUNT
NOTE: When applicable, there is also an alternate reset button 1) Depress the program button for approximately 2 seconds until the
located on the lower part of the water cooler. After removing display changes then release. The display will change and scroll
the bottom cover, the reset button will be located on the left through two messages:
side of the cooler, mounted on the side panel support. “RST FLTR” – Reset Filter Status LED
RESET THE FILTER MONITOR “SETTINGS” – System Settings Sub Menu
1) Instructions apply to filtered units only. If the program button is not pushed again the display will scroll through
2) Depress the program button for approximately 2 seconds until the two messages above for three cycles and then default back to bottle
the display changes then release. The display will change and count and be back in run mode.
scroll through two messages: 2) When the display changes to “SETTINGS”, depress the button again.
“RST FLTR” – Reset Filter Monitor The display will change to show:
“SETTINGS” – System Settings Sub Menu “RNG SET”- Range set for IR sensor.
If the program button is not pushed again the display will scroll “UNIT TYP” - Type of unit (REFRIG or NON-RFRG)
through the two messages above for three cycles and then default “FLT SIZE” - Select filter capacity
back to bottle count and be back in run mode. “RST BCNT” - Reset bottle count
3) When the display changes to “RST FLTR”, depress the button If the button is not pushed again the display will scroll through the four
again. The display will change to show “FLTR =”. Depress the messages above for three cycles and return to run mode.
button again and the display will show “FLTR =0” 3) When display shows “RST BCNT” push program button once the
4) The Green LED should be illuminated indicating that the visual display will show current value, e.g. “0033183”.
filter monitor has been reset. 4) Once display shows current value push the program button once more
SETTING RANGE OF THE IR SENSOR WHERE APPLICABLE to reset back to 0. The display will show BTLCT = 0 for approximately 2
1) Depress the program button for approximately 2 seconds until seconds and then return to run mode showing 00000000 bottles.
the display changes then release. The display will change and NOTE: Once the bottle count is reset to zero there is no way to
scroll through two messages: return to the previous bottle count.
“RST FLTR” – Reset Filter Status LED 5) Testing the bottle counter:
“SETTINGS” – System Settings Sub Menu REFRIG units: Place bottle or hand in front of sensor for approximately
If the program button is not pushed again the display will scroll 9 seconds to see bottle counter count 00000001,
through the two messages above for three cycles and then default (This is based on filling a 20 oz. bottle).
back to bottle count and be back in run mode. NON-RFRG units: Place bottle or hand in front of sensor for
2) When the display changes to “SETTINGS”, depress the button approximately 6 seconds to see bottle counter count 00000001,
again. The display will change to show (This is based on filling a 20 oz bottle).
“RNG SET” - Range set for IR sensor. SETTING FILTER CAPACITY
“UNIT TYP” - Type of unit (REFRIG or NON-RFRG) 1) Depress the program button for approximately 2 seconds until the
“FLT SIZE” - Select filter capacity display changes then release. The display will change and scroll through
“RST BCNT” - Reset bottle count two messages:
3) When display shows “RNG SET” push program button once the “RST FLTR” – Reset Filter Status LED
display will show current value (can be 1 – 10) e.g. “RNG = 3”. “SETTINGS” – System Settings Sub Menu
4) Once display shows current value push the program button to If the program button is not pushed again the display will scroll through
scroll through value of 1 – 10. Select the desired range setting, the two messages above for three cycles and then default back to bottle
"1" being closest to sensor and "10" being farthest away. count and be back in run mode.
5) Once range is selected allow approximately 4 seconds to pass and 2) When the display changes to “SETTINGS”, depress the button again.
then the display will go back to bottle counter and be in run mode. The display will change to show:
6) Test bottle filler by placing bottle or hand in front of sensor to “RNG SET“- Range set for IR sensor.
make sure water is dispensed. “UNIT TYP“ - Type of unit (REFRIG or NON-RFRG)
SETTING UNIT TYPE “FLT SIZE” - Select filter capacity
1) Depress the program button for approximately 2 seconds until the “RST BCNT“ - Reset bottle count
display changes then release. The display will change and scroll If the button is not pushed again the display will scroll through the four
through two messages: messages above for three cycles and return to run mode.
“RST FLTR” – Reset Filter Status LED 3) When display shows “FLT SIZE” push program button once. The display
“SETTINGS” – System Settings Sub Menu will show current value. Can be 3000GAL or 6000GAL.
If the program button is not pushed again the display will scroll 4) Push program button again to display the desired “FLT SIZE”.
through the two messages above for three cycles and then default 5) Allow approximately 4 seconds to pass and the display will return to
back to bottle count and be back in run mode. bottle counter and be in run mode.
Page 7 1000001717 (Rev. K - 12/17)

Spec Seq#: 50
13 28
1285725
26
28
Fig. 9
WALL MOUNTING PLATE
BOTTLE FILLING UNIT
Fig. 10
1000001717 (Rev. K - 12/17) Page 8

Spec Seq#: 50
Superseal Fitting Assembly

Supersello Accesorio de Montaje
Superseal Montage Assemblage
OPERATION OF QUICK CONNECT FITTINGS
SIMPLY PUSH
SIMPLY PUSHIN
IN TUBE
TUBEISIS SECURED
SECURED PUSH
PUSHIN
IN COLLET
COLLET
TUBE TO
TUBE TOATTACH
ATTACH INPOSITION
IN POSITION TORELEASE
TO RELEASE TUBE
TUBE
A
A B C
1285725
PUSHING
PUSHINGTUBE
TUBE IN BEFORE
IN BEFORE
Note: Screw the locknut hand tight to seal. PULLING
PULLING IT
IT OUT
OUT HELPS TO
HELPS TO
RELEASE
RELEASE TUBE
TUBE
Nota: Apriete la mano de la contratuerca para sellar.
Remarque : Visser la main de l'écrou de blocage pour assurer
l'étanchéité.
Fig. 11 Fig. 12
2 2
FILTER PARTS LIST LISTA DE PIEZAS DEL FIL- LISTE DES PIÈCES DU
(See Fig. 13) TRO (Vea la Fig. 13) FILTRE (Voir Fig. 13)
ITEM PART
DESCRIPTION DESCRIPCIÓN DESCRIPTION
NO. NO.
1 51300C Filter Assy-3000 Gal. Ensamblado del Filtro-3000 Galón Ens. filtre-3000 Gallon
2 98926C Kit-Filter Head Fitting includes Kit filtro cabeza montaje incluye Kit filtre raccord de tête comprend
John Guest Fittings Accesorios John Guest Raccords John GuestAssemblêe-
3 0000000746 Assy-Filter & Bracket includes Conjunto del Filtro y Soporte, Filtre et Support Inclut Filtre/
Fltr Head/Mtg Bkt/ Incluye Filtro Soporte/John Guest Montage Support/John Guest/
John Guest Ftgs/Screws Guarniciones/Tornillos de Montaje Vis à Têtê
Fig. 13 de Cabeza
OVERLOAD
3
1 2
COLD CONTROL
(WATER)
COMPRESSOR
S M Fig. 14
115V Wiring Diagram
RELAY Diagrama de cableado de 115 voltios
6 5
BLK schéma de câblage de 115 volts
3 2 FAN
1
WHT GND
Page 9 1000001717 (Rev. K - 12/17)

Spec Seq#: 50
PARTS LIST/ LISTA DE PIEZAS/ LISTE DES PIÈCES

ITEM PART NO DESCRIPTION DESCRIPCIÓN DESCRIPTION
NO.
1 22897C Panel - Bottom Dispenser Panel - Dispensador Inferior Panneau - Distributeur Inférieur
2 23003C Bracket - Regulator Mounting Fijador - Montaje Regulador Support - Montage du Régleur
3 28551C Hanger Bracket Fijador de Suspensión Support de Suspension
4 0000001338 Basin - Stainless Steel Estanque - Acero Inoxidable Bassin - Acier Inoxydable
5 36208C Power Cord Cable Eléctrico Cordon d’Alimentation
6 *36322C Compressor Serv. Pak EMIS70HHR Paquete de Serv. del Compresor EMIS70HHR Trousse D’entr. Surpresseur EMIS70HHR
7 0000000238 Kit - Electricals /OL/Relay/Cvr Kit - Eléctrico/Sobrecarga/Relé/Cubierta Kit-électriques/Surcharge/Relais/Couverture
8 40322C Kit - Orifice w/Oring El Juego - Orificio con Oring Le Trousse - Orifice avec Oring
9 1000002062 Kit - Tee - 1/4 x 1/4 x 3/8 (3 Pack) Kit - Tee -1/4 x 1/4 x 3/8 (Paquete de 3) Kit - Tee -1/4 x 1/4 x 3/8 (Pack de 3)
10 55931C Cover - Dispenser Bottom Cubierta - Dispensador Inferior Couvercle - Distributeur Inférieur
11 55996C Strainer (See "General Instructions") Filtro Bifurcado (Vea "Instrucciones Generales") Grille (Voir "Directives Générales")
1285725
12 56092C Tubing - Poly (Cut To Length) Tubería de Polietileno (Corte a la longitud) Tubes - Polyéthylène (Couper à la Longueur)
13 56274C Kit - Bubbler Assy w/Nut La Asamblea del Juego-Bebedero con Tuerca L'assemblée de Trousse - Bubbler avec l'écrou
14 66703C Drier Secador Déshydrateur
15 1000001602 Kit-75583C Elbow 5/16” - 1/4” (3 Pack) Kit - 75583C Codo 5/16 “- 1/4” (Paquete de 3) Coude Kit - 75583C 5/16” - 1/4” (Pack de 3)
16 70935C Screw - Shoulder x 1/2" Lg. Tornillo - Hombro x 1/2"Lg. Vis - épaulement x 1/2" lg.
17 98537C Kit - Pushbar/Pivot Blocks/Bumpers Kit - Manillar/Pivote Bloques/Topes Kit - Guidon/Pivot Blocs/Pare-chocs
18 98724C Kit - Evaporator Assembly Kit - Ensamblado del Evaporizador Kit - Ens. D’évaporateur
19 98732C Kit - Regulator - Green Spring Kit - Regulador - Verde Primavera Kit - Régulateur - Vert Printemps
20 98773C Kit - Cold Control/Screws Kit - Control del Enfriamiento/Tornillo Kit - Contrôle de Refroidissement/Vis
21 98775C Kit - Fan Motor Assy/Blade/Motor/ Kit - Ventilador Motor Montaje/Hoja/ Kit - Ventilateur Moteur Assemblée/
Shroud/Screws/Nut Motor/Cubierta/Tornillos/Tuerca Lame/Moteur/
22 98776C Kit - Condenser/Drier Kit - Condensador/Secador Kit - Condensateur/ Déshydrateur
23 98777C Kit - Compr Mtg Hdwe/Grommets/ Kit - Compresor Hardware/Arandelas/Clips/Per- Kit - Compresseur Matériel/Oeillets/
Clips/Studs nos de Montaje Clips/Tiges Filetées de Fixation
24 98778C Kit - Heat Exchanger/Drier Kit - Intercambiador de Calor/Secador Kit - Échangeur Thermique/Déshydrateur
25 98789C Kit - Pushbar Bracket/Screws Kit - Hay/Soportes/Tornillos Kit - Barres/Fixations/Vis
26 1000001889 Kit - Drain/Plate/Plug/Elbow/Nut Kit - De Desagüe/Placa/Enchufe/Codo/Tuerca Kit - Plaque/Plug/Coude/écrou de Vidange
27 98899C Kit - Hardware Kit - Juego de Accesorios Kit - De Visserie
28 1000001812 Kit - Bottle Filler Drain Kit - de Drenaje de Llenada de la Botella Kit de Remplissage de Bouteille de Vidange
29 28125C Panel - Right Side (L) Panel - Lado Derecho (L) Panneau - Côté Droit (L)
28124C Panel - Right Side (SS) Panel - Lado Derecho (SS) Panneau - Côté Droit (SS)
30 28129C Panel - Left Side (L) Panel - Lado Izquierdo (L) Panneau - Côté Gauche (L)
28128C Panel - Left Side (SS) Panel - Lado Izquierdo (SS) Panneau - Côté Gauche (SS)
31 28707C Panel - Front Push (L) Panel - Presión Frontal (L) Panneau - Avant (L)
28706C Panel - Front Push (SS) Panel - Presión Frontal (SS) Panneau - Avant (SS)
32 28146C Panel - Right Rear (L) Panel - Retrovisor Derecho (L) Panneau - Arrière Droit (L)
28525C Panel - Right Rear (SS) Panel - Retrovisor Derecho (SS) Panneau - Arrière Droit (SS)
33 28150C Panel - Left Rear (L) Panel - Retrovisor Izquierdo (L) Panneau - Arrière Gauche (L)
28528C Panel - Left Rear (SS) Panel - Retrovisor Izquierdo (SS) Panneau - Arrière Gauche (SS)
34 0000000872 Kit-Pushbar/Nuts Kit Manillar/Tuercas Kit-Guidon/Noix
35 0000000804 Panel - Front Lower/Nmplt (L) Panel - Frontal Inferior/Placa de Identificación(L) Panneau-Front Bas/Plaque Signalétique (L)
0000000834 Panel - Front Lower/Nmplt (SS) Panel - Frontal Inferior/Placa de Panneau-Front Bas/Plaque Signalétique (SS)
Identificación(SS)
- See Filter Table Water Filter Kit (When Provided) Kit de Filtro de Agua (Cuando Provisto) Kit de Filtrage d’Eau (Si Fourni)
*REPLACE WITH SAME COMPRESSOR USED *REEMPLACE CON EL MISMO COMPRESOR USADO *REMPLACEZ AVEC LE MÊME SURPRESSEUR
IN ORIGINAL ASSEMBLY. EN EL ENSAMBLADO INICIAL. QUE CELUI UTILISÉ ORIGINALEMENT.
NOTE: All correspondence pertaining to any NOTA: Toda la correspondencia relacionada con el en- NOTE : Toute correspondance au sujet des refroidis-
of the above water coolers or orders for repair friador de agua anterior o con una orden de reparación seurs d’eau courante ou toute commande de pièce
parts MUST include Model No. and Serial No. piezas DEBERÁ incluir el número de modelo y número de rechange DOIT inclure le numéro de modèle et le
of cooler, name and part number of replace- de serie del enfriador, el nombre y número de pieza de numéro de série du refroidisseur ainsi que le nom et
ment part. la pieza de repuesto. le numéro de pièce à remplacer.
BOTTLE FILLER REPLACEMENT PART KITS

ITEM PART NO. DESCRIPCIÓN DESCRIPTION
DESCRIPTION
NO.
NS 98543C Kit - Electrical Package Paquete Kit - Eléctrico Forfait Kit - Electriqueso
NS 98544C Kit - IR Sensor Sensor Kit - IR Kit - Rcepteur IR
NS 98545C Kit - Solenoid Valve Replacement Reemplazo de la Válvula de Solenoide Kit Remplacement de la Valve Solénoïde - Kit
NS 98546C Kit - Aerator Replacement Reemplazo Kit - Aireador Remplacement du Kit - Aérateur
36 98547C Kit - Top Cover Replacement Kit - Tapa Cubierta Reemplazo Remplacement du Kit - Top Couvercle
NS 98549C Kit - Hardware & Waterway Parts Piezas del Kit - De Hardware y Por Vía Navegable Pièces Kit - Matériel et Voie Navigable
NS 98551C Kit - Filter Mounting Cover (L) Cubierta del Filtro de Kit - De Montaje (L) Couvercle de Filtre - Kit Montage (L)
NS 98669C Kit - Filter Mounting Cover (SS) Cubierta del Filtro de Kit - De Montaje (SS) Couvercle de Filtre - Kit Montage (SS)
NS 98552C Kit - Retro Filter Mounting Montaje de Filtro Kit - Retro Montage de Retro - Kit Filtre
NS 1000001813 Kit - Tower/Basin Gasket Kit - Torre/Cuenca Junta Kit - Tour/Collecteur
NS = NOT SHOWN
REPAIR SERVICE INFORMATION TOLL FREE NUMBER 1.800.260.6640

NÚMERO GRATIS DE SERVICIO 1.800.260.6640
INFORMATIONS POUR LE SERVICE PAR NUMERO SANS FRAIS 1.800.260.6640
FOR PARTS, CONTACT YOUR LOCAL DISTRIBUTOR OR CALL 1.800.834.4816

PARA PIEZAS, CONTACTE A SU DISTRIBUIDOR LOCAL O LLAME AL 1.800.834.4816
PRINTED IN U.S.A. POUR OBTENIR DES PIÈCES, CONTACTEZ VOTRE DISTRIBUTEUR LOCAL OU COMPOSEZ LE 1.800.834.4816
IMPRESO EN LOS E.E.U.U.
IMPRIMÉ AUX É.-U. ELKAY MANUFACTURING COMPANY • 2222 CAMDEN COURT • OAK BROOK, IL 60523 • 630.574.8484 • www.elkay.com
1000001717 (Rev. K - 12/17) Page 10

Spec Seq#: 52
*****
HB-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 53
HYDRANTS
Z1333 ECOLOTROL WALL HYDRANT WITH CERAMIC DISC Parts Assembly and Parts List
375447
Z1333 Parts List
Item Description Qty. Part No.
1 Head 1 60703-004
4 3/4" Nozzle 1 50799-005
5 Faceplate 1 56115-008
*6 Retaining Washer 1 60228-001
*7 O-Ring 1 23750-232
*8 O-Ring 1 23750-028
*9 Operating Coupling 1 60227-002
*10 Equa-Balance ® Seal 1 50785-001
11 Disc 1 50819-001
*12 Disc O-Ring 1 23750-204
13 Operating Tube 1 60226-001
14 Cartridge Assembly 1 59626-001
15 Faceplate Screw 5 22698-047
*16 Key 1 59546-001
17 Cartridge Wrench (Optional) 1 62078-001
*Items are available in -RK Repair Kit Option bag (#66955-195-9).
ZURN PLUMBING PRODUCTS GROUP SPECIFICATION DRAINAGE OPERATION, 1801 PITTSBURGH AVENUE, ERIE, PA 16502 PHONE 814/455-0921 FAX: 814/454-7929 WEBSITE: www.zurn.com
Page 50
Spec Seq#: 53
HYDRANTS
Z1333 ECOLOTROL WALL HYDRANT WITH CERAMIC DISC Troubleshooting Guide
Z1333 Troubleshooting Guide

Hydrant will not operate when turned on. Water supply is shut off. Turn on water supply.
Cannot turn the hydrant on with key. Retaining washer is not properly orientated. See “Orientating the Retaining Washer” below.
375447
Hydrant hasn’t been used for a long time – O-Ring Follow steps 1-2, 4-5, and 8-10 of the Service Guide.
has adhered to the operating screw and head.
Ceramic disc is broken and jammed. Follow steps 1-2, 4, and 6-10 of the Service Guide.
Water sprays from holes around nozzle when Equa-Balance® seal is damaged. Follow steps 1-3 and 8-10 of the Service Guide.
hydrant is on.
Water sprays through the faceplate’s keyway Retaining washer pin is not properly orientated into See “Orientating the Retaining Washer” below.
drainage port when the hydrant is on. operating coupling groove.
Operating coupling’s O-Ring or air relief orifice Follow steps 1-2, 4-5, and 8-10 of the Service Guide.
O-Ring is damaged or missing.
Hydrant will not self-drain when it is shut off The orifice in the operating coupling, retaining Follow steps 1-2, 4 (using a paper clip, evacuate
(hose and hose nozzle are attached). washer, or both is blocked. debris from orifice), and 8-10 of the Service Guide.
Operating coupling is not properly orientated. See “Orientating the Retaining Washer” below.
Water does not shut off completely when Retaining washer is not properly orientated. See “Orientating the Retaining Washer” below.
hydrant is turned off.
Cartridge assembly is loose or damaged. Follow steps 1-2, 4 (then check that the cartridge assembly
is tightly seated), and 6-10 of the Service Guide.
Debris in the ceramic disc, or disc is broken and jammed. Follow steps 1-2, 4, and 6-10 of the Service Guide.
Hydrant exhibits low flow. Water supply to the hydrant is restricted. Check water supply to ensure that all upstream valves
are fully open.
Retaining washer is not properly orientated. See “Orientating the Retaining Washer” below.
Cartridge assembly is damaged or debris in Follow steps 1-2, 4, and 6-10 of the Service Guide.
the ceramic disk.
Orientating the Retaining Washer

If hydrant performance is hindered by the orientation of the retaining washer (see Troubleshooting Guide) then follow these simple steps:
Step 1: Turn water supply to hydrant off.
Step 2: Loosen the five faceplate screws (#15) (DO NOT COMPLETELY REMOVE).
Step 3: Use the operating key to gently cycle the hydrant from OFF to ON and back to OFF again (180° OF ROTATION).
Step 4: Tighten the five faceplate screws (#15) until screws are snugged tight (by hand only).
Page 51
Spec Seq#: 53
HYDRANTS
Z1333 ECOLOTROL WALL HYDRANT WITH CERAMIC DISC Service Guide
Z1333 Service Guide

Step 1: Shutting Off the Water Supply to the Hydrant Step 7: Installing Cartridge and Operating Tube Assemblies
Locate the supply shut-off valve and rotate until water supply is off. Place the cartridge and operating tube assemblies (13-14) into the cartridge
Step 2: Removing the Faceplate and Adjacent Components wrench (17) so that the operating tube (13) is inside of the cartridge wrench
Using 1/8" Allen wrench, remove the five faceplate screws (15) from head (1) (17), and is engaged on the hex portion of the cartridge assembly (14).
by turning counterclockwise. Remove the faceplate (5), nozzle (4) and retaining Insert the cartridge wrench (17) with the cartridge and operating tube
washer (6). assemblies (13-14) into the hydrant until making contact with the head (1),
375447
then rotate the cartridge wrench (17) clockwise screwing the cartridge
If the Equa-Balance ® seal was not the reason for service – skip to step 4. assembly (14) in until it stops, then torque to 15 ft/lbs. (Make sure that the
Step 3: Replacing the Equa-Balance® Seal cartridge assembly is in the off position.)
Remove the current Equa-Balance ® seal (10). Check seal for damage Step 8: Installing the Operating Coupling and Retaining Washer
(punctures, rips, etc.). Replace damaged seal with a new seal (10) observing Orient the operating coupling (9) so that the air relief orifice is in the upper-
proper orientation (EQUA-BALANCE ® SEAL SHOULD CUP INWARD IN ITS most position. Press the operating coupling (9) firmly into the head (1) and
REPLACED STATE.) the operating tube (13). (NOTE: Lubricate the operating coupling O-Ring (8)
Step 4: Removing the Operating Coupling with Lubriplate FGL-2 if needed.) Insert the retaining washer (6) onto the
The operating coupling (9) can be removed by gripping the 5/16" square operating coupling (9) ensuring that the guide pin fits into the operating
end of the operating coupling (9) with a pair of pliers and gently (being coupling (9) groove properly and that the air relief orifice is aligned with
careful not to damage the O-Ring) pulling straight out until the coupling the operating coupling (9) air relief orifice. (If necessary, lubricate lightly
(9) breaks free from the operating tube (13). between the operating coupling (9) and retaining washer (6) with Lubriplate
FGL-2 for smoother operation.)
If the operating coupling, O-Ring and the air relief orifice O-Ring were not
the reason for service – skip to step 6. Step 9: Replacing the Faceplate
Insert nozzle (4) into place and fasten the faceplate (5) to head (1) using the
Step 5: Replacing the Operating Coupling O-Ring
1/8" Allen wrench and the five faceplate screws (15). Rotate the screws
and the Air Relief Orifice O-Ring
clockwise until screws are snugged tight. (By hand only!)
Slip the old O-Ring (8) off, and replace with new O-Ring (8). Remove the old
air relief orifice O-Ring (7) and replace with new air relief orifice O-Ring (7). Step 10: Turning On the Water Supply
If the cartridge and operating tube assemblies were not the reason for Locate the water supply shut-off valve and rotate until water supply is on.
service – skip to step 8.
Z1333 Ecolotrol Wall Hydrant with
Step 6: Removing the Cartridge and Operating Tube Assemblies Ceramic Disc – 3/4" Hose Connection
Insert the 17 mm cartridge wrench (17) into the hydrant, and over the
Static Running Inlet Running Outlet Pressure Drop
operating tube (13) until it stops, then with gentle forward pressure, turn Pressure Pressure Pressure Flow Rate Across Unit
the cartridge wrench (17) clockwise until it engages the hex portion of the (psi) (psi) (psi) (gpm) (psi)
cartridge assembly (14). Then rotate cartridge wrench (17) counterclockwise, 10 4.9 0.0 2.2 4.9
unscrewing the cartridge assembly (14) until the cartridge assembly (14) is 20 15.6 0.1 4.1 15.5
free from the head (1). Remove the cartridge wrench (17) with the cartridge
30 24.3 0.4 5.3 23.9
and operating tube assemblies (13-14). IMPORTANT: Ensure that the entire
40 33.5 0.8 6.1 32.7
cartridge assembly is removed and that the housing seating area is free
of debris. 50 42.3 1.2 7.0 41.0
60 50.5 1.6 7.6 49.0
70 62.3 2.1 8.5 60.2
80 70.9 2.5 9.1 68.4
90 79.3 2.9 9.5 76.5
100
Pressure Drop Across Unit (psi) 76.5
68.4
Running Inlet Pressure (psi)
9.5
60.2
9.1
49.0 8.5
50 41.0 7.6
32.7
7.0
23.9 6.1
15.5
5.3
4.9 Flow Rate (gpm)
4.1
2.2
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Static Inlet Pressure (psi)
Page 52
Spec Seq#: 54
*****
WH-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 55
HYDRANTS
Z1320 ECOLOTROL WALL HYDRANT WITH CERAMIC DISC Parts Assembly, Parts List, and Operating Rod Assemblies
Z1320 Parts Assembly
1177769
Z1320 Parts List
Item Description Qty. Part No.
1 Head 1 59634-001
2 Cartridge Housing 1 59629-004
3 Casing 1 60225-XXX
4 3/4" Nozzle 1 50799-005
5 Faceplate 1 56115-003
*6 Retaining Washer 1 60228-001
*7 O-Ring 1 23750-232
*8 O-Ring 1 23750-028
*9 Operating Coupling 1 60227-002
Operating Rod Assemblies
*10 Equa-Balance ® Seal 1 50785-001
11 Disc 1 50819-001
6" Wall 6-1/8"
*12 Disc O-Ring 1 23750-204 Operating Rod
8" Wall 8-1/8"
13 Operating Tube 1 60226-XXX Assembly Length
10" Wall 10-1/8"
14 Cartridge Assembly 1 59626-001
12" Wall 12-1/8"
15 Faceplate Screw 5 22698-047
14" Wall 14-1/8"
*16 Key 1 59546-001
16" Wall 16-1/8"
17 Wall Clamp (Optional) 2 56071-002
18" Wall 18-1/8"
18 Clamp Screw (Optional) 2 14853-046
20" Wall 20-1/8"
19 Clamp Nut (Optional) 2 14850-002
22" Wall 22-1/8"
20 Hydrant Body 1 56186-001
24" Wall 24-1/8"
21 Lock Clip 1 52033-002
26" Wall 26-1/8"
22 Lock Clip Rivet 2 56201-002
30" Wall 30-1/8"
23 Frame 1 56185-001
24 Hydrant Cover 1 56187-002
25 Hinge Bracket 1 58482-001
26 Hinge Pin 1 58483-001
27 Locking Pin Mounting 1 25306-001
28 Locking PIn 1 25307-001
29 Washer 1 61631-001
30 Screw #10-24 NC 2 14853-042
31 Cartridge Wrench (Optional) 1 62078-XXX
*Items are available in -RK Repair Kit Option bag (#66955-195-9).
Page 26
Spec Seq#: 55
HYDRANTS
Z1320 ECOLOTROL WALL HYDRANT WITH CERAMIC DISC Troubleshooting Guide
Z1320 Troubleshooting Guide

Hydrant will not operate when turned on. Water supply is shut off. Turn on water supply.
Cannot turn the hydrant on with key. Retaining washer is not properly orientated. See “Orientating the Retaining Washer” below.
1177769
Hydrant hasn’t been used for a long time – O-Ring Follow steps 1-2, 4-5, and 8-10 of the Service Guide.
has adhered to the operating screw and head.
Ceramic disc is broken and jammed. Follow steps 1-2, 4, and 6-10 of the Service Guide.
Water sprays from holes around nozzle when Equa-Balance® seal is damaged. Follow steps 1-3 and 8-10 of the Service Guide.
hydrant is on.
Water sprays through the faceplate’s keyway Retaining washer pin is not properly orientated into See “Orientating the Retaining Washer” below.
drainage port when the hydrant is on. operating coupling groove.
Operating coupling’s O-Ring or air relief orifice Follow steps 1-2, 4-5, and 8-10 of the Service Guide.
O-Ring is damaged or missing.
Hydrant will not self-drain when it is shut off The orifice in the operating coupling, retaining Follow steps 1-2, 4 (using a paper clip, evacuate
(hose and hose nozzle are attached). washer, or both is blocked. debris from orifice), and 8-10 of the Service Guide.
Operating coupling is not properly orientated. See “Orientating the Retaining Washer” below.
Water does not shut off completely when Retaining washer is not properly orientated. See “Orientating the Retaining Washer” below.
hydrant is turned off.
Cartridge assembly is loose or damaged. Follow steps 1-2, 4 (then check that the cartridge assembly
is tightly seated), and 6-10 of the Service Guide.
Debris in the ceramic disc, or disc is broken and jammed. Follow steps 1-2, 4, and 6-10 of the Service Guide.
Hydrant exhibits low flow. Water supply to the hydrant is restricted. Check water supply to ensure that all upstream valves
are fully open.
Retaining washer is not properly orientated. See “Orientating the Retaining Washer” below.
Cartridge assembly is damaged or debris in Follow steps 1-2, 4, and 6-10 of the Service Guide.
the ceramic disk.
Orientating the Retaining Washer

If hydrant performance is hindered by the orientation of the retaining washer (see Troubleshooting Guide) then follow these simple steps:
Step 1: Turn water supply to hydrant off.
Step 2: Loosen the five faceplate screws (#15) (DO NOT COMPLETELY REMOVE).
Step 3: Use the operating key to gently cycle the hydrant from OFF to ON and back to OFF again (180° OF ROTATION).
Step 4: Tighten the five faceplate screws (#15) until screws are snugged tight (by hand only).
Page 27
Spec Seq#: 55
HYDRANTS
Z1320 ECOLOTROL WALL HYDRANT WITH CERAMIC DISC Service Guide
Z1320 Service Guide

Step 1: Shutting Off the Water Supply to the Hydrant Step 7: Installing Cartridge and Operating Tube Assemblies
Locate the supply shut-off valve and rotate until water supply is off. Place the cartridge and operating tube assemblies (13-14) into the cartridge
Step 2: Removing the Faceplate and Adjacent Components wrench (31) so that the operating tube (13) is inside of the cartridge wrench
Using 1/8" Allen wrench, remove the five faceplate screws (15) from head (1) (31), and is engaged on the hex portion of the cartridge assembly (14). Insert
the cartridge wrench (31) with the cartridge and operating tube assemblies
1177769
by turning counterclockwise. Remove the faceplate (5), nozzle (4) and
retaining washer (6). (13-14) into the hydrant until making contact with the housing (2), then rotate
the cartridge wrench (31) clockwise screwing the cartridge assembly (14) in
If the Equa-Balance ® seal was not the reason for service – skip to step 4. until it stops, then torque to 15 ft/lbs. (Make sure that the cartridge assembly
Step 3: Replacing the Equa-Balance ® Seal is in the off position.)
Remove the current Equa-Balance ® seal (10). Check seal for damage Step 8: Installing the Operating Coupling and Retaining Washer
(punctures, rips, etc.). Replace damaged seal with a new seal (10) observing Orient the operating coupling (9) so that the air relief orifice is in the uppermost
proper orientation (EQUA-BALANCE ® SEAL SHOULD CUP INWARD IN ITS position. Press the operating coupling (9) firmly into the head (1) and the
REPLACED STATE). operating tube (13). (Note: Lubricate the operating coupling O-Ring (8) with
Step 4: Removing the Operating Coupling Lubriplate FGL-2 if needed.) Insert the retaining washer (6) onto the operating
The operating coupling (9) can be removed by gripping the 5/16 square end coupling (9) ensuring that the guide pin fits into the operating coupling (9)
of the operating coupling (9) with a pair of pliers and gently (being careful groove properly and that the air relief orifice is aligned with the operating
not to damage the O-Ring) pulling straight out until the coupling (9) breaks coupling (9) air relief orifice. (If necessary, lubricate lightly between the
free from the operating tube (13). operating coupling (9) and retaining washer (6) with Lubriplate FGL-2 for
smoother operation.)
If the operating coupling, O-Ring, and the air relief orifice O-Ring were not
the reason for service – skip to step 6. Step 9: Replacing the Faceplate
Insert nozzle (4) into place and fasten the faceplate (5) to head (1) using the
Step 5: Replacing the Operating Coupling O-Ring and the
1/8" Allen wrench and the five faceplate screws (15). Rotate the screws
Air Relief Orifice O-Ring
clockwise until screws are snugged tight. (By hand only!)
Slip the old O-Ring (8) off, and replace with new O-Ring (8). Remove the old
air relief orifice O-Ring (7) and replace with new air relief orifice O-Ring (7). Step 10: Turning On the Water Supply
If the cartridge and operating tube assemblies were not the reason for Locate the water supply shut-off valve and rotate until water supply is on.
service – skip to step 8.
Z1320 Ecolotrol Wall Hydrant with
Step 6: Removing the Cartridge and Operating Tube Assemblies Ceramic Disc – 3/4" Hose Connection
Insert the 17 mm cartridge wrench (31) into the hydrant, and over the operating
Static Running Inlet Running Outlet Pressure Drop
tube (13) until it stops, then with gentle forward pressure, turn the cartridge Pressure Pressure Pressure Flow Rate Across Unit
wrench (31) clockwise until it engages the hex portion of the cartridge assembly (psi) (psi) (psi) (gpm) (psi)
(14). Then rotate cartridge wrench (31) counterclockwise, unscrewing the car- 10 6.1 0.0 2.6 6.0
tridge assembly (14) until the cartridge assembly (14) is free from the housing 20 14.9 0.0 4.3 14.9
(2). Remove the cartridge wrench (31) with the cartridge and operating tube
30 24.3 0.5 5.6 23.8
assemblies (13-14). Important: Ensure that the entire cartridge assembly is
40 33.2 0.9 6.5 32.3
removed and that the housing seating area is free of debris.
50 42.3 1.4 7.3 40.9
60 49.7 1.7 7.9 48.0
70 62.1 2.3 8.8 59.8
80 70.6 2.7 9.3 67.9
90 78.7 3.1 9.8 75.7
100
Pressure Drop Across Unit (psi)
75.7
67.9
Running Inlet Pressure (psi)
9.8
59.8
9.3
48.0 8.8
50 40.9 7.9
32.3
7.3
23.8 6.5
14.9
5.6
6.0 Flow Rate (gpm)
4.3
2.6
0
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Static Inlet Pressure (psi)
Page 28
Spec Seq#: 56
*****
EW-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 57
Emergency Fixtures
Replacement Parts
Classic Model Parts

Eyewash Bowls Dust Caps
948351
154-058 187-053
107-371 S53-063 S53-310
Impact-resistant Corrosion-resistant Eyewash dust caps only (sold Dual Eye/Face wash dust Eyewash dust cap (sold
plastic eyewash stainless steel bowl, individually; two required per caps only (sold individually; individually; two required
bowl, 10" diameter 10¾" diameter eyewash). Yellow plastic tether. two required per eyewash). per eyewash). Beaded
Approximately 1" x 1". Beaded chain tether, 2¼" x 1". chain tether, 1" x 1".
Sprayhead and Spray Ring Assemblies
S45-2453
Eye/face wash (sprayheads
S39-394 S39-396 S39-681
only) Includes 2.4 GPM flow
Eyewash sprayhead assembly Eye/face wash sprayhead Eye/face wash sprayhead assembly; control inside each head. Total
with supply stem assembly with supply stem stem not included flow from dual heads is 4.8
S39-682 (not shown) gpm
Eye/face wash sprayhead assembly
for use with PVC unit only. Stem not
included
S39-397 S05-127
Eyewash and spray ring Spray ring only; requires
assembly with supply stem cross-connection yoke for
attachment to eyewash
© 2013 Bradley
Page 1 of 8 P.O. Box 309, Menomonee Falls, WI 53052-0309
Emergency Fixtures
This information is subject to change without notice. Phone: 800.BRADLEY(800.272.3539) Fax: 262.251.5817
Document No. 4980 3/11/2013 bradleycorp.com
Spec Seq#: 57
Emergency Fixtures
Replacement Parts
Classic Model Parts
Eyewash Ball Valves, Handles and Hardware
948351
S45-122 S30-070 S30-072 S30-074 S30-109
Plastic eyewash Stainless steel eyewash For stainless steel hinged For S19-270BL (left-hand) Stainless steel eyewash handle
handle with ½" brass handle with ½" brass dust covers only. Stainless eyewash only. Stainless steel with ½" stainless steel NPT
NPT stay-open ball NPT stay-open ball steel eyewash handle with eyewash handle with ½" stay-open valve
valve and hardware valve and hardware ½" brass NPT stay-open brass NPT stay-open ball S30-110
S45-123 S30-071
ball valve and hardware valve and hardware
Stainless steel eyewash handle
Plastic eyewash Stainless steel eyewash S30-087 S30-075 with ½" vented stainless steel
handle with hardware handle with hardware For stainless steel hinged For S19-270BL (left-hand) NPT stay-open ball valve
128-135 S08-336 dust covers only. Stainless eyewash only. Stainless steel S30-111
steel eyewash handle with eyewash handle with hardware
Plastic eyewash Stainless steel eyewash hardware 316 stainless steel eyewash
handle only handle only S27-282 handle without dust cover with
S27-282 Brass ½" NPT stay-open ball ½" stainless steel NPT stay-
S27-282 S27-282
Brass ½" NPT stay-open valve only open ball valve
Brass ½" NPT stay- Brass ½" NPT stay- ball valve only
open ball valve only open ball valve only S30-116
316 stainless steel eyewash
handle with hardware
S30-112 S08-338 S27-287

Stainless steel eyewash For all-stainless steel Stainless steel ½" NPT
handle with dust cover units only. Stainless stay-open ball valve
with ½" stainless steel steel eyewash handle Discontinued 4/1/2013
NPT stay-open ball (can only be used with S30-109 or S08-338 are
valve S27-287 ball valve) available for replacement
S08-338SS
parts.
For all 316 stainless
steel units only. 316
stainless steel eyewash
handle (can only be
used with S27-287
ball valve)
© 2013 Bradley
Emergency Fixtures
Spec Seq#: 57
Emergency Fixtures
Replacement Parts
Classic Model Parts
Stem Assemblies, Spacers and Flow Restrictors
Galvanized Fixture with Galvanized Fixture with Standard Stainless 316 Stainless Steel
Sprayhead Assembly
Plastic Bowl Stainless Steel Bowl Steel Fixture Fixture
S21-071 (stem) S21-071 (stem) S21-072 (stem) S21-075 (stem)
Eyewash Only
113-1185 (stem spacer) 113-1159 (stem spacer) 113-1159 (stem spacer) 113-1159 (stem spacer)
948351
S21-073 (stem) S21-073 (stem) S21-074 (stem)
Eye/Face Wash with Spray Ring None
113-1185 (stem spacer) 113-1159 (stem spacer) 113-1159 (stem spacer)
Eye/Face Wash with Dual Black Heads 113-1150 (stem) 113-1150 (stem) 113-1151 (stem) None
Spacers 113-1159 and 113-1185 are required for units that shipped on or before 11/2/2005.
Stem Assemblies
S21-071 S21-072 S21-073 S21-074

Brass stem assembly with stainless steel stem assembly with flow Brass stem assembly stainless steel stem
flow restrictor; for units restrictor; for stainless steel units with flow restrictor; for assembly with
with eyewash only with eyewash only units with eyewash flow restrictor; for
113-1150 S21-075 and spray ring only stainless steel
units with eyewash
Brass stem only; for 316 stainless steel stem assembly with and spray ring only
units with dual black flow restrictor; for 316 stainless steel
eye/face wash heads units (with eyewash) only
113-1151
stainless steel stem only; for stainless
steel units with dual black eye/face
wash heads
Stem Spacers Eyewash and Eye/Face Wash Flow Restrictors
113-1159 113-1185 125-167 125-032

Stainless steel stem Black plastic stem spacer; 3.7 GPM pink flow 3.5 GPM black
spacer; for use in units for use in units with restrictor; for eyewash flow restrictor; for
with stainless steel bowl yellow plastic bowl with face spray ring swing-activated and
only (stem not included) swing-down units
© 2013 Bradley
Emergency Fixtures
Spec Seq#: 57
Emergency Fixtures
Replacement Parts
Halo Model Parts
Covers and Bowl Kits
948351
187-320 S90-390 S90-391 S90-388
Plastic bowl Plastic bowl cover kit Stainless steel bowl kit Stainless steel bowl
cover kit
S90-392
316 stainless steel bowl kit
Sprayhead Assemblies Dust Cover Kits
S05-190 S05-192 S45-2675 S45-2676

Sprayhead assembly Sprayhead assembly Eyewash cover kit Eye/Face wash cover kit
Ball Valves O-ring and Flow Control Handle Kit
S27-327 S65-339 S88-068 S08-390

Chrome-plated brass ½" ball valve O-ring and Screen O-ring and flow Handle Kit
control
S27-328 (not shown)
Stainless steel ½" ball valve
© 2013 Bradley
Emergency Fixtures
Spec Seq#: 57
Emergency Fixtures
Replacement Parts
Spintec™ Showerhead and Drench Shower Parts
s)NCLUDESINTEGRALGPMmOWRESTRICTOR
s&ULLYDISTRIBUTESWATERTHROUGHOUTSPRAYPATTERN
s#OMPACTDESIGNMINIMIZESFOOTPRINTINYOURFACILITY
948351
S24-192 S24-193 S24-194 S24-200
Plastic shroud and ring IStainless steel shroud and ring Plastic showerhead and 1" Stainless steel showerhead and
(showerhead not included) (showerhead not included) diameter 90° elbow 1" diameter 90° elbow
154-147
Ring only
S24-195 S24-196 S24-202
Plastic shroud with ring, plastic Stainless steel shroud with ring, plastic Plastic showerhead, white steel in-ceiling recessed shroud
showerhead and 1" diameter 90° elbow showerhead and 1" diameter 90° elbow assembly, ring, coupling and 1" diameter 90° elbow
S30-059 S19-0011
Chrome-plated brass 1" Self-closing ball valve
NPT ball valve with lever NOTE: Self-closing ball valves
are not ANSI Z358.1 compliant
S27-278
128-156A Appendix B3. However an
128-156C Chrome-plated brass 1" exception may be made in a
Drench shower handle for standard Drench shower handle (48" x 9") NPT ball valve only 'school laboratory' situation.
(non-barrier-free) units (25½" x 9")
128-156D S30-061 (not shown) Contact local authorities
128-156B regarding specific application
Drench shower handle (standard; shipped Stainless steel 1" NPT
Drench shower handle for flush-mount with barrier-free showers) (45½" x 9") ball valve with lever
(non-barrier-free) units (36" x 9")
128-156E S27-276 (not shown)
128-156G
Drench shower handle (57" x 9") Stainless steel 1" NPT
Drench shower handle for heat trace ball valve only
units (27" x 9") 128-156F
Drench shower handle (69" x 9")
© 2013 Bradley
Emergency Fixtures
Spec Seq#: 57
Emergency Fixtures
Replacement Parts
Drench Hose Parts
Hoses Valve - Hose Spray Hose Guide
Bracket
948351
S89-002 140-226
8' thermoplastic hose; S27-265 Drench hose
yellow 269-053 269-054 Replacement valve only guide bracket
S89-003 12' thermoplastic 25' thermoplastic
6' stainless steel hose hose; yellow hose; yellow
Backflow Prevention Drench Hose

Replacement Part Valves
S27-303 S45-2309 S45-2310 S39-817

Dual-check Dual-check Dual-check backflow Replacement valve with
backflow preventer vacuum breaker preventer compliant with drench hose sprayhead
compliant with compliant with ASSE 1012 Watts Series
ASSE 1024 & CSA B64.6 9D; includes fittings for
CSA B64.6 Watts Watts Series 9 easy installation
Series 7
© 2013 Bradley
Emergency Fixtures
Spec Seq#: 57
Emergency Fixtures
Replacement Parts
Other
Safety Signs and Tags
948351
bradleycorp.com
bradleycorp.com bradleycorp.com 114-052

114-050 114-051
114-050 114-051 114-052

Drench shower sign Eyewash sign Combination Drench shower and eyewash sign
Foot Treadle Kits
S45-572
Foot treadle and hardware kit (with 3-foot chain)
for standard pedestal-mounted eyewashes and S39-395
combination shower/eyewash units with hand Foot treadle and
operation; provides supplemental foot operation hardware kit for wall-
mounted eyewashes
S45-1314SS
with hand operation; S45-620
Type 316 stainless steel foot treadle and standard provides supplemental
stainless steel hardware kit for stainless steel foot operation Foot treadle and hardware
pedestal-mounted eyewashes and combination kit for model S19-310PVC
shower/eyewash units combination drench shower
and eyewash unit with
S45-1314SS16
hand operation; provides
Type 316 stainless steel foot treadle and 316 supplemental foot operation
stainless steel hardware kit for Type 316
stainless steel pedestal-mounted eyewashes and
combination shower/eyewash units
On-Site Portables Miscellaneous Supplies
269-1444
S19-949 On-Site Eyewash Kit 133-140
Gravity fed tank Eyewash test gauge
Includes replacement cap, nine foam 204-421
liners, inspection tag Inspection Tag 269-964
269-1379 On-Site Water Foam Liner (sold individually) Safety yellow touch-up
Perforated foam liner (sold individually) PAINT OZAEROSOL
© 2013 Bradley
Emergency Fixtures
Spec Seq#: 57
Emergency Fixtures
Replacement Parts
Other
Freeze and Scald Protection Kits
sFreeze protection valves completely open at 35°F (1.6°C) and closes at 45°F (7.2°C)
sScald protection valves completely open at 105°F (40.5°C) and closes at 85°F (29.4°C)
Classic combination units require both drench shower and eyewash protection valves.
948351
Scald
Valve
Freeze
Valve
Freeze
Valve
Scald
Valve
S45-1703 S45-1987 S45-1986

&REEZEPROTECTIONREPLACEMENTVALVEFOR &REEZEPROTECTIONKITFORDRENCHSHOWERSINCLUDES &REEZEPROTECTIONKITFOREYEWASHESINCLUDESFREEZE
drench showers and eyewashes FREEZEPROTECTIONVALVETEENIPPLESCOMPRESSION protection valve, tee, nipples, compression fitting,
S45-1702 fitting, ball valve, tubing and cable tie ball valve, tubing and cable tie
Scald protection replacement valve for S45-1990 S45-1989
drench showers and eyewashes Scald protection kit for drench showers; includes Scald protection kit for eyewashes includes scald
scald protection valve, tee, nipples, compression protection valve, tee, nipples, compression fitting,
fitting, ball valve, tubing and cable tie ball valve, tubing and cable tie
Optional Adapters
153-395
Female, ¹³⁄₁₆" x 24 — Chrome
153-396
Male, ³⁄₈" NPSM — Chrome
153-401
Female, ¾" (Garden Hose) — Chrome
© 2013 Bradley
Emergency Fixtures
Spec Seq#: 58
Installation and Maintenance

Instructions
Instructions pour l'installation et
l'entretien
Instrucciones para la instalación y
mantenimiento
134208
Bradley EFX 25 Thermostatic Mixing Valve
with Optional Cabinet
Model S19-2100 Series
Robinet thermostatique mélangeur EFX 25

avec cabinet facultatif
Bradley modèle S19-2100
Válvula mezcladora termostática EFX 25

con armario opcional
Bradley modelo S19-2100
215-1290 Rev. L; EN 10-09-001 P.O. Box 309, Menomonee Falls, WI USA 53052-0309
© 2010 Bradley Corporation Phone (262) 251-6000 Fax (262) 251-5817
Page 1 of 28 4/13/10 http://www.bradleycorp.com
Spec Seq#: 58
Bradley EFX 25 Thermostatic Mixing Valve with Optional Cabinet
Model S19-2100 Series Installation and Maintenance Instructions
Table of Contents
Pre-Installation Information ...................................... 2 Recirculation Instructions ......................................... 6
Valve Installation Instructions................................... 3 Maintenance........................................................... 7-8
Recess-Mounted Cabinet Installation ....................... 4 Troubleshooting ..................................................... 8-9
Surface-Mounted Cabinet Installation ...................... 5 Parts Breakdown and Service Kits.......................... 10
Pre-Installation Information
134208
Overview
Valve: The EFX 25 Thermostatic Mixing Valve (Model S19-2100) is designed for use with one drench
shower or eye wash(es) or combination drench shower/eye wash. The valve consists of a liquid-filled
thermal motor and a piston control mechanism with positive shut-off of hot when cold water supply is lost
to prevent scalding. The valve allows cold flow in the event of loss or interruption of the hot water supply
or failure of the thermostat. The valve may be mounted in any position.
The maximum inlet temperature of the valve is 180°F (82°C), with a recommended inlet temperature of
120°F–140°F (49°C–60°C). The valve has a maximum operating pressure of 125 PSI (860 kPA).
Cabinet: The optional recess-mounted or surface-mounted cabinet is constructed of 18-gauge stainless
steel with a 16-gauge stainless steel door. The cabinet finish is either stainless steel or baked white enamel.
The optional cabinet window is made of Plexiglass.
Supplies recommended for installation

• lockable shut-off on the outlet if tempered water is supplied to one or more remote showers
• lockable shut-off on the inlets/supplies
• (6) 3/8" wall anchors and fasteners for surface-mounted cabinet
• (4) 1/4" fasteners (and wall anchors, if necessary) for recess-mounted cabinet
• unions on all connections to facilitate removal of valve
Tools required for temperature adjustment
• 5/32" Allen key
• blade screwdriver
Bradley Warranty Information

Product warranties may be found under “Product Information” on our website at www.bradleycorp.com
2 4/13/10 Bradley Corporation • 215-1290 Rev. L; EN 10-09-001

Spec Seq#: 58
Installation and Maintenance Instructions Model S19-2100 Series
Installation Instructions for Valve

CAUTION: If optional cabinet is to be used, the cabinet must be mounted before the valve
is installed. Please refer to the cabinet mounting instructions on pages 4-5.
Note: Flush the supply lines before beginning
installation. SLOTTED COVER
SCREW
Note: When the check valves are in the open (operating)
134208
position, the cover screw for the stop/check stem will be
flush with the valve cap (see Figure 1).
1. Connect the hot and cold valve supply inlets to the
appropriate hot and cold supply piping. STOP/CHECK
COVER SCREW
2. Connect the mixed valve supply outlet from the
valve to the tempered supply piping. VALVE
CAP
3. Screw the thermometer into the hole in the valve
body (see Figure 2). The thermometer provides a
readout of the outlet water temperature.
4. Pressurize the thermostatic mixing valve and check
for pipe leaks.
5. Slowly open the outlet valve to fill the piping system.
6. Check the temperature when approximately 10
GPM water flow is reached (equivalent to two face Figure 1
washes) and adjust if necessary [the range of the
valve is 65°F–95°F (18°C–35°C)]. To adjust the
temperature, follow the procedure below: THERMOMETER
• remove the slotted cover screw to expose the set screw

• using a 5/32" hex-head Allen key, turn the set screw
counterclockwise to increase the temperature or
clockwise to decrease the temperature.
Note: The standard preset factory temperature setting is
85°F (29°C). Consult proper medical and/or safety
authorities for the optimum temperature recommended for
your particular application.
VALVE BODY
7. Shut the hot water inlet off by closing either the hot
water check valve or inlet valve. While the hot water
supply is turned off, check to make sure the cold Figure 2
water is flowing properly. If the cold water is flowing
properly, reopen the hot water supply.
8. Shut the cold water inlet off by closing either the cold water check valve or inlet valve. While the cold
water supply is off, check to make sure that the hot water flow has shut down.
9. Test the system weekly (turn on the water supply and check for constant control of the desired set
temperature).
Bradley Corporation • 215-1290 Rev. L; EN 10-09-001 4/13/10 3

Spec Seq#: 58
Installation Instructions: Valve with Optional Recess-Mounted Cabinet

Note: Flush the supply lines before beginning installation.
1. Rough in a 24-1/2" W x 24-1/2" H hole in the wall for the cabinet (see Figure 3).
2. Measure and mark the cabinet mounting hole locations at the dimensions shown in Figure 3. Install four
1/4" wall anchors, if required (supplied by installer).
3. Insert the cabinet into the wall opening and secure into place with four 1/4" wall fasteners (supplied by
installer).
134208
4. Install two anchors and screws through the valve bracket in back of the cabinet into a secure brace
(supplied by installer) or into the wall. This must be done to provide adequate support for the valve.
5. Install the valve nipples and one-half of the union ball valve using pipe dope or teflon tape. Then install
the other half of the union ball valve onto the inlet and outlet piping.
6. Insert the valve into the bracket in the cabinet (right side of the valve goes in first). Continue with the
valve installation procedure found on page 3.
7. Position the wall flange tight to the wall and caulk in place.
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
Figure 3

Spec Seq#: 58
Installation Instructions: Valve with Optional Surface-Mounted Cabinet

Note: Flush the supply lines before beginning installation.
1. Measure and mark the cabinet mounting hole locations at the dimensions shown in Figure 4. Install six
3/8" wall anchors (supplied by installer).
2. Position the cabinet onto the wall and secure into place with six 3/8" wall fasteners (supplied by
installer).
3. Install the valve nipples and one-half of the union ball valve using pipe dope or teflon tape. Then install
134208
the other half of the union ball valve onto the inlet and outlet piping.
4. Insert the valve into the bracket in the cabinet (right side of the valve goes in first). Continue with the
valve installation procedure found on page 3.
FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW
MOUNTING HOLE LOCATIONS
BOTTOM VIEW
Figure 4

Spec Seq#: 58
Recirculation Diagram
134208
Recirculation Instructions
Note: Recirculating the water in the system provides constant regulation of the water temperature. Flush the
supply lines thoroughly after completing installation. Close off all fixtures and label them as not available
for use during the recirculating process.
1. Turn off the recirculating pump and turn on the water supply (a water flow rate of 10-15 GPM is
required).
2. Let the water run through the system until a consistent temperature is obtained. If you do not obtain the
required temperature, refer to procedure #6 on page 3 for temperature readjustment.
3. As soon as the water reaches the proper temperature, turn on the recirculating pump (make certain the
proper system temperature has been achieved before proceeding).
4. Check the water temperature at the return pump. If the temperature exceeds the appropriate level by
2°F, adjust the temperature high-limit switch (this will turn off the pump). Wait until the return water
temperature is 5°F below the appropriate level and adjust the low-limit switch (this will turn the pump
back on).
5. Turn the balancing valve until it is completely open.
6. Turn off all fixtures and make sure there is no water running through the system (the cold inlet pipe
should feel warm to the touch).
7. Let the system run for thirty minutes or longer without water. If, after thirty minutes, the water temperature
increases, you may readjust the temperature by slowly closing the balancing valve until the appropriate
temperature is reached.

Spec Seq#: 58
Thermostatic Mixing Valve Maintenance

For maximum efficiency, your thermostatic mixing valve requires a minimum amount of maintenance.
Follow the procedures outlined below to achieve highest performance.
WARNING: To prevent injuries, use proper protective equipment for eyes and skin
when using a propane torch.
Check the piston for smooth movement
134208
To check the valve's piston for free and smooth movement,
follow the procedures outlined below.
TOP CAP
1. Remove the valve's top cap and pull out the thermostat and
then the push rod (see Figure 5). You may use a needlenose
pliers to remove the thermostat from the valve body if
desired. THERMOSTAT
2. Insert a 7/16" dia. rod into the valve and into the piston
overheat chamber. Mark the length of the rod inside the
valve (see Figure 6).
3. Push the rod until the piston stops and mark the new length PUSHROD
(the new length should be approximately 5/16" longer than
the original length) (see Figure 6). If the length is not as it
should be, the piston is not moving freely and needs to be
cleaned along with the piston liner. Clean the piston and
liner following the method outlined below:
• remove the control section assembly from the valve body Figure 5
• remove the top cap and thermostat
• unthread the liner from the cap (it is glued together; the
o-rings must be removed and a propane torch must be
used to melt the glue and loosen the liner)
• any cleaner suitable for brass and stainless steel may be
7/16"
used (if cleaning with suitable cleaner is not sufficient to ROD
remove debris, a 400-grit sandpaper may be used to polish
and hone the piston and liner).
4. If the piston moves freely, push the mechanism up and
The second mark
down several times to make sure the piston moves should be 5/16" higher
on the rod than the
smoothly and consistently. If movement of the piston is first mark.
not consistent, recheck the piston and liner for dirt and
debris as described in procedure #3.
• if the piston parts need to be replaced, contact your
Bradley representative and ask for Piston/Liner Kit (part
number S65-175).
PISTON
OVERHEAT
CHAMBER
Figure 6

Spec Seq#: 58
Thermostatic Mixing Valve Maintenance, continued . . .

Check the thermostat for proper operation
To check the valve's thermostat for proper operation, follow the
procedures outlined below.
1. Remove the top cap and pull out the push rod and thermostat
(see Figure 5 on page 7). 5/16"
ROD
2. Insert a 5/16" dia. rod into the thermostat bellows. Mark the
134208
length of the rod inside the bellows (see Figure 7).
3. Mark the length of the thermostat bellows (at room temperature,
with 10 lb. of force, the bellows length should be approx.
1-1/4") (see Figure 7).
4. If the thermostat bellows length is not in the proper range, the
thermostat must be replaced (it cannot be repaired). Contact Bellows length
your Bradley representative and ask for Thermostat Kit (part should be 1-1/8"
to 1-5/16"
number S65-174).
Adjust the temperature
To adjust the valve's temperature to other than the factory preset,
follow the procedures outlined below.
1. Turn on the water and let it run until at least 10 GPM is
flowing through the valve.
THERMOSTAT
2. Remove the slotted cover screw to expose the set screw.
3. Using a 5/32" hex-head Allen key, turn the set screw
counterclockwise to increase the temperature or clockwise
to decrease the temperature.
Figure 7
4. When the adjustment is complete, replace the cover screw
and turn off the water.
Thermostatic Mixing Valve Troubleshooting

Note: Before attempting to troubleshoot the valve or disassemble the components, check for the following
conditions:
• make sure that the check valves are fully open (the slotted stem must be flush with the stop/check cap)
(see Figure 1 on page 3) and that all inlet and outlet shut-off valves are open
• make sure that the hot and cold inlet pipes are connected properly, and that there are no cross-
connections or leaking stop/check valves
• check the hot water heater output to make sure that it is at least 15° F above the set temperature.
Be sure to close the appropriate shut-off valves prior to disassembly of the valve and reopen the valves
after inspection and repair is complete.
Problem: No hot water flow (cold water flow only)
Cause: The thermostat has failed and, subsequently, the safety shut-off has engaged (the shut-off valve has
closed on either the inlets or outlet).
Solution: See “Check the thermostat for proper operation” above and follow the step-by-step procedure.

Spec Seq#: 58
Thermostatic Mixing Valve Troubleshooting, continued . . .

Problem: Limited water flow
Cause: The inlet shut-off valve may be partially closed or there STOP AND
CHECKS
has been a significant decrease in water pressure.
Solution: See “Check the thermostat for proper operation” on
page 8 and follow the step-by-step procedure.
Cause: The stop and check sections of the valve do not move
134208
VALVE
freely. SCREEN
Solution: Dirt and debris have collected on the check screen or
seat, limiting the movement of the stop and checks. Remove
the stop and checks, clean the screen and seat and reassemble
the valve (see Figure 8). Do not remove the seat. The
components may be scraped with a screwdriver to remove
debris.
A pair of tweezers works well for pulling debris out from
the seat. If the stop and checks need to be replaced, contact
your Bradley representative and ask for Check/Stop Kit
(part number S65-176).
Problem: Improper water temperature VALVE SEAT
Cause: Recirculation is not balanced.
Solution: See “Recirculation instructions” on page 6 and follow
the step-by-step procedure. Figure 8
Problem: External leaks in the system

Cause: Either the NPT joints or the o-rings have been damaged.
Solution: Replace the NPT joints and/or o-rings where necessary. For replacement of o-rings, contact your
Bradley representative and ask for O-Ring/Seal Kit (part number S65-173).
Problem: Temperature fluctuation
Cause: Thermostat is slowly failing.
Solution: See “Check the thermostat for proper operation” on page 8 and follow the step-by-step procedure.
Cause: Recirculation is not balanced.
Solution: See “Recirculation instructions” on page 6 and follow the step-by-step procedure.
Cause: Inlet supply line to the mixing valve is being shared by other pieces of equipment that are used only
periodically, such as laundry appliances or washdown stations. It may reduce the inlet pressure to the
mixing valve to less than 10 PSI. The supply line size may not be large enough to supply both the valve
and the other appliances.
Solution: Enlarge the supply line size, reconfigure the supply line or regulate the supply usage.

Spec Seq#: 58
EFX 25: Parts Breakdown and Service Kits
134208
30-Spring: Hot Side
46-Spring: Cold
Side (Blue)
NOTE: Kit numbers for rough

brass finish and standard range
thermostat. Contact Bradley for
other configurations.
Cold Inlet
Center Section Kit S65-304
Item Qty. Description
Thermostat Kit S65-174 2 1 O-Ring
3 1 Liner
Item Qty. Description
4 1 Washer
15 1 Thermostat 5 1 Screw
17 1 O-Ring 6 1 Spring
21 1 O-Ring Washer/Seal Kit S65-310 7 1 #10-24 Hex Nut
Item Qty. Description 8 1 Spring
4 1 Washer 9 1 Retainer
Piston & Liner Kit S65-175 32 2 Seal 10 1 O-Ring
Check/Stop Kit S65-337
Item Qty. Description 33 3 Washer 11 1 Piston
2 1 O-Ring Item Qty. Description 12 1 O-Ring
3 1 Liner 25 2 Cap 13 1 Overheat Screw
4 1 Washer O-Ring Kit S65-173 26 2 O-Ring 14 1 Upper Seat
5 1 Screw Item Qty. Description 27 2 Stem 15 1 Thermostat
6 1 Spring 28 2 O-Ring 16 1 Pushrod
2 1 O-Ring
7 1 #10-24 Hex Nut 29 2 Strainer 17 1 O-Ring
10 1 O-Ring
8 1 Spring 30 1 Spring 18 1 O-Ring
12 1 O-Ring
9 1 Retainer 31 2 Holder (for Seal) 19 1 O-Ring
17 1 O-Ring
10 1 O-Ring 32 2 Seal 20 1 Mixing Valve Cap
18 1 O-Ring
11 1 Piston 33 2 Washer 21 1 O-Ring
19 1 O-Ring
12 1 O-Ring 34 2 Nut 22 1 Control Cap
21 1 O-Ring
13 1 Overheat Screw 35 2 Seat 23 1 Set Screw
26 2 O-Ring
14 1 Upper Seat 36 2 O-Ring 24 1 Screw
28 2 O-Ring
33 1 Washer 46 1 Spring (Blue) 33 1 Washer
36 2 O-Ring

Spec Seq#: 58
Robinet thermostatique mélangeur EFX 25, avec cabinet facultatif
Instructions pour l'installation et l'entretien Bradley modèle S19-2100
Table des matières

Information avant l'installation ............................... 11 Directives pour la recirculation............................... 15
Installation du robinet ............................................. 12 Entretien............................................................. 16-17
Installation du cabinet suspendu ............................. 13 Dépannage ......................................................... 17-18
Installation du cabinet de surface............................ 14 Liste des pièces et des trousses de service.............. 19
Information avant l'installation
134208
Description
Robinet : Le robinet thermostatique mélangeur EFX 25, (modèle S19-2100), est conçu pour être utilisé
avec une douche d'urgence, une douche oculaire, ou avec une combinaison douche d'urgence/oculaire.
Le robinet est constitué d'un moteur thermique rempli de liquide. Pour empêcher les échaudages, un
mécanisme de contrôle à piston ferme automatiquement l'alimentation en eau chaude en cas de manque
d'eau froide. Le robinet distribue un jet d'eau froide, en cas de perte ou d'interruption d'alimentation en eau
chaude, ou en cas d'une panne du thermostat. Le robinet peut être installé dans n'importe quelle position.
La température maximum à l'entrée du robinet est de 82°C (180°F), et la température recommandée à l'entrée
est de 49° à 60°C (120° à 140°F). La pression d'opération maximum du robinet est de 860 kPA (125 psi).
Cabinet : Le module, à montage suspendu ou de surface, est construit en acier inoxydable de calibre 18,
avec une porte en acier inoxydable de calibre 16. La finition du cabinet est en acier inoxydable ou en
émail cuit de couleur blanc. La fenêtre en Plexiglas est facultative.
Fournitures recommandées pour l'installation

• arrêt d'alimentation avec verrouillage aux sorties, si certaines douches du site sont alimentées en
eau tempérée
• arrêt d'alimentation avec verrouillage aux entrées
• 6 ancrages muraux et attaches de 3/8" pour le cabinet de surface
• 4 attaches (et ancrages muraux si nécessaire) de 1/4" pour le cabinet suspendu
• raccords à tous les branchements, pour faciliter l'enlèvement du robinet
Outils nécessaires pour l'ajustement de la température
• clé Allen de 5/32"
• tournevis plat
Informations de garantie Bradley

Les garanties du produit figurent sous la rubrique « Informations techniques » sur notre site Internet
à www.bradleycorp.com.

Spec Seq#: 58
Bradley modèle S19-2100 Instructions pour l'installation et l'entretien
Installation du robinet
ATTENTION : Si on utilise le cabinet facultatif, il devra être installé avant le robinet.
Se référer aux directives pour l'installation du cabinet, aux pages 13 et 14.
Note : Vider le tuyau d'approvisionnement en eau avant

de débuter l'installation. VIS ENCOCHÉE
DU CHAPEAU
Note : Lorsque les clapets anti-retour sont en position
ouverts, la vis du chapeau de la tige d'arrêt est de
134208
niveau avec le capuchon de robinet (voir Figure 1).
1. Brancher l'eau chaude et froide d'entrée VIS DU CHAPEAU
DE LA TIGE
d'alimentation du robinet à la tuyauterie D'ARRÊT
appropriée.
CAPUCHON
2. Brancher la sortie d'alimentation du robinet DE ROBINET
mélangeur à la tuyauterie d'alimentation en eau
tempérée.
3. Visser le thermomètre dans l'orifice du corps du
robinet (voir Figure 2). Le thermomètre donne une
lecture de la température de l'eau à la sortie.
4. Pressuriser le robinet thermostatique mélangeur et
vérifier s'il y a des fuites.
5. Ouvrir le robinet doucement, de manière à remplir Figure 1
le système de tuyauterie.
6. Lorsque qu'un débit moyen de 38 litres/minute
(10 gallons/minute) est atteint (équivaut à un double THERMOMÈTRE
rinçage facial), vérifier la température et ajuster si
nécessaire [la variation du robinet est de 18° à 35°C
(65° à 95°F)]. Pour ajuster la température, procéder
comme suit :
• enlever la vis encochée du chapeau, afin d'exposer la
vis d'ajustement
• à l'aide d'une clé Allen hexagonale de 5/32", tourner
la vis d'ajustement vers la gauche pour augmenter
la température ou vers la droite pour l'abaisser. CORPS DE
ROBINET
Note : La température préréglée en usine est de 29°C
(85°F). Consulter les autorités, médicales ou de sécurité,
pour déterminer la température maximale recommandée Figure 2
pour votre application en particulier.
7. Fermer l'alimentation en eau chaude, soit par le clapet anti-retour ou l'entrée d'eau chaude. Alors que
l'alimentation en eau chaude est fermée, vérifier si le jet d'eau froide est régulier. Si oui, ouvrir
l'alimentation en eau chaude.
8. Fermer l'alimentation en eau froide, soit par le clapet anti-retour ou l'entrée d'eau froide. Alors que
l'alimentation en eau froide est fermée, s'assurer que le jet d'eau chaud s'est arrêté.
9. Faire une vérification hebdomadaire du système (ouvrir l'alimentation en eau et vérifier si la température
réglée pour l'eau est constante).

Spec Seq#: 58
Installation du robinet avec cabinet suspendu facultatif

Note : Vider le tuyau d'approvisionnement en eau avant de débuter l'installation.
1. Pratiquer une ouverture initiale de 62 cm L x 62 cm H (24,5" x 24,5") dans le mur, pour y fixer le
cabinet (voir Figure 3).
2. Mesurer et marquer l'emplacement des trous pour le montage, selon les dimensions indiquées à la
Figure 3. Si nécessaire, installer quatre ancrages muraux de 1/4" (fournis par l'installateur).
3. Insérer le cabinet dans l'ouverture et le fixer en place avec quatre attaches murales de 1/4" (fournies
134208
par l'installateur).
4. Installer deux vis et deux ancrages à travers le support de robinet, à l'arrière du cabinet, le tout fixé
avec une attache de sécurité (fournie par l'installateur) ou dans le mur. Cette opération est nécessaire
afin d'offrir un support adéquat au robinet.
5. Installer les raccords du robinet ainsi qu'une moitié de la valve de retenue, à l'aide d'enduit d'étanchéité
pour tuyaux ou de ruban de téflon. Puis, installer l'autre moitié de la valve de retenue sur l'entrée et la
sortie de la tuyauterie.
6. Insérer le robinet dans le support, dans le cabinet (le côté droite du robinet en premier). Continuer
l'installation du robinet selon les procédures indiquées à la page 12.
7. Positionner la bride contre le mur et calfeutrer en place.
VUE DE FACE VUE LATERALE

51 mm
578 mm (2")
SORTIE :
267 mm (22,75") BRIDE 1" NPT
PORTE 51 mm
(10,5") (2") 51 mm
(2")
VALVE DE 127 mm
RETENUE (5")
578 mm 610 mm
(22,75") RACCORD (24")
PORTE 356 mm
DU
(14")
ROBINET
660 mm
(26")
216 mm 178 mm 51 mm 51 mm
(8,5") (7") (2") (2")
TROUS DE 7 mm (0,28")
DE DIAMÈTRE, ENTREES :
165 mm
660 mm 4 POUR CHAQUE COTE, 0,75" NPT
(6,5")
(26") 8 AU TOTAL
VUE DU DESSOUS
Figure 3
610 mm
(24")

Spec Seq#: 58
Installation du robinet avec cabinet de surface facultatif

Note : Vider le tuyau d'approvisionnement en eau avant de débuter l'installation.
1. Mesurer et marquer l'emplacement des trous pour le montage, selon les dimensions indiquées à la
Figure 4. Installer six ancrages muraux de 3/8" (fournis par l'installateur).
2. Aligner le cabinet face aux trous de montage et le fixer en place avec six attaches murales de 3/8"
(fournies par l'installateur).
3. Installer les raccords du robinet ainsi qu'une moitié de la valve de retenue, à l'aide d'enduit d'étanchéité
134208
pour tuyaux ou de ruban de téflon. Puis, installer l'autre moitié de la valve de retenue sur l'entrée et la
sortie de la tuyauterie.
4. Insérer le robinet dans le support, dans le cabinet (le côté droite du robinet en premier). Continuer
l'installation du robinet selon les procédures indiquées à la page 12.
VUE DE FACE
VUE LATERALE
578 mm
(22,75")
267 mm PORTE 51 mm
(10,5") SORTIE : 1" NPT (2")
51 mm
(2")
VALVE DE
RETENUE
610 mm
(24")
RACCORD
DU 578 mm
ROBINET (22,75")
PORTE
51 mm
(2")
216 mm 178 mm 165 mm
(8,5") (7") (6,5") ENTREES :
0,75" NPT
POSITION DES TROUS POUR L'INSTALLATION

TROUS DE 12 mm
191 mm (0,47") DE DIAMÈTRE,
159 mm (7,5")
(6,25") EN 6 ENDROITS
VUE DU DESSOUS
508 mm
(20")
610 mm 214 mm
(24") (8,44")
Figure 4
508 mm
51 mm (20")
(2") 51 mm
(2")

Spec Seq#: 58
Schéma de recirculation
CLAPET ANTI-RETOUR (TYPICAL)
DÉBIT D’EAU
FROIDE
TEMPÉRÉE
EAU
FROIDE
134208
COLLECTEUR
DE CHALEUR,
CHUTE 71 cm
(28")
COMMUTATEUR DE
TEMPERATURE
RECIRCULATION
ALTERNATIVE
[plus de 19 litres/minute
(5 gal/min)] EAU TEMPÉRÉE
CHAUDE RECIRULÉE
DÉBIT DE
CLAPET RETOUR
D'EQUILIBRAGE
(TYPICAL) POMPE DE
RECIRCULATION
CHAUFFE-EAU RESERVOIR DE STOCKAGE
Directives pour la recirculation

Note : La recirculation d'eau dans le système fournie une régulation constante de la température de l'eau.
Complètement vider le tuyau d'approvisionnement en eau après avoir terminé l'installation. Durant le
processus de recirculation, fermer tous les douches de premier secours et les identifier comme étant occupés.
1. Fermer la pompe de recirculation et ouvrir l'alimentation en eau [un débit de 38 à 56 litres/minute
(10 à 15 gallons/minute) est nécessaire].
2. Laisser circuler l'eau dans le système, jusqu'à l'atteinte d'une température cohérente. Si la température
nécessaire n'est pas atteinte, se référer à l'étape 6 en page 12, pour le réajustement de la température.
3. Dès que l'eau atteint la température appropriée, démarrer la pompe de recirculation (s'assurer que la
température appropriée du système est atteinte avant de procéder).
4. Vérifier la température d'eau de la pompe de retour. Si la température excède le niveau approprié par
plus de 1°C (2°F), ajuster le commutateur pour l'élévation maximum de la température (la pompe
cessera de fonctionner). Attendre que la température de l'eau se soit abaissée à 2,8°C (5°F) sous le
niveau approprié et ajuster le commutateur pour le niveau minimum (la pompe va redémarrer).
5. Tourner le clapet d'équilibrage jusqu'à ce qu'il soit complètement ouvert.
6. Fermer tous les douches de premier secours et s'assurer qu'il n'y a pas d'eau en circulation dans le
système (le tuyau d'entrée d'eau froide devrait être tiède au toucher).
7. Laisser le système fonctionner sans eau durant 30 minutes ou plus. Si après 30 minutes, la température
de l'eau augmente, réajuster la température à son niveau approprié, en fermant légèrement le clapet
d'équilibrage.

Spec Seq#: 58
Entretien du robinet thermostatique mélangeur

Pour une efficacité maximum, le robinet thermostatique mélangeur nécessite peu d'entretien. Suivre les
directives ci-dessous pour obtenir les meilleures performances.
AVERTISSEMENT : Pour empêcher les blessures, porter les équipements protecteurs
pour les yeux et la peau, lors de l'utilisation d'une torche au propane.
Vérifier l'aisance de la course du piston
134208
Pour vérifier l'aisance de la course du piston, procéder comme suit.
1. Enlever le capuchon de robinet, puis retirer le thermostat et
CAPUCHON
la bielle (voir Figure 5). Si désiré, utiliser une pince à bec
effilé pour enlever le thermostat du corps du robinet.
2. Insérer une bielle de 11 mm (0,44") de diamètre dans le
robinet et dans la chambre de surchauffe du piston. Noter la THERMOSTAT
longueur de la bielle dans le robinet (voir Figure 6).
3. Pousser la bielle, jusqu'à l'arrêt du piston et noter la nouvelle
longueur [la nouvelle longueur devrait être plus longue que
l'originale, environ 8 mm (0,31") de plus (voir Figure 6)]. BIELLE
Si la longueur n'est pas ce qu'elle devrait être, la course du
piston ne se fait pas librement. Le piston et sa chemise
nécessite un nettoyage. Nettoyer le piston et sa chemise
selon la méthode suivante :
• enlever la section de contrôle du corps du robinet
• enlever le capuchon et le thermostat Figure 5
• séparer la chemise et le capuchon (ils sont collés ensemble ;
les bagues doivent être enlevées et une torche au propane
doit être utilisée pour fondre la colle et libérer la chemise)
• tout nettoyeur convenant au laiton et à l'acier inoxydable,
peut être utilisé (si le nettoyage ne suffit pas à enlever BIELLE
DE 11 mm
les débris, un papier sablé 400 peut être utilisé pour polir (0,44")
et affiler le piston et sa chemise).
4. Si la course du piston se fait librement, pousser le
mécanisme de haut en bas plusieurs fois, pour s'assurer
La seconde marque sur
que la course du piston se fait constamment en douceur. la bielle devrait être
située 8 mm (0,31") plus
Si la course du piston ne se fait pas en douceur, vérifier haute que la première.
à nouveau le piston et sa chemise pour les saletés et les
débris, tel qu'indiqué à l'étape 3.
• si des pièces du piston doivent être remplacées, contacter
votre représentant Bradley et demander la trousse
Piston/Chemise (pièce numéro S65-175). CHAMBRE DE
SURCHAUFFE
DU PISTON
Figure 6

Spec Seq#: 58
Entretien du robinet thermostatique mélangeur, suite

Vérification du fonctionnement approprié du thermostat
Pour vérifier si le thermostat du robinet a un fonctionnement
approprié, procéder comme suit.
1. Enlever le chapeau, puis sortir la bielle et le thermostat (voir
BIELLE
Figure 5, page 16). DE 8 mm
(0,31")
2. Insérer une bielle de 8 mm (0,31") de diamètre dans le soufflet
134208
du thermostat. Noter la longueur de la bielle dans le soufflet
(voir Figure 7).
3. Noter la longueur du soufflet du thermostat [à température de
la pièce, avec 4,45 kg / 44,5 N (10 lb) de force, la longueur du
soufflet devrait être d'environ 32 mm (1,25")] (voir Figure 7).
4. Si la longueur du soufflet du thermostat n'est pas appropriée, La longueur du
soufflet devrait être
le thermostat doit être remplacé (il ne peut être réparé). de 28,5 à 33,5 mm
Contacter votre représentant Bradley et demander la trousse (1,13" à 1,31")
Thermostat (pièce numéro S65-174).

Ajuster la température
Pour ajuster la température du robinet à un niveau différent de
celui réglé en usine, procéder comme suit.
1. Ouvrir et laisser couler l'eau, jusqu'à ce qu'un débit de
THERMOSTAT
38 litres/minute (10 gallons/minute) s'écoule par le robinet.
2. Eenlever la vis encochée du chapeau, afin d'exposer la vis
d'ajustement.
3. À l'aide d'une clé Allen hexagonale de 5/32", tourner la vis
Figure 7
d'ajustement vers la gauche pour augmenter la température
ou vers la droite pour l'abaisser.
4. Lorsque l'ajustement est complété, remettre la vis du chapeau et fermer l'eau.
Dépannage du robinet thermostatique mélangeur

Note : Avant de tenter un dépannage du robinet ou de démonter les composantes, vérifier les points suivants :
• s'assurer que les clapets anti-retour sont complètement ouverts (la tige encochée doit être de niveau
avec le capuchon de la tige d'arrêt) (voir Figure 1 à la page 12) et s'assurer également que tous les
robinets d'entrées et de sorties sont ouverts
• s'assurer que les tuyaux d'entrée pour l'eau chaude et l'eau froide sont correctement branchés et qu'il
n'y a aucun branchement croisé ou fuites aux robinets arrêt/contrôle
• vérifier la sortie du chauffe-eau pour s'assurer que la température est à au moins 8,3°C (15°F)
au-dessus du niveau réglé.
S'assurer de fermer les robinets d'arrêt appropriés, avant de démonter le robinet. Les rouvrir quand
l'inspection et la réparation sont complétées.
Problème : Aucun débit d'eau chaude (débit d'eau froide seulement)
Cause : Le thermostat est en panne, donc le robinet d'arrêt de secours s'est embrayé (le robinet d'arrêt a
fermé soit les entrées ou soit les sorties).
Solution : Voir la section « Vérification du fonctionnement approprié du thermostat » ci-dessus et suivre
les procédures qui y sont décrites.

Spec Seq#: 58
Dépannage du robinet thermostatique mélangeur, suite

Problème : Débit d'eau limité
Cause : Le robinet d'arrêt d'entrée peut être partiellement fermé, SECTIONS
ARRÊT/CONTRÔLE
ou il y a eu une baisse significative de la pression d'eau.
Solution : Voir la section « Vérification du fonctionnement
approprié du thermostat » à la page 17 et suivre les
procédures qui y sont décrites.
134208
CRIBLE DE
Cause : Les sections arrêt/contrôle du robinet ne bougent pas ROBINET
librement.
Solution : Des saletés et des débris se sont amassés sur le crible
ou le siège, limitant ainsi les mouvements des arrêts/contrôles.
Enlever l'arrêt/contrôle, nettoyer le crible et le siège, puis
assembler le robinet (voir Figure 8). Ne pas enlever le siège.
Les composantes peuvent être grattées avec un tournevis,
pour en enlever les débris. Les débris dans le siège s'enlèvent
bien avec une paire de pinces. Si l'arrêt/contrôle doit être
remplacé, contacter votre représentant Bradley et demander
la trousse Arrêt/Contrôle (pièce numéro S65-176).
Problème : Température d'eau irrégulière SIEGE DE
Cause : Mauvais ajustement de la recirculation. ROBINET
Solution : Voir les « Directives pour la recirculation » à la page

15 et suivre les procédures indiquées. Figure 8
Problème : Fuites à l'extérieur du système

Cause : L'un des joints NPT ou les bagues sont endommagés.
Solution : Remplacer les joints NPT et/ou les bagues si nécessaire. Pour le remplacement des bagues,
contacter votre représentant Bradley et demander la trousse Bagues/Joints (pièce numéro S65-173).
Problème : Variation de la température
Cause : Le thermostat sera bientôt en panne.
Solution : Voir la section « Vérification du fonctionnement approprié du thermostat » à la page 17 et
suivre les procédures décrites.
Cause : Mauvais ajustement de la recirculation.
Solution : Voir les « Directives pour la recirculation » à la page 15 et suivre les procédures indiquées.
Cause : L'entrée d'alimentation du robinet mélangeur est partagée avec d'autres pièces d'équipement qui ne
sont utilisées que périodiquement, tels appareils de blanchisserie ou stations de lavage. Cela peut réduire
la pression d'entrée du robinet mélangeur à moins de 69 kPA (10 psi). La grosseur de la canalisation
d'alimentation ne suffit peut-être pas à fournir le robinet et les autres équipements.
Solution : Installer une canalisation d'alimentation plus grosse, modifier la canalisation d'alimentation ou
régulariser l'utilisation de l'alimentation.

Spec Seq#: 58
EFX 25 : Liste des pièces et trousses de service
25 - Capuchon
17 - Bague 24 - Vis
14 - Siège
supérieur 23 - Vis d'ajustement
26 - Bague
12 - Bague 15 - Thermostat
27 - Tige
134208
22 - Capuchon
8 - Ressort de contrôle
28 - Bague
21 - Bague
11 - Piston 16 - Bielle
29 - Filtre
10 - Bague
30-Ressort: 20 - Capuchon
30 - RessortCôté chaud 7 - Ecrou hexagonal 10-24 de robinet
13 - Vis de mélangeur
31 - Support surchauffe
de joint 6 - Ressort
9 - Rondelle de
32 - Joint fixation
5 - Vis
33 - Rondelle
34 - Ecrou 33 - Rondelle
19 - Bague
35 - Siège 4 - Rondelle
18 - Bague
36 - Bague 46-Ressort: Côté
froid (bleu)
3 - Chemise
NOTE : Numéros de trousse pour

la finition laiton brut et le thermostat
2 - Bague standard. Contacter Bradley pour
toute autre configuration.
43
Thermomètre
38 - Tuyau en laiton Trousse Portion Centrale S65-304

[19 mm (3/4") IPS]
Pièce Qté. Description
37
Plaque signalétique 1 Arrivée d'eau froide 2 1 Bague
Corps du robinet 3 1 Chemise
Trousse Thermostat S65-174 4 1 Rondelle
5 1 Vis
Pièce Qté. Description 6 1 Ressort
15 1 Thermostat Trousse Rondelle/Joint 7 1 Ecrou hexagonal 10-24
17 1 Bague S65-310 8 1 Ressort
21 1 Bague Pièce Qté. Description 9 1 Rondelle de fixation
Trousse Arrêt/
10 1 Bague
Trousse Piston/Chemise S65-175 4 1 Rondelle Contrôle S65-337
11 1 Piston
32 2 Joint
Pièce Qté. Description Pièce Qté. Description 12 1 Bague
33 3 Rondelle
2 1 Bague 25 2 Capuchon 13 1 Vis de surchauffe
3 1 Chemise 26 2 Bague 14 1 Siège supérieur
Trousse Bague S65-173
4 1 Rondelle 27 2 Tige 15 1 Thermostat
5 1 Vis
Pièce Qté. Description 28 2 Bague 16 1 Bielle
6 1 Ressort 2 1 Bague 29 2 Filtre 17 1 Bague
7 1 Ecrou hexagonal 10-24 10 1 Bague 30 1 Ressort 18 1 Bague
8 1 Ressort 12 1 Bague 31 2 Support de joint 19 1 Bague
9 1 Rondelle de fixation 17 1 Bague 32 2 Joint 20 1 Capuchon de robinet
10 1 Bague 18 1 Bague 33 2 Rondelle mélangeur
11 1 Piston 19 1 Bague 34 2 Ecrou 21 1 Bague
12 1 Bague 21 1 Bague 35 2 Siège 22 1 Capuchon de contrôle
13 1 Vis de surchauffe 26 2 Bague 36 2 Bague 23 1 Vis d'ajustement
14 1 Siège supérieur 28 2 Bague 46 1 Ressort: Côté 24 1 Vis
33 1 Washer 36 2 Bague froid (bleu) 33 1 Rondelle

Spec Seq#: 58
Válvula mezcladora termostática EFX 25 con armario opcional
Bradley modelo S19-2100 Instrucciones para la instalación y mantenimiento
Contenido
Información previa a la instalación......................... 20 Instrucciones de recirculación................................. 24
Instalación de la válvula.......................................... 21 Mantenimiento ................................................... 25-26
Instalación del armario empotrado.......................... 22 Resolución de problemas................................... 26-27
Instalación del armario para montar en superficies ... 23 Lista de piezas y juegos para reparación ................ 28
Información previa a la instalación
134208
Generalidades
Válvula: La válvula mezcladora termostática EFX 25 (modelo S19-2100) está diseñada para ser usada con
ducha de emergencia, lavador de ojos o con la combinación de ducha/lavador de ojos. La válvula consta
de un motor térmico llenado de líquido. Para prevenir quemaduras, un mecanismo de control por pistón
cierra automáticamente el suministro de agua caliente, en caso de falta de suministro de agua fría. La
válvula permite el flujo de agua fría en caso de pérdida o interrupción del suministro de agua caliente o
falla del termostato. La válvula se puede montar en cualquier posición.
La temperatura de entrada máxima de la válvula es de 82°C (180°F); se recomienda una temperatura de
entrada de 49° a 60°C (120° a 140°F). La válvula tiene una presión de operación máxima de 860 kPA
(125 psi).
Armario: El armario opcional para montar sobre la superficie o empotrado está construido de acero
inoxidable de calibre 18 con una puerta de acero inoxidable de calibre 16. El acabado del armario puede ser
de acero inoxidable o de esmalte al horno de color blanco. La ventana opcional del armario es de Plexiglás.
Materiales requeridos para la instalación

• cierre inmovilizable en la salida si se suministra agua tibia para una o más duchas localizadas a
distancia
• cierre inmovilizable en las entradas/suministros
• (6) pernos de anclaje de 3/8 de pulg. y pernos para el armario de montar en superficie
• (4) pernos de 1/4 de pulg. (y pernos de anclaje, en caso de que sean necesarios) para los armarios
empotrados
• uniones en todas las conexiones para facilitar el desmontaje de la válvula
Herramientas requeridas para ajustar la temperatura
• llave Allen de 5/32 de pulg.
• destornillador de punta plana
Información de la garantía de Bradley

Las garantías del producto se pueden encontrar en “Información del producto” o en nuestro sitio
Web www.bradleycorp.com.

Spec Seq#: 58
Instrucciones para la instalación y mantenimiento Bradley modelo S19-2100
Instalación de la válvula
PRECAUCION: Si se va a usar el armario opcional, debe montarlo antes de instalar la válvula.
Consulte las instrucciones de montaje del armario en las páginas 22-23.
Nota: Lave con agua las líneas de suministro antes de

empezar la instalación. TORNILLO DE
CABEZA RANURADA
Nota: Cuando las válvulas de retención (cheque) están DE LA TAPA
abiertas (en operación), el tornillo de la tapa para el
134208
vástago tope/retenedor estará al mismo nivel que la
tapa de la válvula (vea Figura 1).
TORNILLO
1. Conecte las entradas de los suministros de agua TOPE/RETENEDOR
caliente y fría de la válvula con la tubería DE LA TAPA
correspondiente (caliente y fría). TAPA DE

LA VALVULA
2. Conecte la salida del suministro de la válvula
mezcladora a la tubería del suministro de agua
templada.
3. Atornille el termómetro en el orificio del cuerpo de
la válvula (vea Figura 2). El termómetro suministra
una lectura de la temperatura de salida del agua.
4. Presurice la válvula mezcladora termostática y
verifique si existen fugas en la tubería. Figura 1
5. Abra despacio la válvula de la salida para llenar el
sistema de la tubería.
6. Verifique la temperatura cuando obtenga un flujo TERMOMETRO
de agua de aprox. 38 l/min (10 galones/minuto)
(el equivalente a dos lavadores de rostro) y ajústela si
es necesario [el intervalo de la válvula es de 18° a
35°C (65° a 95°F)]. Para ajustar la temperatura,
realice el procedimiento siguiente:
• quite el tornillo de cabeza ranurada de la tapa para
exponer el tornillo de ajuste
• usando una llave hexagonal Allen de 5/32 de pulg.,
gire el tornillo de ajuste a la izquierda para CUERPO DE
LA VALVULA
aumentar la temperatura o a la derecha para
disminuirla.
Nota: El ajuste estándar de temperatura, fijado en la fábrica, Figura 2
es de 29°C (85°F). Consulte a las autoridades médicas o
de seguridad apropiadas acerca de la temperatura óptima que se recomienda para su aplicación específica.
7. Cierre la entrada de agua caliente cerrando la válvula de retención o la válvula de admisión de agua
caliente. Con el suministro de agua caliente cerrado, verifique que el agua fría fluya adecuadamente.
Si el agua fría está fluyendo apropiadamente, abra nuevamente el suministro de agua caliente.
8. Cierre la entrada de agua fría cerrando la válvula de retención o la válvula de admisión de agua fría.
Con el suministro de agua fría cerrado, verifique que el flujo de agua caliente se ha parado.
9. Ponga a prueba el sistema semanalmente (abra el suministro de agua y asegúrese de tener un control
constante de la temperatura deseada).

Spec Seq#: 58
Instalación de la válvula con armario empotrado opcional

Nota: Lave con agua las líneas de suministro antes de empezar la instalación.
1. Haga una abertura en la pared de 62 cm de ancho x 62 cm de altura (24,5 x 24,5 pulg.) para el armario
(vea Figura 3).
2. Mida y marque las ubicaciones de los orificios de montaje según las dimensiones que se indican en la
Figura 3. Instale cuatro pernos de anclaje de 1/4 de pulg, si se necesitan (suministrados por el
instalador).
134208
3. Coloque el armario en la abertura y fíjelo en el lugar con cuatro pernos de pared de 1/4 de pulg.
(suministrados por el instalador).
4. Instale dos tornillos y pernos de anclaje a través del portaválvula en la parte trasera del armario y fíjelo
a un soporte seguro (suministrado por el instalador) o a la pared. Esto es necesario para proporcionar
un apoyo adecuado para la válvula.
5. Usando un sellador para tubos o cinta de teflón, instale los niples de unión y una mitad de la válvula de
bola. En seguida instale la otra mitad de la válvula de bola en la tubería de entrada y salida.
6. Inserte la válvula en el portaválvula dentro del armario (el lado derecho de la válvula se inserta
primero). Siga el procedimiento descrito en la página 21 para la instalación de la válvula.
7. Mantenga la brida de pared contra la pared y aplique calafateo a la junta.
VISTA FRONTAL VISTA LATERAL

51 mm
578 mm BRIDA DE (2 pulg.) SALIDA:
267 mm (22,75 pulg.) PARED 1 pulg. NPT
PUERTA 51 mm
(10,5 pulg.) (2 pulg.) 51 mm
(2 pulg.)
VALVULA 127 mm
DE BOLA (5 pulg.)
578 mm 610 mm
(22,75 (24 pulg.)
NIPLE DE 356 mm
pulg.)
UNION (14 pulg.)
PUERTA
660 mm
(26 pulg.)
216 mm 178 mm 51 mm
ORIFICIOS DE 7 mm 51 mm
(8,5 pulg.) (7 pulg.) (2 pulg.)
(0,28 de pulg.) DE DIAMETRO, (2 pulg.)
4 DE CADA LADO, 165 mm ENTRADAS:
660 mm 8 EN TOTAL (6,5 pulg.) 0,75 de pulg. NPT
(26 pulg.)
VISTA DESDE ABAJO
Figura 3
610 mm
(24 pulg.)

Spec Seq#: 58
Instalación de la válvula con armario opcional para montar en superficies

Nota: Lave con agua las líneas de suministro antes de empezar la instalación.
1. Mida y marque las ubicaciones de los orificios de montaje según las dimensiones que se indican en la
Figura 4. Instale seis pernos de anclaje de 3/8 de pulg. (suministrados por el instalador).
2. Coloque el armario en la pared y fíjelo en el lugar con seis pernos de pared de 3/8 de pulg.
(suministrados por el instalador).
3. Usando un sellador para tubos o cinta de teflón, instale los niples de unión y una mitad de la válvula
134208
de bola. En seguida instale la otra mitad de la válvula de bola en la tubería de entrada y salida.
4. Inserte la válvula en el portaválvula dentro del armario (el lado derecho de la válvula se inserta
primero). Siga el procedimiento descrito en la página 21 para la instalación de la válvula.
VISTA FRONTAL
VISTA LATERAL
578 mm
267 mm (22,75 pulg.)
51 mm
(10,5 pulg.) PUERTA SALIDA: 1 pulg. NPT (2 pulg.)
51 mm
(2 pulg.)
VALVULA
DE BOLA
610 mm
(24 pulg.)
NIPLE DE
UNION 578 mm
(22,75 pulg.)
PUERTA
51 mm
(2 pulg.)
216 mm 178 mm 165 mm
(8,5 pulg.) (7 pulg.) (6,5 pulg.)
ENTRADAS:
0,75 de pulg. NPT
UBICACIONES DE LOS ORIFICIOS DE MONTAJE

ORIFICIOS DE 12 mm
159 mm 191 mm (0,47 pulg.) DE
(6,25 pulg.) (7,5 pulg.) DIAMETRO, 6 LUGARES
VISTA DESDE ABAJO
508 mm
(20 pulg.)
610 mm 214 mm
(24 pulg.) (8,44 pulg.)
Figura 4
508 mm
51 mm (20 pulg.)
(2 pulg.) 51 mm
(2 pulg.)

Spec Seq#: 58
Diagrama de recirculación
VÁLVULA DE RETENCIÓN (TÍPICA)
FLUJO DE AGUA
FRÍA TEMPLADA
AGUA COLECTOR
FRÍA DE CALOR,
CAÍDA DE
134208
71 cm
(28 pulg.)
INTERRUPTOR DE
TEMPERATURA
RECIRCULACIÓN
ALTERNA
[más de 19 l/min
(5 galones/minuto)] AGUA TEMPLADA
RECIRCULADA
CALIENTE
FLUJO DE
VÁLVULA RETORNO
EQUILIBRADORA
(TÍPICA) BOMBA DE
RECIRCULACIÓN
CALENTADOR DE AGUA TANQUE DE ALMACENAMIENTO
Instrucciones de recirculación
Nota: La recirculación del agua en el sistema provee una regulación constante de la temperatura del agua.
Lave abundantemente las líneas de suministro después de terminar la instalación. Cierre todos los
lavadores/duchas de emergencia y colóqueles un aviso indicando que no están en uso durante el proceso
de recirculación.
1. Apague la bomba de recirculación y abra el suministro de agua [se requiere un gasto de 38 a 56 l/min
(10 a 15 galones por minuto)].
2. Deje que el agua corra a través del sistema hasta obtener una temperatura constante. Si no obtiene la
temperatura requerida, refiérase al paso 6 de la página 21 para ajustar la temperatura.
3. Una vez que el agua alcance la temperatura adecuada, encienda la bomba de recirculación (asegúrese
que el sistema haya obtenido la temperatura adecuada antes de proceder).
4. Verifique la temperatura del agua en la bomba de retorno. Si la temperatura excede el nivel apropiado
en 1°C (2°F), ajuste el interruptor de alta temperatura (esto apagará la bomba). Espere hasta cuando la
temperatura del agua de retorno sea de 2,8°C (5°F) por debajo del nivel apropiado y ajuste el interruptor
de baja temperatura (esto encenderá la bomba nuevamente).
5. Gire la válvula de compensación hasta cuando esté completamente abierta.
6. Apague todos los lavadores/duchas de emergencia y asegúrese de que no haya agua corriendo a través
del sistema (el tubo de entrada de agua fría debe sentirse tibio al tacto).
7. Deje el sistema funcionando por 30 minutos o más sin agua. Si, después de 30 minutos, la temperatura
del agua aumenta, puede ajustar la temperatura cerrando muy despacio la válvula de compensación
hasta cuando se obtenga la temperatura apropiada.

Spec Seq#: 58
Mantenimiento de la válvula mezcladora termostática

Para una máxima eficiencia, la válvula mezcladora termostática requiere un mantenimiento mínimo. Siga
los procedimientos a continuación para el mejor desempeño.
ADVERTENCIA: Para prevenir lesiones, use el equipo de seguridad apropiado para
proteger los ojos y la piel, cuando use el soplete de propano.
Verifique que el pistón tenga un movimiento
134208
uniforme
Para verificar que el pistón de la válvula tenga un movimiento
uniforme y libre, realice los pasos siguientes. TAPA SUPERIOR
1. Retire la tapa superior de la válvula y saque el termostato y

después la varilla de empuje (vea Figura 5). Puede utilizar
unas pinzas de punta de aguja para retirar el termostato del TERMOSTATO
cuerpo de la válvula si lo desea.
2. Inserte una varilla de 11 mm (0,44 de pulg.) de diámetro
dentro de la válvula y dentro la cámara de recalentamiento
del pistón. Marque la longitud de la varilla dentro de la VARILLA DE EMPUJE
válvula (vea Figura 6).
3. Empuje la varilla hasta cuando el pistón se detenga y marque
la nueva longitud [la nueva longitud debe ser
aproximadamente 8 mm (0,31 de pulg.) más larga que la
longitud original] (vea Figura 6). Si la longitud no es la
adecuada, el pistón no se está moviendo con libertad y Figura 5
necesita limpiarlo al igual que la camisa del pistón. Para
limpiar el pistón y la camisa, siga los pasos a
continuación:
• separe la sección de control del cuerpo de la válvula
• retire la tapa superior y el termostato VARILLA DE
11 mm
• desenrosque la camisa de la tapa (si las unieron con (0,44 de pulg.)
pegamento; quite los arosellos y use un soplete para
derretir el pegamento y aflojar la camisa)
• se puede usar cualquier limpiador adecuado para acero La segunda marca
debe estar 8 mm
inoxidable y latón (si la limpieza con un limpiador (0,31 de pulg.) más
adecuado no es suficiente para eliminar los desechos, se arriba en la varilla
que la primera
puede usar una lija número 400 para pulir el pistón y la marca.
camisa).
4. Si el pistón se mueve libremente, mueva el mecanismo
hacia arriba y abajo varias veces hasta asegurarse que el
pistón tiene un movimiento uniforme y constante. Si el CAMARA DE
movimiento del pistón no es uniforme, revise el pistón y RECALENTAMIENTO
DEL PISTON
la camisa por alguna suciedad o desecho como se explica
en el paso 3.
• si necesita reemplazar las piezas del pistón, comuníquese
con el representante de Bradley y pídale el Juego de
Pistón/Camisa (pieza número S65-175).
Figura 6

Spec Seq#: 58
Mantenimiento de la válvula mezcladora termostática, continuación

Verifique que el termostato funcione apropiadamente
Para verificar que el termostato de la válvula esté funcionando
adecuadamente, realice los pasos siguientes.
1. Retire la tapa superior y saque la varilla de empuje y el
termostato (vea Figura 5, página 25). VARILLA
DE 8 mm
2. Inserte una varilla de 8 mm (0,31 de pulg.) de diámetro
134208
(0,31 de pulg.)
dentro del fuelle del termostato. Marque la longitud de la
varilla dentro del fuelle (vea Figura 7).
3. Marque la longitud del fuelle del termostato [a temperatura
ambiente, con 4,45 kg / 44,5 N (10 libras) de fuerza, la longitud
del fuelle debe ser aproximadamente 32 mm (1,25 pulg.)]
(vea Figura 7). La longitud del fuelle
debe ser de
4. Si la longitud del fuelle del termostato no es adecuada, se 28,5 a 33,5 mm
debe reemplazar el termostato (no se puede reparar). (1,13 a 1,31 pulg.)
Comuníquese con el representante de Bradley y pídale el

Juego del Termostato (pieza número S65-174).
Ajuste la temperatura
Para ajustar la temperatura de la válvula a un nivel diferente al
fijado en la fábrica, realice los pasos siguientes.
TERMOSTATO
1. Abra el suministro de agua y deje el agua correr hasta cuando
por lo menos 38 l/min (10 galones/minuto) fluyan a través de
la válvula.
2. Quite el tornillo de cabeza ranurada de la tapa para exponer el
tornillo de ajuste. Figura 7
3. Usando una llave hexagonal Allen de 5/32 de pulg., gire el
tornillo de ajuste a la izquierda para aumentar la temperatura o a la derecha para disminuirla.
4. Cuando se termine el ajuste, reemplace el tornillo de la tapa y cierre el suministro de agua.
Resolución de problemas de la válvula mezcladora termostática

Nota: Antes de intentar reparar o desmontar la válvula, examine las condiciones siguientes:
• asegúrese de que las válvulas de retención estén completamente abiertas (el vástago ranurado debe
estar al mismo nivel que la tapa tope/retenedor) (vea Figura 1, página 21) y todas las válvulas de
cierre de las entradas y salidas se encuentren abiertas
• asegúrese de que los tubos de entrada del agua caliente y fría se encuentren conectados correctamente,
y que no hayan conexiones cruzadas ni fugas en las válvulas de tope/retención
• revise la salida del calentador del agua y asegúrese de que esté al menos 8,3°C (15°F) por encima de
la temperatura fijada.
Asegúrese de cerrar las válvulas de cierre correspondientes antes de desmontar la válvula y de abrirlas
nuevamente después de terminar la inspección y reparación.
Problema: No hay flujo de agua caliente (sólo flujo de agua fría)
Causa: Falla del termostato y, como resultado, el cierre de seguridad se activa (la válvula de cierre está
cerrada en las entradas o en la salida).
Solución: Refiérase a la sección anterior “Verifique que el termostato funcione apropiadamente” y siga el
procedimiento paso a paso.

Spec Seq#: 58
Resolución de problemas, continuación

Problema: Flujo de agua limitado
Causa: La válvula de cierre de entrada puede estar cerrada TOPE Y
RETENEDORES
parcialmente o ha ocurrido una baja significativa de la
presión del agua.
Solución: Refiérase a la sección “Verifique que el termostato
funcione apropiadamente” en la página 26 y siga el
134208
FILTRO
procedimiento paso a paso. DE LA
VALVULA
Causa: Las secciones de tope y retención de la válvula no se
mueven libremente.
Solución: Suciedad y desechos se han depositado en el filtro o
en el asiento, limitando el movimiento del tope y los
retenedores. Quite el tope y los retenedores, limpie el filtro y
el asiento y monte la válvula nuevamente (vea Figura 8). No
retire el asiento. Los componentes se pueden raspar con un
destornillador para eliminar los desechos. Con unas pinzas se
puede sacar cualquier desecho del asiento. Si el tope y los
retenedores necesitan reemplazarse, comuníquese con el
representante de Bradley y pídale el Juego de Retenedor/
ASIENTO
Tope (pieza número S65-176). DE LA
VALVULA
Problema: Temperatura del agua inadecuada
Causa: La recirculación no está balanceada. Figura 8
Solución: Refiérase a la sección “Instrucciones de recirculación”
en la página 24 y siga el procedimiento paso a paso.
Problema: Fugas externas
Causa: Las uniones NPT o los arosellos se han dañado.
Solución: Reemplace las uniones NPT y/o los arosellos donde sea necesario. Para obtener arosellos de
repuesto, comuníquese con el representante de Bradley y pídale el Juego de Arosellos/Sellos (pieza
número S65-173).
Problema: Fluctuación de la temperatura
Causa: El termostato está fallando lentamente.
Solución: Refiérase a la sección “Verifique que el termostato funcione apropiadamente” en la página 26 y
siga el procedimiento paso a paso.
Causa: La recirculación no está balanceada.
Solución: Refiérase a la sección “Instrucciones de recirculación” en la página 24 y siga el procedimiento
paso a paso.
Causa: La entrada de la línea de suministro de la válvula mezcladora es compartida con otros equipos que
son usados sólo periódicamente, tales como máquinas de lavar o estaciones de lavado. Esto puede
reducir la presión de entrada de la válvula mezcladora a menos de 69 kPA (10 psi). La capacidad de la
línea de suministro puede no ser lo suficientemente grande para el suministro de ambos, la válvula y los
otros equipos.
Solución: Utilice una línea de suministro de mayor capacidad, reconfigure la línea de suministro o regule
el uso del suministro.

Spec Seq#: 58
EFX 25: Lista de piezas y juegos para reparación

25 - Tapa
17 - Arosello 24 - Tornillo
14 - Asiento
superior 23 - Tornillo de ajuste
26 - Arosello
12 - Arosello 15 - Termostato
27 - Vástago
22 - Tapa de control
134208
8 - Resorte
28 - Arosello
21 - Arosello
16 - Varilla
29 - Filtro 11 - Pistón de empuje
10 - Arosello
30-Resorte: Lado de 20 - Tapa de
30 -agua
Resorte
caliente la válvula
7 - Tuerca hexagonal 10-24
13 - Tornillo de mezcladora
31 - Sujetador recalentamiento
(para el sello) 6 - Resorte
9 - Retenedor
32 - Sello
5 - Tornillo
33 - Arandela
34 - Tuerca 33 - Arandela
19 - Arosello
35 - Asiento 4 - Arandela
46-Resorte: Lado 18 - Arosello

36 - Arosello
de agua fría
3 - Camisa (azul)
NOTA: Los números de los equipos

son para modelos con acabado de
2 - Arosello bronce en bruto y termostato de rango
estándar. Comuníquese con Bradley
para conocer otras configuraciones.
43
Termómetro
Juego de Sección Central S65-304
Pieza Cant. Descripción
38 - Tubo de bronce 2 1 Arosello
[19 mm (3/4 de pulg.) IPS] 3 1 Camisa
37 4 1 Arandela
Placa de fabricante 1
Cuerpo de la válvula Entrada de
5 1 Tornillo
agua fría
6 1 Resorte
Juego de Termostato S65-174
7 1 Tuerca hexagonal
Pieza Cant. Descripción 10-24
15 1 Termostato 8 1 Resorte
Juego de Arandela/Sellos Juego de Retenedor/
17 1 Arosello 9 1 Retenedor
S65-310 Tope S65-337 10 1 Arosello
21 1 Arosello
Pieza Cant. Descripción Pieza Cant. Descripción 11 1 Pistón
Juego de Pistón/Camisa S65-175 25 2 Tapa 12 1 Arosello
4 1 Arandela
Pieza Cant. Descripción 32 2 Sello 26 2 Arosello 13 1 Tornillo de
33 3 Arandela 27 2 Vástago recalentamiento
2 1 Arosello
28 2 Arosello 14 1 Asiento superior
3 1 Camisa Juego de Arosellos
29 2 Filtro 15 1 Termostato
4 1 Arandela S65-173 30 1 Resorte 16 1 Varilla
5 1 Tornillo
Pieza Cant. Descripción 31 2 Sujetador de empuje
6 1 Resorte
(para el sello) 17 1 Arosello
7 1 Tuerca hexagonal 10-24 2 1 Arosello
32 2 Sello 18 1 Arosello
8 1 Resorte 10 1 Arosello
33 2 Arandela 19 1 Arosello
9 1 Retenedor 12 1 Arosello
34 2 Tuerca 20 1 Tapa de la válvula
10 1 Arosello 17 1 Arosello
35 2 Asiento mezcladora
11 1 Pistón 18 1 Arosello
46 1 Resorte: 22 1 Tapa de control
13 1 Tornillo de 21 1 Arosello
Lado de 23 1 Tornillo de ajuste
recalentamiento 26 2 Arosello
agua fría 24 1 Tornillo
14 1 Asiento superior 28 2 Arosello
(azul) 33 1 Arandela
33 1 Arandela 36 2 Arandela

Spec Seq#: 59
*****
TMV-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 60
Bulletin G-522
August, 2019
INSTALLATION, ADJUSTMENT, SERVICE

MODEL 170, 170-LF, 270, 270-USW, 270-LF, 370, 370-LF, 470
THERMOSTATIC / POINT OF USE MIXING VALVES
170 (3/8”COMP) 270 (1/2”NPT) 370 (3/4”NPT)
370-LF (3/4”NPT)
904022
170-LF (3/8”COMP) 270-LF (1/2”NPT)
ASSE 1070 ASSE1017/ASSE 1070 ASSE1017/ASSE 1070
170 WARNING: 270-USW (1/2”) 470 (1”NPT)

DO NOT USE THREAD ( PICTURE NOT SHOWN ) ( PICTURE NOT SHOWN )
SEALANT ON MODEL 170 ASSE 1017 ASSE 1017
COMPRESSION CONNECTIONS ASSE 1070 ASSE 1070
270 / 270-LF / 370 / 370-LF / 470 WARNING:
When using flex hoses be careful, swivel connectors may damage inlet checks and / or element
on outlet on 270, 270-LF, 370, 370-LF and 470 models. Coupling fittings may be needed if
swivel connectors have a brass protruding tube or any protrusion that may damage the valve.
1. Valve should be installed where it can be easily cleaned, 3. Leonard recommends that unions and shutoffs are
adjusted or repaired. installed on the inlets and outlet.
2. Inlets are furnished with NPT connections. When 4. Use solder or pipe cement sparingly. Supply pipes should
soldering close to this unit, DO NOT OVERHEAT, be flushed before the valve is connected. Flush outlet
internal components may become damaged. pipe and valve as soon as it is connected.
WARNING!!
WATER TEMPERATURES IN EXCESS OF 110°F (43°C) MAY CAUSE SCALDING, SEVERE
INJURY, OR DEATH!!
Maximum Operating Pressure: 125 PSI (860 KPA)
IMPORTANT! These thermostatic water mixing valves can be adjusted to deliver water at temperatures
exceeding 110°F (43°C). After installation, the installer must check the outlet water temperature and adjust
the temperature setting to ensure delivery of a safe water temperature not exceeding 110°F (43°C). See
“Temperature Adjustment” next page.
1360 Elmwood Avenue, Cranston, RI 02910 USA WARNING: This product can expose you to chemicals including
Phone: 401.461.1200 Fax: 401.941.5310
! lead, which is known to the State of California to cause cancer.
For more information, go to www.P65Warnings.Ca.gov
Spec Seq#: 60
ADJUSTMENT AND SERVICE

TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
WARNING! This thermostatic mixing valve’s
temperature setting MUST be checked. If the
temperature is too high (above 110ºF, 43ºC), the
temperature knob must be adjusted immediately.
Excessively hot water is DANGEROUS AND MAY
904022
1. Open hot and cold water supply valves to mixing valve. CAUSE SCALDING!!
2. Open mixed water outlet.
3. With the fixture in the full open position, calibrate the PRESSURE-TEMPERATURE:
mixed water outlet temperature by placing a thermometer Maximum Pressure:125 PSI (8.6 BAR)
in the mixed water stream. Loosen knob set screw with  Maximum Hot Water temperature: 200F- (93°C)
5/64” allen wrench. Adjust the setting of the valve to  Approach Temperature 5°F (2.8°C) above set
obtain the desired temperature (counterclockwise, to
point.
increase temperature-clockwise to decrease temperature.)
4. Tighten knob set screw to lock temperature setting.
TROUBLESHOOTING INSTRUCTIONS
GASKET KIT Leaking water under knob. GASKET KIT
Leaking water between valve cover and ALL Models 1/WX
body.
REBUILDING KIT Valve will not control temperature after REBUILDING KIT
cleaning. Model 170, 170-LF R/170
Model 270, 270-LF,
270-USW, 370, 370-LF 470 R/270/370
CHECKSTOP KIT Hot water by-pass into cold line. CHECK KIT
Cold water by-pass into hot line. Model 170, 170-LF 4/108
Model 270, 270-LF 4/220
Model 270-USW 4/220USW
Model 370, 370-LF, 470 4/320
SEE PAGE 3 FOR COMPLETE PARTS BREAKDOWN
SEE PAGE 4 FOR PIPING IN RECIRCULATED OR NON-RECIRCULATED WATER SYSTEMS
MINIMUM PRESSURE DROP
FLOW *
5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 PSI
MODEL IN OUT (GPM)
L\MIN .3 .7 1.0 1.4 1.7 2.1 2.4 2.8 3.1 3.4 BAR
170 0.25 1.7 2.3 2.7 3.0 3.2 3.6 4.0 4.4 4.7 5.0 GPM
170-LF 3/8" 3/8"
0.95 6.4 8.7 10 11.4 12 14 15 17 18 19 L\MIN
270 0.25 3.5 5.5 6.5 7.5 8.5 9.5 10 10.5 11.5 12 GPM
270-LF 1/2" 1/2"
270-USW 0.95 13 21 25 28 32 36 38 40 43 45 L\MIN
0.5 4 6 7 8 9 10 10.5 11.5 12.5 13 GPM

370 3/4" 3/4"
370-LF 1.9 15 23 27 30 34 38 40 43 47 49 L\MIN
0.5 4 6 7 8 9 10 10.5 11.5 12.5 13 GPM

470 1" 1"
1.9 15 23 27 30 34 38 40 43 47 49 L\MIN
* Minimum flow certified to ASSE 1070

IMPORTANT!! THIS IS A CONTROL SYSTEM WHICH MUST BE CLEANED AND MAINTAINED ON A
Phone: 401.461.1200 Fax: 401.941.5310
WEB: http://www.leonardvalve.com 2
Spec Seq#: 60
VALVE PARTS LIST

CHECK CLIP (MODEL 270/270-LF/370/ 370-LF/470 ONLY)
STEM ASSEMBLY O'RING

CHECK 170 - BP ONLY
RETAINING CLIP COVER O'RING
KNOB STEM ASSEMBLY SHUTTLE ASSEMBLY
DO NOT REMOVE
SNAP RING ON
STEM - INJURY MAY
OCCUR PACKING
SCREW
PART # 7539
904022
DIAL PLATE
RETURN SPRING
SHUTTLE O'RING
COVER
KNOB SET SCREW
MODEL 170, 170-LF, 270, 270-LF, 270-USW, 370, 370-LF, 470

MODEL 170, 170-LF MODEL 270, 270-LF MODEL 270-USW MODEL 370, 370-LF, 470
1/ WX Gasket Kit 1/ WX Gasket Kit 1/ WX Gasket Kit 1/ WX Gasket Kit

Shuttle o’ring Shuttle o’ring Shuttle o’ring Shuttle o’ring
Stem assembly o’ring Stem assembly o’ring Stem assembly o’ring Stem assembly o’ring
Cover o’ring Cover o’ring Cover o’ring Cover o’ring
R/ 170 Rebuild Kit R/ 270/370 Rebuild Kit R/ 270/370 Rebuild Kit R/ 270/370 Rebuild Kit
Return spring Return spring Return spring Return spring
Shuttle assembly Shuttle assembly Shuttle assembly Shuttle assembly
Shuttle o’ring Shuttle o’ring Shuttle o’ring Shuttle o’ring
Stem assembly o’ring Stem assembly o’ring Stem assembly o’ring Stem assembly o’ring
Cover o’ring Cover o’ring Cover o’ring Cover o’ring
4/108 Check valve Kit 4/220 Check valve Kit 4/220USW Check valve Kit 4/320 Check valve Kit
2 Check valves 2 Check valves 2 Check valves 2 Check valves
2 Check clips 3 Union gaskets 2 Check clips
DISMANTLING & CLEANING TROUBLESHOOTING

1. Leaking water under knob, order gasket kit, replace stem assembly o-
1. Shut off hot and cold water to the valve as well as the valve outlet ring. Remove knob screw and knob, remove retaining clip, thread out
port. the stem assembly and replace o-ring. Lubricate o-ring, thread stem
2. Loosen lock screw on side of knob with 5/64” allen wrench. into cover, replace retaining ring, knob and screw. Valve temperature
3. Remove the knob screw on top of knob. must be reset after any repairs or cleaning!! See page 2.
4. Remove temperature adjustment knob. 2. Leaking water between cover and body, order gasket kit,
5. Remove valve cover, which includes the stem assembly. replace cover o-ring. Remove knob screw and knob and remove valve
6. The shuttle assembly can now be removed, cleaned and inspected. Be cover and replace o-ring. Replace valve cover, knob and knob screw.
sure to check the condition of the shuttle o-ring and replace if Valve temperature must be reset after any repairs or cleaning!! See
necessary. page 2.
7. Lubricate the shuttle o-ring before installing the shuttle assembly. 3. Hot water bypass into cold line, order checkstop kit and replace checks
8. Install the cover assembly including o-ring back onto valve and within inlets of valve.
tighten. 4. Valve not controlling temperature even after cleaning, order complete
9. Replace knob and knob screw. rebuild kit. Remove knob screw and knob and remove valve cover.
10. Valve temperature must be reset after any repairs or cleaning!! Replace shuttle assembly and return spring being sure to lubricate
See Page 2. Temperature Adjustment shuttle o-ring. Replace valve cover, knob and knob screw. Valve
temperature must be reset after any repairs or cleaning!! See page
2.
5. Leak between valve by-pass fitting to the inlet of base. Check #265
packing, is installed or not split.

Phone: 401.461.1200 Fax: 401.941.5310
WEB: http://www.leonardvalve.com
3
Spec Seq#: 60
INSTALLATION WITHOUT
CIRCULATED TEMPERED WATER
P IP IN G M E TH O D #1
H O T W ATER T EMP ERE D W ATER

SUPPLY T O F IXT URES
C O LD
M ASTER
M IXING VALVE
(O P TI O NAL)
904022
T HER MO M ETER HO T
C O LD
C O LD WA TER
SUPPLY I SO LA TIO N
BALL VALVE
H O T W ATER
H IG H TE MPE RAT URE HO T

(TO K IT CH EN O R LA UNDRY)
I F RE Q U IRED
1. Model 270, 270-LF, 270-USW, 370, 370-LF and 470 Thermostatic Mixing Valves must be installed
according to Piping Diagram W if recirculation of tempered water is required.
2. The 170, 170-LF, 270, 270-LF, 270-USW, 370, 370-LF and 470 Thermostatic Mixing Valve should be
installed below the hot water tank. If the valve cannot be located is this area, the hot water inlet piping
to the mixing valve should be installed with a heat trap.
INSTALLATION WITH CIRCULATED TEMPERED WATER

PIPING METHOD W
TEMPERED WATER
TO FIXTURES
HOT WATER COLD
SUPPLY
THERMOMETER
THERMOMETER HOT
ISOLATION
BALL VALVE
COLD
COLD WATER CIRCULATOR
SUPPLY ISOLATION
BALL VALVES
HOT WATER
CHECK VALVE
HIGH TEMPERATURE HOT

(TO KITCHEN OR LAUNDRY)
IF REQUIRED
CHECK VALVE
LIMITED WARRANTY
Leonard Valve Company warrants the original purchaser that products manufactured by them (not by others) will be free
from defects in materials and workmanship under normal conditions of use, when properly installed and maintained in
accordance with Leonard Valve Company's instructions, for a period of one year from date of shipment. During this period
the Leonard Valve Company will at its option repair or replace any product, or part thereof, which shall be returned, freight
prepaid, to the Leonard factory and determined by Leonard to be defective in materials or workmanship. There are no
warranties, express or implied, which extend beyond the description contained herein. There are no implied warranties of
merchantability or of fitness for a particular purpose. In no event will Leonard be liable for labor or incidental or
consequential damages. Any alteration or improper installation or use of the product will void this limited warranty.

Phone: 401.461.1200 Fax: 401.941.5310
WEB: http://www.leonardvalve.com
© 2018 Leonard Valve Company 4
Printed in USA
Spec Seq#: 61
*****
TMV-2
*****
Spec Seq#: 62
temperedwater.com DATA SHEET

ENG. NO. 86408-A
Thermostatic temperedwater.com/patents
Water Controller
Model 803
High-Low Water Mixer
1259573
Unit No. 86408 UP
C
C ®
ASSE 1017 Approved Certified to

CSA B125.3
Master water mixing control valve shall be of the 100
90
thermostatic type with liquid-filled motor. It shall 80
70
have bronze body construction with replaceable 60
corrosion-resistant components. Valve construction 50
shall employ sliding piston control mechanism. Pis- 40
ton and liner shall be of stainless steel material. 30
Valve shall come equipped with removable union end PRESSURE DROP (PSI)
stop and check inlets with stainless steel strainers.

MINIMUM FLOW 803
20
03
W8
Valve shall control temperature from a low flow of
FLO
3 GPM* up to a maximum flow rate for a given pres-
UM
XIM
sure differential. Valve shall provide protection against 10
MA
9
hot or cold supply line failure and thermostat failure. 8
7
Unit includes a dial thermometer and shut-off valve on 6

5
tempered water outlet. Unit is assembled and tested 4
with necessary fittings and nipples.

3

2
2 3 4 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90100 200 300
FINISH: Bronze

FLOW (GPM)
ALLOWABLE FLOWS
Chrome
Other  MAX
MIN
TEMP. RANGE SET POINT

70° to 100°F 80°F 
90° to 120°F 110°F 
110° to 140°F 130°F  CAPACITIES – MODEL 803

Pressure Drop PSI 5 10 20 30 45 60 80
Special __________ ___________
Valve Number Capacity

803-GPM 43 60 85 103 125 144 165
Optional Test Connection
Including garden hose connection, 803-LPM 163 227 322 390 473 545 624
shut-off and thermometer. *½ gpm when properly installed in recirculated system.
Bronze 
Chrome 
5330 East 25th Street Design and specification subject to change without notice.
Indianapolis, Indiana 46218
Phone (317) 261-1212 Please refer to www.temperedwater.com to ensure
Fax (317) 261-1208 most current data sheet and other design solutions
FRONT2
Spec Seq#: 62
temperedwater.com DATA SHEET
1259573
1 1/2" NPT
12.413
1 1/4" NPT 1 1/4" NPT
803 PIPED ASM.RB 90-120

12.945
5330 East 25th Street Design and specification subject to change without notice.
Indianapolis, Indiana 46218
Phone (317) 261-1212 Please refer to www.temperedwater.com to ensure
Fax (317) 261-1208 most current data sheet and other design solutions
BACK2
Spec Seq#: 63
*****
RVB-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 64
929880
Spec Seq#: 65
*****
RVB-2
*****
Spec Seq#: 66
DU ALL DUAL DRAIN WASHING MACHINE

OUTLET BOX
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS:
1. Before cementing drain line into washer box coupling, remove drain locator tape
and place on top of knock-out test cap inside box over the coupling being
plumbed. (See Figures A & B below)
2. Cement drain line and P-Trap assemblies.
3. Connect water supply lines.
4. Cement coupling plug into unplumbed drain coupling.*
122002
* This precautionary step may be eliminated if drain line is tested
and inspected for leaks, and test cap over plumbed drain coupling
is knocked out, PRIOR TO HANGING SHEETROCK. IT CAN ALSO
BE ELIMINATED IF INSTALLED IN TOP MOUNT POSITION.
** For top mounted valves simply invert box with valves positioned on top.
RIGHT HAND DRAIN LEFT HAND DRAIN
IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR PROPER KNOCK-OUT

BOTTOM VIEW Remove Tape from Apply Tape Inside
Drain side to be Box over Knock-out Apply Tape
Here or Here
TAPE TAPE
Plumbed. to be Plumbed.
See Figure A See Figure B
FIGURE A SEE REVERSE SIDE FOR KNOCKOUT INSTRUCTIONS FIGURE B
Manufacturers of IPS CORPORATION and Products

202 Industrial Park Lane, P.O. Box 220, Collierville, TN 38027 • TEL: (901) 853-5001 • FAX: (901) 853-5008 BB12175
1 2
Position flathead screwdriver at intersection of bottom Hit screwdriver until it penetrates under test cap.
wall and raised test cap.
3 4
ROTATE
HERE
Rotate screwdriver lifting up test cap. Reach in with hand or pliers and remove test cap.
Spec Seq#: 67
*****
EWH-1
*****
Spec Seq#: 68
Instruction Manual
COMMERCIAL ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
MODELS DEL-6/10/15/20 Series 102
DEL-30/40/50 Series 110
& DEN-30/40/52/66/80/120 Series 110
500 Tennessee Waltz Parkway INSTALLATION - OPERATION - SERVICE
269721
Ashland City, TN 37015 - MAINTENANCE - LIMITED WARRANTY
Thank you for buying this energy efficient water heater.

We appreciate your confidence in our products.
PLACE THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO HEATER AND NOTIFY OWNER TO KEEP FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
PRINTED 0515 322055-004

1
Spec Seq#: 68
SAFE INSTALLATION, USE, AND SERVICE

The proper installation, use and servicing of this water heater is extremely important to your safety and the safety of others.
Many safety-related messages and instructions have been provided in this manual and on your own water heater to warn you and
others of a potential injury hazard. Read and obey all safety messages and instructions throughout this manual. It is very important
that the meaning of each safety message is understood by you and others who install, use, or service this water heater.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you

to potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety
269721
messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible
injury or death.
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous

DANGER situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or injury.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous

WARNING situation which, if not avoided, could result
in death or injury.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, could result
CAUTION in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION used without the safety alert

symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
CAUTION situation which, if not avoided, could result
in property damage.
All safety messages will generally tell you about the type of hazard, what can happen if you do not follow the safety message, and
how to avoid the risk of injury.
The California Safe Drinking Water and Toxic Enforcement Act requires the Governor of California to publish a list of substances
known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm, and requires businesses to warn of
potential exposure to such substances.
This product contains a chemical known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or other reproductive harm. This
appliance can cause low level exposure to some of the substances listed in the Act.
IMPORTANT DEFINITIONS
• Qualified Installer or Service Agency:
Installation and service of this water heater requires ability equivalent to that of a Qualified Agency (as defined by ANSI below) in the
field involved. Installation skills such as plumbing, electrical supply are required in addition to electrical testing skills when performing
service.
• ANSI Z223.1 2006 Sec. 3.3.83:
“Qualified Agency” - “Any individual, firm, corporation or company that either in person or through a representative is engaged in and is
responsible for (a) the installation, testing or replacement of gas piping or (b) the connection, installation, testing, repair or servicing of
appliances and equipment; that is experienced in such work; that is familiar with all precautions required; and that has complied with all
the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.”
2
Spec Seq#: 68
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION

PRECAUTIONS HYDROGEN GAS (FLAMMABLE)
DO NOT USE THIS WATER HEATER IF ANY PART HAS BEEN
EXPOSED TO FLOODING OR WATER DAMAGE. Immediately
call a qualified service technician to inspect the water heater and to
replace any part of the control system which has been under water.
If the unit is exposed to the following, do not operate heater until all
corrective steps have been made by a qualified service technician.
1. External fire.
269721
2. Damage.
3. Firing without water.
GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS
This water heater must be grounded in accordance with the
National Electrical Code and/or local codes. These must be Hydrogen gas can be produced in a hot water system served by this
followed in all cases. Failure to ground this water heater properly heater that has not been used for a long period of time (generally two
may also cause erratic control system operation on ELECTRONIC weeks or more). Hydrogen gas is extremely flammable. To reduce the
CONTROL models. risk of injury under these conditions, it is recommended that the hot water
faucet be opened for several minutes at the kitchen sink before using any
This water heater must be connected to a grounded metal, permanent electrical appliance connected to the hot water system. If hydrogen is present
wiring system; or an equipment grounding conductor must be run with there will probably be an unusual sound such as air escaping through the
the circuit conductors and connected to the equipment grounding pipe as the water begins to flow. THERE SHOULD BE NO SMOKING
terminal or lead on the water heater. OR OPEN FLAME NEAR THE FAUCET AT THE TIME IT IS OPEN.
When servicing this unit, verify the power to the unit is turned off prior to opening the control cabinet door.
CAUTION
Improper installation, use and service may
result in property damage.
• Do not operate water heater if any part has been
exposed to flooding or water damage.
• Inspect anode rods regularly, replace when significantly depleted.
• Install in location with drainage.
• Fill tank with water before operation.
• Properly sized thermal expansion tanks are required on all
closed water systems.
Refer to this manual for installation and service.
3
Spec Seq#: 68
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFE INSTALLATION, USE, AND SERVICE....................................... 2 Thermal Expansion..................................................................... 10
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION..................................................... 3 ELECTRICAL.......................................................................................11
Precautions................................................................................... 3 General.........................................................................................11
Hydrogen Gas (Flammable).......................................................... 3 Branch Circuit...............................................................................11
INTRODUCTION................................................................................... 4 Calculating Amperage/Overcurrent Protection.............................11
Preparing for the Installation......................................................... 4 WIRING DIAGRAMS........................................................................... 12
DIMENSIONS AND CAPACITIES DATA............................................... 5 OPERATION........................................................................................ 13
APPROVALS......................................................................................... 6 General........................................................................................ 13
MODEL AND RATING........................................................................... 6 Filling the Water Heater............................................................... 13
FEATURES AND COMPONENTS........................................................ 7 Initial Start Up.............................................................................. 13
269721
Electronic Control Models............................................................. 7 Draining the Water Heater........................................................... 13
LOCATING THE NEW WATER HEATER.............................................. 8 TEMPERATURE REGULATION......................................................... 14
Facts to Consider About the Location........................................... 8 Temperature Adjustment............................................................. 14
Clearances.................................................................................... 8 MAINTENANCE.................................................................................. 15
INSTALLATION..................................................................................... 9 General........................................................................................ 15
Required Ability............................................................................. 9 Anode Rod Inspection................................................................. 15
General.......................................................................................... 9 TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLIST................................................... 16
Contaminated Water...................................................................... 9 Checklist...................................................................................... 16
Circulating Pump........................................................................... 9 Leakage Checkpoints.................................................................. 17
Insulation Blankets........................................................................ 9 WARRANTY........................................................................................ 18
Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve............................................... 9 NOTES................................................................................................ 19
Closed Water Systems................................................................ 10 Repair Parts List.......................................................................... 20
INTRODUCTION
Thank You for purchasing this water heater. Properly installed Be sure to turn off power when working on or near the
and maintained, it should give you years of trouble free service. electrical system of the heater. Never touch electrical
components with wet hands or when standing in water.
Abbreviations Found In This Instruction Manual:
When replacing fuses always use the correct size for the
• ANSI - American National Standards Institute circuit. see page 12.
• AHRI - Air-Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute
The model and rating plates on page 6 interprets certain
• NEC - National Electrical Code
markings into useful information. Both of these references should
• NFPA - National Fire Protection Association be used to identify the heater, its components and optional
• UL - Underwriters Laboratory equipment.
PREPARING FOR THE INSTALLATION 2. The installation must conform with these instructions and the
local code authority having jurisdiction and the requirements
of the power company. In the absence of local codes, the
installation must comply with the latest editions of the National
Electrical Code, NFPA 70 or the Canadian Electrical Code CSA
C22.1. The National Electrical Code may be ordered from:
National Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park,
Quincy, MA 02269. The Canadian Electrical Code is available
from the Canadian Standards Association, 8501 East Pleasant
Valley Road, Cleveland, OH 44131.
3. If after reading this manual you have any questions or do not
understand any portion of the instructions, call the toll free
number listed on the back cover of this manual for technical
1. Read the “General Safety Information” section of this manual assistance.
first and then the entire manual carefully. If you don’t follow
the safety rules, the water heater may not operate safely. It A sample rating plate is shown on page 6 of this manual. In
could cause DEATH, SERIOUS BODILY INJURY AND/OR order to expedite your request, please have full model and serial
PROPERTY DAMAGE. number available for the technician.
This manual contains instructions for the installation, operation, 4. Carefully plan your intended placement of the water heater.
and maintenance of the electric water heater. It also contains Examine the location to ensure the water heater complies with
warnings throughout the manual that you must read and be the “Locating the New Water Heater” section in this manual.
aware of. All warnings and all instructions are essential to the Installation and service of this water heater requires ability
proper operation of the water heater and your safety. READ equivalent to that of a licensed tradesman or qualified agency
THE ENTIRE MANUAL BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO INSTALL (page 2) in the field involved. Plumbing and electrical work
OR OPERATE THE WATER HEATER. are required.
4
Spec Seq#: 68
DIMENSIONS AND CAPACITIES DATA

OUTLET INLET OUTLET INLET
3/4” (FEMALE) 3/4” (FEMALE) 3/4” (FEMALE) 3/4” (FEMALE)
NPT “D” NPT NPT “D” NPT
3/4” NPT
2 1/2” RELIEF VALVE
(63.5 mm) OPENING
TOP VIEW
TOP VIEW JUNCTION TOP VIEW 2 1/2” DEL 6/10/15/20
JUNCTION BOX
BOX DEL 30/40/50 DEN 30 - 120 (63.5 mm)
ALTERNATE OUTLET
“B” “B” 3/4” (FEMALE) NPT
OUTLET
3/4” (FEMALE)
269721
NPT
3/4” NPT
3 3/4” NPT RELIEF VALVE
RELIEF VALVE OPENING
OPENING
“A” “A” “B” “A”
BRASS “C” DRAIN
ELECTRICAL “C”
DRAIN VALVE
CONNECTION
VALVE
INLET
3 3/4” (95.25 mm) 3 3/4” (95.25 mm) 3/4” (FEMALE)
NPT
FRONT VIEW FRONT VIEW FRONT VIEW
DEL 30/40/50 DEN 30-120 DEL 6/10/15/20
*(NO SIDE OUTLET AVAILABLE FOR DEL-6 MODELS)
Figure 1
TABLE 1 - ROUGH-IN DIMENSIONS

Approx.
Models No. of Tank Capacity A B C D
Shipping Weight
Dimensions Elements
US Gals. Litres inches mm inches mm inches mm inches mm Lbs. Kg.
DEL-6 1 6 23 15 1/2 394 14 1/4 362 11 279 - - 35 15.9
DEL-10 1 10 38 18 1/4 464 18 457 12 1/2 318 - - 54 24.5
DEL-15 1 15 57 26 660 18 457 20 1/2 521 - - 58 26.3
DEL-20 1 20 76 22 1/4 565 21 3/4 552 15 3/8 391 - - 73 33.1
DEL-30 2 30 114 30 7/8 784 21 3/4 552 24 1/8 613 8 203 100 45.4
DEL-40 2 40 151 32 1/4 819 24 610 25 9/16 649 8 203 125 56.7
DEL-50 2 50 189 32 1/4 819 26 1/2 673 25 1/8 638 8 203 166 75.3
DEN-30 2 30 114 34 1/2 876 20 1/2 521 - - 8 203 98 44.5
DEN-40 2 40 151 45 1/8 1146 20 1/2 521 - - 8 203 113 51.3
DEN-52 2 50 189 54 7/8 1394 20 1/2 521 - - 8 203 131 59.4
DEN-66 2 66 250 60 3/4 1543 21 3/4 552 - - 8 203 176 79.8
DEN-80 2 80 303 59 3/8 1508 24 610 - - 8 203 211 95.7
DEN-120 2 119 450 62 7/16 1586 29 3/8 746 - - 8 203 326 147.9
TABLE 2 - RECOVERY CAPACITIES

Element U.S. Gallons/Hr and Litres/Hr at TEMPERATURE RISE INDICATED
INPUT
Wattage F° 36F° 40F° 54F° 60F° 72F° 80F° 90F° 100F° 108F° 120F° 126F°
KW
(Upper/Lower) C° 20C° 22.2C° 30C° 33.3C° 40C° 44.4C° 50C° 55.5C° 60C° 66.6C° 70C°
NON-SIMULATANEOUS
/1500 GPH 17 15 11 10 8 8 7 6 6 5 5
1.5 LPH 64 58 43 38 32 29 26 23 21 19 18
/2000 GPH 23 20 15 14 11 10 9 8 8 7 6
2.0 LPH 85 77 57 51 43 38 34 31 28 26 24
/2500 GPH 28 25 19 17 14 13 11 10 9 8 8
2.5 LPH 107 96 71 64 53 48 43 38 36 32 30
3000/3000 GPH 34 30 23 20 17 15 14 12 11 10 10
3.0 LPH 128 115 85 77 64 58 51 46 43 38 37
4000/4000 GPH 45 41 30 27 23 20 18 16 15 14 13
4.0 LPH 170 153 114 102 85 77 68 61 57 51 49
4500/4500 GPH 51 46 34 30 25 23 20 18 17 15 14
4.5 LPH 192 173 128 115 96 86 77 69 64 58 55
5000/5000 GPH 56 51 38 34 28 25 23 20 19 17 16
5.0 LPH 213 192 142 128 107 96 85 77 71 64 61
6000/6000 GPH 68 61 45 41 34 30 27 24 23 20 19
6.0 LPH 256 230 170 153 128 115 102 92 85 77 73
SIMULATANEOUS OPERATION
3000/3000 GPH 68 61 45 41 34 30 27 24 23 20 19
6 LPH 256 230 170 153 128 115 102 92 85 77 73
4000/4000 GPH 90 81 60 54 45 41 36 32 30 27 26
8 LPH 341 307 227 205 170 153 136 123 114 102 97
4500/4500 GPH 101 91 68 61 51 46 41 36 34 30 29
9 LPH 384 345 256 230 192 173 153 138 128 115 110
5000/5000 GPH 113 101 75 68 56 51 45 41 38 34 32
10 LPH 426 384 284 256 213 192 170 153 142 128 122
6000/6000 GPH 135 122 90 81 68 61 54 49 45 41 39
12 LPH 511 460 341 307 256 230 205 184 170 153 146
Recovery capacities at 100° F rise equal: for non-simultaneous element operation = 4.1 gal. x KW of one element; for simultaneous element operation = 4.1 gal. x 2/3 KW of
both elements. For other rises multiply element KW as previously explained by 410 and divide by temperature rise. Full load current for single phase = total watts : voltage.
5
Spec Seq#: 68
APPROVALS
All models are listed by

Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
269721
MODEL AND RATING
DEL-30/40/50 & DEN-30/40/52/66/80/120 DEL-6/10/15/20
6
Spec Seq#: 68
FEATURES AND COMPONENTS

ELECTRONIC CONTROL MODELS
This page shows typical water heater installations by model designations.
DEN/DEL DUAL ELEMENT HEATER DEN/DEL SINGLE ELEMENT HEATER
269721
INSTALL SUITABLE DRAIN PANS UNDER WATER HEATERS
TO PREVENT DAMAGE DUE TO LEAKAGE. REFER TO WATER
HEATER LOCATION ON PAGE 8.
I N S TA L L T H E R M A L INSTALL VACUUM RELIEF

E X PA N S I O N TA N K IN COLD WATER INLET
IF CHECK VALVE OR LINE AS REQUIRED BY
PRESSURE REDUCING LOCAL CODES.
VA LV E I S U S E D I N † OVER CURRENT PROTECTION MUST BE SUPPLIED IN WATER HEATER CIRCUIT.
SUPPLY LINE. CONSULT LOCAL CODE OR CURRENT EDITION OF NEC FOR PROPER INSTALLATION.
* INSTALL IN ACCORDANCE WITH ALL LOCAL CODES.
Figure 2
7
Spec Seq#: 68
LOCATING THE NEW WATER HEATER

FACTS TO CONSIDER ABOUT THE LOCATION Water heater life depends upon water quality, water pressure
and the environment in which the water heater is installed. Water
heaters are sometimes installed in locations where leakage may
result in property damage, even with the use of a drain pan piped
to a drain. However, unanticipated damage can be reduced or
prevented by a leak detector or water shut-off device used in
conjunction with a piped drain pan. These devices are available
from some plumbing supply wholesalers and retailers, and detect
and react to leakage in various ways:
269721
• Sensors mounted in the drain pan that trigger an alarm or turn
off the incoming water to the water heater when leakage is
detected.
The water heater should be located as close as possible
to/or centralized to the water piping system. The water • Sensors mounted in the drain pan that turn off the water
heater should be located in an area not subject to freezing supply to the entire home when water is detected in the
temperatures. drain pan.
The water heater should be located in an area where leakage • Water supply shut-off devices that activate based on the water
of the tank or connections will not result in damage to the area pressure differential between the cold water and how water
adjacent to the heater or to lower floors of the structure. pipes connected to the water heater.
When such locations cannot be avoided, a suitable drain pan • Devices that will turn off the gas supply to a gas water heater
should be installed under the heater. while at the same time shutting off its water supply.
Such pans should be at least two inches deep, have a CLEARANCES

minimum length and width of at least two inches greater A minimum clearance of 4” must be allowed for access to
than the diameter of the heater and should be piped to an replaceable parts such as thermostats, drain valve and
adequate drain. relief valve.
Drain pans suitable for these water heaters are available from Adequate clearance for servicing this water heater should
your distributor or A.O. Smith Water Heater Parts Fulfillment, be considered before installation, such as changing the
125 Southeast Parkway, Franklin, TN 37068. anodes, etc.
8
Spec Seq#: 68
INSTALLATION
REQUIRED ABILITY CONTAMINATED WATER
Installation and service of this water heater requires ability equivalent This water heater shall not be connected to any heating system(s)
to that of a qualified installer or service agency (page 2) in the or component(s) used with a non-potable water heating appliance.
field involved. Plumbing and electrical work is required.
Toxic chemicals, such as those used for boiler treatment shall not
GENERAL be introduced into this system.
The installation must conform with these instructions and the local
CIRCULATING PUMP
code authority having jurisdiction and the requirements of the power
company. In the absence of local codes, the installation must comply Field installed circulating pumps should be of all bronze
269721
with the latest editions of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 or construction.
the Canadian Electrical Code CSA C22.1. The National Electrical
Code may be ordered from: National Fire Protection Association, INSULATION BLANKETS
1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269. The Canadian Electrical Insulation blankets are available to the general public for
Code is available from the Canadian Standards Association, 8501
external use on electric water heaters but are not necessary with
East Pleasant Valley Road, Cleveland, OH 44131.
this product. The purpose of an insulation blanket is to reduce
Do NOT test electrical system before heater is filled with water, follow the standby heat loss encountered with storage tank heaters.
the START UP procedure in the OPERATION section of this manual. Your water heater meets or exceeds the EPACT and ASHRAE/
The principal components of the heater are identified in the IES 90.1 standards with respect to insulation and standby loss
Features and Components illustrations on page 7. requirements, making an insulation blanket unnecessary.
Should you choose to apply an insulation blanket to this heater,
you should follow these instructions below. Failure to follow
these instructions can result in fire, serious personal injury,
or death.
• Do not cover the temperature and pressure relief (T & P) valve
with an insulation blanket.
• Do not cover the instruction manual. Keep it on the side of the
water heater or nearby for future reference.
• Do obtain new warning and instruction labels for placement on
the blanket directly over the existing labels.
TEMPERATURE-PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE

MIXING VALVE USAGE:
Water heaters are intended to produce hot water. Water heated to
a temperature which will satisfy space heating, clothes washing,
dish washing, cleaning and other sanitizing needs can scald and
permanently injure you upon contact. Some people are more likely
to be permanently injured by hot water than others. These include
the elderly, children, the infirm, or physically/developmentally
disabled. If anyone using hot water in your home fits into one of
these groups or if there is a local code or state law requiring a
maximum water temperature at the hot water tap, then you must
take special precautions. In addition to using the lowest possible
temperature setting that satisfies your hot water needs, a means
such as a MIXING VALVE, should be used at the hot water taps
used by these people or at the water heater.
MIXING VALVES for reducing point of use temperature are available
and are to be set at a maximum of 125 degree F. Consult a qualified
installer or service agency. Follow all manufacturer’s Instructions
for installation of these valves. Before changing the factory setting
on the thermostat, read the “Temperature Regulation” section in
this manual.
This water heater is provided with a properly rated/sized and
certified combination temperature - pressure relief valve by the
manufacturer. The valve is certified by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory that maintains periodic inspection of production
of listed equipment of materials as meeting the requirements for
Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems, ANSI Z21.22 • CSA
4.4, and the code requirements of ASME.
If replaced, the new valve must meet the requirements of local
codes, but not less than a combination temperature and pressure
relief valve rated/sized and certified as indicated in the above
9
Spec Seq#: 68
paragraph. The new valve must be marked with a maximum set

pressure not to exceed the marked hydrostatic working pressure
of the water heater (150 psi = 1,035 kPa) and a discharge capacity
not less than the water heater Btu/hr or KW input rate as shown on
the water heater’s model rating plate.
For safe operation of the water heater, the temperature and pressure
relief valve must not be removed from its designated opening nor
plugged. The temperature-pressure relief valve must be installed
directly into the fitting of the water heater designed for the relief valve.
Install discharge piping so that any discharge will exit only within 6
inches (15.2 cm) above, or at any distance below the structural floor.
Be certain that no contact is made with any live electrical part. The
discharge opening must not be blocked or reduced in size under
269721
any circumstances. Excessive length, over 30 feet (9.14 m), or The temperature-pressure relief valve must be manually operated
use of more than four elbows can cause restriction and reduce the at least once a year. Caution should be taken to ensure that (1) no
discharge capacity of the valve. one is in front of or around the outlet of the temperature-pressure
relief valve discharge line, and (2) the water manually discharged
No valve or other obstruction is to be placed between the relief valve
can cause bodily injury or property damage because the water
and the tank. Do not connect discharge piping directly to the drain
may be extremely hot. If after manually operating the valve, it fails
unless a 6” (15.2 cm) air gap is provided. To prevent bodily injury, to completely reset and continues to release water, immediately
hazard to life, or property damage, the relief valve must be allowed close the cold water inlet to the water heater, follow the draining
to discharge water in adequate quantities should circumstances instructions in this manual, and replace the temperature-pressure
demand. If the discharge pipe is not connected to a drain or other relief valve with a properly rated/sized new one.
suitable means, the water flow may cause property damage.
If you do not understand these instructions or have any questions
regarding the temperature-pressure relief valve call the toll free
number listed on the back cover of this manual for technical assistance.
CLOSED WATER SYSTEMS
Water supply systems may, because of code requirements or such
conditions as high line pressure, among others, have installed
devices such as pressure reducing valves, check valves, and back
flow preventers. Devices such as these cause the water system to
be a closed system.
THERMAL EXPANSION
As water is heated, it expands (thermal expansion). In a closed system
The Discharge Pipe: the volume of water will grow when it is heated. As the volume of
• Shall not be smaller in size than the outlet pipe size of the valve, or water grows there will be a corresponding increase in water pressure
have any reducing couplings or other restrictions. due to thermal expansion. Thermal expansion can cause premature
• Shall not be plugged or blocked. tank failure (leakage). This type of failure is not covered under the
limited warranty. Thermal expansion can also cause intermittent
• Shall be of material listed for hot water distribution.
temperature-pressure relief valve operation: water discharged from
• Shall be installed so as to allow complete drainage of both the the valve due to excessive pressure build up. This condition is not
temperature-pressure relief valve and the discharge pipe. covered under the limited warranty. The temperature-pressure relief
• Must terminate a maximum of six inches above a floor drain or valve is not intended for the constant relief of thermal expansion.
external to the building. In cold climates, it is recommended that the A properly sized thermal expansion tank should be installed on all
discharge pipe be terminated at an adequate drain inside the building. closed systems to control the harmful effects of thermal expansion.
• Shall not have any valve or other obstruction between the relief Contact a local plumbing service agency to have a thermal expansion
valve and the drain. tank installed.
10
Spec Seq#: 68
ELECTRICAL
This is an example of calculating heater amperage for both types
of element operation. From this, the branch circuit conductor and
overcurrent protection sizing can be established.
The example is of a three-phase 240 volt unit with two, 6 kw
elements. The notations are for units field converted to single-phase.
Check the heater model and rating plate for actual specifications
and substitute those values in the following.
TABLE 3
Non-simultaneous: Simultaneous:
(as factory wired) (Field conversion)
269721
3000 : 240 = 12.5 amps*
3000 : 240 = 12.5 amps* 12.5 x 1.73 = 21.6 amps
*NOTE: as a single-phase non- *simultaneous
NOTE: as a single-phase
unit the total is:
GENERAL simultaneous unit. 12.5 x 2 = 25 amps
The installation must conform with these instructions and the local The rating of the overcurrent protection should be computed on the
code authority having jurisdiction and the requirements of the power basis of 125 percent of the total connected load amperage. Where the
company. In the absence of local codes, the installation must comply standard ratings and settings do not correspond with this computation,
with the current editions of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 or the next higher standard rating or setting should be selected.
the Canadian Electrical Code CSA C22.1.
Portion of Table 310-16 (NFPA-70) follows:
An electrical ground is required to reduce risk of electrical shock Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Copper Conductors. Not more
or possible electrocution. The water heater should be connected than three conductors in Raceway or Cable or Direct Burial (Based
to a separate grounded branch circuit with over-current protection on Ambient Temperature of 30° C, 86° F).
and disconnect switch. The water heater should be grounded in
accordance with national and local codes. These ampacities relate only to conductors described in Table
310-13 in Code.
Voltage applied to the heater should not vary more than +5% to -10%
of the model and rating plate marking for satisfactory operation. For ambient temperatures over 30° C (86° F), see Correction
Factors, Note 13 in Code.
DO NOT ENERGIZE THE BRANCH CIRCUIT FOR ANY REASON
BEFORE THE HEATER TANK IS FILLED WITH WATER. DOING For ambient temperatures over 30° C (86° F), see Correction
SO WILL CAUSE THE HEATING ELEMENTS TO BURN OUT AND Factors, Note 13 in Code.
VOID WARRANTY. TABLE 4
The factory wiring is attached to a terminal block within the external Temperature Rating of Conductor
Size
junction box unit. The branch circuit is connected to the terminal See Table 310-13 in Code
block within this junction box. The water heater should be connected AMG 60°C 75°C
to a separate, grounded, branch circuit with overcurrent protection MCM (140°F) (167°F)
and disconnect switch. The water heater should be grounded in Types:
Types:
RH, RHW, RUH, (14-2),
accordance with national and local codes. RUW, (14-2), T, TW, UF
THW, THWN, XHHW, USE
18 --- ---
BRANCH CIRCUIT 16 --- ---
The branch circuit wire size should be established through reference 14 15 15
to the current edition of NFPA-70, the National Electrical Code 12 20 20
10 30 30
or other locally approved source in conjunction with the heater 8 40 45
amperage rating. For convenience, portions of the wire size tables 6 55 65
from the Code are reproduced here. The branch circuit should be 4 70 85
sized at 125 percent of the heater rating and further increase wire 3 80 100
size as necessary to compensate for voltage drop in long runs.
Portion of Table 310-18 follows:
CALCULATING AMPERAGE/OVERCURRENT PROTECTION Allowable Ampacities of Insulated Aluminum and Copper -Clad
The heaters come from the factory in two configurations: Aluminum Conductors.
1. Two wire C-2 circuit for single element heater equipped with a Not more than three conductors in Raceway or Cable or Direct Burial
high limit control, single phase power input. (Based on Ambient Temperature of 30° C, 86° F. These ampacities
2. Four wire A-8 circuit for dual element heater equipped with two relate only to conductors described in Table 310-13 in Code.
high limit controls, single phase or three phase power input.
For ambient temperatures over 30° C (86° F), see Correction Factors,
The heater with dual elements is factory wired for connection to Note 13 in Code.
a three wire, three-phase delta branch circuit, non-simultaneous
operation. In addition a ground conductor is required. TABLE 5
Temperature Rating of Conductor
Element connection is for non-simultaneous operation. This means Size
See Table 310-13 in Code
only one element at a time operates. The wiring diagram, on page AMG 60°C 75°C
12, shows the heater may be field converted to simultaneous MCM (140°F) (167°F)
element operation by moving the red wire on “J” terminal to L1. It is Types:
Types:
then possible for both elements to operate at once as determined RUW, (12-2), T, TW, UF
RH, RHW, RUH, (12-2),
by the thermostats. Regardless of element connection the heater THW, THWN, XHHW, USE
operates in an “unbalanced” fashion. 12 15 15
10 25 25
The heater may be field converted to single-phase operation by moving 8 30 40
the wire on L3 of the terminal block to L2. L3 is not used, see page 12. 6 40 50
4 55 65
The heater, now in single-phase non-simultaneous operation, may 3 65 75
be field-converted to single phase simultaneous operation by moving 2 75 90
the red wire on terminal “J” to L1, see page 12. 1 85 100
11
Spec Seq#: 68
WIRING DIAGRAMS
A-8 CIRCUIT FOR DUAL ELEMENT HEATER
C-2 CIRCUIT
FOR SINGLE
ELEMENT HEATERS
EQUIPPED WITH HIGH
LIMIT CONTROL
269721
FACTORY WIRED
---------- FIELD WIRING
† WHITE FOR 120V & 277V
Figure 3
12
Spec Seq#: 68
OPERATION
GENERAL INITIAL START UP
Refer to the Features and Components section of this manual (page The following checks should be made by the installer when the heater
7) for the location of components mentioned in the instructions is placed into operation for the first time.
that follow. 1. Turn off the electrical disconnect switch.
NEVER turn on power to the water heater without being certain the 2. Open the front panel or top access cover, check all water and
water heater is filled with water and a temperature and pressure electrical connections for tightness. Also check connections on top
and or sides of heater. Repair water leaks and tighten electrical
relief valve is installed in the relief valve opening.
connections as necessary.
DO NOT TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM BEFORE HEATER IS 3. Depress the red manual reset button on each Thermostat/ECO
FILLED WITH WATER. FOLLOW FILLING AND START-UP
269721
combination control. (See Figure 5, Figure 6, Figure 7, or Figure 8)
INSTRUCTIONS IN OPERATION SECTION. 4. Turn on the electrical disconnect switch.
5. Observe the operation of the electrical components during the first
heating cycle. Use care as the electrical circuits are energized.
6. Close the front panel or top access cover.
Temperature control and contactor operation should be checked by
allowing heater to come up to temperature and shut off automatically.
Use care as the electrical circuits are energized.
DRAINING THE WATER HEATER
The water heater must be drained if it is to be shut down and exposed
to freezing temperatures. Maintenance and service procedures may
FILLING THE WATER HEATER also require draining the heater.
1. Turn off the electrical disconnect switch.
2. Open a hot water valve until the water is cool, then close the
supply water inlet valve to heater.
3. Attach hose to outlet opening of drain valve and direct end to drain.
4. Open a nearby hot water faucet and the heater drain valve.
5. If the heater is being drained for an extended shutdown, it is
suggested the drain valve be left open during this period. The
hose may be removed.
Follow FILLING instructions when restoring hot water service.
1. Turn off the electrical disconnect switch.

2. Close the water heater drain valve.
3. Open a nearby hot water faucet to permit the air in the system
to escape.
4. Fully open the cold water inlet pipe valve allowing the heater and
piping to be filled.
5. Close the hot water faucet as water starts to flow. The
heater is now ready for STARTUP and TEMPERATURE
REGULATION.
INSTALLATION
13
Spec Seq#: 68
TEMPERATURE REGULATION
approximately the 140°F (60°C) setting. The over temperature device
(ECO high limit) attached to each thermostat has a manual reset.
40A 120-277 VAC

25A.480-600 VAC
125VA.PT.DTY.
120-480 VAC
MODEL
WH10C
269721
MED
APCOM
INC
30A 120-250 VAC

22A 277 VAC
12.5A 480-600VAC
125 VA.PT.DTY. 120-480 VAC
THE WATER HEATER IS EQUIPPED WITH AN ADJUSTABLE

THERMOSTAT TO CONTROL WATER TEMPERATURE. HOT Figure 5 Figure 6
WATER AT TEMPERATURES DESIRED FOR AUTOMATIC
DISHWASHER AND LAUNDRY USE CAN CAUSE SCALDS
THERMODISC THERMOSTATS
RESULTING IN SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR DEATH.
THE TEMPERATURE AT WHICH INJURY OCCURS VARIES WITH
THE PERSON’S AGE AND TIME OF EXPOSURE. THE SLOWER A-8 circuit thermostats are adjustable from approximately 120°F
RESPONSE TIME OF CHILDREN , AGED OR DISABLED PERSONS (49°C) (lowest setting) to 181°F (83°C) (highest setting) (See Figure
INCREASES THE HAZARD TO THEM. NEVER ALLOW SMALL 7). The C-2 circuit thermostat is adjustable from approximately 110°F
CHILDREN TO USE A HOT WATER TAP, OR TO DRAW THEIR OWN (43°C) to 170°F (77°C) (See Figure 8). These thermostats are set
BATH WATER. NEVER LEAVE A CHILD OR DISABLED PERSON from the factory at approximately the 140°F (60°C) setting. The over
UNATTENDED IN A BATHTUB OR SHOWER.
temperature device (ECO high limit) attached to each thermostat
It is recommended that lower water temperatures be used to avoid has a manual reset.
the risk of scalding. It is further recommended, in all cases, that the
water temperature thermostats (See Figure 4) be set for the lowest
temperature which satisfies your hot water needs. This will also
provide the most energy efficient operation of the water heater. L1 L3 L1 L3
RESET RESET
Figure 4 shows the approximate time-to-burn relationship for RESET RESET
normal adult skin. The thermostats on your water heater have a L2

T1
L4 L2
T1
L4
linear relationship between degrees of angular rotation and the

corresponding change in temperature. Thus rotating the temperature
T2 T4
adjustment indicator 30 angular degrees will result in a 10 degree 89T
T2 T4
Fahrenheit change in water temperature. THERM O DISC

THERM-O-DISC
Time for Permanent Burns

Water Temperature Time for 1st Degree Burn
2nd & 3rd Degree
°F (°C) (Less Severe Burns)
(Most Severe Burns) 83°C 181°F 120°F 49°C
110 (43) (normal shower temp.) 170°F 110°F
140°F
116 (47) (pain threshold) 60°C 140°F
116 (47) 35 minutes 45 minutes
122 (50) 1 minute 5 minutes Figure 7 Figure 8
131 (55) 5 seconds 25 seconds
149 (65) 1 second 2 seconds NOTE: It is not necessary to adjust the upper thermostat for a dual
154 (68) instantaneous 1 second element unit. However, if it is adjusted above the factory set point
(U.S. Government Memorandum, C.P.S.C., Peter L. Armstrong, Sept. 15, 1978) 140°F (60°C) it is recommended that it not be set higher than the
Figure 4 lower thermostat setting.
TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT
To change the temperature setting:
The water heater is supplied with thermostats that may come from
different manufactures and have different temperature indications 1. DANGER: Turn off the heater electrical supply. Do not attempt
as described below. to adjust thermostat with power on.
2. Open the junction box door (for upper thermostat of dual
APCOM THERMOSTATS
element water heater only) and/or remove the (lower) thermostat
A-8 Circuit thermostats have three designated set points; LO, MED access panel. Do not remove the plastic personnel protectors
and HI. (See Figure 5).The approximate equivalent temperatures for covering the thermostats. The thermostat is factory pre-set at
these three settings are: LO = 140°F (60°C), MED = 160°F (71°C) and 140°F (60°C).
HI = 181°F (83°C). These thermostats are set from the factory at the
LO 140°F (60°C) setting. The over temperature device (ECO high 3. Using a flat tip screwdriver, rotate the adjusting knob to the
limit) attached to each thermostat has a manual reset. The C-2 circuit desired temperature setting.
thermostat is adjustable from approximately 130°F (54°C) to 170°F
4. Replace the covers and access panels, and turn on heater
(77°C) (See Figure 6). These thermostats are set from the factory at
electrical supply.
14
Spec Seq#: 68
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL ANODE ROD INSPECTION
269721
The anode rod is used to protect the tank from corrosion. Most hot
water tanks are equipped with an anode rod. The submerged rod
sacrifices itself to protect the tank. Instead of corroding tank, water
ions attack and eat away the anode rod. This does not affect water’s
taste or color. The rod must be maintained to keep tank in operating
Periodically the drain valve should be opened and the water condition.
allowed to run until it flows clean. This will help to prevent Anode deterioration depends on water conductivity, not necessarily
sediment buildup in the tank bottom. water condition. A corroded or pitted anode rod indicates high water
conductivity and should be checked and/or replaced more often than
Periodically check the temperature and pressure relief valve an anode rod that appears to be intact. Replacement of a depleted
to ensure that it is in operating condition. Lift the lever at the anode rod can extend the life of your water heater. Inspection should
top of the valve several times until the valve seats properly be conducted by a qualified technician, and at a minimum should be
and operates freely. checked annually after the warranty period.
Artificially softened water is exceedingly corrosive because the
Water heater maintenance includes periodic tank flushing and process substitutes sodium ions for magnesium and calcium ions.
cleaning, and removal of lime scale from the heating element.
The use of a water softener may decrease the life of the water
The heater tank is equipped with an anode rod to aid in heater tank.
corrosion control. The anode rod should be inspected after a maximum of three years
and annually thereafter until the condition of the anode rod dictates
its replacement.
NOTE: Artificially softened water requires the anode rod to be
inspected annually.
15
Spec Seq#: 68
TROUBLESHOOTING CHECKLIST
CHECKLIST ABNORMAL SOUNDS
Before calling for service, check the following points to see if the 1. Sediment or lime scale accumulations on the elements causes
cause of trouble can be identified and corrected. sizzling and hissing noises when the heater is operating.
Reviewing this checklist may eliminate the need of a service call • The sounds are normal, however, the tank bottom and
and quickly restore hot water service. See Figure 2 on page 7 in this elements should be cleaned. See the Maintenance section
manual to identify and locate water heater components. of this manual.
WATER LEAKAGE IS SUSPECTED

Refer to Leakage Checkpoint on the following page 17.
269721
1. Check to see if the heater drain valve is tightly closed.
2. If the outlet of the relief valve is leaking it may represent:
• Excessive water temperature.
• Faulty relief valve.
• Excessive water pressure.
3. Excessive water pressure is the most common cause of relief valve
leakage. It is often caused by a “closed system”. See “Closed
Water Systems” and “Thermal Expansion” in the Installation
section of this manual for more information.
NOT ENOUGH OR NO HOT WATER 4. Examine the area around the element for gasket leakage.
1. Be certain the electrical disconnect switch serving the water heater • Tighten the elements or, if necessary, follow the WATER
is in the ON position. AND LIME SCALE REMOVAL procedure to replace the
2. Check the fuses. gaskets.
• The electrical disconnect switch usually contains fuses. IF YOU CANNOT IDENTIFY OR CORRECT THE SOURCE OF
3. If the water was excessively hot, and is now cold, the high limit MALFUNCTION
switch may have activated. 1. Turn the power supply to the water heater off.
• See the Temperature Regulation section of this manual for 2. Close the supply water inlet valve to the heater.
more information on how to reset the ECO high limit controls.
3. Contact a Qualified Service Agency in your area. Call the toll free
4. The capacity of the heater may have been exceeded by a large phone number on the back cover of this Instruction Manual for
demand for hot water.
assistance in locating a service agency in your area.
• Large demands require a recovery period to restore water
temperature. REPLACEMENT PARTS
5. Cooler incoming water temperature will lengthen the time required Call the toll free phone number on the back cover of this Instruction
to heat water to the desired temperature. Manual for assistance in locating replacement parts.. When ordering
parts, specify complete model no., serial no., (see rating plate),
6. Look for hot water leakage.
quantity and name of part desired. Standard hardware items should
7. Sediment or pipe scale may be affecting water heater operation. be purchased locally.
16
Spec Seq#: 68
LEAKAGE CHECKPOINTS
Instructions: Use this illustration as a guide when checking for sources of water leakage. You or your dealer may be able to correct what
appears to be a problem. NOTE: Cover and Insulation shown removed to reveal tank top.
Relief Valve
Where possible remove or lift top cover to To Open Drain
examine threads of fittings installed into tank
269721
for evidence of leakage. Correct fitting leaks
as necessary.
Water leaks at the elements may be due Condensation and dripping may appear
to: on pipes when cold water temperature is
low. Pipe fitting may be leaking.
1. Defective element which leaks at
terminals or thru flange. Replace Anode Rod (Some Models)
element*. Relief valve operation and leakage
may be due to water expansion during
2. Loose element/gasket leak:
heating cycle or foreign material on seat
(a) Screw-in type: tighten with 1-1/2” of valve. If the valve is not piped to an
socket wrench. If leak continues, open drain the released water could be
remove element*, discard gasket mistaken for a leaking heater. To check
and clean thread areas. Apply where threaded material between jacket
nonhardening Permatex Number 2 opening and swab spud area. Remove
to thread areas, install new gasket valve* if indicated and repair with pipe
and screw element into fitting until joint compound.
it seats. Tighten 1/2 to 3/4 turn with
wrench.
(b) Flange type: tighten screw with
wrench. If leak continues remove
element* and discard gasket. Clean To Open Drain
gasket seating areas and re-install
element with new gasket. A new
element may be required where Water on the side of the tank may
threads have become rusted or be condensation due to the panel or
damaged, preventing tightening. insulation not being in place.
All water which appears at the water
heater bottom or on the surrounding floor
may be caused by condensation, loose
connections or relief valve operation
Drain valve leakage could be from the
and leakage. Do not replace the water
valve itself.* To check for leakage where
heater until full inspection of all potential
threaded portion enters tank, insert Q-tip
leak points is made and corrective steps
or similar absorbent material between
taken to stop the leak. Leakage from other
jacket opening and valve to swab spud
appliances, water lines or ground (see
area. Remove valve* if leak is indicated
page 16) should also be suspected until
and repair with pipe joint compound.
proven otherwise.
*Contact your dealer as it is necessary to
shut off electricity and drain tank to perform
procedure.
Figure 9
17
Spec Seq#: 68
COMMERCIAL
WATER HEATER
LIMITED WARRANTY
EFFECTIVE WHAT'S NOT COVERED

For 3 Years, in the event of a tank leak, we will repair or, at our • Problems caused by improper: gas supply line sizing, gas type,
discretion, replace the defective water heater. venting, connections, combustion air, voltage, wiring, or fusing
269721
For 1 Year, in the event of part failure, we will repair or, at our • Failure to follow applicable codes
discretion, replace the defective part. • Failure to follow printed instructions
We warrant this product against defects in materials or • Abuse, misuse, accident, fire, flood, Acts of God
workmanship as described in this document if installed within
• Improper installation, sizing, delivery, or maintenance
the United States or Canada and provided the product remains
at its original place of installation. • Claims related to rust, noise, smell, or taste of water
Warranty coverage begins the date of installation OR the date of • Failure to conduct authorized factory start up if required
manufacture if installation cannot be verified. • Alterations to the water heater
• Non-outdoor heaters installed outdoors
WHAT'S COVERED
• Damages due to a failure to allow for thermal expansion
Subject to these terms, in the event of defect in materials and/
• Heat exchanger failure due to lack of adequate / proper supply
or workmanship resulting in a tank leak during the first three
of water
years, we will:
• Replace the water heater should the tank leak. • Heaters moved from their original location
Subject to these terms, in the event of a defect in materials and/or • Service trips to explain proper installation, use, or maintenance
workmanship appearing during the first year, we will: of the product/unit or to describe compliance requirements
• Repair or, at our discretion, replace any part of the water under applicable codes and regulations
heater covered under this limited warranty excluding parts • Charges related to accessing your heater including but not
subject to normal maintenance (Example: non-electronic limited to door/wall removal, equipment rental, etc.
anode rod, filter, etc)
• Replacement parts after expiration of this warranty
Service/labor, shipping, delivery, installation, handling or any
other costs are not covered at any time under this warranty. LIMITATIONS
Any replacement part or product will be warranted only for NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING ELSE TO THE CONTRARY,
the unexpired portion of the original water heater’s limited THIS IS YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY.
warranty period. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING A WARRANTY
If an identical model is no longer available due to a change in law, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR
regulation, or standard, we will replace the product with one having PURPOSE ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. SELLER SHALL
comparable capacity and input. In these instances, the owner will NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL,
have the option of paying the difference between what was paid for SPECIAL, PUNITIVE OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGES. TOTAL
the original model and the new model with the additional features, LIABILITY ARISING AT ANY TIME SHALL NOT EXCEED THE
or receiving a refund of the portion of the purchase price, on a PURCHASE PRICE PAID WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT,
pro-rata basis allocable to the unexpired portion of the warranty. TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.
SERVICE INQUIRIES:
For service inquiries call the telephone number listed below. Be prepared to provide the following information:
name, address, and telephone number; the model and serial number of the water heater; proof of installation; and a clear description
of the problem.
For your records, fill in the product:
Serial: ___________________
Model: ___________________
U.S. Customers: Canadian Customers:
A. O. Smith Corporation P. O. Box 310 – 768 Erie Street
500 Tennessee Waltz Parkway Stratford (Ontario) N5A 6T3
Ashland City, Tennessee 37015 800-265-8520
800-527-1953
www.hotwater.com
18
Spec Seq#: 68
NOTES
269721
19
Spec Seq#: 68
REPAIR PARTS LIST
Now that you have purchased this water heater, should a need ever Be sure to provide all pertinent facts when you call or visit.
exist for repair parts or service, simply contact the company it was
WHEN ORDERING REPAIR PARTS, ALWAYS GIVE THE
purchased from or direct from the manufacturer listed on the rating
FOLLOWING INFORMATION:
plate on the water heater.
• MODEL NUMBER
Selling prices will be furnished on request or parts will be shipped
• VOLTAGE AND ELEMENT WATTAGE
at prevailing prices and you will be billed accordingly.
• SERIAL NUMBER
The model number of your Water Heater will be found on the rating • PART DESCRIPTION
plated located above the lower access panel.
Del 6, 10, 15, 20 Series 102 (refer to repair parts table).
DRAIN VALVE 269721

(not supplied with heater)
Part No. 26273-5
Figure 10
20
Spec Seq#: 68
Item Description DEL-6 DEL-10 DEL-15 DEL-20

Series 102 Series 102 Series 102 Series 102
1A........ Anode, Alum... . .................................. 9003942005.......... 9003942005......... 9003942005........ 9003944005
1B........ Anode, Mag. (SMR P72 and S19)...... 9001909005.......... 9001909005......... 9001909005........ 9003721005
2......... Collar, Pipe...........................................9004610115.......... 9004610115..........9004610115........ 9004610115
3......... Cover, Front........................................ 9003900005.......... 9003900005......... 9003900005........ 9003900005
4......... ELEMENT, HEATING.................................... .SEE ELEMENT CHART ON PAGE 23.........................
5......... Gasket, Element.................................. 9000308005.......... 9000308005......... 9000308005........ 9000308005
6......... Opening Insulation...............................043307-000...........043307-000..........043307-000........ 043307-000
7......... *Instruction Manual................................322055-0...............322055-0..............322055-0............ 322055-0
269721
10........ Personnel Protector............................ 9003914015.......... 9003914015......... 9003914015........ 9003914015
11......... Pipe Nipple.............................................. 194130.................194130-3..............194130-3............ 194130-3
12........ Plate, Knockout.......................................43293-1.................43293-1................43293-1.............. 43293-1
PLUG
15/16...... Thermostat with High Limit Switch...... 9006586015.......... 9006586015......... 9006586015........ 9006586015
17........ Bracket, Thermostat............................ 9003898015.......... 9003898015......... 9003898015........ 9003898015
18........ Valve, Relief........................................ 9003484005.......... 9003741005......... 9003741005........ 9003741005
*Not Illustrated.
Standard Hardware Items May Be Purchased Locally. Underlined Parts Are Recommended For Emergency Replacement.
DEN 30, 40, 52, 66, 80 & 120, Series 110 DEL 30, 40 & 50, Series 110
(Refer to Repair Parts Table on page 22) (Refer to Repair Parts Table on page 22)
Figure 11 Figure 12
21
Spec Seq#: 68
Item Description DEL-30 DEL-40 DEL-50 DEN-30 DEN-40 DEN-52 DEN-66 DEN-80 DEN-120
Series 110 Series 110 Series 110 Series 110 Series 110 Series 110 Series 110 Series 110 Series 110
1A.....Anode, Alum. ............................. 9003944005.....9003944005.... 9003944005.....9003944005....9003944005.... 9003944005.... 9000029005..... 9003892005.....9003892005
1B.....Anode, Mag.(SMR P72)............ 9003721005.....9003721005.... 9003721005.....9003721005....9003721005.... 9003721005.... 9003721005..... 9001829005.....9001829005
2......T&P Relief Valve......................... 9003741005.....9003741005.... 9003741005.....9000071005....9000071005.... 9000071005.... 9000071005..... 9000071005.....9000071005
3......Gasket, Element......................... 9000308045.....9000308045.... 9000308045.....9000308045....9000308045.... 9000308045.... 9000308045..... 9000308045.....9000308045
4......ELEMENT, each................................................................................................ (SEE ELEMENT & WATTAGE CHART page 23 ) ��
269721
5......Upper Thermostat w/Hi Limit..... 9002856015.....9002856015.... 9002856015.....9002856015....9002856015.... 9002856015.... 9002856015..... 9002856015.....9002856015
6......Lower Thermostat w/Hi Limit..... 9002857015.....9002857015.... 9002857015.....9002857015....9002857015.... 9002857015.... 9002857015..... 9002857015.....9002857015
7......Thermostat Bracket, each.......... 9003898215.....9003898215.... 9003898215.....9003898215....9003898215.... 9003898215.... 9003898215..... 9003898215.....9003898215
8......Personal Protector...................... 9003914015.....9003914015.... 9003914015.....9003914015....9003914015.... 9003914015.... 9003914015..... 9003914015.....9003914015
9......Lower Access Panel................... 9003900005.....9003900005.... 9003900005.....9003900005....9003900005.... 9003900005.... 9003900005..... 9003900005.....9003900005
10.....Dip Tube..................................... 9003902005.....9003902005.... 9003902005.....9003902005....9003903005.... 9003904005.... 9003905005..... 9003905005.....9005709205
11.....Power Terminal........................... 9005719215.....9005719215.... 9005719215.....9005719215....9005719215.... 9005719215.... 9005719215..... 9005719215.....9005719215
12.....Drain Valve................................. 9003906015.....9003906015.... 9003906015.....9003906015....9003906015.... 9003906015.... 9003906015..... 9003906015.....9003906015
15*....Junction Box Assembly...................195171.............195171............ 195171.............195171............. 195171.............195171.............195171..............195171.............195171
16*....Manual...........................................322055-0......... 322055-0..........322055-0......... 322055-0..........322055-0..........322055-0.........322055-0..........322055-0......... 322055-0
*Not Illustrated.
Standard Hardware Items May Be Purchased Locally.
Underlined Parts Are Recommended For Emergency Replacement.
22
Spec Seq#: 68
269721
Figure 13
TABLE 6 - COPPER SHEATH ELEMENT AND WATTAGE CHART

ELEMENT 120V 208V 240V 277V 480V
K.W.
WATTAGE PART NO. PART NO. PART NO. PART NO. PART NO.
1.0 1000W --- 9002863115 90001431005 --- ---
1.5 1500W 9002963005 9000145005 9002864005 9001225115 ---
2.0 2000W 9003947005 9002858005 9000145005 9004709115 ---
2.5 2500W 9002859005 9004712105 9002860005 9002890005 9002861005
3.0 3000W 9002862005 9002868005 9003959005 9003958005 9003961005
3.5 3500W --- 9003950005 9004712105 --- ---
MAX 3.5KW INPUT FOR 6 GALLON UNITS, ELEMENTS BELOW DOTTED LINE CANNOT BE USED ON 6 GALLON UNITS
4.0 4000W --- 9002867005 9002868005 9001229005 9002869005
4.5 4500W --- 9003952005 9003950100 9003960005 9001225005
5.0 5000W --- 9001224005 9003957005 9001231005 9001236005
5.5 5500W --- 9002871005 9002867005 --- 9002872005
6.0 6000W --- 9003953005 9003952005 9002874005 9002875005
TABLE 7 - INCOLOY SHEATH ELEMENT AND WATTAGE CHART (FOR SMR P72)
ELEMENT 120 V 208 V 240 V 277 V 480 V

K.W.
WATTAGE PART NO. PART NO. PART NO. PART NO. PART NO.
1.5 1500 W 9004279005 9004283005 9004290005 9004736105 Not Available
2.0 2000 W 9004280005 9004284005 9004283005 9004290005 9004298005
2.5 2500 W 9004281005 9004285005 9004291005 9004295005 9004299005
INCOLOY ELEMENTS BELOW THIS LINE CANNOT BE USED ON 6 GALLON UNITS BECAUSE OF ELEMENT LENGTH
3.0 3000 W 9004282005 9004751115 9000664005 9004296005 9004300005
3.5 3500 W Not Available 9003210005 9004292005 Not Available Not Available
4.0 4000 W Not Available 9004294005 9004751115 9000664005 Not Available
4.5 4500 W Not Available 9004287005 9003210005 9004297005 9004301005
23
Spec Seq#: 68
269721
www.hotwater.com
500 Tennessee Waltz Parkway, Ashland City, TN 37015
Tech Support: 800-527-1953
Parts: 800-433-2545
Copyright © 2015 A. O. Smith Water Heater Company, All rights reserved.
24
Spec Seq#: 69
THERM-X-TROL®
THERMAL EXPANSION ABSORBERS
INSTALLATION & OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
Models ST-5C through ST-210VC
121708
NOTE: Inspect for shipping damage and notify freight carrier or store where purchased immediately if damage is present. To avoid risk of personal
injury and property damage, if the product appears to be malfunctioning or shows signs of corrosion, call a qualified professional immediately. Current
copies of the Product manual can be viewed at www.amtrol.com. Use proper safety equipment when installing.
THIS IS THE SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL. IT IS USED TO ALERT YOU TO POTENTIAL PERSONAL INJURY AND OTHER
HAZARDS. OBEY ALL SAFETY MESSAGES THAT FOLLOW THIS SYMBOL TO REDUCE THE RISK OF PERSONAL
INJURY AS WELL AS PROPERTY DAMAGE.
READ CAREFULLY THE PRODUCT This Product, like most Products under pressure,
INSTALLATION & OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS. may over time corrode, weaken and burst or explode,
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS AND WARNINGS IN THE causing serious or fatal injury, leaking or flooding and/or property damage.
MANUAL MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS OR FATAL INJURY AND/OR To minimize risk, a licensed professional must install and periodically
PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND WILL VOID THE PRODUCT WARRANTY. inspect and service the Product. A drip pan connected to an adequate
THIS PRODUCT MUST BE INSTALLED BY A QUALIFIED drain must be installed if leaking or flooding could cause property damage.
PROFESSIONAL. FOLLOW ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL AND STATE Do not locate in an area where leakage of the tank or connections could
CODES AND REGULATIONS, IN THE ABSENCE OF SUCH CODES, cause property damage to the area adjacent to the appliance or to lower
FOLLOW THE CURRENT EDITIONS OF THE NATIONAL PLUMBING floors of the structure.
CODE AND NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE, AS APPLICABLE.
Do not expose Product to freezing temperatures or
EXPLOSION HAZARD. Failure to follow the
instructions in the accompanying product manual temperatures in excess of 200° F. Do not adjust the
can cause a rupture or explosion; possibly causing serious or fatal injury, pre-charge or re-pressure this Product except for any adjustments
leaking or flooding and/or property damage. required at the time of initial installation, especially if Product corroded,
damaged or with diminished integrity. Adjustments to pre-charge must
Use only with potable water system. Do not operate be done at ambient temperature only. Failure to properly size the
in a setting with freezing temperatures or where the Product or follow these instructions may result in excessive strain on the
temperature can exceed 200°F and do not exceed the maximum working
system lead to Product failure, serious or fatal personal injury, leakage
pressure specified for this Product in the Manual. Mount vertically only.
and/or property damage.
Chlorine & Aggressive Water: The water quality
can significantly influence the life of this Product. EXPLOSION OR RUPTURE HAZARD A relief valve
You should test for corrosive elements, acidity, total solids and other must be installed to prevent pressure in excess of
relevant contaminants, including chlorine and treat your water appropriately local code requirement or maximum working pressure designated in the
to insure satisfactory performance and prevent premature failure. Product Manual, whichever is less. At least once every 3 years or if
discharge is present, a licensed contractor should inspect the temperature
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! This product contains a
and pressure relief valve and replace if corrosion is evident or the valve
chemical known by the State of California to cause cancer and to cause
birth defects or other reproductive harm. (California Installer/Contractor does not function. FAILURE TO INSPECT THIS VALVE AS DIRECTED
- California law requires that this notice be given to consumer/end user COULD RESULT IN UNSAFE TEMPERATURE OR PRESSURE BUILD-
of this product.) For more information: www.amtrol.com/prop65.html UP WHICH CAN RESULT IN PRODUCT FAILURE, SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH AND/OR SEVERE PROPERTY DAMAGE AND VOID THE
PRODUCT WARRANTY.
Spec Seq#: 69
PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY

IMPORTANT GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION -
ADDITIONAL SPECIFIC SAFETY ALERTS APPEAR IN THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS.
FAILURE TO PROPERLY SEAL THE VALVE CAP WILL Operation

RESULT IN LOSS OF PRECHARGE CAUSING
PRODUCT TO FAIL. 1. The THERM-X-TROL is installed in the supply line between
the backflow preventer and the water heater. Its sealed-in air
Installation pre-charge prevents water from entering it until the system
pressure exceeds the pre-charge pressure.
THIS PRODUCT MUST BE INSTALLED BY A
QUALIFIED PROFESSIONAL.
2. A
s the water temperature rises, expanded water enters
the THERM-X-TROL’s non-corrosive water reservoir. The
1. Visually inspect THERM-X-TROL for any damage. If damage pre-charged air chamber absorbs the pressure increase,
121708
exists return product for replacement. keeping system pressures below the relief valve setting.
2. Adjust pre-charge to equal incoming pressure. 3. A
s hot water is used, the pressure in the air chamber forces
water back into the system until the THERM-X-TROL is
If increasing the pre-charge pressure empty. At this point, the pressure in the air chamber once
above 55 psig, the following steps must again equals the supply pressure.
be followed: 4. W
ater temperature is not to exceed 200° F or fall below 35° F.
a. Tank must be connected to the system with isolation
valve open. NOTE: M
odels are listed (ST-5C through ST-210VC) under
b. System must be pressurized to 55-60 psi or slightly ASME Section VIII, Division I.
higher than the pre-charge setting of the tank.
c. Isolation valve then needs to be closed.
Warranty
ST-5C through ST-210VC Models: One (1) Year Limited Warranty
d. The pre-charge pressure of the tank can now be
increased to the recommended high pressure setting. Visit www.amtrol.com for complete warranty details.
e. Bring system up to pressure, and then open the Figure 1

isolation valve to the tank. Turbulator™ Installation (ST-5C-DD & ST-12C-DD only)
Failure to follow these instructions could result in damage Backflow Preventor, Check Valve
or Pressure Reducing Valve
to the bladder or diaphragm and void all warranties.
3. Replace and tighten plastic cap on air fitting. Cold Hot Water
Water
4. Therm-X-Trol ST5C-DD and ST12C-DD only: Insert Turbulator Supply
into connector.
Thermal
5. Install the THERM-X-TROL on the city supply line to the 3/4” Threaded Tee Expansion
T&P
Relief
Turbulator Tank
water heater at a point between the water heater and Tank Connector Valve
backflow preventer, check valve or pressure reducing valve Press Turbulator fully into
Water
Heater
(see Figure 1). Mount vertically only. connector prior to
installing tank.
6. O
nce the THERM-X-TROL is installed, check the city supply
line for any leakage. Make repairs if necessary. ST-20VC
7. B
efore the initial firing of the water heater, open any hot
water fixture and draw water until all air is removed from the
system. Turn the water heater temperature control to desired BFP, Check or PRV
ending temperature level, (see water heater instructions). CWS Hot Water
8. T
o relieve initial thermal expansion, slightly open a hot water
faucet. Continue until water heater aquastat temperature is
satisfied. Once heater is at its operating range, no further
bleeding of expanded water is required. THERM-X-TROL
Expansion Tank
T&P
Valve
9. T
he system water heater and THERM-X-TROL will now
be operational. The THERM-X-TROL will control pressure Water
increases caused by thermal expansion to a level well below Heater
the water heater relief valve setting.
Maintenance
1. A
professional plumber should check the complete heating
system, including the THERM-X-TROL, yearly and more
frequently as the system ages.
LOW-LEAD
1400 Division Road, West Warwick, RI 02893 USA

T: 800.426.8765 F: 800.293.1519
www.amtrol.com
© 2018 AMTROL Inc. Part #: 9017-091 (01/18)
Spec Seq#: 75
*****
GWH
*****
Spec Seq#: 76
Instruction Manual
COMMERCIAL GAS WATER HEATERS
MODELS
BTH-120(A)/150(A)/199(A)/250(A)
SERIES 300 & 301
500 Tennessee Waltz Parkway INSTALLATION - OPERATION - SERVICE
1285179
Ashland City, TN 37015 - MAINTENANCE - LIMITED WARRANTY
www.hotwater.com
WARNING: If the information in these

instructions is not followed exactly, a fire
or explosion may result causing property
damage, personal injury or death.
Do not store or use gasoline or other

flammable vapors and liquids in the
vicinity of this or any other appliance.
WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS:
• Do not try to light any appliance.

• Do not touch any electrical switch; do
not use any phone in your building.
• Immediately call your gas supplier
from a neighbor’s phone. Follow the
gas supplier’s instructions.
• If you cannot reach your gas supplier,
call the fire department.
Read and understand this instruction
Installation and service must be manual and the safety messages
performed by a qualified installer, herein before installing, operating or
service agency or the gas supplier. servicing this water heater.
Failure to follow these instructions and
safety messages could result in death
or serious injury.
Thank you for buying this energy efficient water heater.
We appreciate your confidence in our products. This manual must remain with the
water heater.
PLACE THESE INSTRUCTIONS ADJACENT TO HEATER AND NOTIFY OWNER TO KEEP FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
PRINTED 0217 100130050

Spec Seq#: 76
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFE INSTALLATION, USE AND SERVICE�� 3 Direct Vent Air Intake Moisture Protection........................................ 25
APPROVALS�� 3 Vertical Termination Installation�� 25
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION�� 4 Sidewall Termination Installation�� 27
Precautions�� 4 Polypropylene Installations�� 28
Grounding Instructions�� 4 AL29-4C ® Vent Installations�� 29
Hydrogen Gas Flammable�� 4 Common Venting.............................................................................. 29
INTRODUCTION�� 6 Concentric Termination Installation�� 30
Abbreviations Used�� 6 4 Inch Concentric Termination Installation�� 31
1285179
Qualifications�� 6 Low Profile Vent installation�� 34
iCOMM™ and BMS/EMS Compatibility�� 6 Venting Arrangements�� 35
Preparing For The Installation�� 6 Termination Clearances Sidewall Power Vent�� 37
FEATURES AND COMPONENTS�� 7 Termination Clearances Sidewall Direct Vent�� 38
Basic Operation�� 7 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION�� 39
Modulation�� 7 Condensate Drain Installation�� 39
Blower/Burner Assembly Detail�� 7 Supply Gas Line Installation�� 40
Top View�� 8 Gas Line Leak Testing�� 41
Side Views�� 9 Purging�� 41
INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS�� 10 Electrical Wiring�� 41
Rough In Dimensions�� 10 Enable / Disable Circuit (For Building Management Systems)�� 42
Locating The Water Heater��11 Water Line Connections�� 43
Extended Vent Terminations�� 12 T&P Valve Discharge Pipe�� 43
Optional Direct Vent Terminations�� 12 TEMPERATURE REGULATION�� 44
Hard Water�� 12 High Temperature Limit Control (ECO)�� 44
Circulation Pumps�� 12 Thermostat Control�� 44
Insulation Blankets�� 12 CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION�� 45
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS�� 13 Overview�� 45
Gas Supply Systems�� 13 Control System Navigation�� 45
Supply Gas Regulator�� 13 User Settings & Control System Menus�� 48
Power Supply�� 13 START UP�� 53
Mixing Valves�� 14 Prior to Start up�� 53
Dishwashing Machines�� 14 Initial Start Up�� 53
Closed Water Systems�� 14 Lighting the Water Heater�� 54
Thermal Expansion�� 14 Checking The Firing Rate�� 56
Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve�� 15 High Altitude Installations�� 56
Condensate Drain�� 16 TROUBLESHOOTING�� 57
Combustible Material Storage�� 16 Installation Checklist�� 57
Contaminated Air�� 16 Sequence Of Operation�� 57
Air Requirements�� 17 Sequence Of Operation Flow Chart�� 58
Unconfined Space�� 17 Operational Problems�� 59
Confined Space�� 17 Fault And Alert Conditions�� 60
Fresh Air Openings For Confined Spaces�� 18 MAINTENANCE�� 63
Outdoor Air Through Two Openings�� 18 General�� 63
Outdoor Air Through One Opening�� 18 Maintenance Schedule�� 63
Outdoor Air Through Two Horizontal Ducts�� 18 Draining And Flushing�� 63
Outdoor Air Through Two Vertical Ducts�� 19 Filling The Water Heater�� 64
Air From Other Indoor Spaces�� 19 Sediment Removal�� 64
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS - COMMONWEALTH OF Lime Scale Removal�� 64
MASSACHUSETTS�� 20 Powered Anode Rods�� 65
VENTING INSTALLATION�� 21 Drain Valve and Access Panels�� 65
General Venting Information�� 21 Vent System�� 65
General Venting Instructions�� 21 DIAGRAMS�� 66
Intake Air Connection�� 22 CCB - Central Control Board Layout�� 66
Venting Requirements�� 22 Wiring Diagram�� 67
Common Venting.............................................................................. 23 Circulation Pump Wiring Diagrams�� 68
Venting Installation Sequence�� 23 Water Piping Diagrams�� 69
Power Vent Installation�� 23 NOTES�� 76
Direct Vent Installation�� 24 WARRANTY�� 79
2
Spec Seq#: 76
SAFE INSTALLATION, USE AND SERVICE
The proper installation, use and servicing of this water heater is extremely important to your safety and the safety of others.
Many safety-related messages and instructions have been provided in this manual and on your own water heater to warn you and
others of a potential injury hazard. Read and obey all safety messages and instructions throughout this manual. It is very important
that the meaning of each safety message is understood by you and others who install, use, or service this water heater.
1285179
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to
potential personal injury hazards. Obey all safety
messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible
injury or death.
DANGER indicates an imminently

hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
DANGER will result in injury or death.
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, could result
WARNING in injury or death.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, could result in
CAUTION minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION used without the safety alert

symbol indicates a potentially hazardous
CAUTION situation which, if not avoided, could result in
property damage.
All safety messages will generally tell you about the type of hazard, what can happen if you do not follow the safety message, and
how to avoid the risk of injury.
APPROVALS
NOTE: ASME construction is optional on the water

heaters covered in this manual.
3
Spec Seq#: 76

PRECAUTIONS HYDROGEN GAS FLAMMABLE
DO NOT USE THIS WATER HEATER IF ANY PART HAS
BEEN EXPOSED TO FLOODING OR WATER DAMAGE.
Immediately call a qualified service agency to inspect the
water heater and to make a determination on what steps
should be taken next. Explosion Hazard
If the unit is exposed to the following, do not operate heater
until all corrective steps have been made by a qualified Flammable hydrogen gases
service agency. may be present.
1285179
1. External fire. Keep all ignition sources away
2. Damage. from faucet when turning on
3. Firing without water. hot water.
GROUNDING INSTRUCTIONS Hydrogen gas can be produced in a hot water system served
by this water heater that has not been used for a long period of
This water heater must be grounded in accordance with the
time (generally two weeks or more). Hydrogen gas is extremely
National Electrical Code and/or local codes. These must be
flammable. To reduce the risk of injury under these conditions, it is
followed in all cases. Failure to ground this water heater
recommended that a hot water faucet served by this water heater
properly may also cause erratic control system operation.
be opened for several minutes before using any electrical appliance
This water heater must be connected to a grounded metal, connected to the hot water system. If hydrogen is present there will
permanent wiring system; or an equipment grounding probably be an unusual sound such as air escaping through the pipe
conductor must be run with the circuit conductors and as the water begins to flow. THERE SHOULD BE NO SMOKING
connected to the equipment grounding terminal or lead on OR OPEN FLAME NEAR THE FAUCET AT THE TIME IT IS OPEN.
the water heater.
Verify the power to the water heater is turned off before performing any service procedures.
The Enable /Disable switch on front panel disables the 24 volt gas valve. Electrical supply
must be turned off at circuit breaker serving water heater.
Read and understand this instruction

manual and the safety messages Explosion Hazard
herein before installing, operating or
servicing this water heater. Overheated water can cause
Failure to follow these instructions and water tank explosion.
safety messages could result in death
or serious injury. Properly sized temperature and
pressure relief valve must be
This manual must remain with the installed in the opening provided.
water heater.
Water temperature over 125°F (52°C)

can cause severe burns instantly CAUTION
resulting in severe injury or death. Improper installation, use and service may result
Children, the elderly and the in property damage.
physically or mentally disabled are at
highest risk for scald injury. • Do not operate water heater if exposed to flooding or
water damage.
Feel water before bathing or • Inspect anode rods regularly, replace if damaged.
showering. • Install in location with drainage.
Temperature limiting devices such as • Fill tank with water before operation.
mixing valves must be installed • Properly sized thermal expansion tanks are required on all
when required by codes and to closed water systems.
ensure safe temperatures at fixtures. Refer to this manual for installation and service.
4
Spec Seq#: 76
Fire or Explosion Hazard Fire Hazard

Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and For continued protection against
liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance. risk of fire:
Avoid all ignition sources if you smell gas. Do not install water heater on
Do not expose water heater controls to excessive gas carpeted floor.
1285179
pressure. Do not operate water heater if
Use only the gas shown on the water heater rating label. exposed to flooding or water
Maintain required clearances to combustibles. damage.
Keep ignition sources away from faucets after extended
periods of non-use.
Read instruction manual before Fire and Explosion Hazard

installing, using or servicing Use joint compound or Teflon tape
water heater. compatible with propane gas.
Leak test gas connections before
placing water heater in operation.
Disconnect gas piping at main
gas shutoff valve before leak
testing heater.
Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas
Install sediment trap in
Do not obstruct water heater air intake
accordance with NFPA 54 or
with insulating blanket.
CAN/CSA B149.1.
Gas and carbon monoxide detectors
are available.
Install water heater in accordance with
the instruction manual.
Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or
Fire and Explosion Hazard
death. Always read and understand instruction manual. Do not use water heater with any gas
other than the gas shown on the rating
label.
CAUTION
Excessive gas pressure to gas valve can
cause serious injury or death.
Turn off gas lines during installation.
Property Damage Hazard
Contact a qualified installer or service
agency for installation and service.
• All water heaters eventually leak.
• Do not install without adequate drainage.
Jumping out control circuits or components can

result in property damage, personal injury or death.
Electrical Shock Hazard • Service should only be performed by a qualified service

technician using proper test equipment.
• Turn off power at the branch circuit
breaker serving the water heater • Altering the water heater controls and/or wiring in any way
could result in permanent damage to the controls or water
before performing any service.
heater and is not covered under the limited warranty.
• Label all wires prior to disconnecting
when performing service. Wiring errors
can cause improper and dangerous
operation.
Any bypass or alteration of the water
• Verify proper operation after servicing. heater controls and/or wiring will result
• Failure to follow these instructions can in voiding the appliance warranty.
result in personal injury or death.
5
Spec Seq#: 76
INTRODUCTION
Thank You for purchasing this water heater. Properly installed This manual contains instructions for the installation,
and maintained, it should give you years of trouble free service. operation, and maintenance of the water heater. It also
contains warnings throughout the manual that you must read
ABBREVIATIONS USED and be aware of. All warnings and all instructions are essential
to the proper operation of the water heater and your safety.
Abbreviations found in this Instruction Manual include :
Detailed installation diagrams are also found in this manual.
• ANSI - American National Standards Institute
These diagrams will serve to provide the installer with a
• ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers reference. It is essential that all venting, water piping, gas
• AHRI - Air Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute piping and wiring be installed as shown.
1285179
• NEC - National Electrical Code Particular attention should be given to the installation
• NFPA - National Fire Protection Association of thermometers at the locations indicated in the piping
• UL - Underwriters Laboratory diagrams as these are necessary for checking the operation
• CSA - Canadian Standards Association of the water heater.
The principal components of the water heater are identified
QUALIFICATIONS in Features And Components on page 7 in this manual.
Use this reference to locate and identify various components
QUALIFIED INSTALLER OR SERVICE AGENCY
on the water heater.
Installation and service of this water heater requires ability
See the Installation Checklist and Troubleshooting on page
equivalent to that of a Qualified Agency (as defined by ANSI
below) in the field involved. Installation skills such as plumbing, 57. By using this checklist the user may be able to make
air supply, venting, gas supply and electrical supply are required minor operational adjustments and avoid unnecessary
in addition to electrical testing skills when performing service. service calls. However, service and diagnostic procedures
should only be performed by a Qualified Service Agency.
ANSI Z223.1 2006 Sec. 3.3.83: “Qualified Agency” - “Any
individual, firm, corporation or company that either in person or NOTE: Costs to correct installation errors are not covered
through a representative is engaged in and is responsible for (a) under the limited warranty.
the installation, testing or replacement of gas piping or (b) the 2. Be sure to turn off power when working on or near the
connection, installation, testing, repair or servicing of appliances electrical system of the water heater. Never touch electrical
and equipment; that is experienced in such work; that is familiar components with wet hands or when standing in water.
with all precautions required; and that has complied with all the 3. The installation must conform to all instructions contained in
requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.” this manual and the local code authority having jurisdiction.
If you are not qualified (as defined by ANSI above) and licensed These shall be carefully followed in all cases. Authorities
or certified as required by the authority having jurisdiction having jurisdiction should be consulted before installation
to perform a given task do not attempt to perform any of the begins if there are any questions regarding compliance with
procedures described in this manual. If you do not understand local, state or national codes.
the instructions given in this manual do not attempt to perform In the absence of local codes, the installation must comply
any procedures outlined in this manual. with the current editions of the National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI
Z223.1/NFPA 54 and the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 or
ICOMM AND BMS/EMS COMPATIBLITY CAN/CSA-B149.1, the Natural Gas and Propane Installation
iCOMM™ Code and CSA C22.1, the Canadian Electrical Code. All
documents are available from the Canadian Standards
This water heater is compatible with the iCOMM™ remote Association, 8501 East Pleasant Valley Road, Cleveland, OH
monitoring system. The iCOMM™ system hardware is purchased 44131. NFPA documents are also available from the National
separately and allows users to monitor critical water heater Fire Protection Association, 1 Batterymarch Park, Quincy,
operations and diagnose issues by using the manufacture’s MA 02269.
water heater app (available for IOS and Android).
4. If after reading this manual you have any questions or do
The iCOMM™ system can automatically notify selected not understand any portion of the instructions, call the toll
personnel via email and or cellular phone text messages if free number on the back cover of this manual for technical
operational problems or user defined Alert conditions should assistance. In order to expedite your request, please have the
occur. The system is expandable to meet the needs of multiple full Model, Serial and Series number of the water heater you
heaters and groups of heaters.
are working with available for the technician. This information
ICC is located on the water heater’s rating label.
This water heater is connectable to BACnet or Modbus compliant 5. Carefully plan the placement of the water heater. Examine
Supervisory controls via the ICC BMS Gateway. This allows the location to ensure that it complies with the requirements
connection of the water heater to local Building Management in Locating The Water Heater on page 11 and the Rough
Systems using Serial RS-485 (MS/TP) or IP connections. In Dimensions on page 10.
To order or to find out more about iCOMM™ or ICC devices, 6. For installation in California this water heater must be braced
logon to the manufacturer’s website at http://www.hotwater.com/ or anchored to avoid falling or moving during an earthquake.
or call 888-928-3702 (888-WATER02) for more information. See instructions for correct installation procedures.
Instructions may be obtained from California Office of the
PREPARING FOR THE INSTALLATION State Architect, 1102 Q Street, Suite 5100, Sacramento, CA
1. Read the entire manual before attempting to install or operate 95811.
the water heater. Pay close attention to the General Safety 7. Massachusetts Code requires this water heater to be
Information on page 4 and 5. If you don’t follow the installed in accordance with Massachusetts 248-CMR 2.00:
safety rules, the water heater may not operate safely. It could State Plumbing Code and 248-CMR 5. See Commonwealth
cause property damage, injury and/or death. of Massachusetts on page 20.
6
Spec Seq#: 76
FEATURES AND COMPONENTS

BASIC OPERATION MODULATION
The water heaters covered in this manual have a helical coil The water heaters covered by this manual are capable of
shaped heat exchanger that is submerged in the storage tank. modulating their firing rate. The CCB monitors the water
The water heater’s Main Burner is a radial design burner, it temperature in the tank and regulates the firing rate to achieve
is mounted on the top and fires downward through the heat the target temperature setpoint. The firing rate is dictated by the
exchanger. This is a forced draft burner; hot burning gases are hot water draw, proximity to the tank temperature setpoint, and
forced through the heat exchanger under pressure and exit various other temperature limitations.
through the exhaust/vent connection located at the bottom of the
water heater. See Figure 1 and Figure 2. BLOWER/BURNER ASSEMBLY DETAIL
1285179
COMBUSTION INTAKE AIR
BLOWER (combustion air)
ASSEMBLY CONNECTION
3 INCH PVC
INTAKE AIR
(combustion air)
CONNECTION
3 INCH PVC
BURNER
FLANGE
BLOWER
BURNER SPARK IGNITER
ASSEMBLY
MAIN
FLAME
BURNER
SENSOR
MAIN (radial design)
BURNER
(radial design)
Figure 2
HEAT Spark Igniter
EXCHANGER The control system energizes the spark ignition transformer with
120 VAC during the ignition cycle. The spark ignition transformer
then sends a high-voltage current to the spark igniter which in
HELICAL turn ignites the main burner air/gas mixture.
COIL
Flame Sensor
The control system also monitors the flame sensor to confirm
a flame is present at the Main Burner. If a flame is not verified
VENT (exhaust) during the ignition trial period (3-5 seconds) the control system
OUTLET will immediately de-energize the 24 Volt Gas Valve. See the
Sequence Of Operation Flow Chart on page 58.
Figure 1
7
Spec Seq#: 76
TOP VIEW
5 6 8
2 9
11
17
4 2
1285179
3 7
12
10
13
14
15 16
1 FRONT
Figure 3
COMPONENTS (All Models) 8. Supply gas line connection. See the requirements for the
IMPORTANT. The Enable/Disable switch listed in this manual is Gas Supply Systems on page 13.
NOT an "on/off" switch and does not disconnect 120 volt power 9. Low Gas Pressure switch. Normally open contacts that close
to the CCB and other heater components. on a rise in pressure. This switch is used to insure supply
gas pressure is above minimum requirements. The control
1. Water Heater’s Enable/Disable Switch. When in the "Disabled"
system monitors this switch and will disable heating operation
position the switch removes electrical power from the gas
if its contacts are open during a heating cycle. See Gas
valve so that water heating is disabled. The display, CCB,
Pressure Requirements and Table 3 on page 11.
and other electrical components will still be energized and
the display will read "Water Heating Disabled". 10. Vent connection (exhaust / condensate elbow) - three inch
2. Powered anode rods. The water heaters covered in this aluminum.
manual are equipped with powered (non sacrificial) anode 11. Intake air connection - 3 inch PVC.
rods. The BTH 120 has one powered anode, all other models 12. Blocked Exhaust (vent) switch. Normally closed contacts
will have two. Protective current is fed by the control system that open on a rise in pressure. This switch is used to insure
to the titanium electrodes at the end of each anode rod. This the Exhaust (vent) piping connected to the water heater is not
current flows through the water to the conductive surfaces
restricted. The control system monitors this switch and will disable
inside the storage tank which diminishes the corrosive effect
heating operation if its contacts are open during a heating cycle.
of water when it comes in contact with steel.
3. Central Control Board (CCB) enclosure. This enclosure 13. Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve. See Temperature-
houses the control system’s main circuit board, power supply Pressure Relief Valve on page 15.
board, power transformer, and configuration key. The CCB 14. Upper Temperature Probe, 1 of 2 temperature probes. The
regulates water temperature and controls all water heater water heater’s control system monitors this probe to detect
functions, see Control System Operation on page 45. water temperature in the upper portion of the storage tank.
4. Combustion Blower Assembly includes, Gas Valve and The Upper Temperature Probe also houses the ECO (energy
Venturi gas feed system. cut out) switch. This is a non adjustable high temperature
limit switch. The ECO switch contacts are normally closed
5. 120 VAC junction box. Incoming power supply, ground
connections, and other field installed electrical connections and will open on a temperature rise. See High Temperature
are made here. See Power Supply on page 13 and Power Limit Control (ECO) on page 44.
Supply Connections on page 42. 15. Water outlet connection 1 1/2” NPT.
6. Water heater's 24 Volt Gas Valve. 16. UIM (user interface module). The UIM includes the display
7. Blocked Intake Air switch. Normally closed contacts that circuit board and the control system’s LCD Touch Display. Used
open on fall in pressure. This switch is used to insure intake to adjust various user settings and view operational information.
(combustion) air to the water heater is not restricted. The See Control System Operation on page 45.
control system monitors this switch and will disable heating 17. Spark Ignition Transformer. When energized, sends the
operation if its contacts are open during a heating cycle. electrical current to the spark igniter.
8
Spec Seq#: 76
3 5 4 13
4 2 14
6
5 3
7
16
1285179
8
10
15
15
1
11
12
LEFT SIDE RIGHT SIDE
Figure 4
SIDE VIEWS 9. Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve discharge pipe - see T&P

Valve Discharge Pipe Requirements: on page 15.
1. Cleanout access panel, covers water heater cleanout 10. Lower Temperature Probe, 1 of 2 temperature probes. The
opening and ASME plate where applicable. water heater’s control system monitors this probe to detect
2. CCB enclosure - see item 3 on page 8 for description. water temperature in the lower portion of the storage tank.
11. Water inlet - 1 1/2” NPT connection.
3. Intake air connection - 3 inch PVC.
12. Water heater drain valve.
4. Water heater 24 Volt Gas Valve.
13. Supply gas line connection. See Gas Supply Systems on
5. Combustion Blower. page 13.
6. Water outlet - 1 1/2” NPT connection. 14. Low Gas Pressure switch, see description on page 8.
7. UIM (user interface module). The UIM includes the display See Gas Pressure Requirements and Table 3 on page 11.
circuit board and the control system’s LCD Touch Display. 15. Vent Connection (Exhaust/Condensate Elbow) 3" Aluminum.
Used to adjust various user settings and view operational 16. Spark Ignition Transformer. When energized, sends the
information. See Control System Operation on page 45. electrical current to the spark igniter.
8. Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve. See Temperature-
Pressure Relief Valve on page 15.
9
Spec Seq#: 76
INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS
ROUGH IN DIMENSIONS
SUPPLY GAS
CONNECTION
INTAKE AIR
CONNECTION
3 INCH PVC
WATER
OUTLET
HEIGHT
T & P VALVE
FRONT BACK
1285179
B C A
3/4” NPT
RECIRCULATION H F I
LOWER RETURN
TEMPERATURE VENT
PROBE CONNECTION
3 INCH PVC
(exhaust elbow)
CLEANOUT
1 1/2” NPT
WATER 3/4” NPT
D INLET DRAIN
J
G
E
These designs comply with the current edition of the American National Standard for Gas Water Heaters, Volume III, ANSI Z21.10.3 / CSA 4.3
as an automatic circulating tank water heater, and automatic storage water heaters.
TOP VIEW
ALL MODELS 90°

GA
S
E
AK
INT
AIR
26°
1½" NPT WATER

OUTLET
FRONT
T
U
O
DRA E
EX
AN
VAL
HA
LE
VE
IN
V
US
C
AL
T
PV
18°
T&
42°
30°
45°
* Center line of water outlet on top of the water heaters is approximately 7 inches from the front edge of the water heater.
APPROX. APPROX.
DIMENSIONS SHIP SHIP
WEIGHT WEIGHT
MODEL A B C D E F G H I J STD ASME
INCHES (CM) INCHES (CM) INCHES (CM) INCHES (CM) INCHES (CM) INCHES (CM) INCHES (CM) INCHES (CM) INCHES (CM) INCHES (CM) LBS (KG) LBS (KG)
BTH 120 55-1/2 (141) 35 (88.9) 27-3/4 (70.5) 6-5/16 (16) 3 (7.62) 42-1/4 (107.32) 11-1/4 (28.6) 48-1/2 (123.2) 53-1/2 (135.9) 18-1/4 (46.36) 460 (208) 490 (220)
BTH 150 76-1/2 (194.9) 56-3/8 (143.2) 27-3/4 (70.5) 6-5/16 (16) 3 (7.62) 64 (162.6) 11-1/4 (28.6) 70 (177.8) 75-1/2 (191.8) 18-1/4 (46.36) 523 (237) 553 (251)
BTH 199 76-1/2 (194.9) 56-3/8 (143.2) 27-3/4 (70.5) 6-5/16 (16) 3 (7.62) 64 (162.6) 11-1/4 (28.6) 70 (177.8) 75-1/2 (191.8) 18-1/4 (46.36) 523 (237) 553 (251)
BTH 250 76-1/2 (194.9) 56-3/8 (143.2) 27-3/4 (70.5) 6-5/16 (16) 3 (7.62) 64 (162.6) 11-1/4 (28.6) 70 (177.8) 75-1/2 (191.8) 18-1/4 (46.36) 523 (237) 553 (251)
Figure 5
10
Spec Seq#: 76
GAS LINE CONNECTION SIZE STORAGE CAPACITIES

TABLE 1 TABLE 2
† MODEL SERIES NATURAL GAS PROPANE GAS MODEL U. S. GALLONS LITERS
BTH 120 300/301 3/4 "NPT 3/4 "NPT BTH 120 60 227
BTH 150 300/301 3/4 "NPT 3/4 "NPT BTH 150 100 379
BTH 199 300/301 3/4 "NPT 3/4 "NPT BTH 199 100 379
BTH 250 300/301 3/4 "NPT 3/4 "NPT BTH 250 100 379
† Depending on the installed equivalent length, and/or the number of appliances connected, the
supply gas line size may have to be increased beyond the minimum required sizes - see Gas
Line Sizing on page 40.
GAS PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS

TABLE 3
1285179
*MANIFOLD PRESSURE MINIMUM SUPPLY PRESSURE MAXIMUM SUPPLY PRESSURE
MODEL
NATURAL GAS PROPANE GAS NATURAL GAS PROPANE GAS NATURAL GAS PROPANE GAS
BTH 120 0" W.C. (0 kPa) 0" W.C. (0 kPa) 3.5” W. C. (1.10 kPa) 8.5” W. C. (2.12 kPa) 14” W. C. (3.49 kPa) 14” W. C. (3.49 kPa)
BTH 150 0" W.C. (0 kPa) 0" W.C. (0 kPa) 3.5” W. C. (1.10 kPa) 8.5” W. C. (2.12 kPa) 14” W. C. (3.49 kPa) 14” W. C. (3.49 kPa)
BTH 199 0” W. C. (0 kPa) 0” W. C. (0 kPa) 3.5” W. C. (1.10 kPa) 8.5” W. C. (2.12 kPa) 14” W. C. (3.49 kPa 14” W. C. (3.49 kPa)
BTH 250 0” W. C. (0 kPa) 0” W. C. (0 kPa) 3.5” W. C. (1.10 kPa) 8.5” W. C. (2.12 kPa) 14” W. C. (3.49 kPa) 14” W. C. (3.49 kPa)
* The manifold pressure is the factory setting and is not adjustable. A negative pressure will be seen with just the blower running without the Gas Control Valve open.
RECOVERY CAPACITIES
TABLE 4
U. S. GALLONS/HR & LITERS/HR AT TEMPERATURE RISE INDICATED
Type of Input Thermal °F 30°F 40°F 50°F 60°F 70°F 80°F 90°F 100°F 110°F 120°F 130°F 140°F
Model
Gas Btu/hr kW Efficiency% °C 17°C 22°C 28°C 33°C 39°C 44°C 50°C 56°C 61°C 67°C 72°C 78°C
Natural GPH 461 345 276 230 197 173 154 138 126 115 106 99
BTH 120 120,000 35 95
Propane LPH 1743 1308 1046 872 747 654 581 523 475 436 402 374
Natural GPH 594 445 356 297 255 223 198 178 162 148 137 127
BTH 150 150,000 44 98
Propane LPH 2248 1686 1349 1124 963 843 749 674 613 562 519 482
Natural GPH 783 588 470 392 336 294 261 235 214 196 181 168
BTH 199 199,900 58 97
Propane LPH 2965 2224 1779 1483 1271 1112 988 890 809 741 684 635
Natural GPH 970 727 582 485 416 364 323 291 264 242 224 208
BTH 250 250,000 73 96
Propane LPH 3670 2753 2202 1835 1573 1376 1223 1101 1001 918 847 786
LOCATING THE WATER HEATER 8. Locate the water heater where an adequate supply of fresh
air for combustion and ventilation can be obtained. See Air
Carefully choose a location for the new water heater. The Requirements on page 17.
placement is a very important consideration for the safety of the 9. Locate the water heater where the vent and intake air piping,
occupants in the building and for the most economical use of the when installed, will remain within the maximum equivalent
water heater. lengths allowed. See Venting Requirements on page 22.
CAUTION 10. Do not locate the water heater where noise (such as
the Combustion Blower) during normal operation will be
objectionable in adjacent areas.
Property Damage Hazard
11. Do not locate the water heater where the subsequent
installation of the vent (exhaust) or intake air terminations
• All water heaters eventually leak. would be objectionable due to noise at the termination(s).
This includes locations close to or across from windows and
• Do not install without adequate drainage. doors. See Venting Installation on page 21.
Whether replacing an existing water heater or installing the water

heater in a new location observe the following critical points: Fire or Explosion Hazard
1. The water heater must be located indoors.
Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and
2. The water heater must not be located in an area where it will liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance.
be subject to freezing temperatures.
Avoid all ignition sources if you smell gas.
3. Locate the water heater so it is protected and not subject to
Do not expose water heater controls to excessive gas
physical damage by a moving vehicle.
pressure.
4. Locate the water heater on a level surface.
Use only the gas shown on the water heater rating label.
5. Locate the water heater near a floor drain. The water heater should Maintain required clearances to combustibles.
be located in an area where leakage of the tank or connections
Keep ignition sources away from faucets after extended
will not result in damage to the area adjacent to the water heater
periods of non-use.
or to lower floors of the structure. When such locations cannot be
avoided, it is recommended that a metal drain pan, adequately
drained, be installed under the water heater.
Read instruction manual before
6. Locate the water heater close to the point of major hot water usage. installing, using or servicing
7. Locate the water heater close to a 120 VAC power supply. water heater.
See Power Supply on page 13 for requirements.
11
Spec Seq#: 76
There is a risk in using fuel burning appliances such as gas Contact your local distributor or call the parts department phone
water heaters in rooms, garages or other areas where gasoline, number listed on the back cover of this manual to order 4 inch
other flammable liquids or engine driven equipment or vehicles termination(s).
are stored, operated or repaired. Flammable vapors are heavy
and travel along the floor and may be ignited by the water
OPTIONAL DIRECT VENT TERMINATIONS
heater’s igniter or Main Burner flames causing fire or explosion. The water heaters covered in this manual can be installed in a
Flammable items, pressurized containers or any other potential Direct Vent configuration using optional concentric or Low Profile
fire hazardous articles must never be placed on or adjacent to terminations. See Concentric Termination Installation on page
the water heater. 30 and Low Profile Vent installation on page 34.
CLEARANCE TO COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS Concentric and low profile terminations must be ordered separately.
Contact your local distributor or call the parts department phone
The water heaters covered in this manual are approved for number listed on the back cover of this manual to order.
1285179
installation on combustible flooring. The clearance to combustible
and non combustible construction materials is 0 inches on the HARD WATER
back and sides of the water heater. These water heaters are also Where hard water conditions exist, water softening or the
approved for installation in an alcove. threshold type of water treatment is recommended. This will
When the water heater is installed directly on carpeting, the water protect the dishwashers, coffee urns, water heaters, water
heater shall be installed on a metal or wood panel extending piping and other equipment. See Maintenance on page 63 for
beyond the full width and depth of the water heater by at least sediment and lime scale removal procedures.
3 in (76.2 mm) in any direction or, if the water heater is installed
CIRCULATION PUMPS
in an alcove or closet, the entire floor shall be covered by the
panel. The panel must be strong enough to carry the weight of A circulating pump is used when a system requires a circulating
the heater when full of water. loop or there is a storage tank used in conjunction with the water
heater. The tank is provided with a 3/4" NPT recirculation loop
NOTE: Adequate clearance for servicing should be maintained
return connection. See the Water Piping Diagrams beginning on
on all installations. See Service Clearance below.
page 69 for installation location of circulating pumps.
See Circulation Pump Wiring Diagrams on page 68 for
ALCOVE CLEARANCES TO COMBUSTIBLE
AND NON COMBUSTIBLE electrical hookup information. Install in accordance with the
CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS current edition of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 or the
TOP COVER Canadian Electrical Code, CSA C22.1.
0 Stainless steel circulating pumps are recommended for use with
commercial water heaters.
WATER 0
HEATER
Refer to the circulating pump manufacturer’s instructions for its
FRONT 0
operation, lubrication and maintenance instructions.
FRONT
FRONT VIEW TOP VIEW INSULATION BLANKETS
Figure 6
SERVICE CLEARANCE
A service clearance of 24 inches (61 cm) should be maintained
from serviceable parts such as the T&P valve, control system Do not obstruct water heater air intake
components, gas valve, clean out opening, drain valve, the vent with insulating blanket.
connection (exhaust/condensate elbow). Leave as much room as Gas and carbon monoxide detectors
possible above the water heater and near the exhaust elbow for are available.
this reason. See Figure 8 on page 16. Install water heater in accordance with
INTAKE AIR AND VENT PIPE CLEARANCES the instruction manual.
The minimum clearance from combustible materials for the vent

(exhaust) and intake air piping shall be 0 inches. Vent or intake death. Always read and understand instruction manual.
air piping passing through a combustible wall or ceiling must be Insulation blankets are available to the general public for
a continuous run (no joints). external use on gas water heaters but are not necessary
EXTENDED VENT TERMINATIONS with these products. The purpose of an insulation blanket is
to reduce the standby heat loss encountered with storage
The water heaters covered by this manual can be installed using tank heaters. The water heaters covered by this manual meet
3 inch pipe for the intake air and/or vent piping up to a maximum or exceed the Energy Policy Act standards with respect to
of 50 equivalent feet (15.2 m). The intake air and/or vent piping insulation and standby heat loss requirements, making an
can be extended up to 120 equivalent feet (36.5 m) by installing insulation blanket unnecessary.
4 inch pipe. See the Venting Requirements on page 22. Should you choose to apply an insulation blanket to this
The water heater ships from the factory with two (2) 3 inch heater, you should follow these instructions. See the Features
terminations that are 45° PVC elbows with a debris screen and Components section of this manual for identification
installed. When 4 inch intake air or vent pipe is installed, factory of components mentioned below. Failure to follow these
supplied 4 inch terminations must be used. instructions can restrict the air flow required for proper
12
Spec Seq#: 76
combustion, potentially resulting in fire, asphyxiation, serious • DO NOT cover the instruction manual. Keep it on the side of
personal injury or death. the water heater or nearby for future reference.
• DO NOT apply insulation to the top of the water heater, as • DO obtain new warning and instruction labels from the
this will interfere with safe operation of the blower assembly. manufacturer for placement on the blanket directly over the
• DO NOT cover the control system LCD on top of the water existing labels.
heater. • DO inspect the insulation blanket frequently to make certain it
• DO NOT cover the Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve. does not sag, thereby obstructing combustion air flow.
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
1285179
GAS SUPPLY SYSTEMS 2. Supply gas regulators shall have inlet and outlet connections
not less than the minimum supply gas line size for the water
Low pressure building gas supply systems are defined as those heater they supply. See Table 11, page 40.
systems that cannot under any circumstances exceed 14” W.C.
(1/2 PSI Gauge). These systems do not require pressure regulation. 3. Positive lock-up gas pressure regulator(s) should be installed
no closer than 3 feet (1 meter) and no farther than 8 feet (2.4
Measurements should be taken to insure that gas pressures are
meters) from the water heater’s inlet gas connection.
stable and fall within the requirements stated on the water heater
rating plate. Readings should be taken with all gas burning equipment 4. After installing the positive lock-up gas pressure regulator(s)
off (static pressure) and with all gas burning equipment running an initial nominal supply pressure setting of 7.0” W.C.
at maximum rate (dynamic pressure). The gas supply pressure while the water heater is operating is recommended and
will generally provide good water heater operation. Some
must be stable within 1.5” W.C. from static to dynamic pressure to
additional adjustments may be required later to maintain a
provide good performance. Pressure drops that exceed 1.5” W.C. steady gas supply pressure.
may cause rough starting, noisy combustion or nuisance outages.
Increases or spikes in static pressure during off cycles may cause 5. When installing multiple water heaters in the same gas
supply system it is recommended that individual positive
failure to ignite or in severe cases damage to appliance gas valves.
lock-up gas pressure regulators be installed at each unit
If your low pressure system does NOT meet these requirements, from the supply gas connection on the water heater.
the installer is responsible for the corrections.
High Pressure building supply systems use pressures that exceed POWER SUPPLY
14” W.C. (1/2 PSI Gauge). These systems must use field supplied The water heaters covered in this manual require a 120 VAC,
regulators to lower the gas pressure to less than 14” W.C. (1/2 PSI 1Ø (single phase), 60Hz, 15 amp power supply and must also
Gauge). Water heaters require gas regulators that are properly be electrically grounded in accordance with local codes or, in
sized for the water heater input and deliver the rating plate specified the absence of local codes, with the National Electrical Code,
pressures. Gas supply systems where pressure exceeds 5 PSI ANSI/NFPA 70 or the Canadian Electrical Code, CSA C22.1.
often require multiple regulators to achieve desired pressures.
Systems in excess of 5 PSI building pressure should be designed DEDICATED POWER WIRING AND BREAKERS
by gas delivery professionals for best performance. Water heaters Dedicated power supply wires, ground wiring and dedicated
connected to gas supply systems that exceed 14” W.C. (1/2 PSI circuit breakers often prevent electrical line noise and are
Gauge) at any time must be equipped with a gas supply regulator. required when installing the water heater.
All models require a minimum gas supply pressure of 3.5" W.C. for NOTE: This water heater should not be connected to an
natural gas and 8.5" W.C. for propane gas. The minimum supply electrical supply with a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI)
pressure is measured while gas is flowing (dynamic pressure). The or Arc Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) with Integral GFCI
supply pressure should never fall below 3.5" W.C. for natural gas and protection as defined in NFPA 70, CSA C22.1 and UL 943.
8.5" W.C. for propane gas. The supply pressure should be measured
with all gas fired appliances connected to the common main firing POWER FLUCTUATIONS AND ELECTRICAL NOISE
at full capacity. If the supply pressure drops more than 1.5” W.C. as The water heater’s control system requires a source of
gas begins to flow to the water heater then the supply gas system stable clean electricity for proper operation. Connecting the
including the gas line and/or the gas regulator may be restricted water heater to a branch circuit that is subject to fluctuations
or undersized. See Supply Gas Regulator section and Gas Piping in voltage level or electrical line noise such as EMI (electro
section of this manual. The gas valve on all models has a maximum magnetic interference) or RFI (radio frequency interference)
gas supply pressure limit of 14” W.C. The maximum supply pressure may cause erratic control system operation and malfunction.
is measured while gas is not flowing (static pressure).
A high quality power supply filter/suppressor must be installed
SUPPLY GAS REGULATOR if the above conditions exist. Call the technical support phone
number listed on the back cover of this manual or contact a
The maximum allowable gas supply pressure for this water local power filter/suppressor supplier for more information.
heater is 14.0 inches W.C. (3.49 kPa) for natural and propane
gas. Install a positive lock-up gas pressure regulator in the gas NOTE: Malfunctions caused by the power supply and costs
supply line if inlet gas pressure can exceed these pressures at to install power supply filters are not covered under the
any time. limited warranty.
If a positive lock-up regulator is required follow these instructions:
1. Positive lock-up gas pressure regulators must be rated
at or above the input Btu/hr rating of the water heater
they supply.
13
Spec Seq#: 76
MIXING VALVES
HOT WATER
Water temperature over 125°F (52°C) OUTLET
can cause severe burns instantly
resulting in severe injury or death. 12” TO 15”
(30-38 cm)
Children, the elderly and the
physically or mentally disabled are at TEMPERED WATER
highest risk for scald injury. OUTLET
Feel water before bathing or

showering. CHECK
COLD
WATER VALVE
Temperature limiting devices such as
1285179
mixing valves must be installed INLET
MIXING
when required by codes and to CHECK VALVE
ensure safe temperatures at fixtures. VALVE
TO TANK
Water heated to a temperature which will satisfy clothes washing, INLET
dish washing, and other sanitizing needs can scald and cause
permanent injury upon contact. Short repeated heating cycles
caused by small hot water uses can cause temperatures at the Figure 7
point of use to exceed the water heater’s temperature setting by
up to 20°F (11°C). The National Sanitation Foundation also recommends circulation
of 180°F (82°C) water. The circulation should be just enough
Some people are more likely to be permanently injured by
to provide 180°F (82°C) water at the point of take-off to the
hot water than others. These include the elderly, children, the
dishwashing machine.
infirm and the physically/mentally disabled. Table 5 shows the
approximate time-to-burn relationship for normal adult skin. Adjust flow by throttling a full port ball valve installed in the
If anyone using hot water provided by the water heater being circulating line on the outlet side of the pump. Never throttle flow
installed fits into one of these groups or if there is a local code on the suction side of a pump. See the Water Piping Diagrams
or state law requiring a certain water temperature at the point of beginning on page 69.
use, then special precautions must be taken. NOTE: To comply with NSF Standard 5 installation requirements
In addition to using the lowest possible temperature setting that the bottom of the water heater must be sealed to the floor with a
satisfies the demand of the application a Mixing Valve should be silicone based sealant or elevated 6 inches above the floor.
installed at the water heater (see Figure 7) or at the hot water
taps to further reduce system water temperature. CLOSED WATER SYSTEMS
Mixing valves are available at plumbing supply stores. Consult Water supply systems may, because of code requirements
a Qualified Installer or Service Agency. Follow mixing valve or such conditions as high line pressure, among others, have
manufacturer’s instructions for installation of the valves. installed devices such as pressure reducing valves, check
TABLE 5 valves, and back flow preventers. Devices such as these cause
the water system to be a closed system.
Water Temperature Time for 1st Degree Burn
2nd & 3rd Degree
(Most Severe Burns)
THERMAL EXPANSION
110 (43) (normal shower temp.)
116 (47) (pain threshold) As water is heated, it expands (thermal expansion). In a closed
116 (47) 35 minutes 45 minutes system the volume of water will grow when it is heated. As the
122 (50) 1 minute 5 minutes volume of water grows there will be a corresponding increase
in water pressure due to thermal expansion. Thermal expansion
149 (65) 1 second 2 seconds can cause premature tank failure (leakage). This type of failure
154 (68) instantaneous 1 second is not covered under the limited warranty. Thermal expansion
(U.S. Government Memorandum, C.P.S.C., Peter L. Armstrong, Sept. 15, 1978) can also cause intermittent Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve
operation: water discharged from the valve due to excessive
DISHWASHING MACHINES pressure build up. This condition is not covered under the limited
All dishwashing machines meeting the National Sanitation warranty. The Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve is not intended
Foundation requirements are designed to operate with water flow for the constant relief of thermal expansion.
pressures between 15 and 25 pounds per square inch (103 kPa A properly sized thermal expansion tank must be installed on
and 173 kPa). Flow pressures above 25 pounds per square inch all closed systems to control the harmful effects of thermal
(173 kPa), or below 15 pounds per square inch (103 kPa), will expansion. Contact a local plumbing service agency to have a
result in improperly sanitized dishes. Where pressures are high, thermal expansion tank installed.
a water pressure reducing or flow regulating control valve should
be used in the 180°F (82°C) line to the dishwashing machine and See Water Line Connections on page 43 and the Water Piping
should be adjusted to deliver water pressure between these limits. Diagrams beginning on page 69.
14
Spec Seq#: 76
TEMPERATURE-PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE water in adequate quantities should circumstances demand. If

the discharge pipe is not connected to a drain or other suitable
means, the water flow may cause property damage.
Explosion Hazard CAUTION

Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve
Water Damage Hazard
must comply with ANSI Z21.22-
CSA 4.4 and ASME code. • Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve discharge
pipe must terminate at adequate drain.
Properly sized temperature-
1285179
installed in opening provided. T&P Valve Discharge Pipe Requirements:
• Shall not be smaller in size than the outlet pipe size of the
Can result in overheating and
valve, or have any reducing couplings or other restrictions.
excessive tank pressure.
• Shall not be plugged or blocked.
Can cause serious injury or death. • Shall not be exposed to freezing temperatures.
• Shall be of material listed for hot water distribution.
This water heater is provided with a properly rated/sized and • Shall be installed so as to allow complete drainage of both the
certified combination Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve (T&P Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve and the discharge pipe.
valve) by the manufacturer. The valve is certified by a nationally • Must terminate a maximum of six inches above a floor drain
recognized testing laboratory that maintains periodic inspection or external to the building. In cold climates, it is recommended
of production of listed equipment of materials as meeting the that the discharge pipe be terminated at an adequate drain
requirements for Relief Valves for Hot Water Supply Systems, inside the building.
ANSI Z21.22 • CSA 4.4, and the code requirements of ASME. • Shall not have any valve or other obstruction between the
If replaced, the new T&P valve must meet the requirements relief valve and the drain.
of local codes, but not less than a combination Temperature-
Pressure Relief Valve rated/sized and certified as indicated in
the above paragraph. The new valve must be marked with a Burn hazard.
maximum set pressure not to exceed the marked hydrostatic
working pressure of the water heater (150 psi = 1,035 kPa) and
a discharge capacity not less than the water heater Btu/hr or kW Hot water discharge.
input rate as shown on the water heater’s model rating label.
NOTE: In addition to the factory installed Temperature-Pressure Keep clear of Temperature-
Relief Valve on the water heater, each remote storage tank that Pressure Relief Valve
may be installed and piped to a water heating appliance must also discharge outlet.
have its own properly sized, rated and approved Temperature-
Pressure Relief Valve installed. Call the toll free technical
support phone number listed on the back cover of this manual The Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve must be manually
for technical assistance in sizing a Temperature-Pressure Relief operated at least twice a year. Caution should be taken to
Valve for remote storage tanks. ensure that (1) no one is in front of or around the outlet of the
For safe operation of the water heater, the Temperature-Pressure Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve discharge line, and (2) the
Relief Valve must not be removed from its designated opening water manually discharged will not cause any bodily injury or
nor plugged. The Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve must be property damage because the water may be extremely hot. If
installed directly into the fitting of the water heater designed for the after manually operating the valve, it fails to completely reset
relief valve. Install discharge piping so that any discharge will exit and continues to release water, immediately close the cold water
the pipe within 6 inches (15.2 cm) above an adequate floor drain, inlet to the water heater, follow the draining instructions in this
or external to the building. In cold climates it is recommended manual, and replace the Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve with
that it be terminated at an adequate drain inside the building. Be a properly rated/sized new one.
certain that no contact is made with any live electrical part. The NOTE: The purpose of a Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve is
discharge opening must not be blocked or reduced in size under to prevent excessive temperatures and pressures in the storage
any circumstances. Excessive length, over 30 feet (9.14 m), or tank. The T&P valve is not intended for the constant relief of
use of more than four elbows can cause restriction and reduce thermal expansion. A properly sized thermal expansion tank must
the discharge capacity of the valve. be installed on all closed systems to control thermal expansion,
No valve or other obstruction is to be placed between the see Closed Water Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14.
Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve and the tank. Do not connect If you do not understand these instructions or have any
discharge piping directly to the drain unless a 6” (15.2 cm) questions regarding the Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve call
air gap is provided. To prevent bodily injury, hazard to life, or the toll free number listed on the back cover of this manual for
property damage, the relief valve must be allowed to discharge technical assistance.
15
Spec Seq#: 76
CONDENSATE DRAIN COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL STORAGE

The water heaters covered in this manual are condensing
appliances and require a building drain to be located in close
proximity to allow the condensate to drain safely.
Condensate drains from the water heater at the exhaust elbow
Fire or Explosion Hazard
located at the bottom. The field installed condensate drain line Do not store or use gasoline or other flammable vapors and
must not be elevated above the condensate drain connection liquids in the vicinity of this or any other appliance.
on the built-in condensate trap, see Figure 8. If the condensate
Avoid all ignition sources if you smell gas.
does not drain properly it will build up in the exhaust (vent) elbow.
This will restrict the flow of flue gases and cause the Blocked Do not expose water heater controls to excessive gas
pressure.
Exhaust pressure switch to open its contacts. The control system
1285179
monitors all pressure switches, if the Blocked Exhaust Switch Use only the gas shown on the water heater rating label.
contacts are open the control system will lock out and disable Maintain required clearances to combustibles.
heating operation. The “Blocked Exhaust” Fault message will Keep ignition sources away from faucets after extended
be displayed on the control system’s LCD, see Fault And Alert periods of non-use.
Conditions beginning on page 60.
The Condensate Cleanout Cap must be on and tight when unit
is in operation. Read instruction manual before
installing, using or servicing
The exhaust elbow has a built in condensate trap. Do not water heater.
install an additional trap in the condensate drain piping, see
Figure 8.
Keep water heater area clear and free of combustible materials,
NOTE: If the “Blocked Exhaust “ Fault message is ever displayed gasoline and other flammable vapors and liquids.
on the control system LCD, check the condensate drain first and CONTAMINATED AIR
ensure it is not blocked. Periodically, inspect and clean the built-
in condensate trap of any debris.
THIS SIDE VIEW

EXHAUST (VENT)
ELBOW
OF EXHAUST Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas
ELBOW AND
ARROW INDICATE Install water heater in accordance with
CONDENSATE THE LOCATION OF
DRAIN LINE THE PRESSURE the Instruction Manual and NFPA 54 or
CONNECTION PORT CAN/CSA-B149.1.
DRAIN LINE TO TERMINATE NO To avoid injury, combustion and ventilation
MORE THAN 6 INCHES (15.2cm)
ABOVE DRAIN air must be taken from outdoors.
Do not place chemical vapor emitting
products near water heater.

death. Always read and understand instruction manual.
CONDENSATE BUILDING
CLEANOUT CAP CONDENSATE DRAIN DRAIN
LINE - FIELD INSTALLED Corrosion of the flue ways and vent system may occur if air for
combustion contains certain chemical vapors. Such corrosion
may result in failure and risk of asphyxiation.
Figure 8 Combustion air that is contaminated can greatly diminish the
life span of the water heater and water heater components such
CONDENSATE DRAIN WATER TRAP as igniters and burners. Propellants of aerosol sprays, beauty
DO NOT remove the factory installed exhaust/condensate elbow shop supplies, water softener chemicals and chemicals used
for any reason, see Figure 8. The water heater’s vent pipe is in dry cleaning processes that are present in the combustion,
under a slight positive pressure while unit is in operation. The ventilation or ambient air can cause such damage.
water trap inside of the exhaust/condensate elbow prevents flue Do not store products of this sort near the water heater. Air which
gases from escaping into the installed space. The exhaust elbow is brought in contact with the water heater should not contain any
has a built in condensate trap. Do not install an additional trap in of these chemicals. If necessary, uncontaminated air should be
the condensate drain piping, see Figure 8 and Condensate Drain obtained from remote or outdoor sources. The limited warranty is
Installation on page 39. voided when failure of water heater is due to a corrosive atmosphere.
(See limited warranty for complete terms and conditions).
CONDENSATE PH LEVEL
The condensate drains from the water heater’s covered in If the water heater will be used in beauty shops, barber shops,
this manual have PH levels between 4.3 and 5.0. Install a cleaning establishments, or self-service laundries with dry
commercially available neutralizing kit if required by local codes. cleaning equipment, it is imperative that the water heater(s) be
installed in a Direct Vent configuration so that all air for combustion
NOTE: Lower PH levels are acidic. Do not connect a metal drain is derived directly from the outdoor atmosphere through a sealed
line, such as copper, to the water heater for this reason. See intake air pipe. See Venting Installation on page 21.
Condensate Drain Installation on page 39.
16
Spec Seq#: 76
AIR REQUIREMENTS UNUSUALLY TIGHT CONSTRUCTION

In unconfined spaces in buildings, infiltration may be adequate
to provide air for combustion, ventilation and dilution of flue
gases. However, in buildings of unusually tight construction (for
example, weather stripping, heavily insulated, caulked, vapor
barrier, etc.) additional air must be provided using the methods
Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas described in the Confined Space section that follows.
Install water heater in accordance with CONFINED SPACE
the Instruction Manual and NFPA 54 or
CAN/CSA-B149.1. A Confined Space is one whose volume IS LESS THAN 50 cubic
To avoid injury, combustion and ventilation feet per 1,000 Btu/hr (4.8 cm per kW) of the total input rating of
air must be taken from outdoors. all appliances installed in the space.
1285179
Do not place chemical vapor emitting Openings must be installed to provide fresh air for combustion,
products near water heater. ventilation and dilution in confined spaces. The required size for
the openings is dependent on the method used to provide fresh
air to the confined space AND the total Btu/hr input rating of all
death. Always read and understand instruction manual.
appliances installed in the space.
For safe operation an adequate supply of fresh uncontaminated DIRECT VENT APPLIANCES
air for combustion and ventilation must be provided. Appliances installed in a Direct Vent configuration that derive all
air for combustion from the outdoor atmosphere through sealed
An insufficient supply of air can cause recirculation of
intake air piping are not factored in the total appliance input Btu/
combustion products resulting in contamination that may be
hr calculations used to determine the size of openings providing
hazardous to life. Such a condition often will result in a yellow,
fresh air into confined spaces.
luminous burner flame, causing sooting of the combustion
chamber, burners and flue tubes and creates a risk of EXHAUST FANS
asphyxiation. Where exhaust fans are installed, additional air shall be provided
to replace the exhausted air. When an exhaust fan is installed
Do not install the water heater in a confined space unless an
in the same space with a water heater, sufficient openings to
adequate supply of air for combustion and ventilation is brought
provide fresh air must be provided that accommodate the
in to that space using the methods described in the Confined
requirements for all appliances in the room and the exhaust fan.
Space section that follows.
Undersized openings will cause air to be drawn into the room
Never obstruct the flow of ventilation air. If you have any doubts through the water heater’s vent system causing poor combustion.
or questions at all, call your gas supplier. Failure to provide the Sooting, serious damage to the water heater and the risk of fire
proper amount of combustion air can result in a fire or explosion or explosion may result. It can also create a risk of asphyxiation.
and cause property damage, serious bodily injury or death.
LOUVERS AND GRILLES
UNCONFINED SPACE The free areas of the fresh air openings in the instructions that
follow do not take in to account the presence of louvers, grilles or
An Unconfined Space is one whose volume IS NOT LESS THAN screens in the openings.
50 cubic feet per 1,000 Btu/hr (4.8 cubic meters per kW) of the
The required size of openings for combustion, ventilation and
total input rating of all appliances installed in the space. Rooms
dilution air shall be based on the “net free area” of each opening.
communicating directly with the space, in which the appliances
Where the free area through a design of louver or grille or screen
are installed, through openings not furnished with doors, are
is known, it shall be used in calculating the size of opening
considered a part of the unconfined space.
required to provide the free area specified. Where the louver and
Makeup air requirements for the operation of exhaust fans, grille design and free area are not known, it shall be assumed
kitchen ventilation systems, clothes dryers and fireplaces shall that wood louvers will have 25% free area and metal louvers and
also be considered in determining the adequacy of a space to grilles will have 75% free area. Non motorized louvers and grilles
provide combustion, ventilation and dilution air. shall be fixed in the open position.
17
Spec Seq#: 76
FRESH AIR OPENINGS FOR CONFINED SPACES Alternatively a single permanent opening, commencing within 12
inches (300 mm) of the top of the enclosure, shall be provided.
The following instructions shall be used to calculate the size, See Figure 10. The water heater shall have clearances of at
number and placement of openings providing fresh air for least 1 inch (25 mm) from the sides and back and 6 inches (l50
combustion, ventilation and dilution in confined spaces. The mm) from the front of the water heater. The opening shall directly
illustrations shown in this section of the manual are a reference communicate with the outdoors or shall communicate through a
for the openings that provide fresh air into confined spaces vertical or horizontal duct to the outdoors or spaces that freely
only. DO NOT refer to these illustrations for the purpose of vent communicate with the outdoors and shall have a minimum free
installation. See Venting Installation on page 21 for complete area of the following:
venting installation instructions.
1. 1 square inch per 3000 Btu/hr (733 mm2 per kW) of the total
OUTDOOR AIR THROUGH TWO OPENINGS input rating of all appliances located in the enclosure, and
1285179
2. Not less than the sum of the areas of all vent connectors in
the space.
OUTDOOR AIR THROUGH TWO HORIZONTAL DUCTS
Figure 9
The confined space shall be provided with two permanent

openings, one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the top
and one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the bottom of Figure 11
the enclosure. The openings shall communicate directly with the
outdoors. See Figure 9. The confined space shall be provided with two permanent
Each opening shall have a minimum free area of 1 square inch horizontal ducts, one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of
per 4,000 Btu/hr (550 mm2 per kW) of the aggregate input rating the top and one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the
of all appliances installed in the enclosure. Each opening shall bottom of the enclosure. The horizontal ducts shall communicate
not be less than 100 square inches (645 cm2). directly with the outdoors. See Figure 11.
Each duct opening shall have a minimum free area of 1 square
OUTDOOR AIR THROUGH ONE OPENING inch per 2,000 Btu/hr (1100 mm2 per kW) of the aggregate input
rating of all appliances installed in the enclosure.
When ducts are used, they shall be of the same cross sectional
area as the free area of the openings to which they connect.
The minimum dimension of rectangular air ducts shall be not less
than 3 inches.
Figure 10
18
Spec Seq#: 76
OUTDOOR AIR THROUGH TWO VERTICAL DUCTS When ducts are used, they shall be of the same cross sectional
area as the free area of the openings to which they connect.
The illustrations shown in this section of the manual are a The minimum dimension of rectangular air ducts shall be not less
reference for the openings that provide fresh air into confined than 3 inches (7.62 cm).
spaces only.
AIR FROM OTHER INDOOR SPACES
DO NOT refer to these illustrations for the purpose of vent
installation. See Venting Installation on page 21 for complete
venting installation instructions.
1285179
Figure 13
The confined space shall be provided with two permanent

openings, one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the top
Figure 12 and one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the bottom of
The confined space shall be provided with two permanent vertical the enclosure. See Figure 13.
ducts, one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the top and Each opening shall communicate directly with an additional
one commencing within 12 inches (300 mm) of the bottom of the room(s) of sufficient volume so that the combined volume of all
enclosure. The vertical ducts shall communicate directly with the spaces meets the criteria for an Unconfined Space.
outdoors. See Figure 12. Each opening shall have a minimum free area of 1 square inch
Each duct opening shall have a minimum free area of 1 square per 1,000 Btu/hr (2200 mm2 per kW) of the aggregate input
inch per 4,000 Btu/hr (550 mm2 per kW) of the aggregate input rating of all appliances installed in the enclosure. Each opening
rating of all appliances installed in the enclosure. shall not be less than 100 square inches (645 cm2).
19
Spec Seq#: 76
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS - COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS

COMMONWEALTH OF MASSACHUSETTS INSPECTION
For all side wall terminated, horizontally vented power vent, direct The state or local gas inspector of the side wall horizontally
vent, and power direct vent gas fueled water heaters installed in vented gas fueled equipment shall not approve the installation
every dwelling, building or structure used in whole or in part for unless, upon inspection, the inspector observes carbon
residential purposes, including those owned or operated by the monoxide detectors and signage installed in accordance with the
Commonwealth and where the side wall exhaust vent termination provisions of 248 CMR 5.08(2)(a) 1 through 4.
is less than seven (7) feet above finished grade in the area of
EXEMPTIONS
the venting, including but not limited to decks and porches, the
1285179
following requirements shall be satisfied: The following equipment is exempt from 248 CMR 5.08(2)(a)1
through 4:
INSTALLATION OF CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS
1. The equipment listed in Chapter 10 entitled “Equipment Not
At the time of installation of the side wall horizontal vented Required To Be Vented” in the most current edition of NFPA
54 as adopted by the Board; and
gas fueled equipment, the installing plumber or gasfitter shall
observe that a hard wired carbon monoxide detector with an 2. Product Approved side wall horizontally vented gas fueled
alarm and battery back-up is installed on the floor level where equipment installed in a room or structure separate from the
the gas equipment is to be installed. In addition, the installing dwelling, building, or structure used in whole or in part for
plumber or gasfitter shall observe that a battery operated or residential purposes.
hard wired carbon monoxide detector with an alarm is installed
MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS - GAS
on each additional level of the dwelling, building or structure EQUIPMENT VENTING SYSTEM PROVIDED
served by the sidewall horizontal vented gas fueled equipment.
It shall be the responsibility of the property owner to secure the When the manufacturer of Product Approved side wall
services of qualified licensed professionals for the installation of horizontally vented gas equipment provides a venting system
hard wired carbon monoxide detectors. design or venting system components with the equipment, the
instructions provided by the manufacturer for installation of the
In the event that the side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment and the venting system shall include:
equipment is installed in a crawl space or an attic, the hard wired
1. Detailed instructions for the installation of the venting system
carbon monoxide detector with alarm and battery back-up may
design or the venting system components; and
be installed on the next adjacent floor level.
2. A complete parts list for the venting system design or venting
In the event that the requirements of this subdivision can not system.
be met at the time of completion of installation, the owner shall
have a period of thirty (30) days to comply with the above MANUFACTURER REQUIREMENTS - GAS
requirements provided that during said thirty (30) day period, a EQUIPMENT VENTING SYSTEM NOT PROVIDED
battery operated carbon monoxide detector with an alarm shall
be installed. When the manufacturer of a Product Approved side wall
horizontally vented gas fueled equipment does not provide the
APPROVED CARBON MONOXIDE DETECTORS parts for venting the flue gases, but identifies “special venting
systems,” the following requirements shall be satisfied by the
manufacturer:
Each carbon monoxide detector as required in accordance with
the above provisions shall comply with NFPA 720 and be ANSI/ 1. The referenced “special venting system” instructions shall
UL 2034 listed and CSA certified. be included with the appliance or equipment installation
instructions; and
SIGNAGE
2. The “special venting systems” shall be Product Approved by
the Board, and the instructions for that system shall include a
A metal or plastic identification plate shall be permanently
parts list and detailed installation instructions.
mounted to the exterior of the building at a minimum height of
eight (8) feet above grade directly in line with the exhaust vent A copy of all installation instructions for all Product Approved
terminal for the horizontally vented gas fueled heating appliance side wall horizontally vented gas fueled equipment, all venting
or equipment. The sign shall read, in print size no less than one- instructions, all parts lists for venting instructions, and/or all
half (1/2) inch in size, “GAS VENT DIRECTLY BELOW. KEEP venting design instructions shall remain with the appliance or
CLEAR OF ALL OBSTRUCTIONS.” equipment at the completion of the installation.
20
Spec Seq#: 76
VENTING INSTALLATION
CATEGORY IV APPLIANCE
Category IV appliances operate with a positive vent (exhaust)
static pressure and with vent gas temperatures low enough to
Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas produce condensate in the vent piping.
• Install vent system in accordance with codes. POWER VENT CONFIGURATION
• Do not operate water heater if exposed to flooding or Power Vent configurations derive all combustion air from the
water damage
• Special consideration must be taken with installations room where they are installed and discharge all flue gases to
above 10,000 feet (3,048 m) refer to high altitude the outdoor atmosphere through a sealed vent (exhaust) pipe.
section of this manual.
Power vent configurations have one vent pipe connected to the
•
1285179
Do not operate if soot buildup.
water heater which can be terminated in a vertical or horizontal
• Do not obstruct water heater air intake with insulating
jacket or blanket. arrangement. See Figure 42 and Figure 43 on page 35.
• Do not place chemical vapor emitting products near
DIRECT VENT CONFIGURATION
water heater.
• Gas and carbon monoxide detectors are available. Direct Vent configurations derive all combustion air directly from the
• Never operate the heater unless it is vented to the outdoor atmosphere through a sealed intake air pipe and discharge all
outdoors and has adequate air supply to avoid risks
of improper operation, fire, explosion or asphyxiation. flue gases to the outdoor atmosphere through a sealed vent (exhaust)
• Analyze the entire vent system to make sure that pipe. Direct Vent configurations have two pipes connected to the water
condensate will not become trapped in a section of heater, one vent pipe and one intake air pipe. Direct Vent configurations
vent pipe and therefore reduce the open cross
sectional area of the vent. can be terminated in one of seven different arrangements. See Figure
44 on page 35 through Figure 49 on page 36.
Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or death.
Always read and understand the instruction manual. GENERAL VENTING INSTRUCTIONS
Never operate the water heater unless it is vented to outdoors. These instructions must be followed on all installations.
The instructions in this section of the manual must be followed 1. DO NOT install the water heater in a Power Vent configuration
to avoid choked combustion or recirculation of flue gases. Such
conditions cause sooting of the combustion chamber, burners and unless there is adequate supply of fresh air, see Air Requirements
flue tubes and creates a risk of asphyxiation. on page 17. If the installation space does not provide an
adequate supply of fresh air the water heater must be installed in a
GENERAL VENTING INFORMATION Direct Vent configuration.
The water heaters covered in this manual are Category IV 2. If the water heater is to be installed in a beauty shop, barber shop,
appliances and may be installed in either a Power Vent or Direct cleaning establishment, a laundry with dry cleaning equipment
Vent configuration. or any space with contaminated air it is imperative that the water
APPROVED MATERIALS heater(s) be installed in a Direct Vent configuration so that all air for
Approved vent and intake air pipe materials that may be used in combustion is derived from the outdoor atmosphere.
the United States: 3. The vent and intake air piping must terminate outdoors.
PVC pipe materials: 4. The minimum clearance from combustible materials for the vent
• DWV ASTM-D2665 or CSA B181.2 (exhaust) and intake air piping shall be 0 inches. Vent piping
• Schedule 40, 80, 120 ASTM-D1785 or CSA B137.3 passing through a combustible wall or ceiling must be a continuous
• SDR Series ASTM-2241 or CSA B137.3 run (no joints).
CPVC pipe materials: 5. The water heater must be protected from freezing downdrafts
• CPVC 41 ASTM-D2846 or CSA B137.6 during shutdown periods.
• Schedule 40, 80 ASTM-F441 or CSA B137.6 6. The vent (exhaust) pipe must not be combined or connected to any
• SDR Series ASTM-F442 other appliance’s vent system or chimney.
Polypropylene - See page 28 7. The intake air pipe must not be combined or connected to any
• M & G Duravent PolyPro vent system other appliance’s intake air piping.
• Centrotherm InnoFlue vent system 8. Locate the water heater where the vent (exhaust) and intake air
AL29-4C Stainless Steel - See page 29 piping will remain within the maximum equivalent lengths allowed.
• HeatFab Saf-T Vent See Venting Requirements on page 22.
• Duravent FasNSeal 9. Do not install the vent or intake air piping in a manner that will allow
Approved vent pipe materials that must be used in Canada: water to be trapped in the piping.
• ULC S636 PVC / CPVC 10. Vent pipes must be pitched a minimum of a 1/4 inch per foot back
• ULC S636 Polypropylene - See page 28 to the water heater (to allow drainage of condensate).
• AL29-4C Stainless Steel - See page 29 11. Do not anchor the vent or intake air pipe directly to framed walls,
Approved intake air pipe materials that must be used in Canada: floors or ceilings unless rubber isolation pipe hangers are used to
PVC pipe materials: prevent vibration noise from being transmitted.
• DWV ASTM-D2665 or CSA B181.2 12. Use only approved vent/intake air pipe sizes and materials. See
• Schedule 40, 80, 120 ASTM-D1785 or CSA B137.3 Venting Requirements on page 22.
• SDR Series ASTM-D2241 or CSA B137.3 13. Use only factory supplied vent and intake air, concentric or low profile
CPVC pipe materials: terminations. See the Venting Requirements on page 22.
• CPVC 41 ASTM-D2846 or CSA B137.6 14. Do not locate the vent (exhaust) or intake air terminations where
• Schedule 40, 80 ASTM-F441 or CSA B137.6 they would be objectionable due to noise at the termination(s). This
• SDR Series ASTM-F442 includes locations close to or across from windows and doors.
Polypropylene - See page 28 15. Direct venting into dead air spaces such as alleys, atriums, and inside
• M & G Duravent PolyPro vent system corners can cause recirculation of flue gases. Recirculation of flue
• Centrotherm InnoFlue vent system gases will cause sooting, premature failure of the heat exchanger and
AL29-4C Stainless Steel - See page 29 icing of the combustion air intake during severe cold weather. To prevent
• HeatFab Saf-T Vent the recirculation of flue gases, maintain as much distance as possible
• Duravent FasNSeal between the intake air and vent terminations.
NOTE: The use of cellular core PVC (ASTM F891), cellular core 16. Do not locate the vent termination over a public area where
CPVC, or Radel® (polyphenolsulfone) in non-metallic venting systems condensate or vapor can cause a nuisance or ice hazard.
is prohibited. Covering non-metallic vent pipe and fittings with thermal 17. Ensure the screens in the factory supplied terminations are securely
INSULATION IS PROHIBITED. installed to prevent blockage in the vent system.
21
Spec Seq#: 76
18. Stress levels in pipe/fittings can be significantly increased by when viewed from the end, see Figure 15. The Tee fitting's
improper installation. If rigid pipe clamps are used to hold 1/2 inch branch and hose barb must not be angled any lower
the pipe in place, or if the pipe cannot move freely through a (towards the ground) than this factory specification. Angling
wall penetration, the pipe may be stressed, or high thermal higher, up to a 90° position, will not adversely affect operation
stresses may be formed when the pipe heats up and expands. and is acceptable.
Install accordingly to minimize such stresses.
19. Ensure the intake air connection Tee fitting is oriented properly, INSPECT/ADJUST INTAKE AIR TEE FITTING
see page Intake Air Connection section for instructions. Inspect the angle of the Tee fitting's 1/2 inch branch and hose
20. Carefully read the Venting Requirements on page 22 and then barb while viewing from the end of the Tee, see Figure 15. If the
proceed to the Venting Installation Sequence on page 23. angle of the Tee fitting 1/2 inch branch and hose barb is lower
than shown, adjustment will be necessary. To adjust the intake
INTAKE AIR CONNECTION air Tee fitting angle follow the steps listed below.
1285179
The water heaters covered in this manual are factory equipped with Adjustment Procedure:
a unique Combustion Blower and intake air connection Tee fitting.
21. Ensure the water heater is turned off at the on/off switch on
The Tee is a 3" x 3" x 1/2" fitting. The intake air connection Tee
fitting has a hose barb installed in the 1/2 inch branch to connect the front of the water heater.
the Blocked Intake Air switch sensing tube, see Figure 14. 22. Disconnect the Blocked Intake Air switch sensing tube, see
Figure 3 on page 8 for location.
FACTORY INSTALLED COMBUSTION
INTAKE AIR TEE BLOWER 23. Loosen the large hose clamp on the Fernco coupling that
FITTING connects the intake air connection pipe to the Combustion
blower, see Figure 16.
24. Adjust the angle of the Tee fitting so that the 1/2 inch branch
and hose barb are at the proper angle as shown in Figure 15.
25. Retighten the large hose clamp on the Combustion Blower
intake air Fernco coupling,
26. Reconnect the Blocked Intake Air switch sensing tube making
1/2 INCH sure the sensing tube is securely connected at both ends and
BRANCH FERNCO is not kinked.
COUPLING
HOSE BARB FITTING FOR
LARGE HOSE FERNCO
BLOCKED INTAKE AIR
SWITCH SENSING TUBE CLAMP COUPLING
COMBUSTION BLOWER ASSEMBLY

Figure 14
Ensure the hose barb installed in the Tee fitting IS NOT facing
down towards the ground (180° - 6 o'clock position) before venting
installation begins. The barb fitting must be angled between 90°
and no more than 130° as shown in Figure 15. If the barb fitting
is facing down, residual condensate that occasionally forms in
the intake air pipe can drain into the Blocked Intake Air switch
through the attached sensing tube and damage the switch. This
condition can also lead to Blocked Intake Air fault conditions and INTAKE AIR 3 INCH PVC
associated control system lock outs. TEE FITTING
INTAKE AIR CONNECTION PIPE

Figure 16
90° TO 130°
VENTING REQUIREMENTS
FIELD SUPPLIED FITTINGS
Field supplied fittings should be equivalent to the piping material
being installed. Field installed/supplied fittings will add equivalent
feet to the vent or intake air piping as indicated below. All field
supplied/installed fittings and piping must be factored into the
equivalent feet calculations.
END VIEW • 90° elbows (short or long radius) are equivalent to 5 linear
feet (152 cm) of pipe.
CORRECT ORIENTATION • 45° elbows (short or long radius) are equivalent to 2.5 linear
feet (76 cm) of pipe.
INTAKE AIR TEE FITTING
Figure 15 PRIMER AND CEMENT
Tetrahydrofuran (THF) primer should be used to prepare the surfaces
The intake air Tee fitting is factory installed with the 1/2 inch of pipe and fittings for solvent welding. If CPVC or ABS pipe and
branch and hose barb angled to the right at approximately 130° fittings are used, then the proper cement must be used for all joints,
22
Spec Seq#: 76
including joining the pipe to the factory provided terminations (PVC TABLE 6 - PVC/CPVC and Polypropylene
material). PVC Materials should use ASTM D-2564 Grade Cement; Number of 3 Inch Pipe 4 Inch Pipe
CPVC Materials should use ASTM F-493 Grade Cement and ABS 90° Elbows Maximum Feet (Meters) Maximum Feet (Meters)
Materials should use ASTM D-2235 Grade Cement. Installed
One (1) 45 feet (13.7 meters) 115 feet (35.0 meters)
PIPE SIZE REQUIREMENTS
The water heaters covered in this manual are certified for the use Two (2) 40 feet (12.2 meters) 110 feet (33.5 meters)
of 3 and 4 inch pipe for the vent (exhaust) and intake air piping. Three (3) 35 feet (10.7 meters) 105 feet (32.0 meters)
If the installed equivalent length for the intake air or vent piping Four (4) 30 feet (9.1 meters) 100 feet (30.5 meters)
will be 50 feet (15.2 m) or less, 3 inch pipe must be used. If the Five (5) N/A 95 feet (29.0 meters)
installed equivalent length will be more than 50 feet (15.2 m), 4 Six (6) N/A 90 feet (27.4 meters)
inch pipe must be used. NOTE: Refer to Tables 9 and 10 on page 29 for the equivalent
NOTE: Install the pipe size required for the installed equivalent linear pipe length of AL29-4C® 45° and 90° elbows.
1285179
length of each pipe independently. IE: If the intake air pipe will be 4 INCH EXTENDED VENT TERMINATIONS
50 equivalent feet or less and the vent pipe will be more than 50 When 4 inch intake air or vent pipe is installed, factory supplied 4
equivalent feet; the intake air pipe must be installed using 3 inch inch terminations must be used. Contact your local distributor or
pipe and the vent must be installed using 4 inch pipe. call the parts department (phone number listed on the back cover
MAXIMUM EQUIVALENT LENGTHS of this manual) to order 4 inch termination(s).
Three Inch Pipe OPTIONAL CONCENTRIC & LOW PROFILE TERMINATIONS
The water heaters covered in this manual are certified to The water heaters covered by this manual may be installed in a
a maximum length of 3 inch pipe for the exhaust venting Direct Vent configuration using a 4 inch concentric termination or
arrangement of 50 equivalent feet (15.2 m). The certified a 3" or 4" low profile termination.
maximum length of 3 inch pipe for intake air piping is also 50 Concentric and Low Profile terminations must be ordered
equivalent feet (15.2 m). IE: On Direct Vent installations both separately. Contact your local distributor or call the parts
pipes can be up to 50 equivalent feet (15.2 m). department phone number listed on the back cover of this
Four Inch Pipe manual to order.
The water heaters covered in this manual are certified to Concentric & Low Profile Vent Termination Part Numbers:
a maximum length of 4 inch pipe for the exhaust venting • 4" Concentric Termination # 9006328005 (used for both 3"
arrangement of 120 equivalent feet (36.5 m). The certified and 4" diameter piping)
maximum length of 4 inch pipe for intake air piping is also 120 • 3" Low Profile Termination # 9008933005
equivalent feet (36.5 m). IE: On Direct Vent installations both • 4" Low Profile Termination # 9008934005
pipes can be up to 120 equivalent feet (36.5 m).
COMMON VENTING
MINIMUM EQUIVALENT LENGTHS
Three Inch Pipe The water heaters covered by this manual may be installed using a
The water heaters covered in this manual are certified to a common horizontal direct vent kit. Contact your local distributor or
minimum length of 3 inch pipe for the vent (exhaust) of 7 call the parts department phone number listed on the back cover of
equivalent feet (2.1 m). There is no minimum equivalent feet this manual for more information or to order.
requirement for the intake air pipe. VENTING INSTALLATION SEQUENCE
Four Inch Pipe
1. Read General Venting Instructions on page 21 and Venting
The water heaters covered in this manual are certified to
Requirements on page 22 before proceeding. These instructions
a minimum length of 4 inch pipe for the vent (exhaust) of 50
and requirements must be followed on all installations.
equivalent feet (15.2 m). There is no minimum equivalent feet
requirement for the intake air pipe. 2. Determine whether the water heater will be installed in
a Power Vent or Direct Vent configuration and which vent
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ELBOWS system arrangement will be used for the installation. See the
Three Inch Pipe various venting arrangements on pages 35 and 36.
The vent pipe may have a maximum of four 90° elbows installed 3. Proceed to the applicable instructions:
when 3 inch pipe is being used. The intake air pipe may also • Power Vent Installation on page 23.
have a maximum of four 90° elbows installed. IE: in a Direct Vent • Direct Vent Installation on page 24.
configuration each pipe can have up to four 90° elbows installed.
POWER VENT INSTALLATION
NOTE: Refer to Tables 9 and 10 on page 29 for the equivalent
linear pipe length of AL29-4C® 45° and 90° elbows. 1. Read the General Venting Instructions on page 21 and
Four Inch Pipe Venting Requirements on page 22 before proceeding.
These instructions and requirements must be followed in
The vent pipe may have a maximum of six 90° elbows installed
addition to the instructions below that are specific for Power
when 4 inch pipe is being used. The intake air pipe may also
Vent configurations.
have a maximum of six 90° elbows installed. IE: in a Direct Vent
configuration each pipe can have up to six 90° elbows installed. 2. Determine which Power Vent arrangement will be used for
the installation; vertical or horizontal termination. See Figure
FACTORY SUPPLIED FITTINGS 42 and Figure 43 on page 35.
The water heater ships with two (2) factory supplied 3 inch
3. Determine the vent pipe size for the installation, see Venting
terminations (PVC 45° elbows with debris screen). Factory
Requirements on page 22.
supplied vent and intake air terminations, concentric, or
low profile terminations must be used. Factory supplied 4. Plan the layout of the vent piping backwards from the
terminations and installed fittings (exhaust/condensate elbow termination point outdoors to the water heater. Layout the
and intake air connection) add zero equivalent feet to the vent vent piping to use a minimum of pipe and elbows.
and intake air piping. 5. Install the termination first.
23
Spec Seq#: 76
If the vent piping will terminate vertically, through a roof, see If a concentric termination(s) will be used see Concentric
Vertical Termination Installation on page 25. Termination Installation on page 30.
If the vent piping will terminate horizontally, through a If a low-profile termination will be used see Low Profile
sidewall, see Sidewall Termination Installation on page 27. Termination Installation on page 34.
6. When installation of the termination is complete install 6. When installation of the termination(s) is complete Install
necessary piping and fittings to route the vent piping back to necessary piping and fittings to route the intake air and vent
the water heater. piping back to the water heater.
7. The vent pipe shall be supported properly to avoid bending or
7. The intake air and vent piping shall be supported properly
failure. The water heater manufacturer recommends that the
to avoid bending or failure. The water heater manufacturer
vent pipe be supported every 5 feet (152 cm) of vertical run
recommends that the vent and intake air piping be supported
and every 3 feet (91 cm) of horizontal run.
1285179
every 5 feet (152 cm) of vertical run and every 3 feet (91 cm)
8. Do not install the vent piping in a manner that will allow water of horizontal run.
to be trapped in the piping.
8. Do not install the vent or intake air piping in a manner that will
4” PIPE FIELD allow water to be trapped in the piping.
SUPPLIED
9. A field supplied condensate Tee fitting and drain hose shall
be installed in the intake air piping near the water heater
in colder climates with heavy snow accumulations and in
4” x 3” REDUCER areas that regularly experience high humidity. The drain
FIELD SUPPLIED hose should be routed to an adequate floor drain separate
from any other condensate drains. See Figure 20 on page
25.
3” PIPE FIELD
SUPPLIED NOTE: Snow being pulled into the intake air piping and
then melting can lead to excessive amounts of water
EXHAUST ELBOW accumulation and damage water heater components. Warm,
VENT CONNECTION humid outdoor air can lead to excessive condensation
FACTORY INSTALLED
inside the intake air piping and may also damage water
heater components.
VENT (EXHAUST) CONNECTION
10. The intake air and vent (exhaust) piping must be pitched a
Figure 17 minimum of a 1/4 inch per foot back to the water heater (to
allow drainage of condensate).
9. All vent (exhaust) pipes shall be pitched a minimum of a
1/4 inch per foot back to the water heater (to allow drainage 11. If installing 3 inch vent pipe connect the vent pipe to the
of condensate). exhaust elbow on the water heater.
10. If installing 3 inch vent pipe connect the vent pipe to the 12. If installing 4 inch vent pipe transition to 3 inch pipe at the
exhaust elbow on the water heater. exhaust elbow on the water heater as shown in Figure 17 on
11. If installing 4 inch pipe transition to 3 inch pipe at the exhaust page 24. The field installed 3” pipe between the exhaust
elbow on the water heater as shown in Figure 17. The field elbow and the 4” x 3” reducer coupling should be 18 inches
installed 3” pipe between the exhaust elbow and the 4” x 3” (45 cm) or less in length.
reducer coupling should be 18 inches (45 cm) or less in length.
13. Ensure the Intake Air Screen on the Intake Air Connection to
DIRECT VENT INSTALLATION the water heater is removed before connecting the intake air
1. Read the General Venting Instructions on page 21 and pipe to the water heater. See Figure 18.
Venting Requirements on page 22 before proceeding.
These instructions and requirements must be followed in
addition to the instructions below that are specific for Direct
Vent configurations.
2. Determine which Direct Vent arrangement will be used for
the installation. There are seven (7) Direct Vent arrangement Do not obstruct water heater air intake.
options. See Figures 44 through 50.
Gas and carbon monoxide detectors
3. Determine vent and intake air pipe size to be used for the are available.
installation; see Venting Requirements on page 22.
4. Plan the layout of the vent and intake air piping backwards Install water heater in accordance with
from the termination point outdoors to the water heater. the instruction manual.
Layout the vent and intake air piping to use a minimum of Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or
pipe and elbows. death. Always read and understand instruction manual.
5. Install the terminations first.
If standard terminations are being used and the intake air NOTE: Do not leave the screen inside the Intake Air
or vent piping will terminate vertically, through a roof, see Connection for Direct Vent installations. Once the intake
Vertical Termination Installation on page 25. air pipe is installed the screen will be hidden from view and
If standard terminations are being used and the intake air or may become clogged with debris over time. This will cause
vent piping will terminate horizontally, through a sidewall, see improper combustion and may also lead to Blocked Intake
Sidewall Termination Installation on page 27. Air fault conditions and associated control system lock outs.
24
Spec Seq#: 76
See Figure 20. A horizontal section of the air inlet pipe, near
the heater should include a 3” by 3” by 1/2” tee and a hose
barb fitting to drain the water. The tee should be as close to
the heater as is practical. The drain tubing in any installation
INTAKE AIR should have a loop trap and flow to an appropriate waste drain.
SCREEN The air intake drain line must be entirely separate from the
(remove for Direct Vent) exhaust vent outlet condensate line.
3 INCH INTAKE AIR CONNECTIONS
FACTORY INSTALLED
VERTICAL TERMINATION INSTALLATION
INTAKE AIR SCREEN 1. Determine the location for the termination(s).
Figure 18 2. If installing only the vent (exhaust) piping in a Power Vent
configuration vertically through the roof; ensure that all
1285179
14. If installing 3 inch intake air pipe connect the intake air pipe to exterior vertical clearance requirements shown in Figure
the intake air connection on the water heater.
22 and Figure 23 on page 26 are being maintained.
15. If installing 4 inch intake air pipe transition to 3 inch pipe at These clearances and those cited by local and national
the intake air connection on the water heater as shown in codes must be maintained.
Figure 19. The field installed 3” pipe between the intake air
NOTE: On flat roof installations the vent termination must
connection and the 4” x 3” reducer coupling should be 18
be a minimum of 24 inches (60 cm) above any parapet,
inches (45 cm) or less in length.
vertical wall or structure within 10 feet (3 m) horizontally.
3” PIPE FACTORY INSTALLED See Figure 23 on page 26.
FACTORY INSTALLED
INTAKE AIR TEE 1/2 INCH 3. If installing both intake air and vent piping in a Direct Vent
FITTING BRANCH configuration vertically through the roof; ensure that all exterior
vertical clearance requirements shown in Figure 22 and Figure
INTAKE AIR
23 on page 26 are being maintained. These clearances and
those cited by local and national codes must be maintained.
NOTE: On flat roof installations the intake air and the vent
HOSE BARB FITTING FOR FERNCO terminations must be a minimum of 24 inches (60 cm) above
BLOCKED INTAKE AIR COUPLING any parapet, vertical wall or structure within 10 feet (3 m)
SWITCH SENSING TUBE
COMBUSTION BLOWER horizontally. See Figure 23 on page 26.
INTAKE AIR CONNECTION 4. If installing only vent piping in a Power Vent configuration
vertically through the roof the following instructions must be
Figure 19
followed:
INSTALL TEE FITTING AS CLOSE TO WATER HEATER
INTAKE AIR CONNECTION AS POSSIBLE
INTAKE
AIR
The vent termination must be oriented facing downward as
FACTORY PIPING shown in Figure 22 and Figure 23 on page 26.
INTAKE AIR
CONNECTION The bottom edge of vent termination must be a minimum of 12
inches (30 cm), 18 inches (45 cm) in Canada, above average
or expected snow level as shown in Figure 22 on page 26.
FIELD SUPPLIED
5. If installing both intake air and vent piping in a Direct Vent
3” x 3” x 1/2” TEE configuration vertically through the roof the following
WITH HOSE BARB
FITTING INSTALLED
instructions must be followed:
CONNECT FIELD The intake air and vent pipes must penetrate the same side
SUPPLIED FLEXIBLE of the roof as shown in Figure 24 on page 26.
DRAIN HOSE TO BARB
FITTING AND FORM A The intake air and vent terminations must be oriented facing
LOOP WATER TRAP IN
DRAIN HOSE downward and in the same direction as shown in Figure 24
RUN DRAIN HOSE
on page 26.
TO SUITABLE FLOOR The intake air and vent terminations must have a minimum
DRAIN SEPARATELY
FROM OTHER separation of 24” (61 cm) measured on center line as shown
CONDENSATE DRAINS in Figure 24 on page 26. In colder climates this separation
should be increased to at least 48 inches (122 cm).
The bottom edge of the intake air and vent terminations
must be a minimum of 12 inches (30 cm), 18 inches (45 cm)
in Canada, above the average or expected snow level as
shown in Figure 22 and Figure 24 on page 26.
INTAKE AIR CONDENSATE TEE INSTALLATION 6. When the intake air and/or vent piping from multiple
Figure 20 water heaters will terminate in the same location the vent
terminations can be grouped together in close proximity 0
DIRECT VENT AIR INTAKE MOISTURE PROTECTION inches/touching. Intake air terminations can also be grouped
together in close proximity 0 inches/touching.
The air intake piping in a direct vent system will normally not The distance between the closest vent and intake air
have any moisture accumulation in it. However, in certain terminations must be a minimum of 24 inches (61 cm) as
cases, moisture may build up and needs to be drained. Typical shown in Figure 24 on page 26. In colder climates this
situations include, but are not limited to: separation should be increased to at least 48 inches (122 cm).
• Cold outdoor temperature, particularly if the air inlet is short, 7. Cut a 4 inch (10 cm) diameter hole for 3 inch pipe or 5 inch
• Heater being used mostly for space heating and (13 cm) diameter hole for 4 inch pipe where the pipe(s) will
• Air inlet pipe has vertical rise near the heater. pass through the roof.
Installations with any of these conditions are required to NOTE: Beware of concealed wiring and piping when cutting
provide a moisture drain with a trap that flows to a waste drain. through the roof.
25
Spec Seq#: 76
8. Suspend the pipe(s) through center of hole using field IF LESS THAN
supplied metal strapping or equivalent support materials as 10 FEET (3 m)
shown in Figure 22 on page 26.
9. Slide a roof boot or equivalent flashing over the pipe and
secure roof boot or equivalent flashing to roof and seal
around the flashing as shown in Figure 22, Figure 23 and 24 INCHES (60 cm)
MINIMUM HEIGHT ABOVE
Figure 24 on page 26.
10. Install the factory supplied intake air and/or vent termination(s)
using field supplied pipe and one field supplied 90° elbow as
shown in Figure 22 on page 26. The short section of pipe
INTAKE AIR AND/OR VENT
that connects between the field supplied 90° elbow and the TERMINATION(S) MUST BE A
factory supplied termination must not be excessive in length. MINIMUM OF 24 INCES (60 cm)
1285179
The exposed portion of this pipe shall be no more than 2 ABOVE ANY PARAPET, VERTICAL
inches (5 cm), see Figure 22 on page 26. WALL OR STRUCTURE WITHIN
10 FEET (3 m) HORIZONTALLY.
11. Return to Power Vent Installation on page 23 or Direct
Vent Installation on page 24 to complete the installation of
the intake air and/or vent piping between the termination(s)
and the water heater.
INTAKE AIR AND

VENT (EXHAUST) TERMINATIONS
45° ELBOW WITH RECESSED
DEBRIS SCREEN
VERTICAL TERMINATION(S) FLAT ROOF CLEARANCE
INTAKE AIR AND/OR VENT (EXHAUST)
Figure 23
24 INCHES (61 cm) MINIMUM

48 INCHES (122 cm) IN COLDER CLIMATES
FIELD INTAKE AIR

STANDARD FACTORY SUPPLIED TERMINATIONS SUPPLIED TERMINATION
90° ELBOW
Figure 21
VENT (EXHAUST)
2” (5 cm) TERMINATION
MAXIMUM FACTORY SUPPLIED FACTORY SUPPLIED MAINTAIN 12” (30 cm)
STANDARD TERMINATION STANDARD TERMINATIONS 18” (45 cm) FOR CANADA
FIELD POINTED DOWN TOWARDS POINTED DOWNWARD MINIMUM CLEARANCE
SUPPLIED THE GROUND ABOVE HIGHEST
90° ELBOW ANTICIPATED SNOW LEVEL.
FIELD SUPPLIED
PLUMBING
ROOF BOOT
OR FLASHING
MAINTAIN 12” (30 cm) FIELD SUPPLIED
18” (45 cm) FOR CANADA PLUMBING
MINIMUM CLEARANCE ROOF BOOTS
ABOVE HIGHEST ANTICIPATED OR FLASHINGS
SNOW LEVEL.
VERTICAL TERMINATION - DIRECT VENT

STANDARD TERMINATIONS
Figure 24
FIELD
SUPPLIED
STRAP/SUPPORT
VERTICAL TERMINATION(S) INSTALLATION
Figure 22
26
Spec Seq#: 76
SIDEWALL TERMINATION INSTALLATION 18. Cut a 4 inch (10 cm) diameter hole for 3 inch pipe or 5 inch
(13 cm) diameter hole for 4 inch pipe where the pipe(s) will
12. Determine the location for the termination(s). pass through the wall.
13. If installing only vent (exhaust) piping in a Power Vent NOTE: Beware of concealed wiring and piping when cutting
configuration through a sidewall; ensure that all exterior through the wall.
sidewall clearance requirements for the termination, shown
19. Cut a length(s) of pipe being installed 3.5 inches (8.9 cm)
in Figure 51 on page 37, are being maintained. These
to 9.5 inches (24.1 cm) longer than the wall thickness at the
clearances and those cited by local and national codes must
opening. See Figure 26.
be maintained.
NOTE: Vent Termination – exhaust gases of this water
14. If installing both the intake air and the vent piping in a heater are less than 140°F. In cold climates water vapor in
Direct Vent configuration through a sidewall; ensure the exhaust gases will condense into a cloud of vapor where
1285179
that all exterior sidewall clearance requirements for the the vent exits the building. This vapor can gradually discolor
terminations, shown in Figure 52 on page 38, for the exterior building surfaces. The vent termination should be
vent and the intake air termination are being maintained. located where this vapor cloud and potential discoloration
These clearances and those cited by local and national are not a concern. Extending the exposed vent piping up to
codes must be maintained. a maximum of 6 inches (15.2 cm) from the wall helps vapor
15. If installing both an intake air and vent termination in a from being trapped along a building’s face. To avoid this
Direct Vent configuration through a sidewall there must problem, the vent can also be terminated vertically through
be a minimum of 24 inches (61 cm) separation, measured the roof, see Vertical Termination Installation on page 25.
on vertical center line, between the intake air and vent 20. Cement the intake air and/or vent termination to the section(s)
terminations, see Figure 25. of pipe cut to length in the above Step.
NOTE: In colder climates this separation should be increased 21. Slide the included metal wall plate(s) over the pipe(s) to stop
to at least 48 inches (122 cm) between the intake air and against the intake air and/or vent termination. Place some
vent termination or any other appliance vent that discharges silicone caulking (field supplied) on the back of the wall
moisture-laden air such as clothes dryers. This will reduce plate(s) to secure it to the wall.
possibility of frost over from side winds blowing exhaust 22. Working from outside, slide the pipe and termination(s)
vapors to the intake air termination and is recommended for assembled in the above steps through the wall. Ensure the
Canadian installations. termination(s) is pointed down towards the ground. See
16. If installing both intake air and vent terminations in a Direct Figure 26.
Vent configuration through a sidewall the intake air and
vent terminations must be installed at the same elevation METAL PLATES INCREASE EXPOSED VENT
INSTALL INSIDE PIPING UP TO A MAXIMUM
measured on horizontal center line - see Figure 25. AND/OR OUTSIDE OF 6 INCHES (15.2 cm) FROM
WALL TO HELP PREVENT VAPOR
FROM DISCOLORING THE WALL
VENT (EXHAUST) INTAKE AIR FROM SURFACE IN COLDER CLIMATES
TERMINATION TERMINATION WATER
HEATER FACTORY SUPPLIED
ELEVATION STANDARD TERMINATION
INSTALL ON COUPLING
POINTED DOWN
TOWARDS THE GROUND
CENTERLINE INTERIOR WALL EXTERIOR WALL
KEEP INTAKE AND VENT SIDEWALL TERMINATION INSTALLATION

TERMINATION SCREENS
CLEAR OF DEBRIS
24 INCHES (61 cm) MINIMUM

Figure 26
48 INCHES (122 cm) IN COLDER CLIMATES
23. Place a bead of silicone caulking (field supplied) around the
SIDEWALL TERMINATION - DIRECT VENT gap between the installed pipe(s) and the wall. Apply enough
STANDARD TERMINATIONS to fill the gap between the pipe(s) and wall.
24. Press the wall plate flush against the outside wall.
Figure 25
25. Working from the inside apply enough silicone caulking on
17. When the intake air and/or vent piping from multiple water the back of the interior wall plate(s) to hold it in place and
heaters will terminate at the same location through a slide the wall plate over the installed pipe(s).
sidewall, the vent terminations can be grouped together 26. Install a coupling to the end of the pipe(s) inside the building.
in close proximity - 0 inches/touching. The intake air Before the silicone caulking has time to completely set go
terminations can also be grouped together in close proximity outside the building and ensure the termination(s) is still
- 0 inches/touching. pointing down towards the ground. See Figure 26.
However, the distance between the closest vent and intake 27. Return to Power Vent Installation on page 23 or Direct
air terminations must be a minimum of 24 inches (61 cm). Vent Installation on page 24 to complete the installation of
In colder climates this separation should be increased to at the intake air and/or vent piping between the termination(s)
least 48 inches (122 cm). See Figure 25. and the water heater.
27
Spec Seq#: 76
POLYPROPYLENE INSTALLATIONS Polypropylene vent systems do not use cement to connect

the pipe and elbow sections but use a push together gasket
The water heater has been approved to be installed with seal method. Do not attempt to connect Polypropylene with
Polypropylene vent material as shown in Tables 7 and 8. sealant cement. All vent connections MUST be secured by
The approved application of single wall, non-flexible, non- the vent manufacturer’s joint connector. The installer must
concentric Polypropylene vent material is offered by two use a specific vent starter adapter at the flue connection. The
specific manufacturers (Centrotherm ECO Systems and adapter is supplied by the vent manufacturer to adapt to its
DuraVent Polypropylene. These listed products must be vent system.
installed by following the vent manufacturer’s instructions.
Refer to Table 6 on Page 23 to determine the maximum pipe In order to be in full compliance with UL 1738 or ULC-S636 and
length and number of elbows that can be used. to meet the requirements of the water heater manufacturer,
you must use the metal joint connector rings, available from
1285179
Insulation should not be used on Polypropylene venting the Polypropylene vent manufacturer, to stiffen the joints of
materials. The use of insulation will cause increased vent wall 3” and 4” diameter pipes.
temperatures, which could result in vent pipe failure.
Use only the adapters and vent system listed in Tables below.
DO NOT mix vent systems of different types or manufacturers.
Failure to comply could result in severe personal injury, death,
or substantial property damage.
Installations must comply with applicable national, state,

and local codes. For Canadian installation, Polypropylene
vent must be listed as a ULC-S636 approved system. If
Polypropylene vent is not required by your local code, you
may use either PVC or CPVC pipes for your water heater that
allows non-metallic venting material installations.
TABLE 7
M & G Duravent PolyPro
Nominal Pipe Adapter Ring 90 Degree

Flue Outlet Adapter Vent Material Terminal(s)
Diameter Connector Connector Elbow
3PPS-E45B for Exhaust;

3" 3PPS-AD PPS-PAC 3PPS-LB 3PPS-E90B 3PPS
3PPS-E45B for Intake (Direct Vent only)
4PPS-E45B for Exhaust;

4" 4PPS-AD PPS-PAC 4PPS-LB 4PPS-E90B 4PPS
4PPS-E45B for Intake (Direct Vent only)
TABLE 8
Centrotherm InnoFlue SW
Nominal Pipe Adapter Ring 90 Degree

Flue Outlet Adapter Vent Material Terminal(s)
Diameter Connector Connector Elbow
ISAGL ISELL0345UV for Exhaust; ISELL0345UV

3" IAFC03 IANS03 ISELL0387 ISVL03
0303 for Intake (Direct Vent only)
ISAGL ISELL0445UV for Exhaust; ISELL0445UV

4" IAFC04 IANS04 ISELL0487 ISVL04
0404 for Intake (Direct Vent only)
28
Spec Seq#: 76
AL29-4C ® VENT INSTALLATIONS Listed vent systems composed of AL29-4C® must not mix
parts from the different manufacturers. The joints of these
(AL29-4C® is a registered trademark of Allegheny Technologies, Inc.)
products are sealed by internal gaskets. Do not use any
The water heaters covered by this manual are approved other type of sealant. When assembling these vent systems,
to be installed with AL29-4C® stainless steel vent material follow the vent manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning and
using parts from the manufacturers listed in Tables 9 and 10 lubricating the joints, if required. Each section must be locked
below. These listed systems must be installed using the vent together using the method supplied by the vent manufacturer.
manufacturer’s instructions including their listed clearances
to combustible and noncombustible materials. Refer to Table The water heaters covered by this manual are approved to
6 on page 23 for the maximum and minimum equivalent be installed using the approved vent terminations shown
linear vent lengths and number of elbows that may be used. in this manual. This means that, the installer must use the
However, use Tables 9 and 10 below to find the appropriate adapter listed in Tables 9 and 10 and a short piece of PVC
1285179
equivalent linear vent lengths for the AL29-4C® elbows. pipe to complete the end of the vent system with an approved
termination. In Canada, the PVC pipe length must be listed
NOTE: The equivalent lengths of the AL29-4C® elbows are to ULC636.
different than those from smooth walled plastic vents. Consult
Tables 9 and 10 for the correct equivalent linear vent lengths.
TABLE 9
HeatFab Saf-T Vent AL29-4C® Vent System Parts
Equivalent Equivalent
Flue Outlet *Straight Pipe Adapter to
Diameter 45° Elbow Linear Length, 90° Elbow Linear length,
Adapter (3’ Section) PVC
45° Elbow 90° Elbow
3 inches 9301 PVC 9307 9311 5 feet 9314 10 feet 9353CPVC
4 inches 9401 PVC 9407 9411 5 feet 9414 10 feet 9454CPVC
*Consult vent manufacturer’s catalog for other available lengths.
TABLE 10
Duravent FasNSeal AL29-4C® Vent System Parts
Equivalent Equivalent
*Straight Pipe Adapter to
Diameter Flue Outlet Adapter 45” Elbow Linear Length, 90° elbow Linear Length,
(3’ Section) PVC
45” Elbow 90- Elbow
3” 810005378 FSVL3603 FSELB4503 5 feet FSELB9003 10 feet 810009530
4” 810005545 FSVL3604 FSELB4504 5 feet FSELB9004 10 feet 810009529
*Consult vent manufacturer’s catalog for other available lengths.
COMMON VENTING
The water heaters covered by this manual may be installed
using a common horizontal direct vent kit. Contact your local
distributor or call the parts department phone number listed on
the back cover of this manual for more information or to order.
29
Spec Seq#: 76
CONCENTRIC TERMINATION INSTALLATION NOTE: If this required 10 foot (3 m) distance to a parapet,

vertical wall or structure cannot be maintained, standard
1. Concentric terminations must be ordered separately. BTH
120 - 250 models must use the 4 inch concentric termination; terminations must be used. See Vertical Termination
Part Number: 9006328005 for both 3" & 4" vent diameters. Installation on page 25.
Contact your local distributor or call the parts department 5. When installing a concentric termination through a sidewall;
phone number on the back cover of this manual to order ensure that all exterior sidewall clearance requirements
concentric terminations. for the termination, shown in Figure 52 on page 38, are
2. Determine the location for the termination. being maintained. These clearances and those cited by
local and national codes must be maintained.
NOTE: Roof termination is preferred since it is less susceptible
to damage, has reduced chances to intake contaminants and 6. When installing multiple concentric terminations vertically
vent vapors are less visible. through a roof or horizontally through a sidewall ensure the
1285179
3. When installing a concentric termination vertically through the required clearances between terminations and groupings
roof; ensure that all exterior vertical clearance requirements of multiple terminations are maintained. See pages 32
for the concentric termination, shown in Figure 29 on page and 33 for more information.
31 are being maintained. These clearances and those 7. Cut a 5 inch (13 cm) diameter hole for the 4 inch concentric
cited by local and national codes must be maintained. termination where the termination will pass through the wall or
4. When installing a concentric termination vertically through a roof.
flat roof, the termination's vent cap must be a minimum of 10 NOTE: Beware of concealed wiring and piping when cutting
feet (3 m) away from any parapet, vertical wall or structure as through the wall or roof.
shown in Figure 27.
8. When installing multiple concentric terminations vertically
through the roof in the same location the termination
caps for all concentric terminations must be at the same
height measured from ground. See Multiple Concentric
Termination Arrangements on page 33.
9. Determine if the concentric termination will need to be
CONCENTRIC TERMINATION(S)
MUST BE A MINIMUM OF 10 FEET
shortened to accommodate required clearances or to ensure
(3 m) AWAY FROM ANY PARAPET, all vent caps are at the same height when installing multiple
VERTICAL WALL OR
STRUCTURE. terminations vertically through the roof in the same location.
See Figure 28 on page 31 for the minimum lengths
allowed for the 4 inch concentric termination.
NOTE: When shortening the length of the termination
carefully measure and cut the larger (intake air) pipe first.
Cut the same amount of pipe off of the smaller (vent) pipe.
VENT PIPE NOTE: Lengthening of the Concentric Vent Termination is
not permitted.
INTAKE AIR PIPE
10. Proceed to 4 Inch Concentric Termination Installation on
page 31.
CONCENTRIC TERMINATION
FLAT ROOF CLEARANCE
Figure 27
30
Spec Seq#: 76
4 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION INSTALLATION the piping to the concentric termination using field supplied
4" x 3" reducer couplings and short sections of 3 inch pipe
INTAKE AIR CONNECTION INTAKE AIR PIPE (18 inches or less) pipe. Do not exceed the maximum
3 INCH PVC
VENT PIPE equivalent vent length listed on page 23. Cement all fittings
3” x 3” x 4”
Y FITTING and pipe in place.
9. Return to Direct Vent Installation on page 24 to complete
the installation of the intake air and vent piping between the
concentric termination and the water heater.
VENT CONNECTION - 3 INCH PVC VENT CAP
VENT MAINTAIN 12” (30 cm)
VENT PIPE IS 2 1/2 INCH SDR-26 PIPE 18” (45 cm) FOR CANADA
SUPPLIED LENGTH 37 INCHES (94 cm) MINIMUM CLEARANCE
1285179
MINIMUM ALLOWABLE LENGTH 25 INCHES (64 cm) ABOVE HIGHEST ANTICIPATED
COMBUSTION
SNOW LEVEL. MAXIMUM OF
AIR
INTAKE AIR PIPE IS 4 INCH SDR-26 PIPE 24” (60 cm) ABOVE ROOF.
SUPPLIED LENGTH 24 INCHES (60 cm)
MINIMUM ALLOWABLE LENGTH 12 INCHES (30 cm)
ROOF FLASHING
INTAKE AIR PIPE (field supplied)
Y FITTING ASSEMBLY
STRAP
(field supplied)
VENT CAP NOTE: SECURING STRAP

VENT PIPE ASSEMBLY MUST BE FIELD INSTALLED
TO PREVENT MOVEMENT
OF TERMINATION KIT
4 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION KIT

FOUR PIECE KIT - FIELD ASSEMBLY REQUIRED VENT INTAKE
PIPE AIR PIPE
Figure 28
Assemble and install the 4 inch concentric termination. Refer to 4 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION
Figure 28, Figure 29 and Figure 30 for these instructions: VERTICAL INSTALLATION
1. Cement the Y fitting to the larger diameter intake air pipe.
Figure 29
2. Slide the intake air pipe and Y fitting assembly from inside the
building through the hole cut for the termination in the roof
or sidewall. Ensure no foreign materials such as insulation
accumulate inside the assembly. INTAKE AIR PIPE COMBUSTION
3. Secure the intake air Y fitting assembly using field supplied AIR
metal strapping or equivalent support materials. STRAP
(field supplied)
4. On installations installed through the roof slide a field
supplied plumbing boot or roof flashing over the intake air Y
VENT
fitting assembly and secure it to the roof.
5. Seal around the plumbing boot or roof flashing.
6. Cement the vent cap onto the vent pipe. Alternately a field- VENT PIPE
supplied stainless steel screw may be used to secure the 2
components together when field disassembly is desired for
NOTE: SECURING STRAP MUST BE
cleaning. A pilot hole must be drilled for the screw to prevent FIELD INSTALLED TO PREVENT
1 INCH
damage/cracking of the vent cap and/or vent pipe. MAXIMUM
MOVEMENT OF TERMINATION KIT
IN SIDEWALL.
7. Install the vent cap/vent pipe assembly into the intake air Y
fitting assembly, Ensure small diameter vent pipe is cemented
and bottomed in the Y fitting. 4 INCH CONCENTRIC TERMINATION
SIDEWALL INSTALLATION
8. When installing 3 inch intake air and vent piping connect
and cement the pipe directly to the concentric termination.
When installing 4 inch intake air and vent pipe - connect Figure 30
31
Spec Seq#: 76
MULTIPLE CONCENTRIC TERMINATION CLEARANCES Four Concentric Terminations

When installing multiple concentric terminations vertically through 1. When installing four concentric terminations through a roof or
a roof or horizontally through a sidewall ensure the required through a sidewall in close proximity they may be arranged
clearances (separation) between terminations are maintained. into stacked rows of two as shown in Figure 33 or lateral rows
Ensure multiple terminations are arranged or grouped as of two as shown in Figure 34.
required. 2. Four is the maximum number of concentric terminations that
NOTE: These clearances must be maintained to prevent the may be installed in a group where all terminations are in
recirculation of vent (exhaust) gases to the intake air. Clearances close proximity as shown in Figure 33.
are measured between the edges of the concentric termination
caps. A
When installing multiple concentric terminations through a roof
1285179
or through a sidewall the clearances shown in Figure 31 must
be maintained. CONCENTRIC
See Multiple Concentric Termination Arrangements on page 33. A TERMINATION

CAPS END VIEW
Close Proximity & Standard Clearance

1. The clearance between multiple termination caps must be 0 A = 0 - 2 INCHES (0 - 5 cm)
inches (touching) to a maximum of 2 inches (5 cm), dimension CLOSE PROXIMITY
A - Figure 31, when installing concentric terminations in close
FOUR CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS
proximity. See Figure 36 on page 33. (THROUGH A ROOF OR SIDEWALL)
2. The clearance between multiple termination caps must be
increased to a minimum of 24 inches (61 cm), dimension B - Figure 33
Figure 31, when installation in close proximity (above) is not
possible. This is the standard clearance.
CONCENTRIC
A B A
TERMINATION CAPS
A END VIEW
B
OR CONCENTRIC
TERMINATION
CAPS END VIEW
CLOSE PROXIMITY STANDARD CLEARANCE
A = 0 - 2 INCHES (0 - 5 cm) B = 24 INCHES (61 cm)
A = 0 - 2 INCHES (0 - 5 cm) B = 24 INCHES (61 cm) CLOSE PROXIMITY OR GREATER
OR GREATER
FOUR CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS
TWO CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS (THROUGH A ROOF OR SIDEWALL)
(THROUGH A ROOF OR SIDEWALL)
Figure 34
Figure 31
Groups Of Terminations
Three Concentric Terminations 1. When installing multiple groups of concentric terminations
1. When installing three concentric terminations through a roof through a roof or through a sidewall in close proximity they
or through a sidewall the third termination may be installed can be installed into stacked groups of four as shown in
in close proximity as indicated by dimension A in Figure 32. Figure 35. Lateral groups of four as shown in Figure 34 may
2. If close proximity installation of the third termination is not be a more convenient installation arrangement for multiple
possible the third termination may be installed as indicated groups depending on available space.
by dimension B in Figure 32.
CONCENTRIC
A B
TERMINATION
CONCENTRIC
TERMINATION A B CAPS END VIEW
CAPS END VIEW
A A
THIRD
TERMINATION
A = 0 - 2 INCHES (0 - 5 cm) B = 24 INCHES (61 cm) A = 0 - 2 INCHES (0 - 5 cm) B = 24 INCHES (61 cm)
CLOSE PROXIMITY OR GREATER CLOSE PROXIMITY OR GREATER BETWEEN
GROUPS OF FOUR
THREE CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS EIGHT CONCENTRIC TERMINATIONS
(THROUGH A ROOF OR SIDEWALL) (THROUGH A ROOF OR SIDEWALL)
Figure 32 Figure 35
32
Spec Seq#: 76
MULTIPLE CONCENTRIC TERMINATION ARRANGEMENTS

SIDEWALL
The illustrations on this page show some of the installation
arrangements for multiple concentric terminations that are
allowed.
See Multiple Concentric Termination Clearances on page
32 for detailed information on clearances and additional
arrangement options.
NOTE: When multiple concentric terminations are installed
through a roof in the same location all termination caps must be
at the same height measured from the ground.
1285179
Two Concentric Terminations
Two concentric terminations may be installed in close proximity ROOF
as shown in Figure 36 or with standard clearances when this
arrangement is not possible. See Figure 31 on page 32 for
detailed information on clearances. See Figure 32 on page 32
when installing three concentric terminations.
SIDEWALL
Figure 37
Eight Concentric Terminations
Eight concentric terminations may be installed in two stacked
groups of four, in close proximity, as shown in Figure 38. See
Figure 35 on page 32 for detailed information on clearances.
Lateral groups of four as shown in Figure 34 on page 32
may be a more convenient installation arrangement for multiple
groups depending on available space.
ROOF
SIDEWALL
Figure 36
Four Concentric Terminations

Four concentric terminations may be installed in close proximity
ROOF
as shown in Figure 37. See Figure 33 and Figure 34 on page
32 for detailed information on clearances and additional
arrangement options.
Figure 38
33
Spec Seq#: 76
LOW PROFILE VENT INSTALLATION To Heater Intake

Air Connection
This water heater is certified for sidewall direct venting with IPEX
System 636 Low Profile Vent Kit. Follow instructions below for From Heater Vent
proper installations. Pipe Connection
All termination kits must be located and installed in accordance
with locl building code and CSA B149.1 Natural Gas and Propane 12”
Installation Code. Possible Orientations Min to
Over-
1. Once the proper location has been determined, cut 2 holes in
Hang
the wall large enough to accomodate the pipe. See the Chart
at bottom of this page for pipe diameters and distance between Vent/Air
hole centers. Termination
1285179
2. Slide both the intake and exhaust pipes through the holes.
Solvent cement both pipes to the base of the vent termination 12”
kit, follow the solvent cementing procedures outlined in the Min
IPEX System 636 Installation Guide, which is available on the
Grade or
web www.ipexinc.com.
Snow Line
3. To fasten the Base to the wall, use the supplied screws and
anchors. A 3/16” (5mm) hole, 1-3/16” (30mm) deep, will need
to be drilled for the anchors. Locate the anchor hole using the Figure 40
base as a template.
4. Screw the Cap to the Base using the supplied screws.
5. Once the vent termination and pipes are secured, the wall
penetrations will need to be sealed from the interior using a
PVC-compatible sealant material. 12” Min between Edge of Air Inlet
6. All vent pipes and air inlets must terminate at the same height to Vent (Exhaust) and Adjacent Vent (Exhaust) Outlet
avoid possibility of severe personal injury, death, or substantial
property damage.
7. Operate heater through 1 heat cycle to ensure combustion-air and Air Inlet
vent pipes are properly connected to concentric vent termination.
Air Inlet
Piping
Vent Base
Vent (Exhaust) Vent Cap Vent/Air

Piping Termination
Figure 41
Figure 39
Low Profile Termination Kits - Dimensions and Contents Chart
Low Profile Termination Kits - Dimensions

Pipe Outside Hole Spacing
Kit Number IPEX Part Number Description
Diameter (ctr to ctr)
9008933005 196985 3″ Flush Mount Vent Kit 3.5″ 5.63″
9008934005 196986 4″ Flush Mount Vent Kit 4.5″ 5.63″
Each Kit Contains

Qty Item Description
1 Base (two holes)
1 Cap (one hole)
8 Stainless Steel Screws
4 Plastic Anchors
34
Spec Seq#: 76
VENTING ARRANGEMENTS
1285179
Enlarged View of
Direct Vent Air Intake
Moisture Protection
Power Vent Vertical Power Vent Horizontal Direct Vent Vertical

Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44
Enlarged View of
Moisture Protection
Enlarged View of
Moisture Protection
* Enlarged View of
* Moisture Protection
*
* *
Direct Vent Horizontal Direct Vent Vertical Vent Direct Vent Horizontal Vent
Figure 45 Horizontal Intake Vertical Intake
Figure 46 Figure 47
*Direct Vent combustion air intake drains are required in certain situations. See the section on Direct
Vent Air Intake Moisture Protection on page 25.
35
Spec Seq#: 76
VENTING ARRANGEMENTS
1285179
Enlarged View of
Moisture Protection
Enlarged View of
* Enlarged View of
Moisture Protection
Moisture Protection
* *
*
* *
Direct Vent Vertical Concentric Direct Vent Horizontal Concentric Direct Vent Horizontal Low Profile
Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50
*Direct Vent combustion air intake drains are required in certain situations. See the section on Direct
Vent Air Intake Moisture Protection on page 25.
36
Spec Seq#: 76
TERMINATION CLEARANCES SIDEWALL POWER VENT
POWER VENT
(using room air for combustion)
EXTERIOR CLEARANCES FOR SIDEWALL VENT TERMINATION
D H
1285179
E
B
L B
B
C
M
B
I
F
B J K
Figure 51
Vent terminal clearances for “Power Vent” installations. Power Vent configurations use room air for combustion.
1 2 1 2
CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS US INSTALLATIONS CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS US INSTALLATIONS
Clearance to each side Clearance in accordance

Clearance above grade, Clearance in accordance with
of center line extended with local installation codes
A veranda, porch, deck or 12 inches (30 cm) 12 inches (30 cm) H above meter/regulator
local installation codes and the
and the requirements of
balcony requirements of the gas supplier
assembly the gas supplier
6 in (15 cm) for appliances

Above a regulator within 3 ft (91 cm)
≤ 10,000 Btuh (3 kW), 4 feet (1.2 m) below Clearance in accordance
Clearance to window Clearance to service horizontally of the vertical
12 in (30 cm) for appliances > 10,000 or to side of opening; with local installation codes
B or door that may be
Btuh (3 kW) and ≤ 100,000 Btuh 1 foot (30 cm) above I regulator vent outlet center line of the regulator vent
and the requirements of
opened outlet to a maximum vertical
(30 kW), 36 in (91 cm) for appliances opening the gas supplier
distance of 15 ft (4.5 m)
>100,000 Btuh (30 kW)

Clearance to a non
≤ 10,000 Btuh (3 kW), 12 in (30 cm) 4 feet (1.2 m) below or to
Clearance to mechanical air supply
for appliances > 10,000 Btuh (3 kW) side of opening; 1 foot
C permanently closed 12 inches (30 cm)* 12 inches (30 cm)* J inlet into building or
and ≤ 100,000 Btuh (30 kW), 36 in (30 cm) above opening.
window combustion air inlet to
(91 cm) for appliances >100,000
any other appliance
Btuh (30 kW)
Vertical clearance to
ventilated soffit located
3 feet (91 cm) above if
above the terminal Clearance to a
within
D within a horizontal 12 inches (30 cm)* 12 inches (30 cm)* K mechanical air supply 6 feet (1.83 m)
10 feet (3 m) horizontally
distance of 2 feet (61 inlet
cm) from the center line
of the terminal
Clearance above paved
Clearance to sidewalk or paved 7 feet (2.13 m)
E unventilated soffit
12 inches (30 cm)* 12 inches (30 cm)* L driveway located on
7 feet (2.13 m)†
public property
Clearance under
Clearance to outside
F corner
2 feet (60 cm)* 2 feet (60 cm)* M veranda, porch, deck, or 12 inches (30 cm) ‡ 12 inches (30 cm) ‡
balcony
Clearance to inside
G corner
18 inches (45 cm)* 18 inches (45 cm)*
1 In accordance with the current CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.
2 In accordance with the current ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code.
† A vent shall not terminate directly above a sidewalk or paved driveway that is located between two single family dwellings and serves both dwellings.
Where it may cause hazardous frost or ice accumulations on adjacent property surfaces.
‡ Permitted only if veranda, porch, deck, or balcony is fully open on a minimum of two sides beneath the floor.
* Clearance in accordance with local installation codes and the requirements of the gas supplier and the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
37
Spec Seq#: 76
TERMINATION CLEARANCES SIDEWALL DIRECT VENT
DIRECT VENT
(using outdoor air for combustion)
EXTERIOR CLEARANCES FOR SIDEWALL VENT TERMINATION
D HH
1285179
E
B
L B
B
C
M
B
I
F
B J K
Figure 52
Vent terminal clearances for “Direct Vent” installations. Direct Vent configurations use outdoor air for combustion.
1 2 1 2
CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS US INSTALLATIONS CANADIAN INSTALLATIONS US INSTALLATIONS
Clearance to each side Clearance in accordance

Clearance above grade, Clearance in accordance with
of center line extended with local installation codes
A veranda, porch, deck or 12 inches (30 cm) 12 inches (30 cm) H above meter/regulator
local installation codes and the
and the requirements of the
balcony requirements of the gas supplier.
assembly gas supplier.
6 in (15 cm) for

appliances ≤ 10,000
Btuh (3 kW), 9 in (23 Above a regulator within 3 ft (91
≤ 10,000 Btuh (3 kW), 12 in Clearance in accordance
cm) for appliances cm) horizontally of the vertical
Clearance to window or (30 cm) for appliances > 10,000 Clearance to service with local installation codes
B door that may be opened Btuh (3 kW) and ≤ 100,000 Btuh
> 10,000 Btuh (3 kW) I regulator vent outlet
center line of the regulator vent
and the requirements of the
and ≤ 50,000 Btuh (15 outlet to a maximum vertical
(30 kW), 36 in (91 cm) for gas supplier
kW), 12 in (30 cm) for distance of 15 ft (4.5 m)
appliances >100,000 Btuh (30 kW)
appliances > 50,000
Btuh (15 kW)

Clearance to a non ≤ 10,000 Btuh (3 kW), 9 in
≤ 10,000 Btuh (3 kW), 12 in
Clearance to mechanical air supply (23 cm) for appliances
(30 cm) for appliances > 10,000
C permanently closed 6 inches (15 cm)* 6 inches (15 cm)* J inlet into building or
Btuh (3 kW) and ≤ 100,000 Btuh
> 10,000 Btuh (3 kW) and
window combustion air inlet to ≤ 50,000 Btuh (15 kW), 12 in
(30 kW), 36 in (91 cm) for appliances
any other appliance (30 cm) for appliances
>100,000 Btuh (30 kW)
> 50,000 Btuh (15 kW)
Vertical clearance to
ventilated soffit located
Clearance to a
above the terminal within 3 feet (91 cm) above if within
D a horizontal distance of
12 inches (30 cm)* 12 inches (30 cm)* K mechanical air supply 6 feet (1.83 m)
10 feet (3 m) horizontally
inlet
2 feet (61 cm) from the
center line of the terminal
Clearance above
Clearance to unventilated paved sidewalk or
E soffit
12 inches (30 cm)* 12 inches (30 cm)* L paved driveway located
7 feet (2.13 m)† 7 feet (2.13 m)†*
on public property
Clearance under
Clearance to outside
F corner
2 feet (60 cm)* 2 feet (60 cm)* M veranda, porch, deck, 12 inches (30 cm) ‡ 12 inches (30 cm) ‡*
or balcony
Clearance to inside
G corner
18 inches (45 cm)* 18 inches (45 cm)*
1 In accordance with the current CSA B149.1, Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.
2 In accordance with the current ANSI Z223.1/NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code.
† A vent shall not terminate directly above a sidewalk or paved driveway that is located between two single family dwellings and serves both dwellings.
Where it may cause hazardous frost or ice accumulations on adjacent property surfaces.
‡ Permitted only if veranda, porch, deck, or balcony is fully open on a minimum of two sides beneath the floor.
* Clearance in accordance with local installation codes and the requirements of the gas supplier and the manufacturer’s installation instructions.
38
Spec Seq#: 76
WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

CONDENSATE DRAIN INSTALLATION INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Ensure the water heater’s Enable/Disable switch is in the
Installation must conform with these instructions and local “Disable” position.
building codes.
Field supplied materials required for installation include: 2. Install a 1/2 inch PVC condensate drain line between
condensate drain connection on the Exhaust/Condensate Elbow
• Approved PVC cement and PVC primer.
and a suitable building drain. The condensate line must slope
• 1/2 inch PVC pipe - minimum length to equal the distance
between the water heater and a suitable building drain. to an open drain, see Figure 53.
• 1/2 inch PVC fittings (elbows, couplings, and adapters) 3. Terminate the condensate drain piping with an elbow above
1285179
necessary to install a condensate drain line between the the drain. Ensure that any discharge will exit the condensate
Exhaust/Condensate Elbow Assembly and a suitable
building drain. drain line no more than 6 inches (15.2 cm) above a suitable
• Floor mounted standoffs to brace the drain line. building drain, or external to the building, see Figure 53.
INSTALLATION NOTES NOTE: In cold climates it is recommended the condensate

drain be terminated at a suitable drain inside the building.
1. The condensate drains from the water heater’s covered by
this instruction have PH levels between 4.3 and 5.0. Install 4. Ensure the condensate drain line is not elevated above the
a commercially available neutralizing kit if required by local condensate drain connection on the Exhaust/Condensate
codes. Lower PH levels are acidic. Do not connect a metal Elbow, see Figure 53.
condensate drain line, such as copper pipe, to the water
heater for this reason. 5. Brace the condensate drain line with floor mounted standoffs
every three feet.
2. The field installed condensate drain line must not be less
than 1/2 inch PVC in size. 6. Ensure the condensate drains freely during start up, see
Start Up on page 53.
3. The exhaust elbow has a built in condensate trap. Do not
install an additional trap in the condensate drain piping. DO 7. Condensate clean out cap must be on and tight when unit is
NOT remove, modify or alter the factory condensate trap. in operation.
EXHAUST/CONDENSATE
(VENT) ELBOW CONDENSATE DRAIN
LINE - FIELD
INSTALLED
PRESSURE PORT DRAIN LINE TO
TERMINATE NO
1/2” NPT MORE THAN 6
CONDENSATE
DRAIN INCHES (15.2 cm)
CONNECTION ABOVE DRAIN
BUILDING
CONDENSATE DRAIN
CLEANOUT
Figure 53
39
Spec Seq#: 76
SUPPLY GAS LINE INSTALLATION GAS LINE SIZING

Depending on the developed equivalent length and/or the number
Contact your local gas utility company to ensure that adequate of appliances connected to a common main, the size of supply gas
gas service is available and to review applicable installation lines may have to be increased.
codes for your area. Size the supply/main gas line(s) in accordance with Table 11
Be sure that the gas meter has sufficient capacity to supply the or Table 12. The values given in Table 11 and Table 12 are for
rated gas input of the water heater as well as the requirements straight lengths of iron pipe at 0.5" W. C. (125 Pa) pressure drop,
of all other gas fired equipment supplied by the meter. If the which is considered normal for low pressure systems. Note that
gas meter is undersized, the gas company will have to install a fittings such as elbows and tees will add to the pipe pressure drop.
properly sized gas meter. Schedule 40 Steel or Wrought Iron Pipe is the preferred material
for the gas line of this water heater. It is imperative to follow the
sizing recommendations in the latest version of the National Fuel
1285179
Gas Code if Corrugated Stainless Steel Tubing (CSST) is used
as the gas line for this water heater.
Fire and Explosion Hazard
SUPPLY GAS LINE SIZING U. S. UNITS
Do not use water heater with any gas TABLE 11
other than the gas shown on the rating
label. LENGTH NORMAL IRON PIPE SIZES (INCHES)
Excessive gas pressure to gas valve can IN INPUT IN THOUSANDS BTU/HR
cause serious injury or death. FEET 1/2” 3/4” 1” 1 1/4” 1 1/2” 2”
10 175 360 680 1400 2100 3960
agency for installation and service. 20 120 250 485 950 1460 2750
30 97 200 375 770 1180 2200
Make sure gas supplied is same type listed on the water heater’s
40 82 170 320 660 990 1900
rating label.
50 73 151 285 580 900 1680
The water heaters covered in this manual are not intended for
operation at higher than 14.0" W. C. (2.62 kPa) for natural gas and 60 66 138 260 530 810 1520
14.0" W. C. (3.49 kPa) for propane gas supply pressure, see Table 70 61 125 240 490 750 1400
3 on page 11. The water heaters covered in this manual require
80 57 118 220 460 690 1300
supply gas regulators to maintain required supply gas pressure.
Exposure to higher gas supply pressure may cause damage to the 90 53 110 205 430 650 1220
gas controls which could result in fire or explosion. If overpressure 100 50 103 195 400 620 1150
has occurred such as through improper testing of gas lines or
125 44 93 175 360 550 1020
malfunction of the supply system the water heater’s gas valve
must be checked for safe operation by a Qualified Service Agency. 150 40 84 160 325 500 950
Ensure supply regulator vent lines and the safety vent valves are 175 37 77 145 300 460 850
protected against blockage. These are components of the gas 200 35 72 135 280 430 800
supply system, not the water heater. Vent blockage may occur
during ice storms. SUPPLY GAS LINE SIZING METRIC UNITS
It is important to guard against gas valve fouling from TABLE 12
contaminants in the gas ways. Such fouling may cause improper LENGTH NORMAL IRON PIPE SIZES (INCHES)
operation, fire or explosion. If copper supply lines are used they
IN INPUT IN kW
must be internally tinned and certified for gas service.
METERS 1/2” 3/4” 1” 1 1/4” 1 1/2” 2”
3.0 51 105 199 410 615 1160
REGULATED GAS
SUPPLY LINE
6.1 35 73 142 278 428 805
MAIN GAS 9.1 28 59 110 225 346 644
SHUTOFF VALVE 12.2 24 50 94 193 290 556
TEE FITTING
15.2 21 44 83 170 264 492
SEDIMENT TRAP 18.3 19 40 76 155 237 445
21.3 18 37 70 143 220 410
PIPE CAP
24.4 17 35 64 135 202 381
27.4 16 32 60 126 190 357
Figure 54
30.5 15 30 57 117 182 337
Ensure all gas pipe is clean on the inside before installation. To
38.1 13 27 51 105 161 299
trap any dirt or foreign material in the gas supply line a sediment
trap must be installed as shown in Figure 54. The sediment trap 45.7 12 25 47 95 146 278
must be readily accessible and not subject to freezing conditions. 53.3 11 23 42 88 135 249
Install in accordance with the recommendations of the local gas
61.0 10 21 40 82 126 234
utility company.
40
Spec Seq#: 76
GAS LINE CONNECTION GAS LINE LEAK TESTING

1. The water heaters covered by this manual are shipped from
the factory with 3/4 inch supply gas connections. The supply
gas line must not be smaller than 3/4 inch. Connect the supply
gas line to the water heater's 24 Volt Gas Valve in accordance Fire and Explosion Hazard
with all applicable local and national code requirements.
Use joint compound or Teflon tape
2. Depending on the developed equivalent length and/or the compatible with propane gas.
number of appliances connected to a common main, the
Leak test gas connections before
size of the supply gas line may have to be increased, see
placing water heater in operation.
Gas Line Sizing on page 40. If the supply gas line must
be re-sized larger to accommodate increased supply gas line Disconnect gas piping at main
1285179
lengths or multiple appliances use reducer couplings and gas shutoff valve before leak
short pipe nipples to increase the supply gas line. testing heater.
Install sediment trap in
NOTE: Make the transition to the larger supply gas line as
accordance with NFPA 54 or
close to the supply gas connection as possible.
CAN/CSA B149.1.
3. Apply thread sealing compounds (pipe dope/Teflon tape) Any time work is done on the gas supply system perform a leak
sparingly and only to the male threads of the pipe joints. Do test to avoid the possibility of fire or explosion.
not apply sealing compound to the first two threads. Use pipe
dope or Teflon tape marked as being resistant to the action of 1. For test pressures exceeding 1/2 psi (3.45 kPa) disconnect
liquid petroleum (LP/propane) gases. the water heater and its Main Gas Shutoff Valve from the
gas supply piping system during testing, see Figure 54
on page 40. The gas supply line must be capped when
SUPPLY GAS CONNECTION disconnected from the water heater.
FACTORY INSTALLED
TEE FITTING 2. For test pressures of 1/2 psi (3.45 kpa) or less, the water
LOW GAS PRESSURE heater need not be disconnected, but must be isolated from
SWITCH
the supply gas line by closing the Main Gas Shutoff Valve
during testing.
3. Paint all supply gas line joints and connections upstream of
the water heater with a rich soap and water solution to test
for leaks. Bubbles indicate a gas leak. Do not use matches,
candles, flame or other sources of ignition for this purpose.
4. Repair any leaks before placing the water heater in operation.
COMBUSTION
BLOWER
PURGING
Gas line purging is required with new piping or systems.
SUPPLY GAS LINE CONNECTION Purging should be performed per the current edition of NFPA 54
the National Fuel Gas Code or CAN/CSA B149.1 Natural Gas
Figure 55 and Propane Installation Code.
4. Use only a smooth jaw adjustable wrench as a back up ELECTRICAL WIRING
on the body of the 24 Volt Gas Valve when tightening the
first pipe nipple into the body of the valve. DO NOT use a All electrical work must be installed in accordance with the
standard pipe wrench (Stillson wrench) with metal tooth jaws National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70 or the Canadian
as this may permanently damage the valve. Electrical Code, CSA C22.1 and local requirements.
5. Use a standard pipe wrench (Stillson wrench) as a back up When installed, the water heater must be electrically grounded
on the first pipe nipple installed above when connecting other in accordance with local codes or, in the absence of local codes,
fittings and pipe in the supply gas line to prevent the 24 Volt with the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70 or the Canadian
Gas Valve on the water heater from twisting during installation.
Electrical Code, CSA C22.1.
6. To prevent damage, care must be taken not to apply too
If any of the original wire as supplied with the water heater must
much torque when connecting the supply gas line to the
water heater. be replaced, it must be replaced with 105°C rated wiring or its
equivalent, except in the burner housing. In this case 200°C
7. Install a sediment trap as shown in Figure 54 on page 40. rated wire must be used.
8. Install a Main Gas Shutoff valve in the supply gas line as DEDICATED POWER WIRING AND BREAKERS
shown in Figure 54 on page 40. Dedicated power supply wires, ground wiring and dedicated
NOTE: Should overheating occur or the gas supply fail to shut circuit breakers often prevent electrical line noise and are
off, turn off the Main Gas Shutoff valve to the water heater. required when installing the water heater.
NOTE: This water heater should not be connected to an electrical
supply with a Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) or Arc Fault
Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) with Integral GFCI protection as defined
in NFPA 70, CSA C22.1 and UL 943.
41
Spec Seq#: 76
POWER SUPPLY CONNECTIONS heating operation during periods when the building is unoccupied
Read the requirements for the Power Supply on page 13 or there is no demand for hot water.
before connecting power. To use the enable/disable circuit it must first be activated by
The 120 VAC hot wire from the power supply must connect to selecting the “Use External Enable” from the UIM. Field supplied
the black jumper wire or the "L1" terminal block location in the wiring is then installed between the water heater’s CCB and a
junction box and the 120 VAC neutral wire must connect to the set of “dry contacts” (no voltage or load) on the field supplied
white jumper wire or the "Neutral" terminal block location in the external control.
junction box for correct polarity. See Figure 56. NOTE: The water heater’s enable/disable circuit is a switching
Power supply connections must be made as follows: circuit only: Do not apply external voltage or connect any load
1. Turn off power at the water heater's enable/disable switch (IE: relay coil) to this circuit. This will damage the CCB circuit
and the breaker that supplies power to the water heater. board and is not covered under the limited warranty.
1285179
2. Remove the junction box cover. See Figure 3 on page 8 for CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL SUPERVISORY CONTROL
junction box location. The enable/disable circuit is accessed from the CCB’s J17 plug
3. Connect the 120VAC hot wire from the power supply to the inside the CCB enclosure; see Figure 3 on page 8 to locate the
black jumper wire or the terminal block location marked CCB enclosure. Install field wiring to the enable/disable circuit:
"L1" inside of the junction box located on top of the water 1. Turn off power at the water heater’s enable/disable switch
heater. If the black jumper wire is used make the connection and the breaker that supplies power to the water heater.
inside of the junction box with a properly sized wire nut and
2. Locate the CCB enclosure.
wrap electrical tape around the wire nut and wire end. See
junction box Figure 56 and wiring diagram Figure 67 on 3. Carefully remove the Temperature Probe connectors and
page 67. CCB enclosure cover.
NOTE: If electrical connection is made directly to terminal 4. Locate pins 1 and 2 on the CCB J17 plug. See Figure 66 on
block remove black jumper wire before making connection. page 66.
4. Connect the 120VAC neutral wire from the power supply to 5. Connect the two field supplied control wires to pins 1 and 2
the white jumper wire or the terminal block location marked on the CCB J17 plug.
"Neutral" inside of the junction box located on top of the 6. Thread the control wires out of the CCB enclosure with
water heater. If the white jumper wire is used, make the the other wiring and carefully replace the CCB enclosure
connection inside of the junction box with a properly sized cover. Ensure all wiring is routed through the intended area
wire nut and wrap electrical tape around the wire nut and provided for strain relief. Ensure no wiring is being pinched.
wire end. See junction box Figure 56 and wiring diagram
Figure 67 on page 67. 7. Reinstall the CCB enclosure cover and Temperature Probe
connectors.
NOTE: If electrical connection is made directly to terminal
block remove white jumper wire before making connection. 8. Route the control wires inside the junction box on the top
of the water heater; see Figure 3 on page 8 to locate the
5. Connect the ground wire from the power supply to the junction box. Use an available knock-out to route the wires
grounding lug inside the junction box. See junction box inside the junction box.
Figure 56 and Wiring Diagram Figure 67 on page 67.
9. Install field supplied control wiring and conduit as
6. Replace junction box cover when connections are complete. required by national and local codes between the water
NOTE: Do not apply power to the water heater before installation heater’s junction box and the external supervisory
is complete and the water heater is filled with water. control. Connect the wiring from the external control to
the control wires inside the junction box using wire nuts
Ground
and electrical tape.
Heater Wiring
(Factory Installed)
Terminal 10. Connect the control wiring to a set of dry contacts on
the external control. Follow the control manufacturer’s
Jumper Wire
instructions for making connections.
MOV 11. Restore power to the water heater.
Ground
12. From the water heaters UIM “Heater Information Screen”
select “Use External Enable” and change to “Yes”. See
L1 Figure 3 on page 8 to locate the UIM.
Neutral NOTE: Whenever the external control opens the set of dry
contacts used, water heating operation will be disabled.
Whenever the external control closes the set of dry contacts
Figure 56 used, water heating operation will be enabled. A diagonal line and
circle appears over the thermometer icon on the UIM when water
ENABLE / DISABLE CIRCUIT (For Building heating operation is disabled. See the Status Icons descriptions
Management Systems) in Table 14 on page 46.
The water heaters covered in this manual are equipped with NOTE: Ensure the water heater is protected from freezing
an enable/disable circuit for use with field supplied external temperatures when water heating operation is disabled. Damage
supervisory controls such as time clocks or Building Management to the water heater caused by freezing temperatures is not
Systems. The enable/disable circuit may be used to disable covered under the limited warranty.
42
Spec Seq#: 76
WATER LINE CONNECTIONS T&P VALVE DISCHARGE PIPE

The water piping installation must conform to these instructions
and to all local and national code authority having jurisdiction.
Good practice requires that all heavy piping be supported.
Read and observe all requirements in the following sections Explosion Hazard
before installation of the water piping begins:
1. Mixing Valves on page 14. Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve
2. Dishwashing Machines on page 14. must comply with ANSI Z21.22-
CSA 4.4 and ASME code.
3. Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve on page 15.
1285179
4. Closed Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14.
5. For multiple water heater installations see Water Piping
installed in opening provided.
Diagrams beginning on page 69.
WATER PIPING DIAGRAMS Can result in overheating and
This manual provides detailed water piping diagrams for typical excessive tank pressure.
methods of application for the water heaters, see Water Piping
Diagrams beginning 69. Can cause serious injury or death.
The water heater may be installed by itself, or with a separate
storage tank. When used with a separate storage tank, the
circulation may be either by gravity or by means of a circulating This water heater is provided with a properly rated/sized and
pump. When a circulating pump is used, it is important to note certified combination temperature - pressure (T&P) relief
that the flow rate should be slow so that there will be a minimum valve by the manufacturer. See Temperature-Pressure Relief
of turbulence inside the water heater storage tank. Valve on page 15 for information on replacement and other
requirements.
Adjust flow by throttling a full port ball valve installed in the
CAUTION
circulating line on the outlet side of the pump. Never throttle flow
on the suction side of a pump. See the Water Piping Diagrams
beginning on page 69.
NOTE: In addition to the factory installed Temperature-Pressure
Water Damage Hazard
Relief Valve (T&P valve) on the water heater, each remote
storage tank that may be installed and piped to a water heating • Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve discharge
appliance must also have its own properly sized, rated and pipe must terminate at adequate drain.
approved Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve installed.
Call the toll free technical support phone number listed on the
back cover of this manual for further assistance in sizing a T&P Install a discharge pipe between the T&P valve discharge opening
valve for remote storage tanks. and a suitable floor drain. Do not connect discharge piping
directly to the drain unless a 6” (15.2 cm) air gap is provided.
THERMOMETERS (NOT SUPPLIED)
To prevent bodily injury, hazard to life, or property damage, the
Thermometers are installed in the water piping system as a relief valve must be allowed to discharge water in adequate
means of detecting the temperature of the hot water supply quantities should circumstances demand. If the discharge pipe is
at critical points in the system. Field supplied thermometers not connected to a drain or other suitable means, the water flow
should be obtained and installed. See Water Piping Diagrams may cause property damage.
on page 69.
T&P Valve Discharge Pipe Requirements:
WATER (POTABLE) HEATING AND SPACE HEATING
• Shall not be smaller in size than the outlet pipe size of the
1. All water piping components connected to the water heater
valve, or have any reducing couplings or other restrictions.
that are for space heating applications shall be suitable for
use with potable water. • Shall not be plugged or blocked.
2. Toxic chemicals, such as those used for boiler treatment, • Shall not be exposed to freezing temperatures.
must NEVER be introduced into this system. • Shall be of material listed for hot water distribution.
3. The water heaters covered in this manual may never be • Shall be installed so as to allow complete drainage of both the
connected to any existing heating system or component(s) Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve and the discharge pipe.
previously used with non-potable water heating appliance. • Must terminate a maximum of six inches above a floor
4. When the system requires water for space heating that drain or external to the building. In cold climates, it is
exceed safe temperatures at domestic water fixtures a mixing recommended that the discharge pipe be terminated at an
valve must be installed, see Mixing Valves on page 14. adequate drain inside the building.
5. These water heaters cannot be used in space heating • Shall not have any valve or other obstruction between the
applications only. relief valve and the drain.
43
Spec Seq#: 76
TEMPERATURE REGULATION
HIGH TEMPERATURE LIMIT CONTROL (ECO) TABLE 13
This water heater is equipped with an ECO (energy cut out) non Water Temperature Time for 1st Degree Burn
2nd & 3rd Degree
adjustable high temperature limit switch. The ECO is a normally (Most Severe Burns)
closed switch that opens (activates) on a rise in temperature. 110 (43) (normal shower temp.)
116 (47) (pain threshold)
The ECO is located inside the Upper Temperature Probe (two 116 (47) 35 minutes 45 minutes
red wires), see pages 8 and 9 for location. The ECO switch 122 (50) 1 minute 5 minutes
contacts will open when the water temperature reaches 131 (55) 5 seconds 25 seconds
approximately 202°F (94°C) and close at approximately 140 (60) 2 seconds 5 seconds
149 (65) 1 second 2 seconds
1285179
140°F (60°C).
154 (68) instantaneous 1 second
If the ECO activates (contacts open) due to abnormally high (U.S. Government Memorandum, C.P.S.C., Peter L. Armstrong, Sept. 15, 1978)
water temperatures in the storage tank the control system will
immediately de-energize the 24 Volt Gas Valve and end the The water heaters covered in this manual are equipped with an
current heating cycle. The control system will "lock out" disabling electronic control system to regulate water temperature inside
further heating operation. The control system will display the the storage tank. The control system senses temperature from
"Energy Cut Out (ECO)" Fault message on the LCD screen. two factory installed temperature probes, one installed in the top
It is important that a Qualified Service Agent be contacted to of the storage tank and one installed near the bottom, See Top
determine the reason for the ECO activation before resetting the View on page 8 and Figure 4 on page 9 for location.
ECO. Once the reason has been determined and corrected the The “Operating Set Point” is adjusted to regulate water temperature
ECO can be reset as follows: inside the storage tank. This is an adjustable user setting in
Should the ECO activate, the water temperature must drop below the control system’s “Temperatures Menu.” This and all control
140°F (60°C) before the control system can be reset. Once the system menus are accessed through the UIM (user interface
water temperature has cooled below this point the power supply module) located on the front of the water heater, see Figure 57.
to the water heater must be turned off and on again to reset the The Operating Set Point is adjustable from 90°F (32°C) to 180°F
control system. (82°C). The factory setting is 120°F (49°C). See Operating Set
Point And Differential Adjustment on page 48 for instructions
THERMOSTAT CONTROL
on how to adjust the Operating Set Point and other user settings.
Set the Operating Set Point at the lowest setting which produces
Water temperature over 125°F (52°C) an acceptable hot water supply. This will always provide the most
can cause severe burns instantly energy efficient operation.
resulting in severe injury or death.
MODULATION
Children, the elderly and the The water heaters covered by this manual are capable of
physically or mentally disabled are at modulating their firing rate. The CCB monitors the water
highest risk for scald injury. temperature in the tank and regulates the firing rate to achieve
Feel water before bathing or the target temperature setpoint. The firing rate is dictated by the
showering. hot water draw, proximity to the tank temperature setpoint, and
various other temperature limitations.
Temperature limiting devices such as
HIGH TEMPERATURE APPLICATIONS
mixing valves must be installed
when required by codes and to Higher operating temperatures cause more wear on all water
ensure safe temperatures at fixtures. heaters and will decrease the life span of the water heater.
Consider installing a small booster water heater for high
temperature applications, such as commercial dishwashers, to
Hot water temperatures required for automatic dishwasher and raise the outlet temperature from the larger primary water heater
laundry use can cause scald burns resulting in serious personal to the desired point of use temperature.
injury and/or death. Table 13 shows the approximate time-to- Contact your local distributor or call the technical support phone
burn relationship for normal adult skin. number listed on the back cover of this manual for further
The temperature at which injury occurs varies with the person’s technical assistance.
age and duration of exposure. The slower response time of
children, the elderly or disabled persons increases the hazards
to them. If anyone using hot water provided by the water heater Tank Temperature 103°F
being installed fits into one of these groups or if there is a local
code or state law requiring a certain water temperature at the
Operating Set Point 120°F
Status: Heating
point of use, then special precautions must be taken.
In addition to using the lowest possible temperature setting that OFF
satisfies the demand of the application a mixing valve can be GAS O
N
installed at the water heater (see Figure 7 on page 14) or at
the hot water taps to further reduce system water temperature.
MENU HELP
Never allow small children to use a hot water tap or draw their own
bath water. Never leave a child or disabled person unattended in Figure 57
a bathtub or shower.
The water heater should be located in an area where the general
public does not have access to set temperatures.
Setting the Operating Set Point at 120°F (49°C) will reduce
the risk of scalds. Some States require settings at specific
lower temperatures.
44
Spec Seq#: 76
CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION

OVERVIEW THE DESKTOP SCREEN
The water heaters covered in this manual are equipped with an During normal operation the control system will display the
electronic control system that regulates water temperature inside the "Desktop" screen on the LCD Touch Display which is the default
storage tank. Heating cycles and ignition are managed by the control screen. The control system will return to the Desktop screen
system. The ECO (energy cut out), flame sensor, pressure switches when there are no active Fault or Alert conditions or when there
has been no user input for several minutes.
and temperature probes are monitored by the control system. The
Combustion Blower, Spark Ignition Transformer, 24 Volt Gas • Manufacturer and water heater model information is
Valve and anode rods are all powered by the control system. displayed in Title Bar at the top of the Desktop screen.
Menu titles are displayed in the Title Bar when navigating
1285179
The main components of the control system are a UIM (user
the control system menus.
interface module) and a CCB (central control board). The UIM
is located on the top front side of the water heater. The CCB is • The first temperature shown on the Desktop screen, Tank
mounted on top of the water heater inside a protective enclosure. Temperature, is the temperature of the water inside the
This unit is equipped with an Enable/Disable switch. To operate water heater's storage tank.
unit, make sure the switch is set to Enable. See Features And • The second temperature shown on the Desktop screen
Components on page 7 for location of these and all water is the Operating Set Point. The Operating Set Point is the
heater components. temperature at which the control system will maintain the
water inside the storage tank.
POWER • Beneath the Operating Set Point is the "Status" line. The
SUPPLY Status line shows the current operational state of the
BOARD control system in real time, see Table 15 on page 47 for a
description of the various operational states.
• The Desktop screen also displays animated "Status Icons"
to convey operational information, see Table 14 on page
CCB 46 for descriptions of the Status Icons.
BOARD
TRANSFORMER
Figure 58
CONTROL SYSTEM NAVIGATION

All operational information and user settings are displayed and
accessed from the UIM. The UIM houses the control system's
LCD Touch Display (liquid crystal display).
UIM (user interface module)

Desktop Screen Shown
LCD Touch Display Title Bar
Information
Tank Temperature 103°F
Display
Operating Set Point 120°F
Status: Heating
Status Icons OFF
GAS O
N
MENU HELP
Enable/Disable Switch
Operational menus are multi functional.
Figure 59
45
Spec Seq#: 76
STATUS ICONS
The Status Icons are displayed on the Desktop screen and convey operational and diagnostic information. The icons are described
in the table below. See Figure 59 on page 45. Ensure the water heater is properly grounded. Flame sensing requires an adequate
earth ground. If the water heater is not properly grounded it will cause Ignition Failure. See Electrical Connections on page 57.
TABLE 14
Icon Description
Water temperature in the tank has fallen. Shaded area of the animated thermometer icon will rise and fall in response to
water temperature in the storage tank as sensed from the Upper and Lower Temperature Probes. See page 8 and Figure
4 on page 9 for location of Temperature Probes.
Water temperature in the tank has reached the Operating Set Point. The control system enters the Standby mode.
1285179
The control is unable to initiate a heating cycle. This will happen whenever a Fault condition is detected by the control system
or when the Enable/Disable switch on front panel is in disable position or Building Management system Enable/Disable
circuit is an open circuit. Display will read "Status: Water Heating Disabled". For more information see Enable / Disable
Circuit (For Building Management Systems) on page 42.
The Combustion Blower is being energized.
The Spark Igniter is being energized. See Figure 2 on page 7 for Spark Igniter location.
OFF The 24 Volt Gas Valve is being energized.

GAS O
N
The control system has sensed flame at the Main Burner from the flame sensor. See the Sequence Of Operation Flow Chart
on page 58 and Figure 2 on page 7.
The control system has declared a Fault condition and must be inspected/serviced by a Qualified Service Agent. Fault
message details can be viewed in the Current Fault menu. Heating operation is disabled (lock out) until the condition that
caused the Fault is corrected. Power to the water heater must be cycled off and on at the breaker to reset the control system.
NOTE: Cycling power will not reset the control system if the condition that caused the Fault has not been corrected.
The control system has declared an Alert condition and must be inspected/serviced by a Qualified Service Agent. The water
heater will continue to operate during an Alert condition.
46
Spec Seq#: 76
OPERATING STATES
The current operational state of the water heater is displayed on the Desktop screen as the "Status." The common operational states
are described in the table below. See Figure 59 on page 45. Ensure the water heater is properly grounded. Flame sensing requires
an adequate earth ground. If the water heater is not properly grounded it will cause Ignition Failure. See Electrical Connections on
page 57.
TABLE 15
State Description
Standby The water heater is not in an active heating cycle. IE: the Tank Temperature is at or above the Operating Set Point.
Input Verification The control system is conducting a diagnostic check at the beginning of a heating cycle.
Water Heating A Fault condition is detected by the control, the Enable/Disable switch on front panel is in disable position, or the Building
1285179
Disabled Management system Enable/Disable is an open circuit.
Pre-Purge The Combustion Blower is energized to flush residual flue gases from the combustion chamber prior to ignition.
Spark Igniter The Spark Igniter is energized.
Energized
Ignition Activation The 24 Volt Gas Valve is energized and opens to allow fuel gas to flow to the Main Burner.
Ignition Verification The control system is monitoring the flame sensor for the required minimum flame sensing current.
Ensure the water heater is properly grounded. Flame sensing requires an adequate earth ground. If the water heater is not
properly grounded it will cause an Ignition Failure.
Inter-Purge The Combustion Blower is energized to flush residual fuel gas from the combustion chamber after a failed ignition attempt.
Heating Ignition was successful, flame sensing current has been established. The water in the storage tank is being heated.
Post-Purge The Combustion Blower is energized to flush residual flue gases from the combustion chamber at the end of a heating cycle.
Fault The control system has detected a Fault condition. Heating operation is disabled until the Fault condition is corrected. Power
to the water heater must be cycled off and on at the breaker to reset the control system.
NOTE: Cycling power will not reset the control system if the condition that caused the Fault has not been corrected.
CONTROL SYSTEM MENUS

From the Desktop screen pressing "Menu" on the LCD Touch Display will display the "Main Menu" this is where all control system
menus are located. The table below describes the control system menus.
TABLE 16
Menu Description
Temperatures Most commonly accessed menu. Contains the Operating Set Point and Differential user settings.
Heater Status This menus displays the current state of all pressure switches and the ECO (open/closed). The on/off status of the
Combustion Blower, gas valve, Spark Igniter, flame sensor and other monitored water heater components are displayed
in this menu.
Display Settings Temperature units (°F or °C), the LCD appearance (brightness/contrast) and backlight delay user adjustable settings
are located in this menu.
Heater Information Elapsed time of operation, total heating cycle time, heating cycle count, heating on time along with UIM and CCB
software revisions can be viewed in this menu.
Current Fault Displays any current Alert or Fault messages.
Fault History This control system menu retains a list of the last nine (9) Fault and Alert messages with a time stamp. The newest
event will replace the oldest. Faults will clear after 30 days.
Fault Occurrence This control system menu retains a running total of how many times each Fault condition has occurred since the water
heater was first installed. The data does not clear and cannot be reset.
Restore Factory Defaults This control system feature allows the user to restore control system user settings to their factory default settings.
Display Settings preferences ARE NOT changed when factory defaults are restored.
Help Screens Text based operational and user information explaining how to change user settings, navigate the control system menus
and icon descriptions.
47
Spec Seq#: 76
USER SETTINGS & CONTROL SYSTEM MENUS

TEMPERATURES MENU
Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment
The Operating Set Point is adjustable from 90°F (42°C) to 180°F (82°C). The factory setting is 120°F (49°C). The Differential is
adjustable from 2° to 20°. The factory setting is 8°. These user settings are accessed from the Temperatures menu. The following
instructions will explain how to adjust these settings and navigate the control system menus.
When the water temperature sensed by the control system from the two (upper and lower) Temperature Probes reaches the Operating
Set Point the control system will end the heating cycle. A heating cycle will be activated again when the sensed water temperature
drops below the Operating Set Point minus the Differential setting.
NOTE: Lower Differential settings may cause excessive heating cycles (short-cycling) which can cause premature failure of heater
1285179
components. Set the Differential at the highest setting which produces an acceptable hot water supply. Set the Operating Set Point
to the lowest setting which produces an acceptable hot water supply for most efficient use.
DESCRIPTION/ACTION DISPLAY
From the Desktop screen, press MENU. The "Main Menu"
screen will be displayed. MANUFACTURER / MODEL INFORMATION
Operating Setpoint 120°F
Status: Standby
MENU HELP
The Main Menu is where all control system menus are listed, Main Menu
see Table 16 on page 47 for a complete list and description
of control system menus. Use the Up and Down slidebar to Temperatures >
view all control system menus from the Main Menu.
Heater Status >
Press "Temperatures" to access the Temperature menu. Display Settings >
Heater Information >
Current Fault >
BACK HELP
Press "Operating Setpoint" to access the temperature

Temperatures
setpoint menu.
Operating Setpoint 120°F >
Press "CHANGE" to activate the adjustment mode for this
menu item. Differential 8°F >
NOTE: Higher Temperature settings increase wear and
operating costs. Set the Operating Set Point to the lowest Tank Probe Offset 0°F >
setting which produces an acceptable hot water supply. This
will always provide the most energy efficient operation and
longer life. BACK HELP
Use the "+" and "-" Buttons to change the current setting.
Operating Setpoint
Press "ACCEPT" to save the new setting. Press "BACK" to
discard changes and return to the previously saved setting. 120°F
NOTE: Use this same procedure to change the Differential MIN MAX
setting and other adjustable user settings in the control system 90°F 180°F
menus.
ACCEPT BACK
48
Spec Seq#: 76
TEMPERATURES MENU (CONT)

• Differential - Adjustable user setting that changes the tank
temperature differential with a range of 2° to 20°F. The factory Temperatures
setting is 8°F.
• Tank Temperature - Non adjustable. Control system sensed Operating Setpoint 120°F >
temperature (averaged from upper & lower temperature probes). Differential 8°F >
• Tank Probe Offset - adjustable user setting, range -5° to +5°
(factory setting 0°). Tank Temperature 120°F
NOTE: These settings should only be used if hot water supply Tank Probe Offset 0°F >
temperature varies greatly from the Operating Set Point setting.
1285179
The Tank Probe Offset is used to calibrate control system
temperature sensing. This can improve the precision of
temperature control in the storage tank and at points of use. BACK HELP
This feature can also be used to compensate for building
recirculation loops (hot water returning to the storage tank) that
may cause the heating cycles to terminate prematurely.
Example: If the current sensed temperature from a temperature
probe is 120°F (49°C) and the Offset setting is adjusted
to a value other than 0°, the control system would calibrate
or “offset” the sensed temperature from the probe and the
averaged tank temperature. Heating cycles would be activated
and deactivated based on the calibrated (offset) temperature.
A -5° setting results in +5° hotter water.
These settings are adjusted in the same way described for
Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment on page 48.
HEATER STATUS MENU
Top of Menu
Press Heater Status from the Main Menu to enter this menu. Heater Status
This menu contains non adjustable operational information. Use
the slidebar to navigate the menu. Status: Standby
• Status - displays the current Operating State, see Table 15
ECO Contact Closed
on page 47. Low Gas PS Closed
• ECO Contact, Low Gas PS, Blocked Inlet PS, Blocked Blocked Inlet PS Closed
Outlet PS, Blower Prover PS - displays the current state Blocked Outlet PS Closed
of the switch contacts; open or closed. Igniter On No
• Igniter On, Gas Valve On - displays whether or not the
control system is currently energizing these water heater BACK HELP
components; yes = energized, no = de-energized.
Middle of Menu
• Flame Detected - displays whether or not the control
system has detected Main Burner flame during ignition from Heater Status
the flame sensor. Gas Valve On No
• Blower RPM CMD – displays the controls commanded Flame Detected No
blower rpms. Blower RPM CMD 0
Blower RPM – displays the actual blower rpms. Blower RPM 0
• Anode Current, Anode Tank Voltage, Anode Drive Anode Current 51.500mA
Voltage – displays the powered anodes current and Anode Tank Voltage 2.641V
voltage levels.
BACK HELP
NOTE: Menu displays shown are for informational purposes
only. The actual heater display will vary dependent upon the Bottom of Menu
operational state of the water heater. Heater Status
Flame Detected No
Blower RPM CMD 0
Blower RPM 0
Anode Current 51.500mA
Anode Tank Voltage 2.641V
Anode Drive Voltage 3.539V
BACK HELP
49
Spec Seq#: 76
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Press Display Settings from the Main Menu to enter this menu. Display Settings
This menu contains adjustable display options for viewing
information on the UIM’s LCD screen. Use the Slidebar to Temperature Units °F >
navigate the menu. Brightness 5 >
• Temperature Units - Adjustable user setting that changes Backlight Delay 30s >
temperature units display to Celsius °C or Fahrenheit °F.
• Backlight Delay - Adjustable user setting that determines
Language English >
how long the UIM’s LCD backlight remains illuminated after
a key has been pressed. Available settings are; Always Off,
1285179
10, 30 or 60 seconds and Always On.
• Contrast - Adjustable user setting to adjust the UIM’s LCD BACK HELP
screen contrast between text and background.
NOTE: These settings are adjusted in the same way
described for the Operating Set Point And Differential
Adjustment on page 48.
HEATER INFORMATION
Press Heater Information from the Main Menu to enter this menu. Heater Information
This menu contains non adjustable operational information.
• Elapsed Time - Total accumulated time the control system Elapsed Time 0days 0hrs 43mins >
(water heater) has been energized. Burner On Time 0days 0hrs 1mins
• Burner On Time - Total accumulated time the control Use External Enable No >
system has been in the heating operating state; burner run
time.
External Enable Status No >
• Total Cycle Count - Total accumulated count of heating Ignition Trials 3 tries >
cycles. Modulation Enabled >
• CCB Version - Software version for central control board.
• Config CRC - Verifies the configuration key matches the BACK HELP
CCB programming.
• UIM Version - Software version for user interface module.
• Use External Enable - Enables/Disables the external
enable circuit. Bottom of Menu
• External Enable Status - Displays whether or not the
external enable circuit has been activated. Heater Information
• Ignition Trials - Displays the number of ignition trials Ignition Trials 3 tries >
allowed. Modulation Enabled >
NOTE: Historical data is stored in the configuration key. If
this "key" is replaced during servicing the historical data will Total Cycles Counter 2 >
be lost. The data stored in the new configuration key will no Ignition Failure Count 1 >
longer reflect the entire history of the water heater. Flame Loss Count 0 >
The Elapsed Time, Burner On Time and Cycle Count indicate CCB Version 3.17 >
age, usage and wear.
If the Cycle Count per day is high (divide cycle count by BACK HELP
days to determine cycles per day) or the cycle duration is
short (determine burner on time total minutes, divide burner
on time total minutes by cycle count) consider rasing the Heater Information
Differential setting to avoid short cycling and excessive
component wear, see Operating Set Point And Differential Ignition Failure Count 1 >
Adjustment on page 48. Flame Loss Count 0 >
This historical data can also be used to assist facilities CCB Version 3.17 >
managers in forecasting planned replacement of equipment
to help avoid lengthy and costly hot water supply interruptions. Config CRC 0xD7A7 >
UIM Version 2.58 >
Configuration Raw 0x510C >
BACK HELP
50
Spec Seq#: 76
CURRENT FAULT
Press Current Fault from the Main Menu to enter this menu. This
menu contains non adjustable operational information. Use the
Slidebar to navigate the menu. Blocked Exhaust
This menu contains the current Fault or Alert error message. The 0 days 0 hr 0 min ago
time the Fault or Alert message occurred appears directly below. Error Code: A8-1201
A brief description of what causes the particular Fault or Alert Restriction in exhaust pipe.
condition appears below that. Pressing "ADVANCED" will give Check exhaust pipe and
more detailed service information and a list of possible causes termination for blockage.
1285179
for the Fault or Alert condition. See Fault And Alert Messages
on page 61 for more detailed information and diagnostic Press the Advanced button for
procedures.
If there is no Fault or Alert condition active this menu will not BACK ADVANCED
contain any information, "(none)" will be shown next to Current
Fault in the Main menu.
FAULT HISTORY
Press "Fault History" from the Main Menu to enter this menu.
Fault History
the Slidebar to navigate the menu. 1: Upper Temp Probe (Open) (47) >
This menu contains a list of the last nine (9) Fault and Alert 0 days 2 hrs 37 mins ago >
messages with a time stamp. The newest event will replace the 2: Hardware Failure (1A) >
oldest. Faults will clear after 30 days. 0 days 2 hrs 37 mins ago >
Press the Fault to view details for each Fault or Alert message 3: Upper Temp Probe (Open) (47) >
stored.
0 days 2 hrs 40 mins ago >
BACK HELP
FAULT OCCURRENCE
Press Fault Occurrence from the Main Menu to enter this menu. Fault Occurrence
the Slidebar to navigate the menu. Ignition Failure 0 >
This menu contains a running total of how many times each ECO 0 >
Fault condition has occurred since the water heater was first Low Gas Pressure 1 >
installed. Blocked Intake Air 1 >
NOTE: Historical data is stored in the configuration key. If this Blocked Exhaust 1 >
"key" is replaced during servicing the historical data will be lost.
External Input 0 >
The data stored in the new configuration key will no longer
reflect the entire history of the water heater. BACK HELP
RESTORE FACTORY DEFAULTS
Press Restore Factory Defaults from the Main Menu to enter
this menu. Restore Defaults
To restore the adjustable user settings to their factory default
settings press “YES.” The display will show text confirming the
factory default settings have been restored. Are you sure you want to restore
Press NO to exit the Restore Factory Defaults menu. the system to the factory
defaults?
Ye s No
51
Spec Seq#: 76
SERVICE CONTACT INFORMATION

The control system has a discrete menu that Installing contractors and/or service agents can access to enter contact information for
their customers. This contact information will be displayed with all Fault and Alert messages.
From the Desktop Screen (see Figure 59 on page 45) press
Contact Information
and hold down the middle (unmarked) area located between
the "MENU" and "HELP" buttons for 15 seconds to activate the Show Contact No >
"Contact Information" screen. It is located between the "MENU" Change Contact Name >
and "HELP" buttons.
Change Contact Phone >
This will launch a discrete menu where personalized contact
information can be entered. Current Contact Info:
1285179
Using the Slidebar select (highlighted in black) the "Show
Contact" menu item. (000) 000-0000
Press "ACCEPT" to activate the adjustment mode for this
parameter. BACK HELP
Press the "+" and "-" Buttons to change the setting from "No" to
Contact Information
"Yes" and press "ACCEPT" to save the new setting.
Show Contact Yes >
NOTE: The Access Code at the bottom of the Service Contact Change Contact Name >
Information screen is for manufacturing engineering purposes Change Contact Phone >
only. There are no user settings or information accessed
through this menu item. Current Contact Info:
(000) 000-0000
BACK HELP
Press the "Change Contact Name" to enter this menu.

Contact Information
Show Contact Yes >
Change Contact Name >
Current Contact Info:
(000) 000-0000
BACK HELP
Press the "+", "-", "<", and ">" icons to enter your name or the
name of your company. Change Contact Name
When finished press "ACCEPT" to save the new Contact Name.
>
The control system will return to the discrete menu.
Follow these same instructions to change the Contact Phone

Number.
ACCEPT < BACK >

When the new Contact Name and Contact Phone number have
Contact Information
both been updated, press "BACK" to return to the Desktop
screen. Show Contact Yes >
Change Contact Name >
Current Contact Info:
YOURCOMPANYNAMEHERE
(123) 456-7890
BACK HELP
52
Spec Seq#: 76
START UP
PRIOR TO START UP On the water heaters covered by this manual there are
test ports for supply and manifold gas pressure readings
Installation and start up of this water heater requires abilities on the gas valve. Using a small flat tip pocket screw driver
and skills equivalent to that of a licensed tradesman in the field - open the needle valve inside the supply gas pressure
involved, see Qualifications on page 6. test port one full turn only; turn the needle valve screw
Do not place the water heater in operation if any part has been counter-clockwise to open the valve. Slide the manometer
exposed to flooding or water damage. Immediately call a qualified sensing tube over the top of the test port, see Figure 60
service technician to inspect the water heater and to replace any part and Figure 61.
of the control system and any gas control which has been under water. 6. Open the Main Gas Shutoff Valve.
1285179
Light the water heater in accordance with the Lighting and 7. Measure and record the supply gas pressure, this is a “static”
Operation Instruction label on the water heater and in this manual supply gas pressure reading; while the water heater is not
on page 54. firing. Adjust supply gas pressure as necessary, see Supply
The water heaters covered by this manual are equipped with an Gas Pressure Adjustment on page 55.
electronic control system (see page 45) which automatically
sequences the Combustion Blower, pre and post purging of the MANIFOLD GAS SUPPLY GAS
combustion chamber, the spark transformer, the 24 Volt Gas PRESSURE PRESSURE
Valve, Main Burner ignition, and flame sensing. The control TEST PORT TEST PORT
(Non-Adjustable)
system will lock out after three unsuccessful ignition attempts. GAS
VALVE
Before attempting start up, thoroughly study and familiarize
yourself with the exact Sequence Of Operation. See the Sequence
of Operation Flow Chart on page 58. Ensure the water heater is
properly grounded. Flame sensing requires an adequate earth COMBUSTION
ground. If the water heater is not properly grounded it will cause BLOWER
CONNECTION
Ignition Failure. See Electrical Connections on page 57.
COMBUSTION
Be certain that the water heater is full of water, that air is purged AIR INLET
from the gas and water lines and that there are no leaks in the VENTURI
gas and water lines. Ensure all inlet water valves are open.
FILLING THE WATER HEATER
GAS VALVE / VENTURI ASSEMBLY TOP VIEW
Follow these steps to fill the water heater prior to start up.
1. Close the heater drain valve. Figure 60
2. Open a nearby hot water faucet to permit air in system to escape.

MANIFOLD GAS SUPPLY GAS
3. Fully open the cold water inlet valve allowing the piping and PRESSURE PRESSURE TEST PORT
water heater to fill with water. TEST PORT
(Non-Adjustable)
4. Close the hot water faucet opened in Step 2 as water starts to flow.
INITIAL START UP
REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT
• One U-tube manometer, recommended ranges; 0-14” W.C.
(0-3.5 kPa) and 0-35” W.C. (0-8.7 kPa) or pressure gauges.
• One digital manometer can be used in place of U-tube GAS VALVE TOP DETAIL VIEW
manometers or pressure gauges. Recommended ranges;
-14.00 to +14.00” W.C. (0-3.5 kPa) resolution 0.01” W.C. Figure 61
and 0-35” W.C. (0-8.7 kPa) resolution 0.10” W.C.
NOTE: All test equipment must be acclimated to ambient
temperature before calibration and use. GAS SUPPLY GAS
VALVE CONNECTION
PREPARATION
1. Using the control system menus, change the Operating Set
Point to the lowest temperature setting, see Operating Set
Point And Differential Adjustment on page 48.
LOW GAS
2. Turn the water heater’s Enable/Disable switch to the PRESSURE
SWITCH
"Disabled" position. COMBUSTION
AIR INLET
3. Close the Main Gas Shut Off Valve, see Figure 54 on
VENTURI
page 40.
4. Wait five (5) minutes for any residual gas to clear. GAS VALVE / VENTURI ASSEMBLY SIDE VIEW
5. Connect the manometer to the supply gas pressure port on
the gas valve, see Figure 60 and Figure 61. Figure 62
53
Spec Seq#: 76
LIGHTING THE WATER HEATER

LIGHTING & OPERATION LABELS
The instruction label below is affixed to the water heater's covered by this manual at the factory and must be followed when lighting
and operating the water heater.
FOR YOUR SAFETY READ BEFORE LIGHTING
1285179
WARNING: If you do not follow these instructions exactly, a fire or
explosion may result causing property damage, personal injury
or loss of life. FLAMMABLE
BEFORE OPERATING: ENTIRE SYSTEM MUST BE FILLED WITH WATER AND AIR PURGED FROM ALL LINES.
A. This appliance does not have a pilot. It is equipped with If you cannot reach your gas supplier, call the
an ignition device which automatically lights the fire department.
burner. Do not try to light the burner by hand. C.Use only your hand to push in the control
B. BEFORE OPERATING smell all around the appliance buttons. Never use tools. If the control
area for gas. Be sure to smell next to the floor because buttons will not push in, don't try to repair them, call
some gas is heavier than air and will settle on the floor. a qualified service technician. Force or attempted
repair may result in a fire or explosion.
WHAT TO DO IF YOU SMELL GAS
Do not try to light any appliance. D. Do not use t his appliance if any part has been under
wat er. Immediat ely cont act a quali ed inst aller or
Do not touch any electric switch;
service agency t o replace a ooded wat er heat er.
do not use any phone in your building.
Do not at t empt t o repair t he unit . It must be replaced!
Immediately call your gas supplier from a neighbor's
phone. Follow the gas supplier's instructions.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
5. This appliance is equipped with a device
which automatically lights the burner.
DO NOT TRY TO LIGHT THE BURNER BY HAND.
Operating Set Point 120°F 6. Wait five (5) minutes to clear out any gas.
Status: Standby
If you then smell gas, STOP! Follow "B" in
the safety information above on this label. If you
don't smell gas, go to the next step.
7. Turn on all electrical power to the appliance.
8. Set the Enable / Disable switch at the base of
MENU HELP the water heater to the Enable position.
9. Set the thermostat to the desired setting.
CAUTION: Hotter water increases the risk of
ENABLE/DISABLE scald injury. Consult the instruction
SWITCH manual before changing temperature.
1. STOP! Read the safety information above 10.If the appliance will not operate, follow the instruc-
tions "TO TURN OFF GAS TO APPLIANCE" and
on this label. call your technician or gas supplier.
the water heater to the Enable position. WARNING: TURN OFF ALL ELECTRIC
3. Set the thermostat to the lowest setting. POWER BEFORE SERVICING.
the water heater to the Disable position.
TO TURN OFF GAS TO APPLIANCE

1. Set the thermostat to the lowest setting. 2. Set the Enable / Disable switch at the base of
the water heater to the Disable position.
3. Turn off all electrical power to the appliance if
service is to be performed.
54
Spec Seq#: 76
SUPPLY GAS PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT Multiple Water Heater Installations:

In multiple water heater installations or in installations where
the installed water heater(s) share a common gas supply main
with other gas fired appliances; the supply gas pressures shall
Fire and Explosion Hazard be measured at each water heater with all gas fired appliances
Do not use water heater with any gas connected to a common main firing at full capacity.
other than the gas shown on the rating On multiple water heater installations the supply gas line
label.
regulators shall be adjusted to provide gas pressure to each
water heater within the minimum and maximum supply pressure
requirements listed in Table 3 on page 11 with all gas fired
appliances connected to a common gas main firing at full capacity.
1285179
agency for installation and service. NOTE: A pressure drop of more than 1.5” W. C. (0.37 kPa) when
the Main Burner ignites is an indication of an inadequate supply
Supply gas pressure shall be measured while the water heater is of gas and can lead to ignition failure, rough starts and/or rough
not firing (static pressure) AND while the water heater is firing at operation. If a drop of more than 1.5” W. C. (0.37 kPa) in supply
full capacity (dynamic pressure). gas pressure occurs when the Main Burner ignites, ensure the
If the supply gas pressure to the water heater is not between the supply gas lines and regulator(s) are properly sized and installed.
required minimum and maximum values given in Table 3 on page See the requirements for Supply Gas Regulator and Gas Supply
11 adjust the supply gas regulator as necessary. Adjust the supply Systems on page 13. See Supply Gas Line Installation on
gas regulator(s) per the regulator manufacturer’s instructions to page 40 and Supply Gas Regulator on page 13. Ensure all
achieve the required “static” and “dynamic” supply gas pressure. requirements and installation instructions are maintained.
55
Spec Seq#: 76
CHECKING THE FIRING RATE HIGH ALTITUDE INSTALLATIONS

If firing rate adjustment is required follow these instructions to
determine the actual firing rate of the water heater:
NOTE: The heaters covered by this manual are capable of
modulating their firing rate. The firing rate should be checked Fire and Explosion Hazard
with the heater operating at it's full firing rate.
Under no circumstances should the
1. Ensure there are no other gas fired appliances connected to
input exceed the rate shown on the
the gas meter firing during this test.
water heater’s rating label.
2. Contact the gas supplier to determine the heating value, in
Btu per cubic foot, of the gas supply. Overfiring could result in fire or
3. Connect a manometer to the supply gas pressure tap. Follow explosion.
1285179
the instructions for Initial Start Up on page 53. Gas and carbon monoxide detectors are
4. Start the water heater and ensure it is firing. available.
5. Check the supply gas pressure, refer to Table 3 on page
11 for correct pressure.
6. Locate the gas meter serving the water heater.
7. Time how long (in seconds) it takes for one cubic foot of gas
to be used while the water heater is firing with a stop watch.
8. Use the formula below to “clock” the gas meter and determine Breathing Hazard - Carbon Monoxide Gas
the actual firing rate of the water heater based on the heating
value (Btu per cubic foot) of the gas supply: Under no circumstances should
the input exceed the rate shown
3600 on the water heater’s rating label.
x H = Btu/hr
T Overfiring could result in damage to
Example: the water heater and sooting.
3600 x 1050 = 300,000 Btu/hr (87.9 kW) Gas and carbon monoxide detectors
12.6 are available.
• 3600 = seconds in one hour. Breathing carbon monoxide can cause brain damage or
• T = time, in seconds, to burn one cubic foot of gas. death. Always read and understand instruction manual.
• H = heating value of gas in Btu per cubic foot.
• Btu/hr = actual firing rate of the water heater. The water heaters covered by this manual are certified
NOTE: 1050 Btu per cubic foot is a standard value for for use without modification for altitudes up to 10,100 feet
natural gas. Standard propane gas Btu content is 2500 (3,078 m).
Btu per cubic foot. Btu values may change in certain Most gas utility companies de-rate their gas for high altitudes,
areas and at high elevations. Check with the local gas
making it unnecessary to install high altitude orifices.
utility company.
TO TURN OFF GAS SUPPLY For installations above 10,100 feet call the technical
support phone number listed on the back cover of this
1. Change the Operating Set Point to the lowest temperature manual for further technical assistance. Call the local
setting, see Operating Set Point And Differential Adjustment
gas or utility company to verify Btu per cubic foot content
on page 48.
before calling for technical assistance and have that
2. When the water heater has completed its shut down sequence information available.
and enters the standby mode, turn the water heater’s Enable/
Disable switch to the “Disable” position. When in the "Disable" NOTE: The actual firing rate of the water heater must not
position the switch only removes electrical power from the exceed the input rating on the water heater's rating label
gas valve so that water heating is disabled. The display, under any circumstances.
CCB, and other electrical components will still be energized NOTE: Due to the input rating reduction at high altitudes, the
and the display will read "Water Heating Disabled". output rating of the water heater is also reduced and should
3. Close Main Gas Shutoff Valve, see Figure 54 on page 40. be compensated for in the sizing of the equipment.
56
Spec Seq#: 76
TROUBLESHOOTING
INSTALLATION CHECKLIST SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
The list below represents some of the most critical Read the Sequence of Operation below before attempting to
installation requirements that, when overlooked, often result correct any operational problems. Refer to the Features And
in operational problems, down time and needless parts Components section beginning on page 7 for the location
replacement. This is not a complete list. Before performing of various water heater components described below. See the
any troubleshooting procedures use the list below to check Sequence Of Operation Flow Chart on page 58 also.
for installation errors. Costs to correct installation errors are 1. When the control system is first powered, during boot
not covered under the limited warranty. Ensure all installation up, it will display water heater model information during
1285179
requirements and instructions in this manual have been initialization. After a few moments the control system LCD
maintained and followed.
Touch Display which is part of the UIM (user interface
WATER HEATER LOCATION module) will display the default screen known as the
1. Ensure proper clearances to combustibles are maintained "Desktop" screen.
and there is sufficient room to service the water heater. See 2. If the control system determines that the actual water
Clearance To Combustible Materials on page 12. temperature inside the tank is below the programmed
2. Ensure the area is free of corrosive elements and flammable Operating Set Point minus the Differential setting, a heating
materials. See the instructions on page16. cycle is activated.
VENTING 3. The control system then performs selected diagnostic
system checks. This includes confirming the low gas
1. Ensure the intake air and/or vent (exhaust) piping is
pressure, blocked exhaust, blocked intake and ECO (energy
the correct size for the installed length. See Venting
cut out) switch contacts are closed.
Requirements on page 22.
4. If all diagnostic checks are successfully passed, the control
2. Ensure the maximum equivalent feet of pipe has not been
system energizes the Combustion Blower for pre-purge.
exceeded for the intake air and/or vent pipe. See Table 6 -
PVC/CPVC and Polypropylene on page 23. 5. The control system energizes the Spark Ignition Transformer.
3. Ensure the maximum number of elbows has not been 6. The control system energizes the 24 Volt Gas Valve allowing
exceeded in the intake air and/or vent pipe. See Venting gas to flow to the Main Burner.
Requirements on page 22. 7. The control system monitors the flame sensor to confirm
4. Ensure the intake air screen has been removed from the a flame is present at the Main Burner. If a flame is not
intake air connection on the water heater when installing the verified during the ignition trial period the control system will
water heater in a Direct Vent configuration. See Figure 18 try for ignition up to two more times. If flame can not be
on page 25. verified after three trials for ignition, the control system will
5. Ensure all exterior clearances for the intake air, vent, lock out and display the “Ignition Failure” Fault message.
concentric, and low profile terminations are maintained. 8. If a flame is verified, the control system will de-energize
See Vertical Termination Installation on page 25, the Spark Ignition Transformer and enter the heating mode
Sidewall Termination Installation on page 27, Concentric where it will continue heating the water until the Operating
Termination Installation on page 30 and Low Profile Set Point is reached. At this point, the control system will
Termination Installation on page 34. These clearances and de-energize the 24 Volt Gas Valve and enter the post-purge
those cited by local and national codes must be maintained. cycle (approximately 30 seconds).
GAS SUPPLY AND PIPING 9. The water heaters covered by this manual are capable of
1. Ensure a supply gas regulator has been installed for each modulating their firing rate. The firing rate is dictated by the
water heater. See the requirements for a Supply Gas hot water draw and various other temperature limitations.
Regulator on page 13. 10. The Combustion Blower will run for the duration of the post-
2. Ensure the supply gas line to each water heater meets purge cycle to purge the water heater of all combustion
the minimum supply gas line size requirements. See the gases. When the post-purge cycle is complete, the blower is
requirements for the Gas Supply Systems on page 13 de-energized and will coast to a stop.
and the installation instructions on page 40 and 41. 11. The control system now enters the standby mode while
CONDENSATE DRAIN continuing to monitor the internal storage tank water
Ensure the condensate drain is properly connected to the temperature and the state of other system devices. If the
exhaust elbow on the water heater and draining freely to a tank temperature drops below the Operating Set Point
suitable floor drain. See Figure 8 on page 16 and Condensate minus the Differential setting, the control will automatically
Drain Installation on page 39. return to Step 2 and repeat the operating cycle.
ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
1. Ensure the power supply connections to the water heater
are polarity correct. See the requirements for the Power
Supply on page 13 and Electrical Wiring on page 41.
2. Ensure the water heater is properly grounded. Flame
sensing requires an adequate earth ground. If the water
heater is not properly grounded it will cause Ignition Failure.
57
Spec Seq#: 76
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION FLOW CHART
Sequence is shown with Enable/Disable Switch in the Enable position
If tank temperature drops below Operating Set Point minus

Differential setting a heating cycle is activated
Control System performs diagnostic checks
1285179
Normal State of all pressure switches and ECO are checked Control System Locks Out
NO
Pressure switches and ECO are verified closed Displays Fault Msg
Combustion Blower is energized

Pre-Purge cycle
Spark Ignition Transformer is energized
24 Volt Gas Valve is energized

gas flows to Main Burner
Is flame sensed at the Main Burner ?

(control system monitors the flame sensor)
YES NO
Water is heated to 24 Volt Gas Valve

set point de-energized
24 Volt Gas Valve Inter-Purge cycle

de-energized
Retries up to
Post-Purge cycle two more times
Control System
Locks Out
Water heater goes
“Ignition Failure”
into standby mode
Fault Msg is
displayed
Figure 63
58
Spec Seq#: 76
OPERATIONAL PROBLEMS • Vent (exhaust) gas recirculation at the vent and intake air
pipe terminations on Direct Vent installations - see Direct
Vent Installation on page 24.
• Excessive equivalent lengths of intake air and/or vent
Read and understand this instruction (exhaust) piping installed - see Venting Requirements on
manual and the safety messages page 22.
herein before installing, operating or • Debris clogging/blocking the intake air screen(s) - see
servicing this water heater. Figure 18 on page 25 and Figure 25 on page 27.
Failure to follow these instructions and • Debris clogging/blocking the Main Burner - see Figure 2 on
safety messages could result in death page 7.
or serious injury.
1285179
This manual must remain with the MOMENTARY IGNITION
water heater.
This section of the manual is intended to be an aid in correcting

CAUTION
common operational problems, it is not all inclusive. The installer Burn Hazard
may be able to observe and correct certain problems which
might arise when the water heater is first put into operation or • The combustion chamber and burner sleeve
when it is re-fired after a prolonged shutdown. However, only and housing become very hot during operation.
qualified service agents, as defined in Qualifications on page • Do not reach into the burner housing or
6, using appropriate test equipment, should perform any combustion chamber if the water heater
is still hot.
service procedures on the water heater.
NOTE: Call the technical support phone number listed on the • Allow the water heater to cool and always use
gloves when handling the main burner.
back cover of this manual for further technical assistance or to
locate a qualified service agent in your area.
If the Main Burner ignites momentarily but does not sustain
INSTALLATION ERRORS ignition allow the water heater to try to ignite up to two
more times until control system locks out and the Ignition
Operational problems on new installations are often the result of
Failure Fault message is displayed on the control system's
installation requirements that have been overlooked rather than
LCD. If the water heater is experiencing rough starts -
failed components. IE: A "Low Gas Pressure" Fault condition see Rough Starting, Rough Operation on this page. For
is most often caused by low supply gas pressure rather than a momentary ignition problems without rough starting check
defective Low Gas Pressure switch. Rough starting and rough the following:
operation are often caused by undersized supply gas lines and/
or the absence of a supply gas regulator at the water heater. • Undersized supply gas line (low volume of supply gas) - see
Gas Supply Systems on page 13.
Prior to performing any operational checks inspect the water
• Supply gas regulator is not installed per installation
heater installation to ensure all installation requirements and
requirements (erratic gas supply volume/pressures) - see
instructions have been maintained and followed. See the
Installation Checklist on page 57. Supply Gas Regulator on page 13.
• See the list of possible causes and things to check and
NOTE: Costs to correct installation errors are not covered under
repair for the Ignition Failure Fault message on page 61.
the limited warranty.
• Debris clogging/blocking the intake air screen(s) - see
ROUGH STARTING, ROUGH OPERATION Figure 18 on page 25 and Figure 25 on page 27.
• Debris clogging/blocking the Main Burner - see Figure 2 on
page 7.
NOT ENOUGH OR NO HOT WATER
Fire and Explosion Hazard • No power to the water heater, check breaker and fuses.
Do not use water heater with any gas • Enable/Disable switch in "Disabled" position. Set to Enable
other than the gas shown on the rating to allow unit to operate.
label. • Hot water supply valve(s) to fixtures closed.
• Operating Set Point is set too low, Differential setting is set
too high. See Control System Operation on page 45.
• Tank Probe Offset is causing the heating cycles to terminate
Contact a qualified installer or service prematurely - see Temperatures Menu (cont) on page 49.
agency for installation and service.
• Ensure there is not any external supervisory control (using
• Undersized supply gas line (low volume of supply gas) - see the enable/disable circuit) disabling heating operation.
Gas Supply Systems on page 13. • The heating capacity of the water heater has been
• Supply gas regulator is not installed per installation exceeded, the water heater is unable to meet demand.
requirements (erratic gas supply volume/pressures) - see • Colder incoming water temperature lengthening the time
Supply Gas Regulator on page 13. required to heat water to desired temperature.
• Excessive supply gas pressure - see Table 3 on page 11 • Hot water piping leaks, open faucets, water heater drain
and Supply Gas Pressure Adjustment on page 55. valve leaking or open.
59
Spec Seq#: 76
• Sediment or lime scale accumulation may be affecting mark. The water heater will continue to operate during an Alert
water heater operation. See Maintenance on page 63 for condition but the water heater must be serviced by a qualified
sediment and lime scale removal procedures. service agent as soon as possible.
• Water heater not firing at full input rating. Check actual firing RESETTING CONTROL SYSTEM LOCK OUTS
rate of the water heater, see instructions on page 56. Note
that the water heaters covered by this manual are capable To reset the control system from a lock out condition; turn the
of modulating their firing rate. The firing rate is dictated by power supply off at the breaker for approximately 20 seconds
the hot water draw and various other temperature limitations. and then back on. Keep in mind; if the condition that caused the
WATER IS TOO HOT Fault has not been corrected, the control system will continue to
lock out.
• Operating Set Point is set too high. See Operating Set Point
And Differential Adjustment on page 48. DIAGNOSTIC CHECKS
• If installed check Thermostatic Mixing Valve settings
1285179
• Tank Probe Offset setting improperly set - see Temperatures
Menu (cont) on page 49.
• Lime build-up on temperature probes. Inspect and Clean. Electrical Shock Hazard
• Improper water piping - see diagrams beginning on page 69. • Turn off power at the branch circuit
breaker serving the water heater
NOISY OPERATION before performing any service.
• Sediment or lime scale accumulations can cause rumbling • Label all wires prior to disconnecting
and pounding noises during heating cycles. See the when performing service. Wiring errors
Maintenance section of this manual beginning on page 63 can cause improper and dangerous
operation.
for sediment and lime scale removal procedures.
• Normal operating noise of electrical components; • Verify proper operation after servicing.
Combustion Blower, transformer hum, relay contact closure. • Failure to follow these instructions can
result in personal injury or death.
WATER LEAKAGE IS SUSPECTED
• Ensure the water heater drain valve is tightly closed. The following section, Fault And Alert Messages on page
• Check cleanout opening for leaks - see Figure 4 on page 9. 61, lists some of the messages the control system will
• Check inlet/outlet water connections and system piping. display on the LCD when there are operational problems. This
• Check the Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve. is not a complete list. Along with each of the Fault and Alert
• Excessive water temperature. messages described there will be a list of possible causes and
things to check and repair.
• Excessive water pressure.
• Defective Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve. Only qualified service agents, as defined in Qualifications on
NOTE: Excessive water pressure is the most common cause of page 6, using appropriate test equipment, should perform
Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve leakage. Excessive water any service procedures on the water heater.
system pressure is most often caused by "thermal expansion" NOTE: If you are not qualified and licensed or certified as
in a "closed system." See Thermal Expansion and Closed Water required by the authority having jurisdiction to perform a given
Systems on page 14. The Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve task do not attempt to perform any of the diagnostic or service
is not intended for the constant relief of thermal expansion. procedures described in the following section.
Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve leakage due to pressure build If you do not understand the instructions in the following section
up in a closed system that does not have a thermal expansion do not attempt to perform any procedures.
tank installed is not covered under the limited warranty. Thermal
expansion tanks must be installed on all closed water systems. Call the technical support phone number listed on the back cover
of this manual for further technical assistance or to locate a
REPLACEMENT PARTS
qualified service agent in your area.
Replacement parts may be ordered from the manufacturer,
authorized service agencies or distributors. When ordering parts
be sure to have the complete water heater Model Number, Serial
Number and Series Number available. This information can be
found on the rating label affixed to the water heater. Jumping out control circuits or components can
Refer to the parts list included with the water heater from the result in property damage, personal injury or death.
factory for more information or call the parts department or
technical support phone number listed on the back cover of this
manual for further assistance. • Service should only be performed by a qualified service
technician using proper test equipment.
FAULT AND ALERT CONDITIONS
• Altering the water heater controls and/or wiring in any way
FAULT CONDITIONS could result in permanent damage to the controls or water
heater and is not covered under the limited warranty.
When the control system declares a Fault condition it will
display a Fault message on the control system's LCD with
an exclamation "!" mark. The control system will lock out and
disable heating operation until the condition is corrected. The Any bypass or alteration of the water
water heater must be serviced by a qualified service agent heater controls and/or wiring will result
before operation can be restored. in voiding the appliance warranty.
ALERT CONDITIONS
When the control system declares an Alert condition it will display
an Alert message on the control system's LCD with a question "?"
60
Spec Seq#: 76
FAULT AND ALERT MESSAGES

Call the technical support phone number listed on the back cover for further technical assistance or to locate a qualified service agent
in your area.
POSSIBLE CAUSES - CHECK/REPAIR DISPLAYED FAULT/ALERT MESSAGE

• Using a manometer, ensure that gas supply pressure is above
minimum requirement listed on heater’s data plate and does not Ignition Failure
drop more than 1.5” W.C. when unit fires. 0 days 0 hrs 0 mins ago
Error Code: B2-70
• Ensure wire connections to gas valve are clean and tight.
Flame not detected. Clean flame
• Ensure wire connections to flame sensor are clean and tight. rod. Check gas supply.
• Ensure wire connections to spark igniter are clean and tight.
Press the Advanced button for
1285179
• Inspect flame sensor, clean/replace as needed.
more information
• Inspect spark igniter, realign igniter gap as needed
• Ensure adequate electrical ground to heater. BACK ADVANCED
• Confirm supply gas is turned on.

• Using a manometer, ensure the supply gas pressure is above
Low Gas Pressure
0 days 0 hrs 0 mins ago
minimum pressure requirement listed on heater’s data plate
Error Code: A6-501
before and during operation.
Low Gas Pressure
• Ensure wire connections to gas pressure switch are clean and
tight. Press the Advanced button for
• If all above conditions are met, replace gas pressure switch. more information
BACK ADVANCED
• If Blocked Exhaust error occurs when blower is running, check for

restrictions in exhaust pipe, including exhaust elbow, condensate Blocked Air Intake
drain, and outside termination. Also check exhaust pipe installation 0 days 0 hrs 0 mins ago
(size/length) per manual. Error Code: A7-1201
• If Blocked Exhaust error occurs before blower runs, make sure Restriction in air intake.
pressure switch connections are clean and tight. Check pressure Check intake pipe and
termination for blockage.
switch continuity/resistance. Switch should be closed (continuity/0
ohms). Replace switch if open (no continuity). Press the Advanced button for
• Other possible causes: high wind conditions and excessive
negative air pressure in building. BACK ADVANCED
61
Spec Seq#: 76
FAULT AND ALERT MESSAGES (CONT)

Call the technical support phone number listed on the back cover for further technical assistance or to locate a qualified service agent
in your area.
POSSIBLE CAUSES - CHECK/REPAIR DISPLAYED FAULT/ALERT MESSAGE
• If Blocked Intake error occurs before blower runs, make sure
pressure switch connections are clean and tight. Check pressure Blocked Air Intake
switch continuity/resistance. Switch should be closed 0 days 0 hrs 0 mins ago
(continuity/0 ohms). Replace switch if open (no continuity). Error Code: A7-1201
• If Blocked Intake error occurs when blower is running, check for Restriction in air intake.
restrictions in intake pipe, including intake air connection, outside Check intake pipe and
termination for blockage.
termination, and inlet condensate drains (if installed).
1285179
• Other possible causes: High wind conditions, excessive negative Press the Advanced button for
air pressure in building.
BACK ADVANCED
• Ensure wire connections to upper temperature probe are clean

and tight. High Temp Limit Exceeded
• Using a thermometer, check the water temperature of the heater.
Error Code: A5 - 401
• Use a multi-meter and check for continuity between the two red
Energy Cut Off has shut off
wires of the upper temperature probe. water heater due to high tank
• If the two red wires are open (no continuity) and water temperature temperature.
is below 160°F, replace upper temperature probe.
Press the Advanced button for
• If the water temperature exceeds 195°F, turn off electric power and
gas supply and call Tech Support for further instructions.
BACK ADVANCED
• Confirm the water heater is full of water.

• Confirm the powered anode wire connections are tight and free of
No Water
debris or moisture (i.e. rust, solder, metal pipe shavings).
Error Code: D6 -8
• Confirm proper electrical ground to the water heater.
No water detected by Powered
• Inspect powered anode(s), clean/replace as needed. Anode.
The control indicates a problem
with the anode protection. By
ACCEPT BACK ADVANCED
62
Spec Seq#: 76
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Keep water heater area clear and free from combustible TABLE 17
materials, gasoline, and other flammable vapors and liquids. See COMPONENT OPERATION INTERVAL REQUIRED
Tank Sediment Removal Semi Annually Flushing
Locating The Water Heater on page 11. Lime Scale
Tank Semi Annually UN-LIME®
Water heater maintenance includes periodic tank flushing Removal
Inspection Clean Scale
and cleaning, and removal of lime scale. The water Anode Rods
Cleaning
Annually
Deposits
heater should be inspected and adjusted to maintain T&P Valve Test Operation Semi Annually Test
proper combustion. See Initial Start Up on page 53. A
1285179
Termination
Vent System Inspection Annually Screens Clean
periodic inspection of the venting system should be made, Reseal/Repair
see Table 17. Where used, water circulating pump(s)
should be oiled according to the pump manufacturers DRAINING AND FLUSHING
recommendations. It is recommended that the water heater storage tank be drained
and flushed every 6 months to reduce sediment buildup. The
PRECAUTIONS water heater should be drained if being shut down during freezing
temperatures. See Features And Components on page 7 for
CAUTION the location of the water heater components described below.
Do not operate the water heater if it has Burn hazard.

been exposed to or exhibits the following:
• Exposed to flooding or water damage Hot water discharge.

• .
External damage.
• Firing without water. Keep hands clear of drain
• Sooting. valve discharge.
Do not operate the water heater until all corrective steps
have been made by a qualified service technician.
To drain the water heater storage tank:
Never operate the water heater without first being certain it is 1. Turn off the electrical supply to the water heater.
filled with water and a properly sized and rated Temperature- 2. Turn off the gas supply at the Main Gas Shutoff Valve if the
water heater is going to be shut down for an extended period.
Pressure Relief Valve is installed in the relief valve opening
3. Ensure the cold water inlet valve is open.
on the water heater. See Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve 4. Open a nearby hot water faucet and let the water run until the
on page 15. water is no longer hot.
5. Connect a hose to the water heater drain valve and terminate
it to an adequate drain.
6. Close the cold water inlet valve.
7. Open the water heater drain valve and allow all the water to
drain from the storage tank.
Explosion Hazard 8. Close the water heater drain valve when all water in the
storage tank has drained.
Overheated water can cause 9. Close the hot water faucet opened in Step 4.
water tank explosion. 10. If the water heater is going to be shut down for an extended
period, the drain valve should be left open.
Properly sized temperature and To Flush the tank perform the following steps:
pressure relief valve must be 1. Turn off the electrical supply to the water heater.
installed in the opening provided. 2. Ensure the cold water inlet valve is open.
3. Open a nearby hot water faucet and let the water run until
the water is no longer hot. Then close the hot water faucet.
Should overheating occur or the gas supply fail to shut off, turn 4. Connect a hose to the drain valve and terminate it to an
off the Main Gas Shutoff valve. See Figure 54 on page 40. adequate drain.
63
Spec Seq#: 76
5. Ensure the drain hose is secured before and during the entire
flushing procedure. Flushing is performed with system water CLEANOUT
pressure applied to the water heater. TANK ACCESS PANEL
6. Open the water heater drain valve to flush the storage tank. CLEANOUT
CLEANOUT
7. Flush the water heater storage tank to remove sediment and OPENING
GASKET
allow the water to flow until it runs clean.
8. Close the water heater drain valve when flushing is completed.
9. Remove the drain hose.
10. Fill the water heater - see Filling The Water Heater on page 53.
11. Turn on the electrical supply to place the water heater back
1285179
in operation.
12. Allow the water heater to complete several heating cycles to
ensure it is operating properly. CLEANOUT
COVER
FILLING THE WATER HEATER
Figure 64
See Filling The Water Heater on page 53.
SEDIMENT REMOVAL MANUAL LIME SCALE REMOVAL
NOTE: Contact your local distributor or call the parts department
Waterborne impurities consist of the particles of soil and sand phone number on the back cover of this manual to order a new
which settle out and form a layer of sediment on the bottom of cleanout gasket. Have the new gasket available before removing
the tank. the cleanout cover.
For convenience, sediment removal and lime scale removal The cleanout opening is shown in Figure 64. To remove lime
should be performed at the same time. scale manually through the cleanout opening proceed as follows:
LIME SCALE REMOVAL 1. Turn off the electrical supply to the water heater.
When water is heated dissolved minerals in the water such as 2. The water heater must be drained, see Draining And Flushing
calcium and magnesium carbonate (lime scale) become less on page 63, follow the instructions on how to drain the water
soluble. As the water temperature rises these minerals will heater.
precipitate or “fall out” of solution. 3. Remove outer cleanout access panel from lower side of the
The amount of lime scale released from water is in direct water heater jacket.
proportion to water temperature and usage. The higher the water 4. Remove the cleanout cover from cleanout opening.
temperature or water usage, the more lime deposits are dropped 5. Remove lime, scale and/or sediment using care not to
out of the water. damage the glass-lining.
Water hardness also affects lime scale accumulation. With the 6. Install a new cleanout gasket if required.
temperature and usage being the same, hard water will release
more lime scale than softer water. 7. Reinstall the cleanout cover. Be sure to draw plate up tight
by tightening screws securely.
Lime scale reduces heating efficiency as it accumulates inside
a water heater. Heating transfer surfaces become coated with 8. Close the water heater drain valve.
lime scale deposits which increases fuel costs to operate the 9. Fill the water heater - see Filling The Water Heater on page 53.
water heater. Lime scale deposits can also cause rumbling 10. Turn on the electrical supply to place the water heater back
and pounding noises as air molecules trapped in the lime scale in operation. See Initial Start Up on page 53.
escape when heated. Lime scale accumulation also reduces the
life span of water heaters. For these reasons a regular schedule 11. Allow the water heater to complete several heating cycles to
for deliming should be set up. ensure it is operating properly.
The depth of lime accumulation in the bottom of the water 12. Check for water leakage.
heater should be measured periodically. Inspect by removing 13. Reinstall the cleanout access panel.
the cleanout cover once every 6 months at first. Deliming CHEMICAL LIME SCALE REMOVAL
maintenance should then be performed based on the time it
takes for 1 inch (2.5 cm) of lime to accumulate in the bottom of To dissolve and remove more stubborn lime scale deposits, UN-
the water heater. LIME® Professional Delimer should be used.
Sediment and lime scale removal may be accomplished manually UN-LIME® Professional Delimer is an easy to handle patented
through the cleanout opening furnished on the water heater, see food grade acid formulated specifically for lime scale removal
Figure 64. from all types of water using equipment. Hydrochloric base acids
must not be used to delime the water heaters covered in this
manual.
Follow the instructions on the UN-LIME® to delime the water
heater.
NOTE: Call the parts department phone number on the back
cover of this manual to order UN-LIME® Professional Delimer.
See Table 18 on page 65 for part numbers.
64
Spec Seq#: 76
TABLE 18
TEMPERATURE-PRESSURE
UN-LIME® PROFESSIONAL DELIMER RELIEF VALVE
Part Number Description
9005416105 4 - 1 gallon (case)
9005417105 1 - 5 gallon
POWERED ANODE RODS

To insure a long, trouble-free operating life, the water heaters DISCHARGE PIPE
covered in this manual are factory equipped with a powered
anode system. The anode rod(s) are of a permanent design and Figure 65
1285179
do not need replacing unless damaged. Inspection and cleaning If the Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve on the water heater
should be performed once a year. weeps or discharges periodically, this may be due to thermal
NOTE: Follow the instructions to drain the water heater storage expansion.
tank on page 63 first. Remove the powered anodes from the NOTE: Excessive water pressure is the most common cause of
water heater by loosening the 3/4" NPT bushing that forms the Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve leakage. Excessive water
top of the anodes. Do not disassemble the retaining nut and system pressure is most often caused by "thermal expansion"
wire terminal from the top while installed in the water heater, the in a "closed system." See Thermal Expansion and Closed Water
anode's electrode may fall inside the tank. Remove the entire Systems on page 14. The Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve
anode rod from the water heater prior to inspection. Clean the is not intended for the constant relief of thermal expansion.
anode rods with a soft cloth and reinstall. Follow the instructions Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve leakage due to pressure build
for filling the water heater on page 53 when finished. up in a closed system that does not have a thermal expansion
tank installed is not covered under the limited warranty. Thermal
DRAIN VALVE AND ACCESS PANELS expansion tanks must be installed on all closed water systems.
The water heaters covered in this manual are equipped with a DO NOT PLUG THE TEMPERATURE-PRESSURE RELIEF
drain valve, see Features And Components on page 7 for VALVE OPENING. THIS CAN CAUSE PROPERTY DAMAGE,
location. The water heaters covered in this manual are also SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
equipped with a cleanout opening for sediment and lime scale
removal. See Figure 64 on page 64.
TEMPERATURE-PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE TEST

Explosion Hazard
Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve
Burn hazard. must comply with ANSI Z21.22-
CSA 4.4 and ASME code.
Hot water discharge.
Keep clear of Temperature- installed in opening provided.
Pressure Relief Valve
discharge outlet. Can result in overheating and
excessive tank pressure.
It is recommended that the Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve Can cause serious injury or death.
should be checked to ensure that it is in operating condition
every 6 months.
When checking the Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve operation, VENT SYSTEM
make sure that (1) no one is in front of or around the outlet of the Examine the vent system every 6 months. Points of inspection
Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve discharge line, and (2) that are as follows:
the water discharge will not cause any property damage, as the
1. Check for obstructions and/or deterioration of the intake air
water may be extremely hot. Use care when operating valve as
and/or vent piping and the intake air and vent terminations.
the valve may be hot.
Replace immediately where needed.
To check the relief valve, lift the lever at the end of the valve
2. The debris screens in the intake air and vent terminations
several times, see Figure 65. The valve should seat properly and
should be should be cleaned of foreign material and soot.
operate freely.
See Figure 25 on page 27.
If after manually operating the valve, it fails to completely reset NOTE: Do not reach inside the vent termination when the
and continues to release water, immediately close the cold heater is in operation.
water inlet to the water heater and drain the water heater, see
Draining And Flushing on page 63. Replace the Temperature- 3. Check all vent system connections for leakage and repair or
Pressure Relief Valve with a properly rated/sized new one, see reseal as necessary.
Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve on page 15 for instructions on 4. Inspect and clean the built-in condensate trap of any debris.
replacement. See Figure 8 on page 16 and Figure 53 on page 39.
65
Spec Seq#: 76
DIAGRAMS
CCB - CENTRAL CONTROL BOARD LAYOUT
J13
6 5 4 J16 8 7 6 5
J3
1285179
8 1
5 4 3 2 1 J4
3 2 1 J5 4 3 2 1
4
3
J9 2
J10 1
4
2 J17
3
7 1 6
1
8 2 2 5
9 3 1 4
J14
10 4 3
11 5 2
12 6 1
3 1
4 2 J15
8
7 9 J12
4 6 J1 3 6
2 5
1 3 1 4
2
J6
4 3 2 1
Figure 66
66
Spec Seq#: 76
WIRING DIAGRAM
1285179
Figure 67
67
Spec Seq#: 76
CIRCULATION PUMP WIRING DIAGRAMS
CIRCULATING PUMP WIRING DIAGRAM

STORAGE TANK OR BUILDING RECIRCULATION
FIELD SUPPLIED TEMPERATURE CONTROL
INSTALLED IN THE STORAGE TANK
OR CIRCULATING LOOP RETURN LINE
1285179
NOTE: USE SEPARATE 120 VAC POWER
SUPPLY FOR PUMP CIRCUIT. DO NOT
SHARE POWER WITH WATER HEATER AS
THIS MAY CAUSE ELECTRICAL LINE
NOISE AND LEAD TO ERRATIC CONTROL
SYSTEM OPERATION.
L1 HOT
120 VAC CIRC

POWER PUMP
MOTOR
L2 NEUTRAL
Figure 68
CIRCULATING PUMP WIRING DIAGRAM

DISHWASHER LOOP WITH TOGGLE SWITCH
DISHWASHER FIELD SUPPLIED TEMPERATURE
TOGGLE CONTROL INSTALLED IN THE
SWITCH CIRCULATING LOOP RETURN LINE
NOTE: USE SEPARATE 120 VAC POWER
SUPPLY FOR PUMP CIRCUIT. DO NOT
SHARE POWER WITH WATER HEATER AS
THIS MAY CAUSE ELECTRICAL LINE
NOISE AND LEAD TO ERRATIC CONTROL
SYSTEM OPERATION.
L1 HOT
120 VAC CIRC

POWER PUMP
MOTOR
L2 NEUTRAL
Figure 69
68
WATER PIPING DIAGRAMS 4. See Closed Systems and Thermal Expansion on page 14.
Before installation of water piping review the following: 5. See Water Line Connections on page 43.
1. See Mixing Valves on page 14. 6. If a pump is being installed between a water heater and storage tank or on a building
recirculation loop wire according to Figure 68 on page 68.
2. See Dishwashing Machines on page 14.
7. If a pump is being installed in a recirculation loop between the water heater and a
3. See Temperature-Pressure Relief Valve on page 15. commercial dishwasher wire according to Figure 68 or Figure 69 on page 68.
ONE WATER HEATER, SINGLE TEMPERATURE LEGEND

WITH BUILDING RECIRCULATION
TEMPERATURE & TEMPERATURE CONTROL CHECK VALVE
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE PROBE
WARNING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS SUGGESTED
PIPING CONFIGURATION AND OTHER DEVICES; PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DRAIN TEMPERATURE GAGE
CHECK WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES
FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS. CIRCULATING PUMP FULL PORT BALL VALVE WATER FLOW SWITCH
ANY MATERIAL, COMPONENT OR VENDOR CHANGE

MUST HAVE PRIOR APPROVAL BY THE APPLICABLE
PRODUCT ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT.
HOT WATER
TO FIXTURES
69
PIPE T&P TO
OPEN DRAIN HOT WATER
RETURN
COLD WATER
SUPPLY
EXPANSION
TANK
FINISHED FLOOR
NOTES:
1. Preferred piping method.
2. The temperature and pressure relief valve setting shall not exceed pressure rating of any component in the system.
3. Service valves are shown for servicing unit. However, local codes shall govern their usage.
Spec Seq#: 76
1285179
ONE WATER HEATER, TWO TEMPERATURE LEGEND

WITH HIGH TEMPERAURE LOOP RECIRCULATION
WITH BUILDING RECIRCULATION TEMPERATURE CONTROL
TEMPERATURE & PROBE CHECK VALVE
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
WARNING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS SUGGESTED DRAIN
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE TEMPERATURE GAGE
PIPING CONFIGURATION AND OTHER DEVICES;
CHECK WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES FULL PORT BALL VALVE
CIRCULATING PUMP WATER FLOW SWITCH
FOR ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS.
MIXING VALVE

OUTLET
TEMPERED
WATER
OUTLET
70
TEMPERED WATER
RETURN
COLD WATER HOT

SUPPLY
HOT WATER
RETURN PIPE T&P TO
OPEN DRAIN
EXPANSION
COLD
TANK
FINISHED FLOOR
NOTES:
Spec Seq#: 76
1285179

WITH VERTICAL STORAGE TANK FORCED RECIRCULATION
WITH BUILDING RECIRCULATION TEMPERATURE & TEMPERATURE CONTROL CHECK VALVE
WARNING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS SUGGESTED PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE DRAIN TEMPERATURE GAGE
CHECK WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES CIRCULATING PUMP FULL PORT BALL VALVE WATER FLOW SWITCH
HOT WATER
ANY MATERIAL, COMPONENT OR VENDOR CHANGE TO FIXTURES
71
PIPE T&P TO
OPEN DRAIN HOT WATER
RETURN
COLD WATER
ALT. COLD WATER SUPPLY
CONNECTION
EXPANSION
TANK
FINISHED
FLOOR
NOTES:
4. The tank temperature control should be wired to and control the pump between the water heater(s) and the storage tank(s).
5. The water heater’s operating thermostat should be set 5 degrees F higher than the tank temperature control.
Spec Seq#: 76
1285179

WITH HORIZONTAL STORAGE TANK FORCED RECIRCULATION
WITH BUILDING RECIRCULATION TEMPERATURE & TEMPERATURE CONTROL CHECK VALVE
WARNING: THIS DRAWING SHOWS SUGGESTED DRAIN TEMPERATURE GAGE

PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
CHECK WITH LOCAL CODES AND ORDINANCES CIRCULATING PUMP FULL PORT BALL VALVE WATER FLOW SWITCH

PRODUCT ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT. HOT WATER
TO FIXTURES
72
CIRCULATING
PUMP
PIPE T&P TO HOT WATER
OPEN DRAIN RETURN
ALTERNATE
LOCATION
COLD WATER
SUPPLY
EXPANSION
TANK
FINISHED
FLOOR
NOTES:
4. The tank temperature control should be wired to and control the pump between the water heater(s) and the storage tank(s).
5. The water heater’s operating thermostat should be set 5 degrees F higher than the tank temperature control.
Spec Seq#: 76
1285179
TWO WATER HEATERS, SINGLE TEMPERATURE LEGEND


HOT WATER
TO FIXTURES
73
PIPE T&P TO PIPE T&P TO
OPEN DRAIN OPEN DRAIN
HOT WATER
RETURN
COLD WATER
SUPPLY
EXPANSION
TANK
FINISHED
FLOOR
NOTES:
Spec Seq#: 76
1285179
THREE WATER HEATERS, SINGLE TEMPERATURE LEGEND


74
HOT WATER
TO FIXTURES
PIPE T&P TO PIPE T&P TO PIPE T&P TO

OPEN DRAIN OPEN DRAIN OPEN DRAIN
HOT WATER
RETURN
COLD WATER
SUPPLY
EXPANSION
TANK
FINISHED
FLOOR
NOTES:
Spec Seq#: 76
1285179
FOUR WATER HEATERS, SINGLE TEMPERATURE LEGEND


HOT WATER
TO FIXTURES
75
TANK TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
PIPE T&P TO PIPE T&P TO PIPE T&P TO PIPE T&P TO

OPEN DRAIN OPEN DRAIN OPEN DRAIN OPEN DRAIN
HOT WATER
RETURN
COLD WATER
SUPPLY
EXPANSION
TANK
FINISHED
FLOOR
NOTES:
Spec Seq#: 76
1285179
Spec Seq#: 76
COMMERCIAL
WATER HEATER
LIMITED WARRANTY
EFFECTIVE WHAT'S NOT COVERED

For 3 Years, in the event of a tank leak, we will repair or, at our • Problems caused by improper: gas supply line sizing, gas type,
1285179
discretion, replace the defective water heater. venting, connections, combustion air, voltage, wiring, or fusing
For 1 Year, in the event of part failure, we will repair or, at our • Failure to follow applicable codes
discretion, replace the defective part. • Failure to follow printed instructions
We warrant this product against defects in materials or • Abuse, misuse, accident, fire, flood, Acts of God
workmanship as described in this document if installed within
• Improper installation, sizing, delivery, or maintenance
the United States or Canada and provided the product remains
at its original place of installation. • Claims related to rust, noise, smell, or taste of water
Warranty coverage begins the date of installation OR the date of • Failure to conduct authorized factory start up if required
manufacture if installation cannot be verified. • Alterations to the water heater
• Non-outdoor heaters installed outdoors
WHAT'S COVERED
• Damages due to a failure to allow for thermal expansion
Subject to these terms, in the event of defect in materials and/
• Heat exchanger failure due to lack of adequate / proper supply
or workmanship resulting in a tank leak during the first three
of water
years, we will:
• Replace the water heater should the tank leak. • Heaters moved from their original location
Subject to these terms, in the event of a defect in materials and/or • Service trips to explain proper installation, use, or maintenance
workmanship appearing during the first year, we will: of the product/unit or to describe compliance requirements
• Repair or, at our discretion, replace any part of the water under applicable codes and regulations
heater covered under this limited warranty excluding parts • Charges related to accessing your heater including but not
subject to normal maintenance (Example: non-electronic limited to door/wall removal, equipment rental, etc.
anode rod, filter, etc)
• Replacement parts after expiration of this warranty
Service/labor, shipping, delivery, installation, handling or any
other costs are not covered at any time under this warranty. LIMITATIONS
Any replacement part or product will be warranted only for NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING ELSE TO THE CONTRARY,
the unexpired portion of the original water heater’s limited THIS IS YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE WARRANTY.
warranty period. ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING A WARRANTY
If an identical model is no longer available due to a change in law, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR
regulation, or standard, we will replace the product with one having PURPOSE ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. SELLER SHALL
comparable capacity and input. In these instances, the owner will NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL,
have the option of paying the difference between what was paid for SPECIAL, PUNITIVE OR OTHER INDIRECT DAMAGES. TOTAL
the original model and the new model with the additional features, LIABILITY ARISING AT ANY TIME SHALL NOT EXCEED THE
or receiving a refund of the portion of the purchase price, on a PURCHASE PRICE PAID WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT,
pro-rata basis allocable to the unexpired portion of the warranty. TORT, STRICT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.
SERVICE INQUIRIES:
For service inquiries call the telephone number listed below. Be prepared to provide the following information:
name, address, and telephone number; the model and serial number of the water heater; proof of installation; and a clear description
of the problem.
For your records, fill in the product:
Serial: ___________________
Model: ___________________
U.S. Customers: Canadian Customers:
A. O. Smith Corporation P. O. Box 310 – 768 Erie Street
500 Tennessee Waltz Parkway Stratford (Ontario) N5A 6T3
Ashland City, Tennessee 37015 800-265-8520
800-527-1953
www.hotwater.com
79
Spec Seq#: 76
1285179
500 Tennessee Waltz Parkway, Ashland City, TN 37015

Technical Support: 800-527-1953 • Parts: 800-433-2545
www.hotwater.com
Copyright © 2017 A. O. Smith, All rights reserved.

Spec Seq#: 77
THERM-X-TROL®
THERMAL EXPANSION ABSORBERS
INSTALLATION & OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
Models ST-5C through ST-210VC
135048
NOTE: Inspect for shipping damage and notify freight carrier or store where purchased immediately if damage is present. To avoid risk of personal
injury and property damage, if the product appears to be malfunctioning or shows signs of corrosion, call a qualified professional immediately. Current
copies of the Product manual can be viewed at www.amtrol.com. Use proper safety equipment when installing.
THIS IS THE SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL. IT IS USED TO ALERT YOU TO POTENTIAL PERSONAL INJURY AND OTHER
HAZARDS. OBEY ALL SAFETY MESSAGES THAT FOLLOW THIS SYMBOL TO REDUCE THE RISK OF PERSONAL
INJURY AS WELL AS PROPERTY DAMAGE.
READ CAREFULLY THE PRODUCT This Product, like most Products under pressure,
INSTALLATION & OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS. may over time corrode, weaken and burst or explode,
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS AND WARNINGS IN THE causing serious or fatal injury, leaking or flooding and/or property damage.
MANUAL MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS OR FATAL INJURY AND/OR To minimize risk, a licensed professional must install and periodically
PROPERTY DAMAGE, AND WILL VOID THE PRODUCT WARRANTY. inspect and service the Product. A drip pan connected to an adequate
THIS PRODUCT MUST BE INSTALLED BY A QUALIFIED drain must be installed if leaking or flooding could cause property damage.
PROFESSIONAL. FOLLOW ALL APPLICABLE LOCAL AND STATE Do not locate in an area where leakage of the tank or connections could
CODES AND REGULATIONS, IN THE ABSENCE OF SUCH CODES, cause property damage to the area adjacent to the appliance or to lower
FOLLOW THE CURRENT EDITIONS OF THE NATIONAL PLUMBING floors of the structure.
CODE AND NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE, AS APPLICABLE.
Do not expose Product to freezing temperatures or
EXPLOSION HAZARD. Failure to follow the
instructions in the accompanying product manual temperatures in excess of 200° F. Do not adjust the
can cause a rupture or explosion; possibly causing serious or fatal injury, pre-charge or re-pressure this Product except for any adjustments
leaking or flooding and/or property damage. required at the time of initial installation, especially if Product corroded,
damaged or with diminished integrity. Adjustments to pre-charge must
Use only with potable water system. Do not operate be done at ambient temperature only. Failure to properly size the
in a setting with freezing temperatures or where the Product or follow these instructions may result in excessive strain on the
temperature can exceed 200°F and do not exceed the maximum working
system lead to Product failure, serious or fatal personal injury, leakage
pressure specified for this Product in the Manual. Mount vertically only.
Chlorine & Aggressive Water: The water quality
can significantly influence the life of this Product. EXPLOSION OR RUPTURE HAZARD A relief valve
You should test for corrosive elements, acidity, total solids and other must be installed to prevent pressure in excess of
relevant contaminants, including chlorine and treat your water appropriately local code requirement or maximum working pressure designated in the
to insure satisfactory performance and prevent premature failure. Product Manual, whichever is less. At least once every 3 years or if
discharge is present, a licensed contractor should inspect the temperature
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING! This product contains a
and pressure relief valve and replace if corrosion is evident or the valve
chemical known by the State of California to cause cancer and to cause
birth defects or other reproductive harm. (California Installer/Contractor does not function. FAILURE TO INSPECT THIS VALVE AS DIRECTED
- California law requires that this notice be given to consumer/end user COULD RESULT IN UNSAFE TEMPERATURE OR PRESSURE BUILD-
of this product.) For more information: www.amtrol.com/prop65.html UP WHICH CAN RESULT IN PRODUCT FAILURE, SERIOUS INJURY
OR DEATH AND/OR SEVERE PROPERTY DAMAGE AND VOID THE
PRODUCT WARRANTY.
Spec Seq#: 77
PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS CAREFULLY

IMPORTANT GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION -
ADDITIONAL SPECIFIC SAFETY ALERTS APPEAR IN THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS.
FAILURE TO PROPERLY SEAL THE VALVE CAP WILL Operation

RESULT IN LOSS OF PRECHARGE CAUSING
PRODUCT TO FAIL. 1. The THERM-X-TROL is installed in the supply line between
the backflow preventer and the water heater. Its sealed-in air
Installation pre-charge prevents water from entering it until the system
pressure exceeds the pre-charge pressure.
THIS PRODUCT MUST BE INSTALLED BY A
QUALIFIED PROFESSIONAL.
2. A
s the water temperature rises, expanded water enters
the THERM-X-TROL’s non-corrosive water reservoir. The
1. Visually inspect THERM-X-TROL for any damage. If damage pre-charged air chamber absorbs the pressure increase,
135048
exists return product for replacement. keeping system pressures below the relief valve setting.
2. Adjust pre-charge to equal incoming pressure. 3. A
s hot water is used, the pressure in the air chamber forces
water back into the system until the THERM-X-TROL is
If increasing the pre-charge pressure empty. At this point, the pressure in the air chamber once
above 55 psig, the following steps must again equals the supply pressure.
be followed: 4. W
ater temperature is not to exceed 200° F or fall below 35° F.
a. Tank must be connected to the system with isolation
valve open. NOTE: M
odels are listed (ST-5C through ST-210VC) under
b. System must be pressurized to 55-60 psi or slightly ASME Section VIII, Division I.
higher than the pre-charge setting of the tank.
c. Isolation valve then needs to be closed.
Warranty
ST-5C through ST-210VC Models: One (1) Year Limited Warranty
d. The pre-charge pressure of the tank can now be
increased to the recommended high pressure setting. Visit www.amtrol.com for complete warranty details.
e. Bring system up to pressure, and then open the Figure 1

isolation valve to the tank. Turbulator™ Installation (ST-5C-DD & ST-12C-DD only)
Failure to follow these instructions could result in damage Backflow Preventor, Check Valve
or Pressure Reducing Valve
to the bladder or diaphragm and void all warranties.
3. Replace and tighten plastic cap on air fitting. Cold Hot Water
Water
4. Therm-X-Trol ST5C-DD and ST12C-DD only: Insert Turbulator Supply
into connector.
Thermal
5. Install the THERM-X-TROL on the city supply line to the 3/4” Threaded Tee Expansion
T&P
Relief
Turbulator Tank
water heater at a point between the water heater and Tank Connector Valve
backflow preventer, check valve or pressure reducing valve Press Turbulator fully into
Water
Heater
(see Figure 1). Mount vertically only. connector prior to
installing tank.
6. O
nce the THERM-X-TROL is installed, check the city supply
line for any leakage. Make repairs if necessary. ST-20VC
7. B
efore the initial firing of the water heater, open any hot
water fixture and draw water until all air is removed from the
system. Turn the water heater temperature control to desired BFP, Check or PRV
ending temperature level, (see water heater instructions). CWS Hot Water
8. T
o relieve initial thermal expansion, slightly open a hot water
faucet. Continue until water heater aquastat temperature is
satisfied. Once heater is at its operating range, no further
bleeding of expanded water is required. THERM-X-TROL
Expansion Tank
T&P
Valve
9. T
he system water heater and THERM-X-TROL will now
be operational. The THERM-X-TROL will control pressure Water
increases caused by thermal expansion to a level well below Heater
the water heater relief valve setting.
Maintenance
1. A
professional plumber should check the complete heating
system, including the THERM-X-TROL, yearly and more
frequently as the system ages.
LOW-LEAD
1400 Division Road, West Warwick, RI 02893 USA

T: 800.426.8765 F: 800.293.1519
www.amtrol.com
© 2018 AMTROL Inc. Part #: 9017-091 (01/18)
Spec Seq#: 83
*****
CP-1, 2, 3, 6
*****
Spec Seq#: 84
~Bell & Gossett INSTRUCTION MANUAL

P58671H
a xylem brand
867369
C@US
LISTED
NRF/NBF/SSF Circulator
INSTALLER: PLEASE LEAVE THIS MANUAL FOR THE OWNER'S USE.
NOTE: Bell & Gossett recommends Bronze or Stainless Steel

Booster Pumps be used for pumping potable water. AWARNING
BEFORE INSTALLING, USING
This pump is for indoor use only. OR SERVICING THIS PRO·
DUCT, READ THE INSTRUC·
TIONS. TO REDUCE RISK
OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK
SAFETY SEE INSTRUCTIONS FOR A WARNING
PROPER INSTALLATION. RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK;
INSTRUCTIONS THIS PUMP HAS NOT
This safety alert symbol will be used in this manual and on the A CAUTION BEEN INVESTIGATED FOR
USE IN SWIMMING POOL g
AND MARINE AREAS. ~
pump Safety Instruction decal to draw attention to safety related FOR SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
-NONSUBMERSIBLE PUMP-
USE WIRE SUITABLE FOR AT
instructions. When used, the safety alert symbol means LEAST 90"C. USE COPPER
CONDUCTORS ONLY.
ATIENTION! BECOME ALERT! YOUR SAFETY IS INVOLVED! EMPLOYER DES FILS
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS MA Y RESULT IN A D'ALIMENTATION ADEQUATS
POUR 90"C. FOR INDOOR USE
SAFETY HAZARD. ONLY. EMPLOYER UNIQUE-
MENT A L' INTERIEUR.
Your NRF/ NBF/ SSF Booster Pump should have the warningl
caution label and nonsubmersible warning label displayed to
the right (Fig. 1) on the pump conduit box. If this warning and FIG. 1
caution label is missing or illegible, contact your local B&G
Representative for a replacement.
Spec Seq#: 84
DESCRIPTION Electrical Rating: 115V, 60Hz, 10; 220V, 60Hz, 10;

220~50Hz, 10;230~ 60Hz, 10
The Model NRF/NBF/SSF Circulator Pump features system liquid
lubricated bearings, non-overloading permanent split capacitor If your NBF pump is equipped with a sweat connected pump
motor with impedance protection and quiet operation. body, the maximum operating pressure is limited to 150 PSI
(10 bars) or a lower value determined by the type of solder
PUMP APPLICATION used and pressure/ temperature limitations listed below:
The Model NRF/ NBF/ SSF Booster Pump may be used for Do not exceed these values.
water circulating applications in hydronic and solar systems. (Solder type limits per ASTM STD. B16.18-1978)
This pump is nonsubmersible, for indoor use only. It has not
MAXIMUM LIMITATIONS
been investigated for use in swimming pool and marine areas.
PUMP TYPE OF PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
BODY SOLDER PSI of
OPERATIONAL LIMITS
867369
95-5 300 200
These pumps are designed to pump liquids compatible with SWEAT TIN- 250 225
ANTI MONY 200 250
their iron , bronze or stainless steel body constructions.
Maximum Operating Pressure: 150 PSI (10 bars) WARNING:
Maximum Operating Temperature:
NRF-22 & NRF-9F/ LW, 240°F (115° C)
A Damage to the pump or failure of solder sealing joints
may occur if these operational limits are exceeded. This
NBF Pumps (except NBF-33), 230°F (110°C) can result in water leakage. Failure to follow this instruction
NRF-33 & NBF-33, 225°F (10rC) could cause serious personal injury and/ or property damage.
SSF Pumps, 230°F (110°C)
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
MECHANICAL SAFETY ELECTRICAL SAFETY
A WARNING: EXCESSIVE SYSTEM A WARNING: ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
.. PRESSURE HAZARD . . Electrical connections are to be made by a qualified
The maximum working pressure of the pump is listed on electrician in accordance with all applicable codes,
the nameplate - DO NOT EXCEED THIS PRESSURE. ordinances and good practices. Failure to follow these
Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious instructions could result in serious personal injury, death
personal injury, death and/ or property damage. and/ or property damage.
A WARNING: EXCESSIVE PRESSURE HAZARD A WARNING: ELECTRICAL GROUNDING HAZARD

.. VOLUMETRIC EXPANSION . . Adequate electrical grounding is required for the safe
The heating of water and other fluids causes volumetric operation of B&G Pumps. The use of grounded metal
expansion. The associated forces may cause failure of conduit assures this requirement. If the means of connection
system components and the release of high temperature to the supply - connection box (wiring compartment) is
fluids. This can be prevented by installing properly sized other than grounded metal conduit , ground the pump back
and located compression tanks and pressure relief valves. to the service. Use a copper conductor at least the size of
Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious the circuit connectors supplying the pump. Connect the
personal injury, death and/ or property damage. ground wire to the green grounding screw in the wiring
compartment. Failure to follow these instructions could
result in serious personal injury, death and/ or property
THERMAL SAFETY damage.
A WARNING: EXTREME TEMPERATURE HAZARD

. . If the pump , motor or piping are operating at A WARNING: RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
extremely high or low temperature, guarding or insulation is . . Do not install this pump in swimming pool or marine
required. Failure to follow these instructions could result in areas. Failure to follow these instructions could result in
serious personal injury, death and/ or property damage. serious personal injury, death and/or property damage.
A WARNING:
. . California Proposition 65 warning! This product
contains chemicals known to the state of California to
cause cancer and birth defects of other reproductive harm.
REMOVAL OF PUMP FROM EXISTING SYSTEM FOR REPLACEMENT
A WARNING: ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD A WARNING: HOT WATER HAZARD

. . Disconnect and lockout the power before servicing. . . Before draining the system , allow water to cool to at
Failure to follow these instructions could result in serious least 100°F, open the drain valve (take precautions against
personal injury or death. water damage) and leave the drain valve open until
servicing is complete. Failure to follow these instructions
1. Close the valves on the suction and discharge sides of the could result in serious personal injury, death and / or
pump. (If no valves have been installed, it may be neces- property damage.
sary to drain the system.)
2
Spec Seq#: 84
A WARNING: ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD A WARNING: HIGH PRESSURE HAZARD

. . Be certain the electrical power is not present at the . . Pressure may be present in the pump body. This
motor leads before continuing . Failure to follow these pressure can be relieved by loosening the flange bolts and
instructions could result in serious personal injury or death shifting the pump assembly slightly to allow the pressurized
water to escape. Failure to follow these instructions could
2. Loosen the conduit box cover screw and remove the cover. result in serious personal injury or death.
3. Disconnect the electrical supply lines to the pump. 4. Remove the flange nuts and bolts or loosen the union ring
nuts. Then remove the pump from the piping.
1. Use a torch with a sharp pointed flame.

PUMP INSTALLATION
2. Clean tube ends and pump connections thoroughly.
A CAUTION: PROPERTY DAMAGE HAZARD 3. Use 95-5 (Tin-Antimony); and a good grade of flux.
. . It is not advisable to install circulators in an attic
867369
or upper floor over finished living space. If the circulator
A CAUTION:
. . Heat associated with the use of silver solder may
must be installed over head, or over expensive equipment, damage a pump voiding the warranty. Do not use silver
provide adequate drainage in the event of leakage. Failure solder. Failure to follow these instructions could result in
to follow these instructions could result in property damage. property damage and/or moderate personal injury.
Locate the pump so there is sufficient room for inspection,

maintenance and service. Bell & Gossett recommends the
A CAUTION:
. . Excessive use of solder in a vertical installation may
installation of service valves on the suction and discharge of
result in damage to the pump impeller. Do not use
all circulators to facilitate servicing or replacement of the
excessive flux. Failure to follow these instructions could
circulator without draining the system.
result in property damage and/or moderate personal injury.
A CAUTION: The use of PTFE impregnated pipe 4. When sweating the joints, first wrap the pump body with a
. . compound and PTFE tape on pipe threads pro- cool wet rag, then direct the flame with care to avoid
vides lubricity which can lead to overtightening and break- subjecting the pump to excessive heat.
age. Do not overtighten. Failure to follow this instruction
can result in moderate personal injury from hot water 5. Check soldered connections for leaks. If resoldering is
and/or property damage. required , take care to avoid subjecting the pump to exces-
sive heat.
Install suction and discharge flanges or union connectors on
the pipe ends. The use of PTFE tape sealer or a high quality A WARNING: WATER LEAKAGE HAZARD
thread sealant is recommended . . . To prevent leakage, make certain that the flange bolts
or ring nuts have been adequately tightened and that the
Be sure to minimize any pipe-strain on the pump. Support the solder connections do not leak. Failure to follow these
suction and discharge piping by the use of pipe hangers near instructions could result in serious personal injury, death
the pump. Line up the vertical and horizontal piping so that the and/or property damage.
bolt-holes in the pump flanges match the bolt-holes in the
pipe flanges. If union connections are used , line up the pump MODE OF DISCHARGE
threads with union tail pieces. DO NOT ATIEMPT TO SPRING The Model NRF/ NBF/SSF Circulator can be installed to dis-
THE SUCTION OR DISCHARGE LINES IN POSITION. THIS
charge up or down , horizontally, left or right, but the motor
MAY RESULT IN UNWANTED STRESS IN THE PUMP BODY,
shaft must remain in the horizontal position, the arrow on the
FLANGE CONNECTIONS AND PIPING. The code for Pressure body must point in the direction of the flow, the conduit box
Piping (ANSI B31 .1) lists many types of supports available for
must be positioned on the top or to the side of the motor
various applications.
housing (see figure 2). If the conduit box position must be
changed, it is best to do so before installation. However, if the
Bell & Gossett flange/union gaskets must be installed between the
pump is already installed, see the section titled "REMOVAL OF
NRF/ NBF/SSF pump body flanges and the suction and discharge
PUMP FROM EXISTING SYSTEM FOR REPLACEMENT"
pipe flanges/union tail pieces. Use 7116" diameter x 11/2 " long cap
before proceeding.
screw and matching nut to connect the pump to the flanges.
A WARNING: HOT WATER HAZARD

A CAUTION:
. . Make sure the power is turned off before placing
. . When disassembling a gasketed joint, always use a
anything inside the discharge opening to move the impeller.
new gasket upon reassembly. NEVER RE-USE OLD
GASKETS. Failure to follow these instructions could result
in serious personal injury, death and/or property damage. TO CHANGE THE CONDUIT POSITION
1. Remove the four (4) 1/4-20 Allen screws (311 6 wrench) while
A WARNING: HOT WATER HAZARD supporting the motor assembly.
. . Make sure that each flange gasket remains seated in 2. Remove the motor assembly from the pump body and
the flange groove during and after installation. Failure to rotate it to the desired position (see figure 2).
follow these instructions could result in serious personal
injury, death and/or property damage. 3. Replace the Allen screws and tighten evenly in a diagonal
method to 60 in-Ibs.
Apply torque in even increments to both flange bolts until a 4. Check to see that the impeller turns freely. Insert your finger
value of 115 in-Ibs. is reached . Both the suction and discharge in the discharge port of the pump body (the arrow on the
flange bolts must be torqued in this manner. pump body points in the direction of the discharge) until
you can feel the impeller and rotate it with your fingertip. If
If your NBF pump is equipped with a sweat connected pump the impeller does not turn easily, repeat the disassembly/
body, see the following instructions: reassembly process.
3
Spec Seq#: 84
FIG. 2
WARNING: ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD WARNING: ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD

Disconnect and lock out the power befor e making Be certain that all connections ar e secure and the
electrical connections. Failur e to follow these instructions conduit box cover is closed befor e electrical power is
could result in serious personal injury or death. connected. Failure to follow these instructions could r esult
867369
in serious personal injury, death and/or property damage.
WIRING INSTRUCTIONS
A. Loosen the scr ew securing the conduit box cover (wiring
compartment), and remove the screw & cover. TYPICAL WIRING INSTALLATION SCHEMATIC
1Ø POWER SOURCE
B. Attach the appropriate size connector to the hole in the side
of the conduit box.
C. Using a minimum size of 14 AWG copper electrical wire
(refer to your local code for wiring restrictions), wire the FUSIBLE DISCONNECT
motor to a single phase power sour ce that matches the OR CIRCUIT BREAKER BY
electrical rating on the pump nameplate. See Fig. 3. Use OTHERS
the size of electrical wire as dictated by local code. S
D. Connect the gr ound wire to the inside of the conduit box TO REMOTE
with one of the gr een screws provided inside the box. See CONTROL
Fig. 4. IF REQUIRED L N
NOTE: Electrical supply and gr ounding wires must be suit- PUMP MOTOR
able for at least 90°C (194°F). IMPEDANCE
PUMP
PROTECTED
MOTOR
NOTE: Model N RF/N BF/SSF Cir culators are impedance
protected and do not require external overload protection. FIG. 3
CONDUIT BOX WIRING DETAIL
ALTERNATE
GROUND SCREW GREEN
GROUND
SCREW
LINE
FIG. 4 LEADS
SYSTEM PREPARATION WARNING: HOT WATER LEAKAGE HAZARD

Prior to pump start-up, closed heating and cooling systems Pressurize the body slowly while checking for leaks at
should be cleaned, drained, and refilled with clean water. The all joints with gaskets or solder connections. Failur e to follow
system fluid pH must be maintained between 7 and 9. these instructions could r esult in serious personal injury
START-UP
Do not start pump until the system has been filled and vented. PERIODIC INSPECTION
Air should be vented fr om the system by means of an air vent Bell & Gossett N RF/N BF/SSF Cir culators are designed to
located at a high point in the system. The system must be provide years of trouble free service. It is recommended that
completely vented prior to pump operation. Do not run N RF/ periodic inspections be made to check for potential pr oblems
NBF/SSF circulators dry. Pump operation without water cir cu- with the pump. If any leakage or evidence of leakage is pr e-
lation could result in pump and motor damage. sent, repair or replace the unit.
Xylem Inc.
8200 N. Austin Avenue
Morton Grove, Illinois 60053
Phone: (847) 966-3700
Fax: (847) 965-8379
www.xyleminc.com/brands/bellgossett
Bell & Gossett is a trademark of Xylem Inc. or one of its subsidiaries.
© 2013 Xylem Inc. P58671H January 2013
Spec Seq#: 88
*****
WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
*****
Spec Seq#: 89
*****
GARBAGE DISPOSAL
*****
Spec Seq#: 90
398218
EVO LUTION COMPACT ®
COMPACT SIZE FOOD WASTE DISPOSER
TRITURADOR DE DESPERDICIOS DE ALIMENTOS DE TAMAÑO COMPACTO
BROYEUR DE DÉCHETS DE TAILLE COMPACTE
www.insinkerator.com
75495 Rev A
Evolution Compact ®
Compact Size Food Waste Disposer/Triturador de Desperdicios de Alimentos de Tamaño Compacto/Broyeur de Déchets de Taille Compacte 1
Spec Seq#: 90
The Evolution Series® by InSinkErator® is a new standard in sound and grind performance. Featuring exclusive
patented SoundSeal™ and MultiGrind™ technologies, no food waste disposer grinds more with less noise.
Evolution Series® de InSinkErator® es el nuevo estándar dentro de la tecnología de conductos y trituración. Con
las exclusivas tecnologías patentadas SoundSeal™ y MultiGrind™, ningún triturador de desperdicios tritura más
con menos ruido.
La série Evolution Series® d'InSinkErator® représente une nouvelle norme en matière de son et de rendement de
broyage. Caractérisée par des technologies exclusives brevetées SoundSeal™ et MultiGrind™, aucun autre
broyeur ne broie plus de déchets aussi silencieusement.
398218
Sound Seal
TM
SoundTecnología
Seal SoundTechnologie
Seal
TM TM
1
Technology
1 Quiet Collar® Sink Baffle 1 Deflector del fregadero 1 Écran d’évier Quiet Collar®
Quiet Collar®
6 2 Anti-Vibration Mount® 2 Anti-Vibration Mount® 2 Anti-Vibration Mount®
2
3 Anti-Vibration 3 Anti-Vibration 3 Anti-Vibration
Tailpipe Mount™ Tailpipe Mount™ Tailpipe Mount™
5
4 SoundLimiter™ Insulation 4 Aislamiento SoundLimiter™ 4 Isolation SoundLimiter™
Multi Grind Multi Grind Multi Grind

TM TM TM
7
Technology Tecnología Technologie
5 GrindShear Ring® 5 GrindShear Ring® 5 GrindShear Ring®
3 6 Quick-Lock® Sink Mount 6 Montaje del fregadero 6 Outil de montage Quick-Lock®
Quick-Lock®
7 Stainless Steel 7 Componentes de trituración 7 Composants de broyage en acier
Grind Components de acero inoxidable inoxydable
8
8 3/4 HP Heavy Duty 8 Motor Dura-Drive® de 8 Moteur 3/4 ch robuste Dura-Drive®
4 Dura-Drive® Motor 3/4 HP para trabajos
pesados
! Read all warnings before proceeding.

! Lea todas las advertencias antes de continuar.
! Lire tous les avertissements avant de procéder.
8”
6”
”
1/8
12
4”
53
/4”
Dimensions/Dimensiones/Dimensions
Spec Seq#: 90
Includes/Incluye/Comprend
Lower Mounting Ring

Stopper
A Tapón
Anillo de montaje inferior
Bouchon Anneau de montage inférieur
398218
Quiet Collar®
Sink Baffle Anti-Vibration Mount®
B Deflector del Anti-Vibration Mount®
fregadero Quiet Collar® Anti-Vibration Mount®
Écran d’évier
Quiet Collar®
Sink Flange Dishwasher Inlet
C Brida del fregadero Entrada del lavavajillas
Collet d’évier
Avaloir du lave-vaisselle
Fiber Gasket
D Junta de fibra
Anti-Vibration
Joint fibreux J Tailpipe Mount™
Anti-Vibration
Backup Flange Tailpipe Mount™
E Brida de apoyo
Disposer/Triturador/Broyeur
Anti-Vibration
Bride de retenue Tailpipe Mount™
Mounting Ring
F Anillo de montaje K
Jam-Buster™ Wrench
Llave Jam-Buster™
Anneau de montage
Clé Jam-Buster™
1 1/2” Screws
G Tornillos de 1 1/2”
Failure to use the spring type hose
clamp provided voids warranty./ M
Discharge Tube
Tubo de descarga
(3,81 cm) La garantía pierde validez si no usa
Vis de 1 1/2 po Tuyau de vidange
la abrazadera de manguera tipo
1 1/8” Screws resorte incluida./Le fait de ne pas
H Tornillos de 1 1/8" utiliser la bride de serrage à ressort
(2,85 cm) annule la garantie.
Vis de 1 1/8 po Spring Type Hose Clamp Discharge Tube
Snap Ring L Abrazadera de N
I Anillo de cierre manguera tipo resorte/
Tubo de descarga
Tuyau de vidange
Jonc de blocage Bride de serrage à ressort
Tools and Materials/Herramientas y materiales/Outils et pièces

Not Included/No incluidos/Non compris
Cable Connector Plumbers putty

Conector para cable Masilla de plomería
Connecteur de câble Mastic de plomberie
Wire Nuts
Tuercas para conectores
Serre-fils
Spec Seq#: 90
Removal of old disposer/Extracción del triturador viejo/Retrait de l’ancien broyeur.

If you are replacing an WARNING
1 existing disposer, continue
to Step 2. If there is no
existing disposer, disconnect
SHOCK HAZARD
Turn off electric power at fuse box or
2
sink drain and skip to Step 10. circuit breaker.
Si tiene que reemplazar un triturador PELIGRO DE DESCARGA ELECTRICA

existente, continúe con el paso 2. Si no Desconecte el suministro eléctrico
existe un triturador, desconecte el desde la caja de fusibles o el
desagüe del fregadero y continúe con el interruptor de circuito.
398218
Paso 10.
RISQUE DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE
En cas de remplacement d’un broyeur Coupez l’alimentation électrique au
existant, passer à l’étape 2. Dans le cas boîtier de fusibles ou de disjoncteurs.
contraire, déconnecter le drain de
l’évier et passer à l’étape 10. Disconnect drain trap from waste
discharge tube. Disconnect dishwasher if
connected to the disposer./Desconecte la
trampa de desagüe del tubo de descarga
de desperdicios. Desconecte el lavavajillas
si está conectado al triturador./
Déconnecter le robinet de vidange du tube
de vidange. Déconnecter le lave-vaisselle
s’il est connecté au broyeur.
! WARNING
3 Falling Hazard 4 !* 5 !*
Peligro de caída
Danger de chute
Support disposer, insert end of Jam- *WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD *WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD
Buster™ Wrench (K) into right side of With the electrical supply turned off, With the electrical supply turned off,
mounting lug, and turn. Disposer will fall flip disposer over and remove electrical disconnect the disposer wires from the
free./Apoye el triturador, inserte el extremo cover plate. Save cable connector if electrical supply./*ADVERTENCIA:
de la Llave Jam-Buster™ (K) en el lado applicable./*ADVERTENCIA: PELIGRO DE PELIGRO DE DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA.
derecho de uno de los salientes de montaje DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA. Con la energía Con la energía eléctrica apagada,
y gire. El triturador se liberará./Soutenir eléctrica apagada, voltee el triturador desconecte los cables del triturador del
le broyeur, insérer l’extrémité de la Clé y retire la placa de la cubierta eléctrica. suministro eléctrico./*AVERTISSEMENT :
Jam-Buster™ (K) dans le côté droit de Guarde el conector del cable si DANGER D’ÉLECTROCUTION. Couper
l’écrou de montage et tourner. Le broyeur corresponde./*AVERTISSEMENT : DANGER l’alimentation électrique, puis déconnecter
chutera librement en place. D’ÉLECTROCUTION. Couper l'alimentation les fils du broyeur de l’alimentation
électrique puis renverser le broyeur et électrique.
enlever la plaque électrique. Conserver le
connecteur de câble s’il y a lieu.
Spec Seq#: 90
If the new disposer mounting is the

same as the old one, you can go to
6 7
step 15.
Note: For sinks thicker than 3/8”,

you will need to replace existing 1 1/2”
screws with 1 1/8” screws (H). See
step 14.
398218
Si el montaje del triturador nuevo es el
mismo que el viejo, puede ir al Paso 15.
Nota: Para los fregaderos con espesor

mayor de 3/8” (0,95 cm), deberá
reemplazar los tornillos existentes de Loosen the 3 screws on the mounting Using a screwdriver, remove the snap
1 1/2” (3,81 cm) por tornillos de 1 1/8” assembly./Afloje los 3 tornillos en el ring./Retire el anillo de cierre con un
(2,85 cm) (H). Consulte el Paso 14. conjunto de montaje./Desserrer les 3 destornillador./Au moyen d’un tournevis,
vis du montage. retirer le jonc de blocage.
Si le nouveau broyeur est similaire au
broyeur usagé, pas-ser à l’étape 15.
Note : Pour les éviers de plus de

3/8 po d’épaisseur, il faut remplacer
les vis de 1 1/2 po existantes par des
vis de 1 1/8 po (H). Voir l’étape 14.
8 9
Remove flange from sink./Retire la brida Remove old plumber’s putty from sink
del fregadero./Retirer le collet de l’évier. with putty knife./Retire la masilla de
plomería vieja del fregadero con una
espátula para masilla./Enlever l’ancien
mastic de plomberie au moyen d’un
couteau à mastic.
Spec Seq#: 90
Installation/Instalación/Installation
10 11 12 C
D
C
C E
398218
F
Evenly apply 1/2” thick rope of plumber’s Press flange (C) firmly into sink drain. Insert fiber gasket (D), backup flange (E)
putty around flange (C)./Aplique una tira Remove excess putty./Presione la brida (C) and mounting ring (F). Hold in place while
gruesa de masilla de plomería, de 1/2” firmemente en el desagüe del fregadero. inserting snap ring (I)./Inserte la junta de
(1,27 cm), en forma uniforme alrededor de Retire la masilla sobrante./Enfoncer le fibra (D), la brida de soporte (E) y el anillo
la brida (C)./Appliquer uniformément un collet (C) fermement dans le drain de de montaje (F). Sosténgalos en su lugar
cordon de mastic de plomberie de 1/2 po l’évier. Enlever l’excès de mastic. mientras inserta el anillo de cierre (I)./
d’épaisseur autour du collet (C). Insérer le joint fibreux (D), la bride de
retenue (E) et l’anneau de montage (F).
Tenir le tout en place pendant l’insertion
du jonc de blocage (I).
< 3/8”
13 15
Stop and read
I 14 E
F
Deténgase y lea
Arrêter et lire
!*
G 1-1/2”
Optional/Opcional/
Facultatif
> 3/8”
J
E
F
H 1-1/8”
Place a weight such as the disposer on the Tighten 1 1/2” screws (G) evenly and firmly *CAUTION: DISHWASHER CONNECTION
sink flange to hold it in place. Use a towel to against backup flange. Use shorter 1 1/8” ONLY If you do not need to attach the
prevent scratching sink. Pull snap ring open screws (H) if sink is more than 3/8” thick./ dishwasher, go to step 17. Turn disposer (J)
and press firmly until it snaps into place./ Ajuste los tornillos de 1 1/2” (3,81 cm) (G) onto side and insert screwdriver into
Coloque un peso, por ejemplo el triturador, en forma uniforme y firme contra la brida dishwasher inlet./*PRECAUCIÓN: SÓLO
sobre la brida del fregadero para mantenerla de soporte.Utilice tornillos más cortos de 1 PARA CONEXIÓN DEL LAVAVAJILLAS.
en su lugar. Utilice una toalla para evitar que 1/8” (2,85 cm) (H) si el fregadero tiene Si no es necesario conectar el lavavajillas,
se raye el fregadero. Abra el anillo de cierre más de 3/8” (0,95 cm) de espesor./Serrer pase al Paso 17. Voltee el triturador (J)
y presione firmemente hasta que se coloque les vis de 1 1/2 po (G) uniformément et sobre un lado e introduzca el destornillador
en el lugar./Placer un poids tel que le fermement contre la bride de retenue. en la entrada del lavavajillas./*MISE EN
broyeur sur le collet de l’évier pour le Utiliser les vis plus courtes de 1 1/8 po (H) GARDE : CONNECTION DU LAVE-VAIS-
maintenir en place. Utiliser une serviette si l’épaisseur de l’évier dépasse 3/8 pouce. SELLE UNIQUEMENT. S’il n’est pas
pour éviter d’égratigner l’évier. Ouvrir le nécessaire de connecter le lave-vaisselle,
jonc de blocage et appuyer fermement passer à l’étape 17. Mettre le broyeur (J)
jusqu’à ce qu’il s’enclenche. sur le flanc puis insérer un tournevis dans
l’avaloir du lave-vaisselle.
Spec Seq#: 90
16 !* 17 !* 18
!*
398218
*CAUTION: DISHWASHER CONNECTION *WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD. *WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD. With electrical
ONLY Knock out drain plug and remove Turn disposer over and remove electrical supply turned off, insert cable connector (not
plug from inside of disposer./ cover plate. Pull out wires. DO NOT included) and run electrical cable through
*PRECAUCION: SOLO PARA CONEXION REMOVE CARDBOARD SHIELD./ access hole on bottom of disposer. Tighten
DEL LAVAPLATOS. Extraiga de un golpe *ADVERTENCIA: PELIGRO DE DESCARGA cable connector./*ADVERTENCIA: PELIGRO
la tapa ciega de desagüe del interior del ELECTRICA Dé vuelta el triturador y retire DE DESCARGA ELECTRICA Con el suministro
triturador./*MISE EN GARDE : la placa protectora eléctrica. Saque los eléctrico apagado, introduzca el conector del
CONNECTION DU LAVE-VAISSELLE cables. NO RETIRE LA PROTECCION DE cable (no incluido) y pase el cable eléctrico a
UNIQUEMENT Faire tomber le bouchon CARTON./*AVERTISSEMENT : DANGER través del orificio de acceso en la parte
du drain et enlever le bouchon qui se DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. Renverser le inferior del triturador. Ajuste el conector del
trouve à l’intérieur du broyeur. broyeur et enlever la plaque électrique. cable./*AVERTISSEMENT : DANGER DE
Extraire les fils électriques. NE PAS CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE. Couper l’alimentation
ENLEVER L’ÉCRAN DE CARTON. électrique, insérer le connecteur de câble (non
compris) et faire passer le câble électrique
par le trou d’accès qui se trouve au bas du
broyeur. Serrer le connecteur de câble.
19 ! *
1 20 21 L*
2
N
DO NOT cut or disconnect any wires.
NO corte ni desconecte ningún cable.
Ne couper ou débrancher AUCUN fil.
*WARNING: SHOCK HAZARD. Connect white wire Push wires into disposer (do not displace Place tube (M or N) into Anti-Vibration
from disposer to neutral (white) wire from power cardboard shield) and replace electrical Tailpipe Mount™. Use provided tubes for
source and black wire from disposer to hot (black,
red) wire from power source with wire nuts (not
cover plate./Coloque los cables dentro del best results. Secure with spring type hose
included); ground wire to green grounding screw. triturador (no desplace la protección clamp (L). *Important: Failure to use the
Unit must be grounded for safe and proper de cartón) y vuelva a colocar la placa spring type hose clamp provided voids
installation./*ADVERTENCIA: PELIGRO DE protectora eléctrica./Pousser les fils dans warranty./Coloque el tubo (M o N) dentro
DESCARGA ELÉCTRICA. Conecte el cable blanco le broyeur (ne pas déplacer l’écran de del Anti-Vibration Tailpipe Mount™. Utilice
del triturador al cable neutro (blanco) de la fuente de
energía, y el cable negro del triturador al cable vivo carton) et replacer la plaque électrique. los tubos provistos para obtener mejores
(negro, rojo) de la fuente de energía, use para ello resultados. Fije con la abrazadera de
tuercas para cable (no incluidas); finalmente, una el manguera tipo resorte (L). *Importante:
cable de conexión a tierra con el tornillo verde La garantía pierde validez si no usa la
conectado a tierra. La unidad debe estar conectada abrazadera de manguera tipo resorte
a tierra para una instalación segura y adecuada./
*AVERTISSEMENT : DANGER D’ÉLECTROCUTION. incluida./Placer le tuyau (M ou N) dans le
Raccordez le fil blanc du broyeur au fil neutre (blanc) dispositif Anti-Vibration Tailpipe Mount™.
de la source d’alimentation et le fil noir du broyeur Utiliser les tuyaux fournis pour obtenir de
au fil sous tension (noir ou rouge) de la source meilleurs resultats. Fixer avec la bride de
d’alimentation au moyen de serre-fils (non inclus);
mettez le fil à la terre au moyen de la vis verte de
serrage à ressort (L). *Important : Le fait de
mise à la terre. L'unité doit être mise à la terre pour ne pas utiliser la bride de serrage à ressort
assurer une installation adéquate et sûre. annule la garantie.
Spec Seq#: 90
22 23 24
398218
N
Hang disposer by aligning 3 mounting tabs Turn mounting ring until all 3 mounting You may need to trim tube for proper fit.
with slide-up ramps on mounting ring./ tabs lock over the ridges on the slide-up Reconnect plumbing (and dishwasher
Sostenga el triturador y alinee las 3 ramps./Gire el anillo de montaje hasta connection if used). Make sure Anti-
lengüetas de montaje con las rampas que los 3 apéndices de montaje se Vibration Tailpipe Mount™ is straight./Es
deslizables sobre el anillo de montaje./ cierren sobre los bordes de las rampas posible que deba recortar el tubo para una
Accrocher le broyeur en alignant les 3 deslizables./Faire tourner l’anneau de colocación adecuada. Reconecte la
onglets de montage avec les glissières de montage jusqu’à ce que les 3 onglets se plomería (y la conexión del lavavajillas, si
l’anneau de montage. bloquent par-dessus les nervures des utiliza uno). Asegúrese de que el Anti-
glissières. Vibration Tailpipe Mount™ esté derecho./
Le tuyau devra peut-être être coupé pour
s’ajuster proprement. Reconnecter la
plomberie (et le lavevaisselle s’il y a lieu).
S’assurer que le dispositif Anti-Vibration
Tailpipe Mount™ est bien droit.
25 26
Model Evolution 18005585700

Model Evolution
05081500028 AMPS 8.1 HP 3/4 05081500028
Volts 120 Hz 60 1PH
18005585700
InSinkErator
Emerson Electric
Racine, WI 53406
Detach removable portion of spec label Insert Quiet Collar® Sink Baffle into sink
and place on a visible location./Corte la opening. Fill sink with water, then test for
parte desmontable de la etiqueta de leaks./Inserte el deflector del fregadero
especificaciones y colóquela en un lugar Quiet Collar® en la abertura del fregadero.
visible./Détacher la partie détachable de Llene el fregadero con agua y luego
l’étiquette de spécifications et la placer verifique que no haya fugas./Insérer
dans un endroit bien visible. l’écran Quiet Collar® dans l’ouverture de
l’évier. Remplir l’évier d’eau pour vérifier
qu’il ne fuit pas.
Spec Seq#: 90
ENGLISH
INSTRUCTIONS PERTAINING TO RISK OF FIRE, ELECTRIC SHOCK, OR INJURY TO PERSONS
(SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS)
WARNING When using electric appliances, basic precautions are always to be followed, including:
• Read all instructions before using the appliance. • When not operating a disposer, leave the stopper in place to reduce
• To reduce the risk of injury, close supervision is required when an the risk of objects falling into the disposer.
appliance is used near children. • This product is designed to dispose of normal household food waste;
• Do not put fingers or hands into a waste disposer. inserting materials other than food waste into disposer could cause
• Turn the power switch to the off position before attempting to clear a personal injury and/or property damage.
jam, removing an object from the disposer or pressing reset button. • To reduce the risk of injury, do not use the sink containing the
398218
• When attempting to loosen a jam in a waste disposer, use the disposer for purposes other than food preparation (such as baby
self-service Jam-Buster™ Wrench. bathing or washing hair).
• When attempting to remove objects from a waste disposer, use • Do not dispose of the following in the disposer: paints, solvents,
long-handled tongs or pliers. household cleaners and chemicals, automotive fluids, plastic wrap.
• To reduce the risk of injury by materials that are expellable by a waste • Replace Quiet Collar® Sink Baffle when worn to help prevent entry or
disposer, do not operate the disposer without the Quiet Collar® Sink ejection of material and water.
Baffle in place. Do not put the following into a disposer: clam or oyster • FIRE HAZARD: Do not store flammable items such as rags, paper
shells, caustic drain cleaners or similar products, glass, china, or or aerosol cans near disposer. Do not store or use gasoline or other
plastic, large (whole) bones, metal (such as bottle caps, steel shot, tin flammable vapors and liquids in vicinity of disposer.
cans, or utensils), hot grease or other hot liquids.
WARNING CAUTION
Personal Injury: Do not position your head or body under disposer; Do not use plumber's putty on any other disposer connection other
unit could fall during removal or installation. than sink flange. Do not use thread sealants or pipe dope. These may
harm disposer and cause property damage.
CAUTION
Do not operate disposer without Anti-Vibration Tailpipe Mount™ as
water leaks may result.
WARNING
Electric Shock
Improper connection of the equipment-grounding conductor can result in a risk of electric shock. Check with a qualified electrician or serviceman
if you are in doubt as to whether the appliance is properly grounded. Do not modify the plug provided with the appliance - if it will not fit the
outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician.
• This disposer must be properly grounded.
• Do not attach ground wire to gas supply pipe.
• Disconnect power before installing or servicing disposer.
• If three-prong grounded plug is used, plug must be inserted into three-hole grounded receptacle.
• All wiring must comply with local electrical codes.
• Do not reconnect electrical current at main service panel until proper grounds are installed.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1. Remove stopper from sink opening and run strong flow of cold water.
2. Turn on wall switch to start disposer.
3. Slowly insert food waste into disposer. CAUTION! Position stopper to minimize possible ejection of material while grinding.
4. After grinding is complete, turn disposer off and run water for a few seconds to flush drain line.
DO... DON'T...
• First turn on a moderate to strong flow of cold water and then turn on • Don't pour grease or fat down your disposer or any drain. It can build
the disposer. Continue running cold water for a few seconds after up in pipes and cause drain blockages. Put grease in a jar or can and
grinding is completed to flush the drain line. dispose in the trash.
• Grind hard materials such as small bones, fruit pits, and ice. A • Don't use hot water when grinding food waste. It is OK to drain hot water
scouring action is created by the particles inside the grind chamber. into the disposer between grinding periods.
• Grind peelings from citrus fruits to freshen up drain smells. • Don't fill disposer with a lot of vegetable peels all at once. Instead, turn
• Use a disposer cleaner, degreaser, or deodorizer as necessary to the water and disposer on first and then feed the peels in gradually.
relieve objectionable odors caused by grease build-up. • Don't grind large amounts of egg shells or fibrous materials like corn
husks, artichokes, etc., to avoid possible drain blockage.
• Don't turn off disposer until grinding is completed and only sound of
CAUTION motor and water is heard.
Regularly inspect disposer and plumbing fittings for water leaks, as
water leaks can cause property damage. Manufacturer cannot be held
responsible for property damage as a result of water leaks.
Spec Seq#: 90
USER-MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
CLEANING DISPOSER
Over time, food particles may accumulate in the grind chamber and baffle. An odor from the disposer is usually a sign of grease and food
buildup, caused by insufficient water flow during and after disposer use. To clean disposer:
1. Turn off disposer and disconnect power supply.
2. Place stopper in sink opening and fill sink halfway with warm water.
3. Mix 1/4 cup baking soda with water. Turn disposer on and remove stopper from sink at same time to wash away loose particles.
4. Remove Quiet Collar® Sink Baffle and clean by hand or in dishwasher. Do not operate disposer without Quiet Collar® Sink Baffle in place.
Disposers may also be cleaned with Disposer Care®. This product is not sold by InSinkErator®, but is generally available in major
home centers, hardware, and grocery stores. For more information on Disposer Care®, contact Summit Brands at 1-888-476-6688 or
www.summitbrands.com.
398218
RELEASING DISPOSER JAM
If motor stops while disposer is operating, disposer may be jammed. To release jam:
1. Turn off disposer and water.
2. Insert one end of self-service Jam-Buster™ Wrench into center hole on bottom of disposer (see Figure A). Work Jam-Buster™ Wrench back
and forth until it turns one full revolution. Remove Jam-Buster™ Wrench.
3. Reach into disposer with tongs and remove object(s). Allow disposer motor to cool for 3 - 5 minutes, then lightly push red reset button on
disposer bottom (see Figure B). (If motor remains inoperative, check service panel for tripped circuit breakers or blown fuses.)
Figure A Figure B
4 YEAR IN-HOME FULL SERVICE WARRANTY

This warranty covers all replacement parts and repair labor to correct 3. Write to us if a satisfactory solution is not reached in steps 1 and 2.
defects in disposer material and workmanship for the full warranty period Our address is:
from the date of installation in your home. If warranty service is required
during the warranty period, contact an authorized InSinkErator® service InSinkErator®
center to replace or repair the unit in your home at no cost to you. If you have Service Department
questions concerning your disposer or determining when service is needed, 4700 21st Street
please call the toll free InSinkErator® AnswerLine® to obtain the name of Racine, Wisconsin 53406 USA
the authorized service center nearest you. The toll free number is
1 (800) 558-5700, or visit our website at www.insinkerator.com. When writing or calling, supply the following information: date, your name,
your address, and your phone number. Describe the product by model number,
This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other serial number, date purchased, place purchased, and service history (including
rights which vary from state to state. If the manufacturer determines name and address of service agent). Clearly describe the problem and service
the unit should be replaced rather than repaired, the warranty on the required.
replacement unit will be limited to the unexpired term of the original
warranty. No other express warranty, written or oral, applies. NOTE: Warranty is determined by unit serial number and date of installation.
Purchase or installation receipt may be required to verify warranty status.
If your disposer does not operate, follow these steps in order:
1. Check the things you can do yourself. Be sure the disposer is connected The foregoing warranty does not apply to damage or inoperation resulting
to the electric power and the fuses or circuit breakers are in working from accident, alteration, misuse, abuse, improper installation, installation not
order. Reread the instruction book to ensure that you are operating the in accordance with these instructions or local electrical and plumbing codes.
disposer correctly. Warranty will be voided if installed in a commercial or industrial application.
2. Call InSinkErator®, or visit our website for information or for the

location of the authorized service center nearest you. The toll free
number is 1 (800) 558-5700, or visit our website at www.insinkerator.com.
Food waste disposers are an environmentally responsible alternative to transporting food waste to landfills. And they can help reduce
greenhouse gas emissions. Food waste converts to bio-solids at the waste treatment plant and can be recycled and applied as fertilizer.
Biogases can be captured and recycled as an energy source.
InSinkErator® may make improvements and/or changes in the specifications at any time, in its sole discretion, without notice or obligation and further
reserves the right to change or discontinue models.
The mounting collar configuration is a trademark of Emerson Electric Co.
Compact Size Food Waste Disposer/Triturador de Desperdicios The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of Emerson Electric Co.
Printed in the U.S.A. © 2008 InSinkErator, InSinkErator® is a division of Emerson Electric Co. 10
de Alimentos de Tamaño Compacto/Broyeur de Déchets de Taille Compacte All Rights Reserved.
Spec Seq#: 90
ES PA Ñ O L
INSTRUCCIONES CORRESPONDIENTES A RIESGO DE INCENDIO, DESCARGAS ELÉCTRICAS O
LESIONES A PERSONAS (GUARDE ESTAS INSTRUCCIONES)
Al usar artefactos electrodomésticos, siempre se deben tomar precauciones básicas,

ADVERTENCIA las que incluyen:
• Lea todas las instrucciones antes de utilizar el aparato. • Cuando el triturador no esté en funcionamiento, deje la tapón del drenaje en
• Para reducir el riesgo de lesiones, se requiere estrecha supervisión cuando se su lugar para reducir el riesgo de que algún objeto caiga en el triturador.
usa un artefacto cerca de niños. • Este producto está diseñado para deshacerse de desperdicios normales de
• No ponga los dedos ni las manos dentro de un triturador de desperdicios. los alimentos hogareños; insertar materiales que no son desperdicios en el
• Coloque el interruptor de encendido en la posición de apagado antes de triturador podría ocasionar lesiones personales o daños a la propiedad.
tratar de eliminar un atasco, retirar un objeto del triturador de desperdicios o • Para reducir el riesgo de lesiones, no utilice el fregadero o pileta que contiene
398218
presionar el botón de reposición. el triturador para tareas que no sean de preparación de los alimentos (como
• Cuando intente desatascar un triturador de desperdicios de comida, utilice la bañar a un bebé o lavarse el cabello).
llave incorporada Jam-Buster™. • No elimine ninguno de los siguientes elementos en el triturador: pinturas,
• Al tratar de extraer objetos de un triturador de desperdicios use tenazas o solventes, limpiadores de uso doméstico, productos químicos, líquidos para
pinzas de mango largo. automóviles o envolturas de plástico.
• Para reducir el riesgo de sufrir lesiones por materiales que salgan • Para evitar que cualquier material ingrese o salga despedido y que se
despedidos del triturador de desperdicios, no lo opere sin tener el deflector salpique agua, reemplace el deflector del fregadero Quiet Collar® cuando
del fregadero Quiet Collar® en su lugar. No coloque los siguientes éste se desgaste.
elementos dentro de un triturador: conchas de almejas u ostras, limpiadores • PELIGRO DE INCENDIO: No guarde artículos inflamables, como trapos, papel
de drenaje cáusticos o productos similares, vidrio, loza o plástico, huesos o aerosoles, cerca del triturador. No guarde ni utilice gasolina ni otros vapores
enteros) grandes, metales (como tapas de botellas, granalla de acero, latas o o líquidos inflamables cerca del triturador.
utensilios), grasa caliente u otros líquidos calientes.
ADVERT ENCIA PRECAUCION

Lesiones personales: No coloque la cabeza ni el cuerpo debajo del No utilice masilla de plomería ni ninguna otra conexión del triturador
triturador, ya que la unidad podría caerse mientras lo retira o instala. que no sea la brida del fregadero. No utilice sellador de rosca ni grasa
para rosca de cañerías. Estos productos pueden dañar el triturador y
ocasionar daños a la propiedad.
PRECAUCION
No opere el triturador sin el Anti-Vibration Tailpipe Mount™, ya que
puede haber fugas de agua.
ADVERTENCIA
Descarga eléctrica
La conexión incorrecta del conductor de conexión a tierra del equipo puede representar un riesgo de descarga eléctrica. Consulte a un electricista calificado
o especialista en reparaciones si tiene dudas sobre la conexión a tierra del aparato. No cambie el enchufe que viene con el aparato. Si no coincide con el tipo
de tomacorriente, pídale a un electricista calificado que instale un tomacorriente adecuado.
• El triturador debe tener una adecuada conexión a tierra.
• No conecte el cable de conexión a tierra en un tubo de suministro de gas.
• Desconecte la corriente eléctrica antes de instalar o reparar el triturador.
• Si se utiliza un enchufe de tres patas con conexión a tierra, el enchufe debe introducirse en un receptáculo de tres orificios con conexión a tierra.
• Todo el cableado debe cumplir con los códigos eléctricos locales.
• No reconecte la corriente eléctrica al panel de servicio principal sino hasta que se instalen las conexiones a tierra adecuadas.
INSTRUCCIONES DE OPERACION
1. Retire el tapón de la apertura del fregadero y haga correr un flujo fuerte de agua fría.
2. Encienda el interruptor de pared para arrancar el triturador.
3. Introduzca lentamente los desperdicios de comida dentro del triturador. ¡PRECAUCIÓN! Coloque el tapón para disminuir la posibilidad de que los materiales
salgan despedidos durante la trituración.
4. Luego de que la trituración esté completa, apague el triturador y deje correr el agua durante unos segundos para enjuagar la línea de drenaje.
LO QUE DEBE HACER LO QUE NO DEBE HACER

• Primero haga correr un flujo de agua fría, de moderado a copioso, y luego • No vierta grasa ni aceite en el triturador ni en ningún drenaje. Estos
encienda el triturador. Siga haciendo correr el agua durante unos segundos materiales se pueden acumular en las cañerías y tapar el drenaje. Coloque
después de que termine la trituración para enjuagar la línea de drenaje. la grasa en un frasco o lata y deséchelo en la basura.
• Triture materiales duros como huesos pequeños, carozos de frutas y hielo. • No use agua caliente para triturar desperdicios de comidas. Puede dejar
Las partículas crean una acción de restregado en el interior de la cámara de correr agua caliente en el triturador entre períodos de trituración.
trituración. • No llene el triturador con demasiadas cáscaras de vegetales al mismo tiempo.
• Triture cáscaras de frutas cítricas para refrescar el olor del drenaje. Primero abra la llave del agua y encienda el triturador y luego coloque las
• Utilice un limpiador, desengrasante o desodorante para trituradores cuando cáscaras gradualmente.
sea necesario a fin de eliminar malos olores causados por la acumulación • No triture grandes cantidades de cáscaras de huevo ni materiales fibrosos
de grasa. como barbas del choclo, alcachofas, etc., pues ello podría obstruir el drenaje.
• No apague el triturador hasta que la trituración esté completa y sólo se
PRECAUCION escuche el sonido del motor y del agua.
Revise periódicamente el triturador y los acoples de plomería para ver si

hay fugas de agua, ya que éstas pueden ocasionar daños a la propiedad. El
fabricante no es responsable de los daños a la propiedad resultantes de las
fugas de agua.
Spec Seq#: 90
INSTRUCCIONES DE MANTENIMIENTO PARA EL USUARIO

LIMPIEZA DEL TRITURADOR
Con el tiempo, las partículas de comida se pueden acumular en la cámara de trituración y el deflector. Los malos olores provenientes del triturador son generalmente
un signo de acumulación de grasa y comida causada por el flujo de agua insuficiente durante y después del uso del triturador. Para limpiar el triturador:
1. Apague el triturador y desconecte la corriente eléctrica.
2. Coloque el tapón en la abertura del fregadero y llénelo con agua tibia hasta la mitad.
3. Mezcle 1/4 de taza de bicarbonato de sodio con agua. Encienda el triturador y retire el tapón del fregadero al mismo tiempo para eliminar las partículas sueltas.
4. Retire el deflector del fregadero Quiet Collar® y límpielo a mano o en el lavavajillas. No opere el triturador sin el deflector del fregadero Quiet Collar® en su lugar.
Los trituradores también se pueden limpiar con Disposer Care®. InSinkErator® no vende este producto, pero gene-ralmente se lo consigue en las principales
tiendas de artículos para el hogar, en ferreterías y en tiendas de abarrotes. Si desea obtener más información sobre Disposer Care®, comuníquese con Summit
Brands al 1-888-476-6688 o visite www.summitbrands.com.
CÓMO LIBERAR LAS OBSTRUCCIONES DEL TRITURADOR

Si el motor se detiene durante el funcionamiento del triturador, podría estar bloqueado. Para liberar las obstrucciones:
398218
1. Apague el triturador y cierre la llave de agua.
2. Inserte un extremo de la llave incorporada Jam-Buster™ en el orificio central, en el fondo del triturador (ver Figura A). Mueva la llave Jam-Buster™ hacia adelante
y hacia atrás hasta que gire una vuelta completa. Quite la llave Jam-Buster™.
3. Introduzca unas tenazas dentro del triturador y retire el objeto u objetos. Deje enfriar el motor durante 3 a 5 minutos y luego oprima suavemente el botón
de reposición rojo ubicado en la parte inferior del triturador (ver Figura B). (Si el motor no funciona, revise el panel de servicio para ver si hay interruptores de
circuito activados o fusibles quemados.)
Figura A Figura B
GARANTÍA TOTAL DE SERVICIO POR 4 AÑOS EN SU HOGAR

Esta garantía cubre todas las piezas de repuesto y las tareas de reparación para 3. Escríbanos si no ha obtenido una solución satisfactoria en los pasos 1 y 2.
corregir los defectos en los materiales del triturador y la mano de obra durante el Nuestra dirección es:
período total de la garantía desde la fecha de instalación en su hogar. Si se requiere el
servicio de garantía durante el período de garantía, comuníquese con un centro de InSinkErator®
servicio autorizado de InSinkErator® para reemplazar o reparar la unidad en su hogar, Service Department
sin costo alguno para usted. Si tiene preguntas con respecto al triturador o si desea 4700 21st Street
saber cuándo se necesita servicio, llame a la línea de ayuda gratuita AnswerLine® de Racine, Wisconsin 53406 USA
InSinkErator® para obtener el nombre del centro del servicio autorizado más cercano.
Llame gratis al 1 (800) 558-5700, o bien visite nuestro sitio en Internet en Cuando escriba o llame, proporcione la siguiente información: fecha, su nombre, su
www.insinkerator.com. dirección y su número de teléfono. Describa el producto por el número de modelo, el
número de serie, la fecha y el lugar de compra y el historial de servicio (incluya el
Esta garantía le otorga derechos legales específicos y también puede tener otros nombre y la dirección del agente de servicio). Describa claramente el problema y el
derechos que varían según el estado. Si el fabricante determina que se debe servicio requerido.
reemplazar la unidad en vez de repararla, la garantía de la unidad de reemplazo se
limitará al plazo vigente de la garantía original. No se aplica ninguna otra garantía NOTA: La garantía está determinada por número de serie de la unidad y la fecha de
expresa, oral o escrita. instalación. Se puede requerir el recibo de compra o de instalación para verificar el es-
tado de la garantía.
Si el triturador no funciona, siga estos pasos en orden:
1. Verifique las cosas que puede hacer usted mismo. Asegúrese de que el triturador La garantía anterior no se aplica a daños o mal funcionamiento causado por accidentes,
esté conectado a la corriente eléctrica y de que los fusibles o interruptores de alteraciones, mal uso, abuso, instalación inadecuada, instalación que no respete estas
circuito funcionen correctamente. Vuelva a leer el manual de instrucciones para instrucciones o los códigos de plomería y eléctricos locales. La garantía no tendrá
asegurarse de que está operando el triturador correctamente. validez si se usa para fines industriales o comerciales.
2. Llame a InSinkErator®, o visite nuestro sitio en Internet si desea obtener información

o conocer la ubicación del centro de servicio autorizado más cercano. Llame gratis al
1 (800) 558-5700, o visite nuestro sitio en Internet en www.insinkerator.com.
Los trituradores de desperdicios de comida son una alternativa que no daña el medio ambiente para el transporte de los desperdicios a los vertederos.
Además, ayudan a reducir las emisiones de gases que generan el efecto invernadero. Los desperdicios de comida se convierten en sólidos biológicos en la
detratamiento de desperdicios y pueden reciclarse y aplicarse como fertilizantes. Los biogases pueden capturarse y reciclarse como fuente de energía.
InSinkErator® podrá hacer mejores y/o cambios en las especificaciones en cualquier momento, a su discreción exclusiva, sin aviso ni obligación, y se reserve
adicionalmente el derecho a cambiar o descontinuar los modelos.
La configuración del collarín de montaje es una marca registrada de Emerson Electric Co.
Compact Size Food Waste Disposer/Triturador de Desperdicios

El logotipo de Emerson es una marca registrada y una marca de servicio de Emerson Electric Co.
Impreso en los EE.UU. © 2008 InSinkErator, InSinkErator es una división de Emerson Electric Co. 12
de Alimentos de Tamaño Compacto/Broyeur de Déchets de Taille Compacte Todos los derechos reservados.
Spec Seq#: 90
FRANÇAIS
INSTRUCTIONS RELATIVES AUX RISQUES D’INCENDIE, DE CHOC ÉLECTRIQUE OU DE BLESSURES
(GARDER CES INSTRUCTIONS)
Lors de l’utilisation d’appareil électriques, des précautions élémentaires doivent toujours être
AVERTISSEMENT prises, y compris :
• Lire les instructions au complet avant d’utiliser l’appareil. • Lorsque le broyeur n’est pas utilisé, laisser le bouchon en place pour éviter
• Pour réduire les risques de blessure, surveiller étroitement les enfants toute chute d’objet dans le broyeur.
lorsqu’ils se trouvent à proximité d’un appareil en marche. • Ce produit a été conçu pour disposer des déchets de cuisine, le fait d’insérer
• Ne pas mettre les doigts ou la main dans un broyeur de déchets. autre chose que des déchets de cuisine dans le broyeur pourrait entraîner
• Mettre l’interrupteur à la position d’arrêt avant de tenter de libérer un des blessures et/ou des dommages matériels.
objet coincé, d’enlever un objet du broyeur ou d’appuyer sur le bouton de • Afin de réduire les risques de blessure, ne pas utiliser un évier doté d’un
398218
réenclenchement. broyeur de déchets à d’autres fins que la préparation d’aliments (par
• Lorsque vous tentez de dégager un blocage dans un broyeur, utilisez la clé exemple, pour donner le bain à un bébé ou pour se laver les cheveux).
libre-service Jam-Buster™. • Ne pas jeter les produits suivants dans le broyeur : peinture, solvants,
• Pour enlever des objets du broyeur de déchets, utiliser des clés ou des pinces produits chimiques et nettoyants ménagers, liquides automobiles, pellicule
à longs manches. plastique.
• Afin de réduire les risques d’éjection de débris par le broyeur de déchets, ne • Remplacer l’écran d’évier Quiet Collar® lorsqu’il est usé dans le but de
pas faire fonctionner l’appareil sans avoir préalablement mis en place l’écran prévenir la pénétration ou l’éjection de débris et d’eau.
pour évier Quiet Collar®. Ne pas mettre les produits ou objets suivants dans le • RISQUES D’INCENDIE : Ne pas ranger d’articles inflammables tels que des
broyeur de déchets : coquilles de palourde ou d’huître, nettoyants caustiques chiffons, du papier ou des aérosols à proximité du broyeur. Ne pas ranger ni
pour drain ou produits similaires, verre, porcelaine ou plastique, gros os utiliser de l’essence ou autres vapeurs et liquides inflammables à proximité
(complets), métal (tel que bouchons de bouteille, morceaux de métal, boîtes de du broyeur.
conserve ou ustensiles), graisse chaude ou autres liquides chauds.
AVERTISSEMENT MISE EN GARDE

Blessures : Ne pas placer la tête ou le corps sous le broyeur de Ne pas utiliser du mastic de plomberie sur aucune autre connection
déchets, l’unité pourrait tomber pendant le retrait ou l’installation. du broyeur que le collier d’évier. Ne pas utiliser de produit d’é-
tanchéité pour filetage ni de pâte lubrifiante. Ces produits sont nuisi-
bles au broyeur et peuvent causer des dommages
MISE EN GARDE
Ne pas faire fonctionner le broyeur sans avoir préalablement installé
le dispositif Anti-Vibration Tailpipe Mount™ car des fuites d’eau
pourraient se produire.
AV E R T I S S E M E N T
Choc électrique :
Un branchement inadéquat au conducteur de mise à la terre de l’appareil peut entraîner des risques de choc électrique. Vérifier avec un électricien ou un
réparateur qualifié en cas de doute sur la mise à la terre adéquate de l’appareil. Ne pas modifier la fiche fournie avec l’appareil. Si la fiche ne s’adapte pas à
la prise de courant, faire poser une prise adéquate par un électricien.
• Ce broyeur doit être correctement mis à la terre.
• Ne pas fixer de fil de mise à la terre au tuyau d’alimentation du gaz.
• Couper l’alimentation électrique avant d’installer ou de réparer le broyeur.
• Si une fiche de mise à la terre à trois branches est utilisée, celle-ci doit être insérée dans une prise de trois trous mise à la terre.
• Tout le câblage utilisé doit être conforme aux codes de l’électricité locaux en vigueur.
• Ne pas remettre le courant au panneau principal avant que des conducteurs de mise à la terre ne soient installés.
MODE D’EMPLOI
1. Enlever le bouchon de l’évier et faire couler l’eau froide à flot.
2. Allumer l’interrupteur au mur pour démarrer le broyeur.
3. Insérer lentement les déchets de cuisine dans le broyeur. MISE EN GARDE! Placer le bouchon de façon à minimiser l’éjection possible de déchets pendant le
broyage.
4. Une fois le broyage terminé, éteindre le broyeur et faire couler l’eau dans la conduite du drain pendant quelques secondes pour la rinser.
UTILISATION ADÉQUATE UTILISATION INADÉQUATE
• Faire d’abord couler l’eau froide à flot modéré ou puissant puis allumer le • Ne pas verser d’huile ou de graisse dans votre broyeur ou dans n’importe quel
broyeur. Continuer de faire couler l’eau froide pendant quelques secondes une drain. La graisse pourrait s’accumuler dans les tuyaux et entraîner un blocage
fois le broyage terminé afin de rinser la conduite du drain. du drain. Verser la graisse dans un pot ou une boîte de conserve vide et la
• Broyer des objets durs tels que de petits os, des noyaux de fruits et de la mettre au rebus.
glace. Une action de frottement est créée par les particules à l’intérieur de la • Ne pas utiliser d’eau chaude pendant le broyage des déchets de cuisine. Le
chambre de broyage. fait de faire couler de l’eau chaude dans le broyeur entre les broyages ne nuit
• Broyer des pelures d’agrumes afin de rafraîchir les odeurs que dégagent le pas à l’appareil.
drain. • Ne pas remplir le broyeur de pelures de légumes en une seule fois. Faire
• Au besoin, utiliser un nettoyant, un dégraissant ou un désodorisant pour plutôt couler l’eau et allumer le broyeur, puis ajouter les pelures dans le
éliminer les mauvaises odeurs causées par l’accumulation de graisse dans broyeur graduellement.
le broyeur. • Ne pas procéder au broyage de grandes quantités de coquilles d’œuf ou de
matières fibreuses telles que des enveloppes de maïs, des artichauts etc. afin
MISE EN GARDE d’éviter tout blocage du drain.
• Ne pas éteindre le broyeur avant d’avoir complètement broyé les déchets et
Inspecter régulièrement le broyeur et les raccords de plomberie pour y d’entendre uniquement le bruit du moteur et de l’eau qui coule.
détecter toute fuite d’eau. En effet, les fuites d’eau peuvent entraîner des
dommages. Le fabricant ne peut être tenu responsable des dommages
causés par des fuites d’eau.
Spec Seq#: 90
INSTRUCTIONS D’ENTRETIEN PAR L’UTILISATEUR

NETTOYAGE DU BROYEUR
À la longue, des particules d’aliments peuvent s’accumuler dans la chambre de broyage et l’écran. Une odeur nauséabonde provenant du broyeur est généralement le
signe d’une accumulation de graisse et d’aliments causée par un écoulement insuffisant d’eau pendant et après l’utilisation du broyeur. Pour nettoyer le broyeur :
1. Éteindre le broyeur et couper l’alimentation électrique.
2. Poser le bouchon dans l’ouverture de l’évier et remplir ce dernier à moitié avec de l’eau tiède.
3. Verser 1/4 tasse de bicarbonate de soude dans l’eau. Allumer le broyeur et enlever le bouchon de l’évier simultanément afin d’évacuer les particules qui se sont
détachées.
4. Enlever l’écran d’évier Quiet Collar® et le nettoyer à la main ou le mettre au lave-vaisselle. Ne pas faire fonctionner le broyeur sans avoir préalablement remis en
place l’écran d’évier Quiet Collar®.
Les broyeurs peuvent également être nettoyés avec du Disposer Care®. Ce produit n’’est pas vendu par InSinkErator® mais est généralement offert dans tous
les grands centres de rénovation, quincailleries et magasins d’alimentation. Pour plus de renseignements au sujet du Disposer Care®, contacter Summit Brands
a76-6688 ou aller à www.summitbrands.com.
398218
DÉBLOCAGE DU BROYEUR
Si le moteur s’arrête pendant que le broyeur fonctionne, il est possible que celui-ci soit bloqué. Pour débloquer le broyeur :
1. Éteindre le broyeur et cesser de faire couler l’eau.
2. Insérez une extrémité de la clé libre-service Jam-Buster™ dans le trou central au fond du broyeur (reportez-vous à la figure A). Déplacez la clé Jam-Buster™ de
l'avant vers l'arrière jusqu'à ce qu'elle tourne un tour complet. Retirez la clé Jam-Buster™.
3. Au moyen des pinces, dégager et enlever les débris qui bloquent le broyeur. Laisser le moteur du broyeur refroidir pendant 3 à 5 minutes puis enfoncer légèrement
le bouton de réenclenchement rouge au bas du broyeur (voir Figure B). (Si le moteur ne fonctionne toujours pas, vérifier le panneau de service pour y rechercher
des disjoncteurs déclenchés ou des fusibles grillés.)
Figure A Figure B
GARANTIE DE SERVICE COMPLET À DOMICILE DE 4 ANS

Cette garantie couvre tous les remplacements de pièce et la main-d’œuvre pour la 3. Veuillez nous écrire si une solution satisfaisante n’a pas été obtenue aux étapes 1 et 2.
correction de défauts de matériau ou de fabrication du broyeur pendant toute la Notre adresse est la suivante :
période couverte par cette garantie à partir de la date d’installation à domicile. Si
une réparation couverte par la garantie s’avère nécessaire pendant la période de InSinkErator®
garantie, contactez un centre de réparation autorisé InSinkErator® pour remplacer Service Department
ou réparer l’unité à votre domicile, sans frais. Si vous avez des questions concernant 4700 21st Street
votre broyeur ou si vous cherchez à déterminer à quel moment une réparation est Racine, Wisconsin 53406 USA
nécessaire, veuillez composer le numéro sans frais de la ligne d’assistance
InSinkErator® AnswerLine® pour obtenir le nom du centre de réparation le plus Lorsque vous nous écrivez ou nous appelez, veuillez fournir les renseignements suivants :
près de votre domicile. Composez le numéro sans frais 1 (800) 558-5700 ou la date, vos nom, adresse et numéro de téléphone. Décrivez le produit par numéro de
consultez notre site Web à www.insinkerator.com. modèle, numéro de série, date d’achat, magasin où l’achat a été fait, historique des
réparations (y compris le nom et l’adresse de l’agent de réparation). Décrivez en détails
Cette garantie vous donne des droits reconnus par la loi; d’autres droits peuvent le problème et la réparation exigée.
également s’appliquer d’un État ou d’une province à l’autre. Dans le cas où le
fabricant détermine que l’unité doit être remplacée plutôt que réparée, la garantie NOTE : La garantie est déterminée par le numéro de série de l’unité et la date
de remplacement de l’unité se limitera à la durée qui reste sur la période couverte d’installation. La preuve d’achat ou d’installation peut être exigée pour vérifier le statut
par la garantie originale. Aucune autre garantie expresse, écrite ou verbale ne s’applique. de la garantie.
Si votre broyeur ne fonctionne pas, suivez ces étapes dans l’ordre : La garantie qui précède ne s’applique pas aux dommages ni à une panne de l’appareil
1. Vérifiez les choses que vous pouvez faire vous-même. Assurez-vous que le broyeur causés par un accident, l’altération, l’utilisation inadéquate, la mauvaise installation
est bien connecté à l’alimentation électrique et que les fusibles ou disjoncteurs ou l’installation du produit non conforme à ces instructions ou aux codes locaux de
fonctionnent correctement. Lisez une fois de plus le livret d’instructions pour vous l’électricité ou de la plomberie en vigueur. La garantie sera annulée si l’appareil a été
assurer que vous faites fonctionner le broyeur correctement. installé pour une application commerciale ou industrielle.
2. Composez le numéro de la ligne d’assistance InSinkErator® ou consultez notre site

Web pour obtenir de l’information ou pour connaître l’emplacement du centre
de réparation le plus proche. Composez le numéro sans frais 1 (800) 558-5700 ou
consultez notre site Web à www.insinkerator.com.
Les broyeurs de déchets représentent une solution écologique de remplacement du transport des déchets alimentaires vers les décharges. De plus, ils
peuvent contribuer à réduire les émissions de gaz à effet de serre. Les déchets alimentaires sont transformés en solides biologiques à l’usine de traitement
des déchets et peuvent être recyclés et utilisés comme engrais. Les gaz biologiques peuvent être récupérés et recyclés en tant que source d’énergie.
InSinkErator® se réserve le droit, à sa seule discrétion, d’apporter en tout temps des améliorations ou des modifications aux spécifications sans préavis ou
obligation de sa part, ou de modifier ou de supprimer des modèles.
La configuration du collier de fixation est une marque de commerce de Emerson Electric Co.
Compact Size Food Waste Disposer/Triturador de Desperdicios Le logo Emerson est une marque de commerce et une marque de service de Emerson Electric Co.
Imprimé aux É.-U. © 2008 InSinkErator, InSinkErator® est une division de Emerson Electric Co. 14
de Alimentos de Tamaño Compacto/Broyeur de Déchets de Taille Compacte Tous droits réservés

O&amp;M Barber&#39;s Hill ISd

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

O&amp;M Barber&#39;s Hill ISd

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Plumbing Submittal

Barber's Hill ISD Plumbing O&M

26 ............ **SHOWER BELOW IS ON THE

27 ............ **SHOWER BELOW IS IN THE SPECS**

30 ............ **SHOWER BELOW IS IN THE SPECS**

78 ............ *** OPTIONAL ACCESSORY ***

82 ............ *** OPTIONAL ACCESSORY ***

Commercial Fixtures Terms and Conditions

Illustrations of Typical Installations

ZURN INDUSTRIES, LLC · COMMERCIAL FIXTURES OPERATION

Light Commercial Products Terms and Conditions

ZURN INDUSTRIES, LLC · LIGHT COMMERCIAL OPERATION

Tubular Brass Terms and Conditions

ZURN INDUSTRIES, LLC · COMMERCIAL TRAPS and SUPPLIES OPERATION

6" (152 mm)

Valve Inlet Gasket

6" (152 mm)

Valve Inlet Gasket

For Non-Quick-Release Seats/Pour sièges Non-Quick-Release/Para asientos que no son Quick-Release

ONE-YEAR LIMITED WARRANTY GARANTIE LIMITÉE D'UN AN GARANTÍA LIMITADA DE UN AÑO

24" (610 mm) Outlet Detail

17-1/2" (445 mm) 6-1/2" 11-3/4" 13-3/4" 20-3/4" 30"

6" (152 mm)

Valve Inlet Gasket

Tools and Materials

Before You Begin

Prior to installation, unpack the new lavatory and inspect it for

1018370-2-B 2 Kohler Co.

Hanger (provided) Installation

Concealed Arm Carrier Installation

Kohler Co. 3 1018370-2-B

Installation With Hanger

CAUTION: Risk of product damage. Do not overtighten the

Installation With Concealed Arm Carrier

1018370-2-B 4 Kohler Co.

Install the Lavatory (cont.)

Kohler Co. 5 1018370-2-B

Avant l’installation, déballer le nouveau lavabo et l’examiner pour

Kohler Co. Français-1 1018370-2-B

Avant de commencer (cont.)

Les murs et le plancher doivent être d’aplomb, à l’équerre et de

ATTENTION : Risque de blessures. Les lavabos en fonte sont

Si un mastic est fourni avec le lavabo, ne pas en utiliser d’autre.

Kohler Co. Français-2 1018370-2-B

Installation du support (fourni)

Installation du bras de renfort occulte

1018370-2-B Français-3 Kohler Co.

Installation avec support suspendu

ATTENTION : Risque d’endommagement du produit. Ne pas

Placer le lavabo sur le support et mettre de niveau. Fixer le

Installation avec bras de renfort occulte

Kohler Co. Français-4 1018370-2-B

Installer le Lavabo (cont.)

Glisser le lavabo sur les bras de renfort. Mettre le lavabo de

1018370-2-B Français-5 Kohler Co.

Antes de la instalación, revise con cuidado todas las piezas para

Kohler Co. Español-1 1018370-2-B

Antes de Comenzar (cont.)

Este lavabo puede ser instalado con el soporte incluido o con un

PRECAUCIÓN: Riesgo de lesiones personales. Los lavabos de

1018370-2-B Español-2 Kohler Co.

Instalación del soporte (incluido):

Instalación del brazo de soporte oculto

Kohler Co. Español-3 1018370-2-B

O&M Barber's Hill ISd

O&M Barber's Hill ISd

27 ............ SHOWER BELOW IS IN THE SPECS

30 ............ SHOWER BELOW IS IN THE SPECS

78 ............ * OPTIONAL ACCESSORY *

82 ............ * OPTIONAL ACCESSORY *

665-190KJKABNF - Actuator 668-013JKNF - Return spring